NetEngine A800 Hardware Guide(pdf)
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
V800R021C10 and Later Versions
Hardware Guide
Issue 05
Date 2023-03-31
HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD.
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2023. All rights reserved.
No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means without prior
written consent of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Trademarks and Permissions
and other Huawei trademarks are trademarks of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
All other trademarks and trade names mentioned in this document are the property of their respective
holders.
Notice
The purchased products, services and features are stipulated by the contract made between Huawei and
the customer. All or part of the products, services and features described in this document may not be
within the purchase scope or the usage scope. Unless otherwise specified in the contract, all statements,
information, and recommendations in this document are provided "AS IS" without warranties, guarantees
or representations of any kind, either express or implied.
The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Every effort has been made in the
preparation of this document to ensure accuracy of the contents, but all statements, information, and
recommendations in this document do not constitute a warranty of any kind, express or implied.
Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Address: Huawei Industrial Base
Bantian, Longgang
Shenzhen 518129
People's Republic of China
Website: https://www.huawei.com
Email: support@huawei.com
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. i
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide Contents
Contents
1 Document Declaration........................................................................................................... 1
2 Using the Hardware Tool.......................................................................................................4
3 Hardware Description.............................................................................................................5
3.1 Chassis......................................................................................................................................................................................... 5
3.1.1 NetEngine A813 E................................................................................................................................................................ 5
3.1.2 NetEngine A822 E............................................................................................................................................................. 14
3.1.3 NetEngine A821 E............................................................................................................................................................. 26
3.2 Optical Module...................................................................................................................................................................... 43
3.2.1 Understanding Pluggable Optical Modules............................................................................................................. 43
3.2.1.1 Optical Module Structure............................................................................................................................................43
3.2.1.2 Optical Module Classification.................................................................................................................................... 44
3.2.1.3 Optical Module Appearance.......................................................................................................................................46
3.2.1.4 Guide to Using Optical Modules.............................................................................................................................. 51
3.2.1.5 Optical Attenuator Configuration............................................................................................................................ 62
3.2.2 GPON ONU SFP Optical Module................................................................................................................................. 63
3.2.2.1 GPON ONU-SFP-SMF-1490nm(rx)/1310nm(tx)-20km-industry...................................................................63
3.2.3 1Gbps SyncE and 1588V2 Electrical Module............................................................................................................65
3.2.3.1 1Gbps-SFP-100m-industry-Support SyncE and 1588V2................................................................................... 65
3.2.4 155Mbps eSFP Optical Module.................................................................................................................................... 65
3.2.4.1 155Mbps-eSFP-SMF-1310nm-15km-industry...................................................................................................... 65
3.2.4.2 155Mbps-eSFP-SMF-1310nm-40km-industry...................................................................................................... 67
3.2.4.3 155Mbps-eSFP-SMF-1550nm-80km-industry...................................................................................................... 68
3.2.4.4 155Mbps-eSFP-SMF-1310nm-40km-commercial............................................................................................... 69
3.2.4.5 155Mbps-eSFP-SMF-1550nm-80km-commercial (S4015716).......................................................................71
3.2.4.6 155Mbps-eSFP-SMF-1310nm-15km-commercial............................................................................................... 72
3.2.5 155Mbps eSFP BIDI Optical Module...........................................................................................................................73
3.2.5.1 155Mbps-eSFP-SM-1310nm(Tx)/1550nm(Rx)-15km-commercial............................................................... 73
3.2.5.2 155Mbps-eSFP-SM-1550nm(Tx)/1310nm(Rx)-15km-commercial............................................................... 75
3.2.6 1Gbps Electrical Module................................................................................................................................................. 76
3.2.6.1 1Gbps-SFP-100m-industry (02310RAV)................................................................................................................. 76
3.2.6.2 1Gbps-SFP-100m-industry (02314FNP)................................................................................................................. 77
3.2.6.3 1Gbps-SFP-100m-commercial................................................................................................................................... 77
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. ii
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide Contents
3.2.6.4 1Gbps-SFP-100m-industry (34100099).................................................................................................................. 78
3.2.6.5 1Gbps-SFP-100m-industry (34100144).................................................................................................................. 79
3.2.7 1.25Gbps eSFP Optical Module.................................................................................................................................... 79
3.2.7.1 1.25Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1550nm-80km-commercial (02310RAW).................................................................... 80
3.2.7.2 1.25Gbps-eSFP-MMF-850nm-500m-extended.................................................................................................... 81
3.2.7.3 1.25Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1310nm-10km-industry...................................................................................................... 82
3.2.7.4 1.25Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1310nm-10km-commercial(34060473)........................................................................ 83
3.2.7.5 1.25Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1310nm-40km-commercial............................................................................................... 85
3.2.7.6 1.25Gbps-eSFP-MMF-850nm-500m-extended (S4017307)............................................................................ 86
3.2.7.7 1.25Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1310nm-40km-commercial (S4017309).......................................................................87
3.2.8 1.25Gbps SFP BIDI Optical Module............................................................................................................................. 88
3.2.8.1 1.25Gbps-SFP-SMF-1310nm(Tx)/1490nm(Rx)-10km-industry...................................................................... 89
3.2.8.2 1.25Gbps-SFP-SMF-1490nm(Tx)/1310nm(Rx)-10km-industry...................................................................... 90
3.2.9 1.25Gbps eSFP BIDI Optical Module...........................................................................................................................91
3.2.9.1 1.25Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1310nm(Tx)/1490nm(Rx)-10km-commercial(34060470)......................................91
3.2.9.2 1.25Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1490nm(Tx)/1310nm(Rx)-10km-commercial.............................................................93
3.2.9.3 1.25Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1310nm(Tx)/1490nm(Rx)-40km-commercial.............................................................94
3.2.9.4 1.25Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1490nm(Tx)/1310nm(Rx)-40km-commercial.............................................................95
3.2.9.5 1.25Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1570nm(Tx)/1490nm(Rx)-80km-commercial.............................................................97
3.2.9.6 1.25Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1490nm(Tx)/1570nm(Rx)-80km-commercial.............................................................98
3.2.9.7 0.1~1.25Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1310nm(Tx)/1550nm(Rx)-40km-commercial.................................................... 99
3.2.9.8 0.1~1.25Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1550nm(Tx)/1310nm(Rx)-40km-commercial.................................................. 101
3.2.10 1.25Gbps eSFP CWDM Optical Module................................................................................................................ 102
3.2.10.1 1.25Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1571nm-80km-commercial.......................................................................................... 102
3.2.10.2 1.25Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1591nm-80km-commercial.......................................................................................... 103
3.2.10.3 1.25Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1551nm-80km-commercial.......................................................................................... 105
3.2.10.4 1.25Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1511nm-80km-commercial.......................................................................................... 106
3.2.10.5 1.25Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1611nm-80km-commercial.......................................................................................... 107
3.2.10.6 1.25Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1491nm-80km-commercial.......................................................................................... 108
3.2.10.7 1.25Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1531nm-80km-commercial.......................................................................................... 110
3.2.10.8 1.25Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1471nm-80km-commercial.......................................................................................... 111
3.2.11 125M~2.67Gbps eSFP DWDM Optical Module..................................................................................................112
3.2.11.1 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1560.61nm-120km-commercial.................................................................... 112
3.2.11.2 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1559.79nm-120km-commercial.................................................................... 113
3.2.11.3 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1558.98nm-120km-commercial.................................................................... 115
3.2.11.4 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1558.17nm-120km-commercial.................................................................... 116
3.2.11.5 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1557.36nm-120km-commercial.................................................................... 117
3.2.11.6 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1556.55nm-120km-commercial.................................................................... 119
3.2.11.7 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1555.75nm-120km-commercial.................................................................... 120
3.2.11.8 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1554.94nm-120km-commercial.................................................................... 121
3.2.11.9 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1554.13nm-120km-commercial.................................................................... 122
3.2.11.10 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1553.33nm-120km-commercial..................................................................124
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. iii
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide Contents
3.2.11.11 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1552.52nm-120km-commercial..................................................................125
3.2.11.12 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1551.72nm-120km-commercial..................................................................126
3.2.11.13 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1550.92nm-120km-commercial..................................................................127
3.2.11.14 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1550.12nm-120km-commercial..................................................................129
3.2.11.15 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1549.32nm-120km-commercial..................................................................130
3.2.11.16 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1548.51nm-120km-commercial..................................................................131
3.2.11.17 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1547.72nm-120km-commercial..................................................................132
3.2.11.18 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1546.92nm-120km-commercial..................................................................134
3.2.11.19 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1546.12nm-120km-commercial..................................................................135
3.2.11.20 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1545.32nm-120km-commercial..................................................................136
3.2.11.21 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1544.53nm-120km-commercial..................................................................137
3.2.11.22 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1543.73nm-120km-commercial..................................................................139
3.2.11.23 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1542.94nm-120km-commercial..................................................................140
3.2.11.24 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1542.14nm-120km-commercial..................................................................141
3.2.11.25 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1541.35nm-120km-commercial..................................................................142
3.2.11.26 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1540.56nm-120km-commercial..................................................................144
3.2.11.27 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1539.77nm-120km-commercial..................................................................145
3.2.11.28 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1538.98nm-120km-commercial..................................................................146
3.2.11.29 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1538.19nm-120km-commercial..................................................................147
3.2.11.30 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1537.40nm-120km-commercial..................................................................149
3.2.11.31 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1536.61nm-120km-commercial..................................................................150
3.2.11.32 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1535.82nm-120km-commercial..................................................................151
3.2.11.33 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1535.04nm-120km-commercial..................................................................152
3.2.11.34 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1534.25nm-120km-commercial..................................................................154
3.2.11.35 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1533.47nm-120km-commercial..................................................................155
3.2.11.36 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1532.68nm-120km-commercial..................................................................156
3.2.11.37 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1531.90nm-120km-commercial..................................................................157
3.2.11.38 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1531.12nm-120km-commercial..................................................................159
3.2.11.39 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1530.33nm-120km-commercial..................................................................160
3.2.11.40 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1529.55nm-120km-commercial..................................................................161
3.2.12 10Gbps SFP+ Optical Module...................................................................................................................................162
3.2.12.1 10Gbps-SFP+-SMF-1550nm-80km-commercial............................................................................................. 162
3.2.12.2 10Gbps-SFP+-SMF-1310nm-40km-commercial (02311YEB).....................................................................164
3.2.12.3 10Gbps-SFP+-SMF-1310nm-10km-industry.................................................................................................... 165
3.2.12.4 10Gbps-SFP+-MMF-850nm-0.1km-industry.................................................................................................... 166
3.2.12.5 10Gbps-SFP+-SMF-1550nm-40km-industry.................................................................................................... 168
3.2.12.6 10Gbps-SFP+-SMF-1310nm-40km-commercial (34061409)..................................................................... 169
3.2.12.7 10Gbps-SFP+-MMF-850nm-0.3km-commercial............................................................................................. 170
3.2.12.8 10Gbps-SFP+-SMF-1310nm-10km-commercial............................................................................................. 172
3.2.12.9 10Gbps-SFP+-SMF-1550nm-40km-commercial............................................................................................. 173
3.2.13 1.25/9.953/10.3125Gbps SFP+ Optical Module..................................................................................................174
3.2.13.1 1.25/9.953/10.3125Gbps-SFP+-MMF-850nm-0.3km-commercial............................................................ 175
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. iv
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide Contents
3.2.13.2 1.25/9.953/10.3125Gbps-SFP+-SMF-1310nm-10km-commercial............................................................ 176
3.2.13.3 1.25/9.953/10.3125Gbps-SFP+-SMF-1550nm-40km-commercial............................................................ 178
3.2.14 10Gbps SFP+ CWDM Optical Module................................................................................................................... 179
3.2.14.1 10Gbps-SFP+-SMF-1511nm-70km-commercial............................................................................................. 179
3.2.14.2 10Gbps-SFP+-SMF-1471nm-70km-commercial............................................................................................. 180
3.2.14.3 10Gbps-SFP+-SMF-1491nm-70km-commercial............................................................................................. 182
3.2.14.4 10Gbps-SFP+-SMF-1531nm-70km-commercial............................................................................................. 183
3.2.14.5 10Gbps-SFP+-SMF-1551nm-70km-commercial............................................................................................. 184
3.2.14.6 10Gbps-SFP+-SMF-1571nm-70km-commercial............................................................................................. 186
3.2.14.7 10Gbps-SFP+-SMF-1591nm-70km-commercial............................................................................................. 187
3.2.14.8 10Gbps-SFP+-SMF-1611nm-70km-commercial............................................................................................. 188
3.2.15 10Gbps SFP+ BIDI Optical Module......................................................................................................................... 189
3.2.15.1 10Gbps-SFP+-SMF-1270nm(Tx)/1330nm(Rx)-40km-commercial (02311JNF)................................... 190
3.2.15.2 10Gbps-SFP+-SMF-1330nm(Tx)/1270nm(Rx)-40km-commercial (02311JNQ).................................. 191
3.2.15.3 10Gbps-SFP+-SMF-1270nm(Tx)/1330nm(Rx)-10km-industry.................................................................. 192
3.2.15.4 10Gbps-SFP+-SMF-1330nm(Tx)/1270nm(Rx)-10km-industry.................................................................. 194
3.2.16 10Gbps SFP+ OTN Optical Module........................................................................................................................ 195
3.2.16.1 10Gbps-SFP+-SMF-1528nm~1568nm-80km-commercial...........................................................................195
3.2.17 10Gbps SFP+ DWDM Optical Module...................................................................................................................196
3.2.17.1 10Gbps-SFP+-SMF-1528nm~1568nm-40km-commercial...........................................................................197
3.2.17.2 10Gbps-SFP+-SMF-1528nm~1568nm-80km-commercial...........................................................................198
3.3 Cables..................................................................................................................................................................................... 199
3.3.1 AC Power Cable.............................................................................................................................................................. 200
3.3.2 Fiber Jumper..................................................................................................................................................................... 204
3.3.3 Ethernet Cable..................................................................................................................................................................207
3.3.4 Chassis Ground Cable.................................................................................................................................................... 210
3.3.5 Management Cable........................................................................................................................................................ 211
3.3.6 USB-to-Ethernet Cable.................................................................................................................................................. 213
3.4 Power Distribution............................................................................................................................................................. 215
3.4.1 PDC120S12-CN (DC-DC Module,120W,-40degC,65degC,-72V,28.8V,11.4V-12.6V,12V/10A,0,2000uF)
......................................................................................................................................................................................................... 215
4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement............................................................219
4.1 Hardware installation and maintenance .................................................................................................................. 219
4.1.1 Installation Guide............................................................................................................................................................219
4.1.1.1 Equipment Installation Process...............................................................................................................................219
4.1.1.2 Installation Preparation............................................................................................................................................. 221
4.1.1.2.1 Requirements for Running Environment A and Installation Planning...................................................223
4.1.1.2.2 Requirements for Running Environment B and Installation Planning...................................................248
4.1.1.2.3 Requirements for Running Environment C and Installation Planning...................................................263
4.1.1.2.4 Basic Installation Specifications.......................................................................................................................... 266
4.1.1.3 General Installation Guidelines...............................................................................................................................270
4.1.1.3.1 Unpacking Inspection............................................................................................................................................. 270
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. v
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide Contents
4.1.1.3.2 Installing chassis....................................................................................................................................................... 273
4.1.1.3.3 Installing Router Tray and Power Adapter...................................................................................................... 274
4.1.1.3.4 Checking Tail Fiber Connection........................................................................................................................... 275
4.1.1.3.5 Grounding Specifications....................................................................................................................................... 276
4.1.1.3.6 Engineering Labels...................................................................................................................................................280
4.1.1.3.7 The Requirements of Cabling and Bundling................................................................................................... 295
4.1.1.3.8 Binding Strap............................................................................................................................................................. 297
4.1.1.3.9 Assembling and Testing the Cable Connector................................................................................................301
4.1.1.3.10 Inspecting and Cleaning Optical Fiber Connectors and Adapters........................................................ 323
4.1.2 Parts Replacement.......................................................................................................................................................... 340
4.1.2.1 Component Information............................................................................................................................................340
4.1.2.2 Basic Operation Process and Precautions........................................................................................................... 340
4.1.2.3 Replacing the Chassis................................................................................................................................................. 343
4.1.2.4 Replacing the Optical Module................................................................................................................................ 345
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. vi
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 1 Document Declaration
1 Document Declaration
Purpose
This document describes hardware features of the NetEngine A800. It helps
intended readers obtain detailed information about each chassis, board, and cable,
and learn how to install and maintain devices.
NO TICE
The Hardware Guide includes hardware data of multiple versions. Before using this
document, check the first version supported by the hardware.
Related Version
NO TICE
The following table lists the product versions involved in this document. Before
reading this document, confirm whether your versions are included in this
document.
Product Name Version
HUAWEI NetEngine A800 Applicable to:
Series ● V800R021C00SPC100
● V800R021C10SPC600
● V800R022C00SPC600
● V800R022C10SPC500
Intended Audience
This document is intended for:
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 1 Document Declaration
● Network planning engineers
● Hardware installation engineers
● Commissioning engineers
● On-site maintenance engineers
● System maintenance engineers
Special Declaration
● The pictures of hardware in this document are for reference only.
● The supported boards are described in the document. Whether a
customization requirement can be met is subject to the information provided
at the pre-sales interface.
● All device dimensions described in this document are designed dimensions
and do not include dimension tolerances. In the process of component
manufacturing, the actual size is deviated due to factors such as processing or
measurement.
Symbol Conventions
The symbols that may be found in this document are defined as follows.
Symbol Description
Indicates a hazard with a high level of risk which, if
not avoided, will result in death or serious injury.
Indicates a hazard with a medium level of risk
which, if not avoided, could result in death or
serious injury.
Indicates a hazard with a low level of risk which, if
not avoided, could result in minor or moderate
injury.
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if
not avoided, could result in equipment damage,
data loss, performance deterioration, or
unanticipated results.
NOTICE is used to address practices not related to
personal injury.
Supplements the important information in the main
text.
NOTE is used to address information not related to
personal injury, equipment damage, and
environment deterioration.
Change History
● Changes in Issue 05 (2023-03-31)
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 1 Document Declaration
This is the fifth official release.
● Changes in Issue 04 (2022-10-31)
This is the fourth official release.
● Changes in Issue 03 (2022-07-31)
This is the third official release.
● Changes in Issue 02 (2022-05-31)
This is the second official release.
● Changes in Issue 01 (2022-03-31)
This is the first official release.
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 3
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 2 Using the Hardware Tool
2 Using the Hardware Tool
Enterprise:
In the enterprise network market, Info-Finder is a tool platform, It allows you to
search for key product information by product series and model. The key product
information includes basic information such as the software specifications, life
cycles, and hardware information, and operation and maintenance information
such as the licenses, alarms, logs, commands, and MIBs. The hardware-related
tools are as follows:
● Product image gallery: provides product photos, and network element icons
for you to produce design drawings and networking diagrams.
● Hardware configuration: automatically generates hardware configuration
diagrams after you select components are required and calculates the weight,
power consumption, and heat consumption.
● Hardware center: provides the technical specifications of devices and
components, as well as the mapping between devices, components, and
versions.
● 3D model: Using this function, you can query product images, product
overview, and component insertion/removal videos, enabling you to quickly
obtain product information in one-stop mode.
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 4
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
3 Hardware Description
3.1 Chassis
3.2 Optical Module
3.3 Cables
3.4 Power Distribution
3.1 Chassis
3.1.1 NetEngine A813 E
Overview
Table 3-1 Basic information about the NetEngine A813 E
Description Part Number Model First Integrated
supported fixed device
version
NetEngine 02354XWG CP8PHST1EA V800R022C00 Y
A813 E AC A6 SPC600
Chassis
(6*GE/FE(o)
+8*GE/FE(e))
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 5
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
Description Part Number Model First Integrated
supported fixed device
version
NetEngine 02354XWH CP8PHST1EA V800R022C00 Y
A813 E AC A8 SPC600
Basic
Configuratio
n(Includes
A813 E
Chassis,Fixed
Interface
(6*GE/FE(o)
+8*GE/FE(e)),
1*AC power,
no software
or doc, with
auxiliary
materials)
NetEngine 02355KNR CP8PHST1EA V800R022C10 Y
A813 E AC AD SPC500
Basic
Configuratio
n(Includes
A813 E
Chassis,Fixed
Interface
(6*GE/FE(o)
+8*GE/FE(e)),
1*AC power,
no software
or doc, with
auxiliary
materials)
NetEngine 02355KNT CP8PHST1EA V800R022C10 Y
A813 E AC AB SPC500
Chassis
(6*GE/FE(o)
+8*GE/FE(e))
NO TE
In specific areas, as the auxiliary materials are different, the sales BOM numbers may be
different. Different sales BOM numbers may correspond to the same description in the
device attribute table. The actual sales BOM number in an area prevails.
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 6
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
Appearance
Figure 3-1 Appearance of the NetEngine A813 E
Figure 3-2 Appearance of the NetEngine A813 E(with DC power adapter)
Panel
Table 3-2 Indicators on the NetEngine A813 E
Silkscreen Name Color Status Description
PWR Power status Green Steady on The power
indicator supply is
normal.
- Steady off The power
supply is lost
or fails.
STAT Working Green Steady on The board is
status working
indicator properly.
Red Steady on The board
hardware is
faulty.
Green Blinking The board
software is
being
initialized.
- Steady off The board is
not powered
on or is not
running.
ALM Alarm Red Steady on Device-level
indicator critical alarms
exist.
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 7
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
Silkscreen Name Color Status Description
Orange Steady on Device-level
major or
minor alarms
exist.
- Steady off Normal
status.
RSV Reserved - - -
indicator
(reserved)
L/A Connection/ Green Steady on The port
Data connection is
transmission normal.
status
indicator Green Blinking Data is being
received/sent
on ports.
- Steady off The physical
connection of
the port is
abnormal.
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 8
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
Table 3-3 Buttons on the NetEngine A813 E
Silkscreen Name Description
RST Reset button Used to reset a device.
When you press the RST
button and then release
it, the device starts to
reset.
The RST button can also
be used to delete the
password and
configuration file on the
device. The procedure is
as follows: Press and
release the RST button
to restart the NE. Then,
press and hold the RST
button for about 90
seconds. When the STAT
and ALM indicators both
blink (this status lasts
about 10 seconds),
release the RST button
immediately. The device
then starts to
automatically delete the
password and
configuration file.
However, if you release
the RST button after
they stop both blinking,
the device undergoes
only a reset without
clearing the password
and configuration file.
NOTE
After the RST button is
used to clear the
configuration file, the
original configuration file
is deleted. You are advised
to back up the
configuration file
periodically.
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 9
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
Table 3-4 Ports on the NetEngine A813 E
Port Connector Type Description Available
Components
MGMT-ETH RJ45 10M/100M auto- ETH management
sensing Ethernet cable
NM interface
NOTE
If a service port
can be connected
to an NMS, you
are advised to use
the service port as
the network
management port.
CONSOLE RJ45 Console interface: Console
connects to the management
console for on- cable
site system
configuration. The
default baud rate
is 9600 bit/s.
USB USB TYPE A USB port -
(reserved)
GE/FE (0–7) RJ45 Interface for Ethernet cable
inputting and
outputting FE/GE
electrical signals
GE/FE (8–13) SFP Interface for 1Gbps Electrical
inputting and Module
outputting FE/GE 1.25Gbps eSFP
optical signals Optical Module
1.25Gbps eSFP
BIDI Optical
Module
155Mbps eSFP
Optical Module
Table 3-5 Pins of the MGMT-ETH interface
Front View Pin Usage
1 Transmit positive of the
NM interface
2 Transmit negative of the
NM interface
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 10
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
Front View Pin Usage
3 Receive positive of the
NM interface
4 Unspecified
5 Unspecified
6 Receive negative of the
NM interface
7 Unspecified
8 Unspecified
Table 3-6 Pins of the CONSOLE interface
Front View Pin Usage
1 Unspecified
2 Unspecified
3 Transmit end of the
Console interface
4 Unspecified
5 Grounding end of the
Console interface
6 Receive end of the
Console interface
7 Unspecified
8 Unspecified
Interface Numbering Rules
On the NetEngine A813 E, an interface is numbered in the format of "slot
number/subcard number/port number". The following part describes the details:
● Slot number
The slot number of NetEngine A813 E, is always 0.
● Subcard number
The NetEngine A813 E, does not support subcards. Therefore, the subcard
number of the NetEngine A813 E, is fixed as 2.
● Port number
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 11
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
The port numbers of service interfaces on the NetEngine A813 E, begin with 0.
Port numbering depends on the number of interfaces on the NetEngine A813
E.
NO TE
The OAM interface is always numbered Ethernet0/0/0.
Labels
Figure 3-3 Label position
Table 3-7 Label description
Label Name Description
Chassis bar code The bar code will be retrieved by the device as the
label equipment serial number (ESN).
Grounding label This label suggests the position of the grounding terminal.
Qualification This label suggests that the device is qualified.
label
Product This label suggests the product name and certification.
nameplate label
Label for When installing a device against walls, keep 10 mm or
installing a longer distance between the device and walls.
device against
walls
Network access This label suggests the device network access certificate.
certificat label
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 12
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
Technical Specifications
Table 3-8 Technical specifications of the NetEngine A813 E AC+DC
Item Specification
Cabinet installation standards ETSI (21-inch); IEC (19-inch); IMB (3U)
Dimensions without packaging (H x W 43.6 mm x 320 mm x 220 mm (1.72 in.
x D) [mm(in.)] x 12.60 in. x 8.66 in.)
Chassis height [U] 1 U
Weight without packaging [kg(lb)] 2.3 kg (5.07 lb)
Typical power consumption (with 32.7 W
configuration) [W]
Typical heat dissipation (with 106.1 BTU/hour
configuration) [BTU/hour]
MTBF [year] 106.64 year
MTTR [hour] 2 hour
Availability 0.99999
CPU 4-core 1400 MHz
SDRAM 4 GB
Flash memory 16 MB
Storage 2 GB
Power supply mode AC+DC
Rated input voltage [V] AC: 110 V/220 V
DC: 12 V
NOTE
Supports –48 V DC, +48 V DC, or +24 V DC
through external power adapters.
Input voltage range [V] AC: 100 V–240 V
DC: 11.4 V–12.7 V
Maximum input current [A] AC: 1.2 A
DC (12 V): 5 A
Maximum input cable size [mm²] AC: standard C13 cable
DC (12 V): output cable for the power
adapter
Front-end circuit breaker/fuse [A] AC: > 2 A
DC (12 V): See the specifications of the
external power adapter.
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 13
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
Item Specification
Heat dissipation mode Air cooling
Airflow direction From left to right
Noise at normal temperature (acoustic 50 dB(A)
power) [dB(A)]
Switching capacity 28 Gbit/s (Bidirectional). The
maximum allowed error is 0.01%. To
be specific, 99.99% of the line rate is
guaranteed.
Redundant power supply Supports two power inputs for
redundancy backup through an
external power adapter.
Redundant fans If a single fan fails, the system can still
work for a short period of time at an
ambient temperature of 40°C (104°F).
Long-term operating temperature –5°C to +55°C (23.0°F to 131.0°F)
[°C(°F)]
Restriction on the operating ≤ 30°C/hour (54°F/hour)
temperature variation rate [°C(°F)]
Storage temperature [°C(°F)] –40°C to +70°C (–40°F to +158 °F)
Long-term operating relative humidity 5% to 95% RH, non-condensing
[RH]
Storage relative humidity [RH] 5% to 100% RH, non-condensing
Long-term operating altitude [m(ft.)] ≤ 4000 m (13123.2 ft.) (For the
altitude in the range of 1800 m to
4000 m [5905.44 ft. to 13123.2 ft.], the
operating temperature of the device
must decrease by 1°C [1.8°F] for every
220 m [721.78 ft.].)
Storage altitude [m(ft.)] < 5000 m (16404 ft.)
3.1.2 NetEngine A822 E
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 14
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
Overview
Table 3-9 Basic information about the NetEngine A822 E
Description Part Number Model First Integrated
supported fixed device
version
NetEngine 02354WPK CP8PHST2EA2 V800R022C00 Y
A822 E Basic 4 SPC600
Configuratio
n(Includes
A822 E
Chassis,Fixed
Interface(2*10
GE/GE/FE(o)
+4*GE/FE(o)
+8*GE/FE(e)),
1*AC power,
no software
or doc, with
auxiliary
materials)
NetEngine 02354WPL CP8PHST2EA2 V800R022C00 Y
A822 E AC 2 SPC600
Chassis
(2*10GE/GE/
FE(o)+4*GE/
FE(o)+8*GE/
FE(e))
NetEngine 02355KPD CP8PHST2EA2 V800R022C10 Y
A822 E AC 8 SPC500
Chassis
(2*10GE/GE/
FE(o)+4*GE/
FE(o)+8*GE/
FE(e))
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 15
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
Description Part Number Model First Integrated
supported fixed device
version
NetEngine 02355KPF CP8PHST2EA2 V800R022C10 Y
A822 E Basic B SPC500
Configuratio
n(Includes
A822 E
Chassis,Fixed
Interface(2*10
GE/GE/FE(o)
+4*GE/FE(o)
+8*GE/FE(e)),
1*AC power,
no software
or doc, with
auxiliary
materials)
NO TE
In specific areas, as the auxiliary materials are different, the sales BOM numbers may be
different. Different sales BOM numbers may correspond to the same description in the
device attribute table. The actual sales BOM number in an area prevails.
Appearance
Figure 3-4 Appearance of the NetEngine A822 E
Figure 3-5 Appearance of the NetEngine A822 E(with DC power adapter)
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 16
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
Panel
Table 3-10 Indicators on the NetEngine A822 E
Silkscreen Name Color Status Description
PWR Power status Green Steady on The power
indicator supply is
normal.
- Steady off The power
supply is lost
or fails.
STAT Working Green Steady on The board is
status working
indicator properly.
Red Steady on The board
hardware is
faulty.
Green Blinking The board
software is
being
initialized.
- Steady off The board is
not powered
on or is not
running.
ALM Alarm Red Steady on Device-level
indicator critical alarms
exist.
Orange Steady on Device-level
major or
minor alarms
exist.
- Steady off Normal
status.
RSV Reserved - - -
indicator
(reserved)
L/A Connection/ Green Steady on The port
Data connection is
transmission normal.
status
indicator Green Blinking Data is being
received/sent
on ports.
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 17
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
Silkscreen Name Color Status Description
- Steady off The physical
connection of
the port is
abnormal.
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 18
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
Table 3-11 Buttons on the NetEngine A822 E
Silkscreen Name Description
RST Reset button Used to reset a device.
When you press the RST
button and then release
it, the device starts to
reset.
The RST button can also
be used to delete the
password and
configuration file on the
device. The procedure is
as follows: Press and
release the RST button
to restart the NE. Then,
press and hold the RST
button for about 90
seconds. When the STAT
and ALM indicators both
blink (this status lasts
about 10 seconds),
release the RST button
immediately. The device
then starts to
automatically delete the
password and
configuration file.
However, if you release
the RST button after
they stop both blinking,
the device undergoes
only a reset without
clearing the password
and configuration file.
NOTE
After the RST button is
used to clear the
configuration file, the
original configuration file
is deleted. You are advised
to back up the
configuration file
periodically.
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 19
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
Table 3-12 Ports on the NetEngine A822 E
Port Connector Type Description Available
Components
MGMT-ETH RJ45 10M/100M auto- ETH management
sensing Ethernet cable
NM interface
NOTE
If a service port
can be connected
to an NMS, you
are advised to use
the service port as
the network
management port.
CONSOLE RJ45 Console interface: Console
connects to the management
console for on- cable
site system
configuration. The
default baud rate
is 9600 bit/s.
USB USB TYPE A USB port -
(reserved)
GE/FE (0–7) RJ45 Interface for Ethernet cable
inputting and
outputting FE/GE
electrical signals
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 20
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
Port Connector Type Description Available
Components
10G/GE/FE (8–9) SFP+ Interface for 10Gbps SFP+
inputting and Optical Module
outputting 1.25/9.953/10.31
FE/GE/10G optical 25Gbps SFP+
signals Optical Module
10Gbps SFP+
CWDM Optical
Module
10Gbps SFP+
BIDI Optical
Module
10Gbps SFP+
DWDM Optical
Module
125M~2.67Gbps
eSFP DWDM
Optical Module
1Gbps Electrical
Module
1.25Gbps eSFP
Optical Module
1.25Gbps SFP
BIDI Optical
Module
1.25Gbps eSFP
BIDI Optical
Module
1.25Gbps eSFP
CWDM Optical
Module
1Gbps SyncE and
1588V2 Electrical
Module
155Mbps eSFP
Optical Module
155Mbps eSFP
BIDI Optical
Module
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 21
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
Port Connector Type Description Available
Components
GE/FE (8–13) SFP Interface for 1Gbps Electrical
inputting and Module
outputting FE/GE 1.25Gbps eSFP
optical signals Optical Module
1.25Gbps SFP
BIDI Optical
Module
1.25Gbps eSFP
BIDI Optical
Module
1.25Gbps eSFP
CWDM Optical
Module
1Gbps SyncE and
1588V2 Electrical
Module
155Mbps eSFP
Optical Module
155Mbps eSFP
BIDI Optical
Module
Table 3-13 Pins of the MGMT-ETH interface
Front View Pin Usage
1 Transmit positive of the
NM interface
2 Transmit negative of the
NM interface
3 Receive positive of the
NM interface
4 Unspecified
5 Unspecified
6 Receive negative of the
NM interface
7 Unspecified
8 Unspecified
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 22
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
Table 3-14 Pins of the CONSOLE interface
Front View Pin Usage
1 Unspecified
2 Unspecified
3 Transmit end of the
Console interface
4 Unspecified
5 Grounding end of the
Console interface
6 Receive end of the
Console interface
7 Unspecified
8 Unspecified
Interface Numbering Rules
On the NetEngine A822 E, an interface is numbered in the format of "slot
number/subcard number/port number". The following part describes the details:
● Slot number
The slot number of NetEngine A822 E, is always 0.
● Subcard number
The NetEngine A822 E, does not support subcards. Therefore, the subcard
number of the NetEngine A822 E, is fixed as 2.
● Port number
The port numbers of service interfaces on the NetEngine A822 E, begin with 0.
Port numbering depends on the number of interfaces on the NetEngine A822
E.
NO TE
The OAM interface is always numbered Ethernet0/0/0.
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 23
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
Labels
Figure 3-6 Label position
Table 3-15 Label description
Label Name Description
Chassis bar code The bar code will be retrieved by the device as the
label equipment serial number (ESN).
Grounding label This label suggests the position of the grounding terminal.
Qualification This label suggests that the device is qualified.
label
Product This label suggests the product name and certification.
nameplate label
Label for When installing a device against walls, keep 10 mm or
installing a longer distance between the device and walls.
device against
walls
Network access This label suggests the device network access certificate.
certificat label
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 24
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
Technical Specifications
Table 3-16 Technical specifications of the NetEngine A822 E AC+DC
Item Specification
Cabinet installation standards ETSI (21-inch); IEC (19-inch); IMB (3U)
Dimensions without packaging (H x W 43.6 mm x 320 mm x 220 mm (1.72 in.
x D) [mm(in.)] x 12.60 in. x 8.66 in.)
Chassis height [U] 1 U
Weight without packaging [kg(lb)] 2.3 kg (5.07 lb)
Typical power consumption (with 35.0 W
configuration) [W]
Typical heat dissipation (with 113.55 BTU/hour
configuration) [BTU/hour]
MTBF [year] 106.64 year
MTTR [hour] 2 hour
Availability 0.99999
CPU 4-core 1400 MHz
SDRAM 4 GB
Flash memory 16 MB
Storage 2 GB
Power supply mode AC+DC
Rated input voltage [V] AC: 110 V/220 V
DC: 12 V
NOTE
Supports –48 V DC, +48 V DC, or +24 V DC
through external power adapters.
Input voltage range [V] AC: 100 V–240 V
DC: 11.4 V–12.7 V
Maximum input current [A] AC: 1.2 A
DC (12 V): 5 A
Maximum input cable size [mm²] AC: standard C13 cable
DC (12 V): output cable for the power
adapter
Front-end circuit breaker/fuse [A] AC: > 2 A
DC (12 V): See the specifications of the
external power adapter.
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 25
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
Item Specification
Heat dissipation mode Air cooling
Airflow direction From left to right
Noise at normal temperature (acoustic 50 dB(A)
power) [dB(A)]
Switching capacity 40G bit/s (Bidirectional). The
maximum allowed error is 0.01%. To
be specific, 99.99% of the line rate is
guaranteed.
Redundant power supply Supports two power inputs for
redundancy backup through an
external power adapter.
Redundant fans If a single fan fails, the system can still
work for a short period of time at an
ambient temperature of 40°C (104°F).
Long-term operating temperature –5°C to +55°C (23.0°F to 131.0°F)
[°C(°F)]
Restriction on the operating ≤ 30°C/hour (54°F/hour)
temperature variation rate [°C(°F)]
Storage temperature [°C(°F)] –40°C to +70°C (–40°F to +158 °F)
Long-term operating relative humidity 5% to 95% RH, non-condensing
[RH]
Storage relative humidity [RH] 5% to 100% RH, non-condensing
Long-term operating altitude [m(ft.)] ≤ 4000 m (13123.2 ft.) (For the
altitude in the range of 1800 m to
4000 m [5905.44 ft. to 13123.2 ft.], the
operating temperature of the device
must decrease by 1°C [1.8°F] for every
220 m [721.78 ft.].)
Storage altitude [m(ft.)] < 5000 m (16404 ft.)
3.1.3 NetEngine A821 E
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 26
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
Overview
Table 3-17 Basic information about the NetEngine A821 E
Descriptio Part Model First Integrated Remarks
n Number supported fixed
version device
NetEngine 02354QGQ CP8PHST2E V800R021C Y Default:
A821 E AC A01 10SPC500 2*10GE/GE
Chassis /FE(o)
(6*10GE/G +8*GE/
E/FE(o) FE(o)
+4*GE/ +8*GE/
FE(o) FE(e). The
+8*GE/ ports can
FE(e), be
Default upgraded
2*10GE/GE to
/FE(o) 6*10GE/GE
+8*GE/ /FE(o)
FE(o) +4*GE/
+8*GE/ FE(o)
FE(e)) +8*GE/
FE(e)
through
the RTU.
NetEngine 02354QGQ CP8PHST2E V800R021C Y Default:
A821 E AC -001 A01 10SPC600 2*10GE/GE
Chassis /FE(o)
(6*10GE/G +8*GE/
E/FE(o) FE(o)
+4*GE/ +8*GE/
FE(o) FE(e). The
+8*GE/ ports can
FE(e), be
Default upgraded
2*10GE/GE to
/FE(o) 6*10GE/GE
+8*GE/ /FE(o)
FE(o) +4*GE/
+8*GE/ FE(o)
FE(e)) +8*GE/
FE(e)
through
the RTU.
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 27
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
Descriptio Part Model First Integrated Remarks
n Number supported fixed
version device
NetEngine 02354QGQ CP8PHST2E V800R022C Y Default:
A821 E AC -006 A01 00SPC600 2*10GE/GE
Chassis /FE(o)
(6*10GE/G +8*GE/
E/FE(o) FE(o)
+4*GE/ +8*GE/
FE(o) FE(e). The
+8*GE/ ports can
FE(e), be
Default upgraded
2*10GE/GE to
/FE(o) 6*10GE/GE
+8*GE/ /FE(o)
FE(o) +4*GE/
+8*GE/ FE(o)
FE(e)) +8*GE/
FE(e)
through
the RTU.
NetEngine 02354QGS CP8PHST2E V800R021C Y -
A821 E AC A03 10SPC500
Basic
Configurati
on(Include
s A821 E
AC
Chassis,Fix
ed
Interface(2
*10GE/GE/
FE(o)
+8*GE/
FE(o)
+8*GE/
FE(e)),1*AC
Power,with
out
Software
and
Document)
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 28
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
Descriptio Part Model First Integrated Remarks
n Number supported fixed
version device
NetEngine 02354QGS- CP8PHST2E V800R021C Y -
A821 E 001 A03 10SPC600
Basic
Configurati
on(Include
s A821 E
Chassis,Fix
ed
Interface(2
*10GE/GE/
FE(o)
+8*GE/
FE(o)
+8*GE/
FE(e)),1*AC
Power,with
out
Software
and
Document)
NetEngine 02354QGS- CP8PHST2E V800R022C Y -
A821 E 006 A03 00SPC600
Basic
Configurati
on(Include
s A821 E
Chassis,Fix
ed
Interface(2
*10GE/GE/
FE(o)
+8*GE/
FE(o)
+8*GE/
FE(e)),1*AC
Power,with
out
Software
and
Document)
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 29
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
Descriptio Part Model First Integrated Remarks
n Number supported fixed
version device
NetEngine 02355KNY CP8PHSB2 V800R022C Y Default:
A821 E AC EA05 10SPC500 2*10GE/GE
Chassis /FE(o)
(6*10GE/G +8*GE/
E/FE(o) FE(o)
+4*GE/ +8*GE/
FE(o) FE(e). The
+8*GE/ ports can
FE(e), be
Default upgraded
2*10GE/GE to
/FE(o) 6*10GE/GE
+8*GE/ /FE(o)
FE(o) +4*GE/
+8*GE/ FE(o)
FE(e)) +8*GE/
FE(e)
through
the RTU.
NetEngine 02355KPB CP8PHSB2 V800R022C Y -
A821 E EA07 10SPC500
Basic
Configurati
on(Include
s A821 E
Chassis,Fix
ed
Interface(2
*10GE/GE/
FE(o)
+8*GE/
FE(o)
+8*GE/
FE(e)),1*AC
Power,with
out
Software
and
Document)
NO TE
In specific areas, as the auxiliary materials are different, the sales BOM numbers may be
different. Different sales BOM numbers may correspond to the same description in the
device attribute table. The actual sales BOM number in an area prevails.
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 30
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
Appearance
Figure 3-7 Appearance of the NetEngine A821 E
Figure 3-8 Appearance of the NetEngine A821 E(with DC power adapter)
Panel
Table 3-18 Indicators on the NetEngine A821 E
Silkscreen Name Color Status Description
PWR Power supply green The power Steady on
status supply is
indicator normal.
- No power is Off
accessed.
The power
supply poles
are inversely
connected.
STAT Board status green The device is Steady on
indicator working
normally.
red The device Steady on
hardware is
faulty.
green Loading of Blink
the board
software is in
process.
- The device is Off
not running
or no power
is input.
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 31
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
Silkscreen Name Color Status Description
ALM Alarm Red Critical Steady on
indicator alarms are
generated.
Orange Major or Steady on
minor alarms
are
generated.
- No alarms are Off
generated.
RSV Reserve - - -
indicator(Rese
rved)
LINK Port green The physical Steady on
Connection port
Status connection is
Indicator normal.
- The physical Off
port
connection
fails.
ACT Port green The data Blink
Transmitting/ interface is
Receiving transmitting
Status or receiving
Indicator data.
NOTE:
The color of
the indicator
on the
electrical port
is orange.
The color of
the indicator
on the optical
port is green.
- The data Off
interface is
not
transmitting
or receiving
data.
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 32
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
Silkscreen Name Color Status Description
L/A Connection/ green The Steady on
data connection on
transmission the physical
status port is
indicator normal.
green The Blink
connection on
the physical
port is
normal, and
data is
received or
transmitted
on the port.
- The physical Off
connection
fails.
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 33
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
Table 3-19 Buttons on the NetEngine A821 E
Silkscreen Name Description
RST Reset button Used to reset a device.
When you press the RST
button and then release
it, the device starts to
reset.
The RST button can be
used to clear the
password and
configuration file of a
device. Once you press
and release the RST
button, the device begins
to reset. After you press
and hold down the RST
button for about 90s and
release the button when
the STAT and ALM
indicators blink
simultaneously, the
device begins to
automatically clear the
password and
configuration file. If you
still hold down the RST
button after the
indicators blink
simultaneously and then
release the button after
they do not blink
simultaneously (for
about 10s), the device
undergoes only a reset
without clearing the
password and
configuration file.
- If you press the RST
button, the original
configuration file is
cleared. You are advised
to periodically back up
the configuration file.
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 34
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
Table 3-20 Ports on the NetEngine A821 E
Port Connector Type Description Available
Components
MGMT-ETH RJ45 10M/100M auto- ETH management
sensing Ethernet cable
NM interface
NOTE
If a service port
can be connected
to an NMS, you
are advised to use
the service port as
the network
management port.
CONSOLE RJ45 Console interface: Console
connects to the management
console for on- cable
site system
configuration. The
default baud rate
is 9600 bit/s.
USB USB TYPE A USB port -
(reserved)
GE/FE (0–7) RJ45 Interface for Ethernet cable
inputting and
outputting FE/GE
electrical signals
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 35
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
Port Connector Type Description Available
Components
10GE/GE/FE (8–9) SFP+/SFP Interface for 10Gbps SFP+
inputting and Optical Module
outputting FE/GE/ 1.25/9.953/10.31
10GE optical 25Gbps SFP+
signals Optical Module
NOTE 10Gbps SFP+
1. Ports 8 and 9
work in standard CWDM Optical
Ethernet mode by Module
default. You can 10Gbps SFP+
run the flexe
BIDI Optical
enable port port-id
command in the Module
system view to 10Gbps SFP+
switch the ports to DWDM Optical
the FlexE mode. An
interface working Module
in GE mode cannot 125M~2.67Gbps
be switched to the eSFP DWDM
FlexE mode. Optical Module
2. Interfaces 8 and
9 in FlexE mode 1Gbps Electrical
cannot connect to Module
standard 10GE 1.25Gbps eSFP
interfaces. Optical Module
3. This FlexE mode
supports only GE- 1.25Gbps SFP
granularity hard BIDI Optical
pipes and Module
interconnection
1.25Gbps eSFP
with Huawei FlexE
interfaces with the BIDI Optical
same GE Module
granularity. 1.25Gbps eSFP
4. In CWDM Optical
V800R021C10, Module
electrical modules
inserted into ports 1Gbps SyncE and
8 to 9 support only 1588V2 Electrical
1000 Mbit/s, and Module
do not support 10
Mbit/s, 100 Mbit/s, 155Mbps eSFP
or 10M/100M Optical Module
auto-sensing (no 155Mbps eSFP
this restriction in
later versions). BIDI Optical
Module
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 36
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
Port Connector Type Description Available
Components
10GE/GE/FE (10– SFP+ FE/GE/10GE 10Gbps SFP+
13) optical signal Optical Module
input and output 1.25/9.953/10.31
interface 25Gbps SFP+
Description: Optical Module
By default, only 10Gbps SFP+
the GE/FE CWDM Optical
interface is Module
supported. To use 10Gbps SFP+
the 10GE BIDI Optical
interface, you Module
need to purchase
the RTU. 10Gbps SFP+
DWDM Optical
For details about Module
how to use the
RTU, see 125M~2.67Gbps
Installation > eSFP DWDM
License Usage Optical Module
Guide. 1Gbps Electrical
Module
1.25Gbps eSFP
Optical Module
1.25Gbps SFP
BIDI Optical
Module
1.25Gbps eSFP
BIDI Optical
Module
1.25Gbps eSFP
CWDM Optical
Module
1Gbps SyncE and
1588V2 Electrical
Module
155Mbps eSFP
Optical Module
155Mbps eSFP
BIDI Optical
Module
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 37
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
Port Connector Type Description Available
Components
GE/FE (14–17) SFP Interface for 1Gbps Electrical
inputting and Module
outputting FE/GE 1.25Gbps eSFP
optical signals Optical Module
1.25Gbps SFP
BIDI Optical
Module
1.25Gbps eSFP
BIDI Optical
Module
1.25Gbps eSFP
CWDM Optical
Module
1Gbps SyncE and
1588V2 Electrical
Module
155Mbps eSFP
Optical Module
155Mbps eSFP
BIDI Optical
Module
Table 3-21 Pins of the MGMT-ETH interface
Front View Pin Usage
1 Transmit positive of the
NM interface
2 Transmit negative of the
NM interface
3 Receive positive of the
NM interface
4 Unspecified
5 Unspecified
6 Receive negative of the
NM interface
7 Unspecified
8 Unspecified
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 38
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
Table 3-22 Pins of the CONSOLE interface
Front View Pin Usage
1 Unspecified
2 Unspecified
3 Transmit end of the
Console interface
4 Unspecified
5 Grounding end of the
Console interface
6 Receive end of the
Console interface
7 Unspecified
8 Unspecified
Interface Numbering Rules
On the NetEngine A821 E, an interface is numbered in the format of "slot
number/subcard number/port number". The following part describes the details:
● Slot number
The slot number of NetEngine A821 E, is always 0.
● Subcard number
The NetEngine A821 E, does not support subcards. Therefore, the subcard
number of the NetEngine A821 E, is fixed as 2.
● Port number
The port numbers of service interfaces on the NetEngine A821 E, begin with 0.
Port numbering depends on the number of interfaces on the NetEngine A821
E,.
NO TE
The OAM interface is always numbered Ethernet0/0/0.
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 39
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
Labels
Figure 3-9 Label position
Table 3-23 Label description
Label Name Description
Chassis bar code The bar code will be retrieved by the device as the
label equipment serial number (ESN).
Grounding label This label suggests the position of the grounding terminal.
Qualification This label suggests that the device is qualified.
label
Product This label suggests the product name and certification.
nameplate label
Label for When installing a device against walls, keep 10 mm or
installing a longer distance between the device and walls.
device against
walls
Network access This label suggests the device network access certificate.
certificat label
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 40
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
Technical Specifications
Table 3-24 Technical specifications of the NetEngine A821 E AC+DC
Item Specification
Cabinet installation standards ETSI (21-inch); IEC (19-inch); IMB (3U)
Dimensions without packaging (H x W 43.6 mm x 320 mm x 220 mm (1.72 in.
x D) [mm(in.)] x 12.60 in. x 8.66 in.)
Chassis height [U] 1 U
Weight without packaging [kg(lb)] 2.7 kg (5.95 lb)
Typical power consumption (with 69.87 W
configuration) [W]
Typical heat dissipation (with 226.70 BTU/hour
configuration) [BTU/hour]
MTBF [year] ● CP8PHSB2EA05 (02355KNY): 56
year
● CP8PHSB2EA07 (02355KPB): 56
year
● CP8PHST2EA01 (02354QGQ): 44.55
year
● CP8PHST2EA01 (02354QGQ-001):
44.55 year
● CP8PHST2EA01 (02354QGQ-006):
56 year
● CP8PHST2EA03 (02354QGS): 44.55
year
● CP8PHST2EA03 (02354QGS-001):
44.55 year
● CP8PHST2EA03 (02354QGS-006):
56 year
MTTR [hour] 2 hour
Availability 0.99999
CPU 4-core 1400 MHz
SDRAM 4 GB
Flash memory 64 MB
Storage 2 GB
Power supply mode AC+DC
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 41
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
Item Specification
Rated input voltage [V] AC: 110 V/220 V
DC: 12 V
NOTE
Supports –48 V DC and +48 V DC through
the external power adapter.
Input voltage range [V] AC: 100 V–240 V
DC: 11.4 V–12.7 V
Maximum input current [A] AC: 1.5 A
DC (12 V): 10 A
Maximum input cable size [mm²] AC: standard C13 cable
DC (12 V): output cable for the power
adapter
Front-end circuit breaker/fuse [A] AC: > 2 A
DC (12 V): See the specifications of the
external power adapter.
Heat dissipation mode Air cooling
Airflow direction From left to right
Noise at normal temperature (acoustic 50 dB(A)
power) [dB(A)]
Switching capacity 144 Gbit/s (Bidirectional). The
maximum allowed error is 0.01%. To
be specific, 99.99% of the line rate is
guaranteed.
Redundant power supply Supports two power inputs for
redundancy backup through an
external power adapter.
Redundant fans If a single fan fails, the system can still
work for a short period of time at an
ambient temperature of 50°C (122°F).
Long-term operating temperature –40°C to +65°C (–40°F to +149°F)
[°C(°F)]
Restriction on the operating ≤ 30°C/hour (54°F/hour)
temperature variation rate [°C(°F)]
Storage temperature [°C(°F)] –40°C to +70°C (–40°F to +158 °F)
Long-term operating relative humidity 5% to 95% RH, non-condensing
[RH]
Storage relative humidity [RH] 5% to 100% RH, non-condensing
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 42
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
Item Specification
Long-term operating altitude [m(ft.)] ≤ 4000 m (13123.2 ft.) (For the
altitude in the range of 1800 m to
4000 m [5905.44 ft. to 13123.2 ft.], the
operating temperature of the device
must decrease by 1°C [1.8°F] for every
220 m [721.78 ft.].)
Storage altitude [m(ft.)] < 5000 m (16404 ft.)
FlexE supported ● CP8PHSB2EA05 (02355KNY): -
● CP8PHSB2EA07 (02355KPB): -
● CP8PHST2EA01 (02354QGQ):
Yes
Physical port 8 can be added to one
group. port-id ranges from 1000 to
3000. A maximum of eight FlexE
clients can be created.
Physical port 9 can be added to one
group. port-id ranges from 1000 to
3000. A maximum of eight FlexE
clients can be created.
● CP8PHST2EA01 (02354QGQ-001): -
● CP8PHST2EA01 (02354QGQ-006): -
● CP8PHST2EA03 (02354QGS): -
● CP8PHST2EA03 (02354QGS-001): -
● CP8PHST2EA03 (02354QGS-006): -
3.2 Optical Module
3.2.1 Understanding Pluggable Optical Modules
3.2.1.1 Optical Module Structure
Figure1 shows the structure of an optical module.
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 43
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
Figure 3-10 Optical module structure
1. Handle 2. Receiver 3. Transmitter 4. Shell
5. Label 6. Dust cap 7. Spring 8. Module
connector
3.2.1.2 Optical Module Classification
Optical modules are available in various types to meet diversified requirements.
● Classified by transmission rates
Currently, the transmission rates of optical modules cover a wide range.
According to different transmission rates, optical modules can be classified
into 400 Gbit/s optical modules, 200 Gbit/s optical modules, 100 Gbit/s optical
modules, 40 Gbit/s optical modules, 25 Gbit/s optical modules, and 10 Gbit/s
optical modules, 2.5 Gbit/s optical modules, 1.25 Gbit/s optical modules, 1000
Mbit/s optical modules, 155 Mbit/s optical modules, and 100 Mbit/s optical
modules.
● Classified by encapsulation types
The higher transmission rate an optical module provides, the more complex
structure it has. According to the encapsulation type, optical modules are
classified into SFP, eSFP, SFP+, XFP, SFP28, QSFP28, QSFP+, CXP, CFP and CSFP.
– SFP: small form-factor pluggable.
– eSFP: enhanced small form-factor pluggable. An eSFP module is an SFP
module that supports monitoring of voltage, temperature, bias current,
transmit optical power, and receive optical power. Because all the SFP
optical modules support these monitoring functions, eSFP is also called
SFP.
– SFP+: small form-factor pluggable plus, SFP with a higher rate. SFP+
modules are more sensitive to electromagnetic interference (EMI)
because they have a higher rate. To reduce EMI, SFP+ modules have more
springs than SFP modules and the cages for SFP+ modules on a card are
tighter.
– XFP: X is the Roman numeral 10, meaning that all XFP optical modules
provide a 10 Gbit/s transmission rate. XFP optical modules support LC
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 44
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
fiber connectors. XFP optical modules are wider and longer than SFP+
optical modules.
– SFP28: with the same interface size as an SFP+ module. An SFP28
interface can use a 25GE SFP28 optical module or 10GE SFP+ optical
module.
– QSFP28: with the same interface size as a QSFP+ module. A QSFP28
interface can use a 100GE QSFP28 optical module or a 40GE QSFP+
optical module.
– QSFP+: quad small form-factor pluggable. QSFP+ optical modules
support MPO fiber connectors and are larger than SFP+ modules.
– QSFP-DD: quad small form factor pluggable-double density, it is a high-
speed pluggable module defined by the QSFP-DD MSA group.
– CXP: hot-pluggable high-density parallel optics transceiver form factor,
which provides 12 channels of traffic in each of the Tx and Rx directions.
It applies only to short multimode links.
– CFP: C form-factor pluggable, a new standard for high-speed, hot-
pluggable optical transceivers that support data communication and
telecommunication applications. Dimensions of a CFP optical module are
144.75 mm x 82 mm x 13.6 mm (W x D x H).
– CSFP: A Compact Small Form-Factor Pluggable (SFP) module is a Gigabit
Ethernet transceiver with two bidirectional channels inside a conventional
SFP form factor to address high-density port requirements in FTTx
deployments. Typically, this CSFP optical module is interconnected with
two BIDI SFP optical modules. During interconnection, the transmit and
receive wavelengths must match, and the transmission distances of the
optical modules at the two ends must be the same.
● Classified by physical layer standards
Different physical layer standards are defined to allow data transmission in
different modes. Therefore, different types of optical modules are produced to
comply with these standards. For details, see Standards compliance of the
specific optical module.
● Classified by modes
Optical fibers are classified into single-mode and multimode fibers. Therefore,
optical modules are also classified into single-mode and multimode modules
to support different optical fibers.
– Single-mode optical modules are used with single-mode fibers. Single-
mode fibers support a wide band and large transmission capacity, and are
used for long-distance transmission.
– Multimode optical modules are used with multimode fibers. Multimode
fibers have lower transmission performance than single-mode fibers
because of modal dispersion, but their costs are also lower. They are used
for small-capacity, short-distance transmission.
Wavelength division multiplexing modules differ from other optical modules in
center wavelengths. A common optical module has a center wavelength of 850
nm, 1310 nm, or 1550 nm, whereas a wavelength division multiplexing module
transmits lights with different center wavelengths. Wavelength division
multiplexing modules are classified into two types: coarse wavelength division
multiplexing (CWDM) and dense wavelength division multiplexing (DWDM).
Within the same band, DWDM modules are available in more types and use
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 45
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
wavelength resources more efficiently than CWDM modules. DWDM and CWDM
modules allow lights with different center wavelengths to be transmitted on one
fiber without interfering each other. Therefore, a passive multiplexer can be used
to combine the lights into one channel, which is then split into multiple channels
by a demultiplexer on the remote end. This reduces the optical fibers required.
DWDM and CWDM modules are used for long-distance transmission.
The transmit power of a long-distance optical module is often larger than its
overload power. Therefore, when using such optical modules, select optical fibers
of an appropriate length to ensure that the actual receive power is smaller than
the overload power. If the optical fibers connected to a long-distance optical
module are too short, use an optical attenuator to reduce the receive power on
the remote optical module. Otherwise, the remote optical module may be burnt.
3.2.1.3 Optical Module Appearance
The following lists some common optical modules, which may not be supported
by this product. The figures are for reference only.
Table 3-25 Commonly used optical modules
Encaps Interface Appearance
ulatio type
n type
SFP LC Single-fiber-bidirectional transceiver
RJ45 1Gbps Electrical Module
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 46
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
Encaps Interface Appearance
ulatio type
n type
eSFP LC Two-fiber bidirectional
Single-fiber-bidirectional transceiver
SFP+ LC Two-fiber bidirectional
Single-fiber-bidirectional transceiver
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 47
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
Encaps Interface Appearance
ulatio type
n type
XFP LC Two-fiber bidirectional
Single-fiber-bidirectional transceiver
SFP28 LC Two-fiber bidirectional
Single-fiber-bidirectional transceiver
QSFP2 LC/MPO Two-fiber bidirectional
8
Single-fiber-bidirectional transceiver
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 48
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
Encaps Interface Appearance
ulatio type
n type
QSFP+ LC/MPO
CXP MPO
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 49
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
Encaps Interface Appearance
ulatio type
n type
CFP LC/MPO CFP
CFP2
CFP4
CFP8
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 50
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
Encaps Interface Appearance
ulatio type
n type
CSFP LC
QSFP- LC
DD
3.2.1.4 Guide to Using Optical Modules
This section describes instructions on how to use an optical module.
NO TE
Only optical modules matching Huawei products can be used. These optical modules are
strictly tested by Huawei. If non-matching optical modules are used, device requirements
may fail to be met, and services may fail to run properly. To replace optical modules, see
Parts Replacement-Replacing an Optical Module.
ESD Measures
Before touching any optical module, wear an ESD wrist strap or ESD gloves. Take
full ESD measures when installing optical apparatus such as optical modules
indoors or outdoors.
Figure 3-11 Methods of wearing ESD gloves
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 51
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
Figure 3-12 Methods of wearing ESD wrist strap
Placing Optical Apparatus and fibers
Do not touch pins or connecting fingers with bare hands. Handle the optical fibers
gently. Use two fingers to hold the fiber connector instead of grasping the fiber or
the fiber cover.
Do not apply axial or lateral fiber wallop bumps on the fiber. Do not fold, twist, or
crush the tail fiber. Do not drag the tail fiber or press the coupling point of the tail
fiber. Figure 3-13 shows how to properly place optical apparatus and fibers.
Figure 3-13 Methods of placing optical apparatus and fibers
NO TE
Install the fiber in circles with diameter longer than 6 cm ( 0.20 ft ).
Uninstalling Optical Apparatus
● Open the buckle and slowly take out the optical apparatus. Do not drag the
optical fiber to forcibly take out the optical fiber. Ensure that the optical fiber
is connected to and removed from the interface horizontally.
Figure 3-14 The tab is closed
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 52
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
Figure 3-15 The tab is open
● 155Mbps SFP Electrical Transceiver, in Figure 3-16 (1) shows a black plastic
latch. Press the latch to unlock the electrical module. As (2) indicates, hold
the two sides of the electrical module to remove it.
Figure 3-16 Removing a 155 Mbit/s electrical module
Please do not remove the black plastic latch when removing the electrical
module.
If the black plastic latch falls off, use an auxiliary tool, such as a pair of
tweezers, to press the cage buckle, as shown in the following figure. Then,
hold the two sides of the electrical module to remove it.
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 53
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
● CFP2 optical module(02311LYG), in Figure 3-17, Push the puller to the
bottom until the latch shown in (1) automatically unlocks the optical module.
Then, horizontally drag the puller to remove the optical module.
Figure 3-17 Removing a CFP2 optical module
● When removing a CFP optical module, loosen the two screw rods of the
module and then remove the module slowly. Do not directly drag the optical
fiber to pull out the optical module or forcibly pull out the optical module.
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 54
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
CA UTION
The QSFP28 and QSFP-DD modules will get very hot during operation. To
prevent injuries, do not touch the module shells when removing the modules.
Precautions for the loosened optical module
● When installing an optical module, force it into position. If a crack sound is
heard or a slight tremor is felt, it indicates that the latch boss is secured.
When the latch boss is not secured, the connecting finger is unstably
connected to the connector on the board, and the link may become Up. On
the condition that the optical module tremors or collides with another object,
however, the optical module will be loosened or the optical signals will be
temporarily cut off.
● When inserting the optical module, make sure that the tab is closed. (At this
time, the latch boss locks the optical module.) After the optical module is
inserted, try pulling it out to see if it is installed in position. If the optical
module cannot be pulled out, it is secured.
● If you cannot push the optical module into an optical module cage any
longer, the optical module is in good contact with the board connector.
● When installing a CFP optical module, push the module panel horizontally
into the connector using even force with both thumbs. After the module is
inserted, push the module slightly to ensure that it has reached the stop
position.
● After the CFP optical module is securely inserted, tighten the two screw rods
of the module alternately. To prevent the module from getting loosened due
to vibration or collision, you are advised to use a screwdriver to tighten the
screw rods.
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 55
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
Precautions for receptacle contamination
● Clean tissues must be prepared for deployment on site. You need to clean the
optical connector before inserting it in the receptacle. This protects the
receptacle against the contamination.
NO TE
Use at least three cleaning tissues. Wipe the end of an optical connector horizontally
in one direction, and then move the connector end to the unused part of the cleaning
tissue to continue. Generally, one cleaning tissue is used for cleaning an optical
connector.
● To prevent contamination, the optical module should be covered with either a
dust cap or an optical connector.
Cover an optical module with a dust cap.
Cover an optical module with an optical connector
● Lay the optical fibers on the Optical-fiber Distribution Frame (ODF) or coil
them up in a fiber management tray. Make sure that the optical fibers are not
squeezed.
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 56
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
● If a receptacle or an optical connector has not been used for a long time and
has not been covered with a dust cap, you should clean it before using it. A
cotton swab is used to clean a receptacle, and a cleaning tissue is used to
clean an optical connector.
NO TE
During the cleaning process, insert the cotton swab and turn it slowly in the
receptacle. Do not use too much force, because the receptacle may be damaged.
● If, for no apparent reason, optical signals are lost during the operation of a
device, use the preceding method to clean the receptacle or the optical
connector. This will eliminate contamination as the cause of the signal loss.
Precautions for the overload-caused burnt optical module
● When using an OTDR to test the connectivity or the attenuation of optical
signals, disconnect the optical connector from the optical module. Otherwise,
the optical module may be burnt.
● When performing a self-loop test, use an optical attenuator. Do not loosen
the optical connector.
● It is required that a long-distance optical module have an input optical power
of less than -7 dBm. If the input optical power is larger than -7 dBm, you
need to add an optical attenuator. For example, if the transmitting optical
power is X dBm and the optical attenuation is Y dB, the receiving optical
power is X-Y, which must be smaller than -7dBm (X-Y<-7 dBm).
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 57
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
Inspecting Optical Fiber Connectors
The Ethernet port rate is increasing and the quality requirement for optical fibers
and optical cables is higher. Table 3-26 describes requirements for the loss of
optical fiber connectors according to the national standard (GBT50312-2016).
Table 3-26 Maximum attenuation of the optical fiber connector
Type Maximum attenuation of an optical fiber
connector (dB)
Fiber splicing connector 0.3
Optical mechanical connector 0.3
Optical connector 0.75
NO TE
Fiber cores are connected through connectors, such as the ODF, optical attenuator, and
flange, in splicing and mechanical modes.
Table 3-27 describes requirements for the reflection of the optical fiber connector
when Ethernet ports (such as 200G and 50G) use PAM4 encoding to double the
rate. More connectors bring lower requirements for the reflection.
Table 3-27 Maximum reflection of connectors
Number of Optical Fiber Maximum Reflection of Each Connector
Connectors (dB)
1 -22
2 -29
4 -33
6 -35
8 -37
10 -39
Link splice loss and reflectance values of the test methods and the following
processing steps:
1. After the optical fiber at the peer end is disconnected, use the OTDR meter to
test the local end. Check whether the loss and reflection of each link and
node are normal. (The loss of a fiber splicing connector should be less than
0.3 dB, the loss of a connector should be less than 0.75 dB, and the reflection
of a connector should be less than -30 dB.) If the test result is not within the
required range, process the abnormal port.
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 58
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
2. Locate the equipment room where the port resides based on the distance
between abnormal points in the OTDR test result. Preliminarily determine the
port location, disconnect the port, and perform an OTDR test on the port that
reports alarms. Check whether the distance is consistent with that in the
previous test. If not, continue to test other ports.
3. After the abnormal port is found, test the port using a fiber microscope. If the
port is dirty, clean it.
4. After the port is cleaned, restore the port, and ensure that the connector is
tightened. Perform an OTDR test on the port to check whether loss and
reflection of each link and node are normal.
5. If the fault persists, replace the flange and perform an OTDR test on the port
that reports alarms to check whether loss and reflection of each link and
node are normal.
6. If the fault persists, replace the optical fiber and perform an OTDR test on the
port that reports alarms to check whether loss and reflection of each link and
node are normal.
7. If multiple abnormal points exist on the link, repeat steps 2 to 6.
Other precautions
● The optical connector should be horizontally inserted in the receptacle to
avoid damages to the receptacle.
● Mixed use of multi-mode and single-mode optical fibers is prohibited.
Otherwise, faults such as signal loss may occur.
Method of distinguishing optical modules in single mode and multi-mode.
Table 3-28 Method of distinguishing optical modules in single mode and
multi-mode
Item Single mode Multi-mode
Transmission distance 10 km or longer Below 0.5 km
Wavelength Non-850 nm 850 nm
Information on the SM MM
label
50G Optical Module Installation Guide
1. Precautions for optical module installation
(1) If a cabinet with a door is used, a sufficient distance must be reserved between
the optical module and the cabinet door to prevent the puller or patch cord from
bumping on the door.
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 59
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
(2) Long-distance optical modules must be equipped with optical attenuators for
self-loops. For a 50GBase-ER (40 km) long-distance optical module, the receive
optical power damage threshold is lower than the average minimum transmit
optical power, making the module prone to damage caused by self-loops.
Therefore, the module must be equipped with an optical attenuator for self-loops.
(3) When optical path quality is tested using an OTDR, optical fibers must be
removed from the associated optical module. This is because the OTDR's transmit
optical power is far greater than the optical power damage threshold at the
receive end of an optical module.
2. Method of checking an optical path
Figure 3-18 Method of checking an optical path
3. Method of cleaning the end faces of an optical fiber
Before cleaning the end faces of an optical fiber that is in use, ensure that the
optical fiber has no optical signals. To achieve this, shut down the ports at both
ends of the fiber. Then, clean the end faces and insert the optical fiber back into
the corresponding port.
To clean the end faces of an optical fiber that is not in use, remove the dust-proof
cap from the fiber connector (or the patch cord connector of the involved optical
component), and put the dust-proof cap into a dedicated cleaning kit. After the
cleaning is complete, re-install the dust-proof cap.
● Use the untouched part of a lint-free wipe to wipe the connector end face
along one direction.
● If the end face of an optical fiber cannot be cleaned due to serious
contamination, use a lint-free wipe dipped with cleanser to wipe the end face
along one direction. Then, use a dry lint-free wipe to clean the end face.
Ensure that the end face is dry before using the optical fiber.
● After the cleaning is complete, immediately install a dust-proof cap for any
optical fiber connector that is not in use.
4. Precautions for using a lint-free wipe to clean the end face of an optical
fiber
● Use a smooth surface of the lint-free wipe for cleaning.
● Ensure that the optical fiber connector is vertical to the lint-free wipe during
cleaning.
● Wipe the end face along the direction of the lint-free wipe's grain.
● Wipe the end face along one direction only.
● Any part of a lint-free wipe can be used only once, and a small piece of lint-
free wipe can be used to clean only one connector.
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 60
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
5. Method of using lint-free swabs to clean the optical port of an optical
module
Remove the dust-proof cap from the optical port of the optical module, and put
the dust-proof cap into a dedicated cleaning kit.
● Select a proper lint-free swab based on the type of the optical port to be
cleaned. (For SC optical ports, use lint-free swabs with a diameter of 2.5 mm;
for LC and MTRJ optical ports, use lint-free swabs with a diameter of 1.25
mm.) Dip the lint-free swab into cleanser, insert it into the inside of the
optical port, and clean the optical port by rotating the swab 360 degrees in
one direction along the inner wall of the optical port.
● Insert a dry lint-free swab of the same type into the inside of the optical port
and clean the optical port by rotating the swab 360 degrees in one direction
along the inner wall of the optical port.
● Cap the optical port after the cleaning is complete.
6. Precautions for using lint-free swabs to clean the optical port of an optical
module
● When cleaning the optical port of an optical module, clean the end faces of
associated optical fibers to prevent the optical fibers from dirtying the optical
port.
● In general, each lint-free swab can be used for cleaning only once. If a used
lint-free swab is confirmed clean and can be reused, it can be used for a
maximum of three times. For example, a lint-free swab that is ever used to
dry an optical port can be used for a maximum of three times.
7. Safety precautions
● Electrostatic protection: Active optical and electrical components are
extremely sensitive to electrostatic. Therefore, take strict measures to protect
against electrostatic. For example, wear ESD gloves during operations and
touch only the shell of the involved component.
● Laser protection: Do not look into optical ports without eye protection when
reseating a module.
8. Discrete reflectance
Focus on the reflection indicators of each node during link deployment. The
discrete reflection indicators must meet the IEEE standards.
Table 3-29 Maximum discrete reflectance of QSFP28 50G defined by IEEE
Number of QSFP28 50G-FR QSFP28 50G-LR QSFP28 50G-ER
discrete (Maximum value (Maximum value (Maximum value
reflectances of each discrete of each discrete of each discrete
greater than –55 reflectance) reflectance) reflectance)
dB
1 -25 dB -22 dB -19 dB
2 -31 dB -29 dB -27 dB
4 -35 dB -33 dB -32 dB
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 61
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
Number of QSFP28 50G-FR QSFP28 50G-LR QSFP28 50G-ER
discrete (Maximum value (Maximum value (Maximum value
reflectances of each discrete of each discrete of each discrete
greater than –55 reflectance) reflectance) reflectance)
dB
6 -38 dB -35 dB -35 dB
8 -40 dB -37 dB -37 dB
10 -41 dB -39 dB -39 dB
3.2.1.5 Optical Attenuator Configuration
This section describes how to configure an optical attenuator.
Calculating the Optical Attenuation
You can calculate the optical attenuation based on the actual optical power.
Table 3-30 Description of the Paramater
Name Description
P(in)min maximum transmit optical power.
P(out)max transmission distance.
S transmission distance.
A attenuation coefficient. Note that the
attenuation coefficient is related to
optical fiber types and wavelengths. By
default, the attenuation coefficient of
a 1310-nm wavelength in a G.652
fiber is 0.45 dBm/km or 0.4 dBm/km;
the attenuation coefficient of a 1550-
nm wavelength in a G.652 fiber is
0.235 dBm/km or 0.25 dBm/km.
P(in)max maximum receive optical power, that
is, minimum overload point.
The principle for determining whether an attenuator needs to be configured at a
transmission point is as follows:
If P(out)max – S x Attenuation coefficient > P(in)max, an attenuator needs to be
configured. The optical attenuation is calculated in the following formula: T=
P(out)max - S x Attenuation coefficient - P(in)max.
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 62
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
Table 3-31 Reference for configuring an attenuator
BOM Descriptio P(out) P(out) P(in) P(in)
Number n max min min max
34060276 eSFP, -8 dBm -15 dBm -31 dBm -8 dBm
1310nm,ST
M1,LC,SM,
15km
NO TE
● If P(in)max of an optical module equals P(out)max, you do not need to configure an
attenuator.
● You can choose the 5 dBm and 10 dBm attenuators for optical modules on the device.
BOM Number and Description of Attenuators
Table 3-32 BOM number and description of attenuators
BOM Number Description
45030021 Fixed Optical Attenuator,
1260nm~1620nm-5dB-LC/PC-45dB
45030022 Fixed Optical Attenuator,
1260nm~1620nm-10dB-LC/PC-45dB
NO TE
This table is for reference only. BOM numbers of attenuators vary with configuration
documents.
3.2.2 GPON ONU SFP Optical Module
3.2.2.1 GPON ONU-SFP-SMF-1490nm(rx)/1310nm(tx)-20km-industry
Table 3-33 GPON ONU-SFP-SMF-1490nm(rx)/1310nm(tx)-20km-industry
specifications
Item Value
Basic Information
Module name GPON ONU-SFP-SMF-1490nm(rx)/
1310nm(tx)-20km-industry
Part Number 03031QHU
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 63
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
Item Value
Model H87MMA5671A2
Form factor SFP
Application standard FSAN G.984.2, OMCI support per ITU-T
G.988
Connector type SC/APC
Optical fiber type SMF
Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12
Working case temperature [°C(°F)] -40°C to 85°C(-40°F to 185°F)
DDM options SFF-8472
Environment standard RoHS
Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1
ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V
Transmission rate [bit/s] 2.488 Gbit/s(rx)/1.244 Gbit/s(TX)
Target transmission distance [km] 20 km
Transmitter Optical Characteristics
Center wavelength [nm] 1310 nm
Tx operating wavelength range [nm] 1290 nm - 1330 nm
Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) 5 dBm
[dBm]
Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]
Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) 0.5 dBm
[dBm]
Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]
Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 10 dB
Receiver Optical Characteristics
Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1480 nm - 1500 nm
Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -27 dBm
Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -
Overload power (AVG) [dBm] -8 dBm
Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 64
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
3.2.3 1Gbps SyncE and 1588V2 Electrical Module
3.2.3.1 1Gbps-SFP-100m-industry-Support SyncE and 1588V2
Table 3-34 1Gbps-SFP-100m-industry-Support SyncE and 1588V2 specifications
Item Value
Basic Information
Module name 1Gbps-SFP-100m-industry-Support
SyncE and 1588V2
Part Number 34100255
Model OEGD01N02
Form factor SFP
Application standard IEEE 802.3, 1000Base-T
Connector type RJ45
Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12
Working case temperature [°C(°F)] -40°C to 85°C(-40°F to 185°F)
Environment standard RoHS
Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1
ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V
Transmission rate [bit/s] 1000 Mbit/s
Target transmission distance [km] 0.1 km
3.2.4 155Mbps eSFP Optical Module
3.2.4.1 155Mbps-eSFP-SMF-1310nm-15km-industry
Table 3-35 155Mbps-eSFP-SMF-1310nm-15km-industry specifications
Item Value
Basic Information
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 65
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
Item Value
Module name 155Mbps-eSFP-SMF-1310nm-15km-
industry
Part Number 34060307
Model eSFP-1310nm-I-1
Form factor eSFP
Application standard ITU-T G.957, STM-1
Connector type LC
Optical fiber type SMF
Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12
Working case temperature [°C(°F)] -40°C to 85°C(-40°F to 185°F)
DDM options SFF-8472
Environment standard RoHS
Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1
ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V
Transmission rate [bit/s] 155 Mbit/s
Target transmission distance [km] 15 km
Transmitter Optical Characteristics
Center wavelength [nm] 1310 nm
Tx operating wavelength range [nm] 1261 nm - 1360 nm
Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) -8 dBm
[dBm]
Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]
Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) -15 dBm
[dBm]
Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]
Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 8.2 dB
Receiver Optical Characteristics
Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1260 nm - 1580 nm
Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -31 dBm
Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 66
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
Item Value
Overload power (AVG) [dBm] -8 dBm
Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -
3.2.4.2 155Mbps-eSFP-SMF-1310nm-40km-industry
Table 3-36 155Mbps-eSFP-SMF-1310nm-40km-industry specifications
Item Value
Basic Information
Module name 155Mbps-eSFP-SMF-1310nm-40km-
industry
Part Number 34060308
Model eSFP-1310nm-L-1.1
Form factor eSFP
Application standard ITU-T G.957, STM-1
Connector type LC
Optical fiber type SMF
Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12
Working case temperature [°C(°F)] -40°C to 85°C(-40°F to 185°F)
DDM options SFF-8472
Environment standard RoHS
Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1
ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V
Transmission rate [bit/s] 155 Mbit/s
Target transmission distance [km] 40 km
Transmitter Optical Characteristics
Center wavelength [nm] 1310 nm
Tx operating wavelength range [nm] 1263 nm - 1360 nm
Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) 0 dBm
[dBm]
Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 67
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
Item Value
Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) -5 dBm
[dBm]
Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]
Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 10.5 dB
Receiver Optical Characteristics
Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1263 nm - 1360 nm
Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -34 dBm
Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -
Overload power (AVG) [dBm] -10 dBm
Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -
3.2.4.3 155Mbps-eSFP-SMF-1550nm-80km-industry
Table 3-37 155Mbps-eSFP-SMF-1550nm-80km-industry specifications
Item Value
Basic Information
Module name 155Mbps-eSFP-SMF-1550nm-80km-
industry
Part Number 34060309
Model eSFP-1550nm-L-1.2
Form factor eSFP
Application standard ITU-T G.957, STM-1
Connector type LC
Optical fiber type SMF
Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12
Working case temperature [°C(°F)] -40°C to 85°C(-40°F to 185°F)
DDM options SFF-8472
Environment standard RoHS
Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1
ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 68
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
Item Value
Transmission rate [bit/s] 155 Mbit/s
Target transmission distance [km] 80 km
Transmitter Optical Characteristics
Center wavelength [nm] 1550 nm
Tx operating wavelength range [nm] 1480 nm - 1580 nm
Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) 0 dBm
[dBm]
Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]
Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) -5 dBm
[dBm]
Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]
Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 10.5 dB
Receiver Optical Characteristics
Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1263 nm - 1580 nm
Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -34 dBm
Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -
Overload power (AVG) [dBm] -10 dBm
Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -
3.2.4.4 155Mbps-eSFP-SMF-1310nm-40km-commercial
Table 3-38 155Mbps-eSFP-SMF-1310nm-40km-commercial specifications
Item Value
Basic Information
Module name 155Mbps-eSFP-SMF-1310nm-40km-
commercial
Part Number S4015715
Model eSFP-FE-LH40-SM1310
Form factor eSFP
Application standard ITU-T G.957, STM-1
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 69
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
Item Value
Connector type LC
Optical fiber type SMF
Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12
Working case temperature [°C(°F)] 0°C to 70°C(32°F to 158°F)
DDM options SFF-8472
Environment standard RoHS
Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1
ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V
Transmission rate [bit/s] 155 Mbit/s
Target transmission distance [km] 40 km
Transmitter Optical Characteristics
Center wavelength [nm] 1310 nm
Tx operating wavelength range [nm] 1263 nm - 1360 nm
Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) 0 dBm
[dBm]
Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]
Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) -5 dBm
[dBm]
Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]
Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 10.5 dB
Receiver Optical Characteristics
Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1263 nm - 1360 nm
Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -34 dBm
Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -
Overload power (AVG) [dBm] -10 dBm
Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -10 dBm
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 70
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
3.2.4.5 155Mbps-eSFP-SMF-1550nm-80km-commercial (S4015716)
Table 3-39 155Mbps-eSFP-SMF-1550nm-80km-commercial specifications
Item Value
Basic Information
Module name 155Mbps-eSFP-SMF-1550nm-80km-
commercial
Part Number S4015716
Model eSFP-FE-LH80-SM1550
Form factor eSFP
Application standard ITU-T G.957, STM-1
Connector type LC
Optical fiber type SMF
Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12
Working case temperature [°C(°F)] 0°C to 70°C(32°F to 158°F)
DDM options SFF-8472
Environment standard RoHS
Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1
ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V
Transmission rate [bit/s] 155 Mbit/s
Target transmission distance [km] 80 km
Transmitter Optical Characteristics
Center wavelength [nm] 1550 nm
Tx operating wavelength range [nm] 1480 nm - 1580 nm
Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) 0 dBm
[dBm]
Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]
Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) -5 dBm
[dBm]
Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]
Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 10.5 dB
Receiver Optical Characteristics
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 71
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
Item Value
Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1263 nm - 1580 nm
Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -34 dBm
Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -
Overload power (AVG) [dBm] -10 dBm
Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -10 dBm
3.2.4.6 155Mbps-eSFP-SMF-1310nm-15km-commercial
Table 3-40 155Mbps-eSFP-SMF-1310nm-15km-commercial specifications
Item Value
Basic Information
Module name 155Mbps-eSFP-SMF-1310nm-15km-
commercial
Part Number S4015755
Model eSFP-FE-LX-SM1310
Form factor eSFP
Application standard ITU-T G.957, STM-1
Connector type LC
Optical fiber type SMF
Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12
Working case temperature [°C(°F)] 0°C to 70°C(32°F to 158°F)
DDM options SFF-8472
Environment standard RoHS
Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1
ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V
Transmission rate [bit/s] 155 Mbit/s
Target transmission distance [km] 15 km
Transmitter Optical Characteristics
Center wavelength [nm] 1310 nm
Tx operating wavelength range [nm] 1261 nm - 1360 nm
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 72
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
Item Value
Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) -8 dBm
[dBm]
Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]
Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) -15 dBm
[dBm]
Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]
Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 8.2 dB
Receiver Optical Characteristics
Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1260 nm - 1580 nm
Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -28 dBm
Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -
Overload power (AVG) [dBm] -8 dBm
Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -8 dBm
3.2.5 155Mbps eSFP BIDI Optical Module
3.2.5.1 155Mbps-eSFP-SM-1310nm(Tx)/1550nm(Rx)-15km-commercial
Table 3-41 155Mbps-eSFP-SM-1310nm(Tx)/1550nm(Rx)-15km-commercial
specifications
Item Value
Basic Information
Module name 155Mbps-eSFP-SM-1310nm(Tx)/
1550nm(Rx)-15km-commercial
Part Number 34060363
Model SFP-FE-LX-SM1310-BIDI
Form factor eSFP
Application standard IEEE 802.3, 100BASE-BX10-U
Connector type LC
Optical fiber type SMF
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 73
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
Item Value
Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12
Working case temperature [°C(°F)] 0°C to 70°C(32°F to 158°F)
DDM options SFF-8472
Environment standard RoHS
Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1
ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V
Transmission rate [bit/s] 155 Mbit/s
Target transmission distance [km] 15 km
Transmitter Optical Characteristics
Center wavelength [nm] 1310 nm
Tx operating wavelength range [nm] 1260 nm - 1360 nm
Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) -8 dBm
[dBm]
Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]
Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) -14 dBm
[dBm]
Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]
Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 8.5 dB
Receiver Optical Characteristics
Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1480 nm - 1580 nm
Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -32 dBm
Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -
Overload power (AVG) [dBm] -8 dBm
Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 74
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
3.2.5.2 155Mbps-eSFP-SM-1550nm(Tx)/1310nm(Rx)-15km-commercial
Table 3-42 155Mbps-eSFP-SM-1550nm(Tx)/1310nm(Rx)-15km-commercial
specifications
Item Value
Basic Information
Module name 155Mbps-eSFP-SM-1550nm(Tx)/
1310nm(Rx)-15km-commercial
Part Number 34060364
Model SFP-FE-LX-SM1550-BIDI
Form factor eSFP
Application standard IEEE 802.3, 100BASE-BX10-D
Connector type LC
Optical fiber type SMF
Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12
Working case temperature [°C(°F)] 0°C to 70°C(32°F to 158°F)
DDM options SFF-8472
Environment standard RoHS
Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1
ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V
Transmission rate [bit/s] 155 Mbit/s
Target transmission distance [km] 15 km
Transmitter Optical Characteristics
Center wavelength [nm] 1550 nm
Tx operating wavelength range [nm] 1480 nm - 1580 nm
Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) -8 dBm
[dBm]
Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]
Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) -14 dBm
[dBm]
Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]
Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 8.5 dB
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 75
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
Item Value
Receiver Optical Characteristics
Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1260 nm - 1360 nm
Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -32 dBm
Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -
Overload power (AVG) [dBm] -8 dBm
Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -
3.2.6 1Gbps Electrical Module
3.2.6.1 1Gbps-SFP-100m-industry (02310RAV)
Table 3-43 1Gbps-SFP-100m-industry specifications
Item Value
Basic Information
Module name 1Gbps-SFP-100m-industry
Part Number 02310RAV
Model OEGD01N01
Form factor SFP
Application standard IEEE 802.3, 1000Base-T
Connector type RJ45
Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12
Working case temperature [°C(°F)] -40°C to 85°C(-40°F to 185°F)
Environment standard RoHS
Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1
ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V
Transmission rate [bit/s] 10 Mbit/s
100 Mbit/s
1000 Mbit/s
Target transmission distance [km] 0.1 km
Receiver Optical Characteristics
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 76
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
Item Value
Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -
3.2.6.2 1Gbps-SFP-100m-industry (02314FNP)
Table 3-44 1Gbps-SFP-100m-industry specifications
Item Value
Basic Information
Module name 1Gbps-SFP-100m-industry
Part Number 02314FNP
Model OEGD01N03
Form factor SFP
Application standard IEEE 802.3, 1000Base-T
Connector type RJ45
Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12
Working case temperature [°C(°F)] -40°C to 85°C(-40°F to 185°F)
Environment standard RoHS
Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1
ESD(HBM1) [V] 1000 V
Transmission rate [bit/s] 10 Mbit/s
100 Mbit/s
1000 Mbit/s
Target transmission distance [km] 0.1 km
3.2.6.3 1Gbps-SFP-100m-commercial
Table 3-45 1Gbps-SFP-100m-commercial specifications
Item Value
Basic Information
Module name 1Gbps-SFP-100m-commercial
Part Number 34100080
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 77
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
Item Value
Model SFP-GE-1000BaseT
Form factor SFP
Application standard IEEE 802.3, 1000Base-T
Connector type RJ45
Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12
Working case temperature [°C(°F)] 0°C to 70°C(32°F to 158°F)
Environment standard RoHS
Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1
ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V
Transmission rate [bit/s] 10 Mbit/s
100 Mbit/s
1000 Mbit/s
Target transmission distance [km] 0.1 km
3.2.6.4 1Gbps-SFP-100m-industry (34100099)
Table 3-46 1Gbps-SFP-100m-industry specifications
Item Value
Basic Information
Module name 1Gbps-SFP-100m-industry
Part Number 34100099
Model OSFPTRJ45
Form factor SFP
Application standard IEEE 802.3, 1000Base-T
Connector type RJ45
Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12
Working case temperature [°C(°F)] -40°C to 85°C(-40°F to 185°F)
Environment standard RoHS
Security standard FCC Class A, IEC 60825-1 Class 1
ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 78
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
Item Value
Transmission rate [bit/s] 10 Mbit/s
100 Mbit/s
1000 Mbit/s
Target transmission distance [km] 0.1 km
3.2.6.5 1Gbps-SFP-100m-industry (34100144)
Table 3-47 1Gbps-SFP-100m-industry specifications
Item Value
Basic Information
Module name 1Gbps-SFP-100m-industry
Part Number 34100144
Model SFP-1000BASE-T1
Form factor SFP
Application standard IEEE 802.3, 1000Base-T
Connector type RJ45
Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12
Working case temperature [°C(°F)] -40°C to 85°C(-40°F to 185°F)
Environment standard RoHS
Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1
ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V
Transmission rate [bit/s] 10 Mbit/s
100 Mbit/s
1000 Mbit/s
Target transmission distance [km] 0.1 km
3.2.7 1.25Gbps eSFP Optical Module
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 79
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
3.2.7.1 1.25Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1550nm-80km-commercial (02310RAW)
Table 3-48 1.25Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1550nm-80km-commercial specifications
Item Value
Basic Information
Module name 1.25Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1550nm-80km-
commercial
Part Number 02310RAW
Model OSG080N01
Form factor eSFP
Application standard IEEE 802.3, 1000BASE-ZX
Connector type LC
Optical fiber type SMF
Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12
Working case temperature [°C(°F)] 0°C to 70°C(32°F to 158°F)
DDM options SFF-8472
Environment standard RoHS
Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1
ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V
Transmission rate [bit/s] 1.25 Gbit/s
Target transmission distance [km] 80 km
Transmitter Optical Characteristics
Center wavelength [nm] 1550 nm
Tx operating wavelength range [nm] 1500 nm - 1580 nm
Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) 5 dBm
[dBm]
Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]
Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) -2 dBm
[dBm]
Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]
Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 9 dB
Receiver Optical Characteristics
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 80
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
Item Value
Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1260 nm - 1580 nm
Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -23 dBm
Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -
Overload power (AVG) [dBm] -3 dBm
Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -
NOTE
The interface standard is Huawei-specific.
3.2.7.2 1.25Gbps-eSFP-MMF-850nm-500m-extended
Table 3-49 1.25Gbps-eSFP-MMF-850nm-500m-extended specifications
Item Value
Basic Information
Module name 1.25Gbps-eSFP-MMF-850nm-500m-
extended
Part Number 34060286
Model eSFP-850nm-1000Base-Sx/FC200MM
Form factor eSFP
Application standard IEEE 802.3, 1000BASE-SX
Connector type LC
Optical fiber type MMF
Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12
Working case temperature [°C(°F)] -20°C to 85°C(-4°F to 185°F)
DDM options SFF-8472
Environment standard RoHS
Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1
ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V
Transmission rate [bit/s] 1.25 Gbit/s
Target transmission distance [km] 0.5 km(OM1)
Transmitter Optical Characteristics
Center wavelength [nm] 850 nm
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 81
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
Item Value
Tx operating wavelength range [nm] 770 nm - 860 nm
Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) 0 dBm
[dBm]
Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]
Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) -9.5 dBm
[dBm]
Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]
Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 9 dB
Receiver Optical Characteristics
Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 760 nm - 860 nm
Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -17 dBm
Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -
Overload power (AVG) [dBm] 0 dBm
Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -
3.2.7.3 1.25Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1310nm-10km-industry
Table 3-50 1.25Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1310nm-10km-industry specifications
Item Value
Basic Information
Module name 1.25Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1310nm-10km-
industry
Part Number 34060290
Model eSFP(S)-1310nm-1000Base-Lx
Form factor eSFP
Application standard IEEE 802.3, 1000BASE-LX10
Connector type LC
Optical fiber type SMF
Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12
Working case temperature [°C(°F)] -40°C to 85°C(-40°F to 185°F)
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 82
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
Item Value
DDM options SFF-8472
Environment standard RoHS
Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1
ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V
Transmission rate [bit/s] 1.25 Gbit/s
Target transmission distance [km] 10 km
Transmitter Optical Characteristics
Center wavelength [nm] 1310 nm
Tx operating wavelength range [nm] 1260 nm - 1360 nm
Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) -3 dBm
[dBm]
Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]
Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) -9 dBm
[dBm]
Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]
Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 9.5 dB
Receiver Optical Characteristics
Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1260 nm - 1360 nm
Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -19 dBm
Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -
Overload power (AVG) [dBm] -3 dBm
Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -
3.2.7.4 1.25Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1310nm-10km-commercial(34060473)
Table 3-51 1.25Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1310nm-10km-commercial(34060473)
specifications
Item Value
Basic Information
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 83
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
Item Value
Module name 1.25Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1310nm-10km-
commercial(34060473)
Part Number S4016067
Model OSG010N05
Form factor eSFP
Application standard IEEE 802.3, 1000BASE-LX10
Connector type LC
Optical fiber type SMF
Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12
Working case temperature [°C(°F)] 0°C to 70°C(32°F to 158°F)
DDM options SFF-8472
Environment standard RoHS
Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1
ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V
Transmission rate [bit/s] 1.25 Gbit/s
Target transmission distance [km] 10 km
Transmitter Optical Characteristics
Center wavelength [nm] 1310 nm
Tx operating wavelength range [nm] 1270 nm - 1355 nm
Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) -3 dBm
[dBm]
Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]
Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) -9 dBm
[dBm]
Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]
Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 9.5 dB
Receiver Optical Characteristics
Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1270 nm - 1355 nm
Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -20 dBm
Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 84
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
Item Value
Overload power (AVG) [dBm] -3 dBm
Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -3 dBm
3.2.7.5 1.25Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1310nm-40km-commercial
Table 3-52 1.25Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1310nm-40km-commercial specifications
Item Value
Basic Information
Module name 1.25Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1310nm-40km-
commercial
Part Number S4016954
Model OSG040002
Form factor eSFP
Application standard IEEE 802.3, 1000BASE-EX
Connector type LC
Optical fiber type SMF
Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12
Working case temperature [°C(°F)] 0°C to 70°C(32°F to 158°F)
DDM options SFF-8472
Environment standard RoHS
Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1
ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V
Transmission rate [bit/s] 1.25 Gbit/s
Target transmission distance [km] 40 km
Transmitter Optical Characteristics
Center wavelength [nm] 1310 nm
Tx operating wavelength range [nm] 1275 nm - 1350 nm
Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) 0 dBm
[dBm]
Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 85
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
Item Value
Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) -5 dBm
[dBm]
Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]
Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 9.5 dB
Receiver Optical Characteristics
Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1260 nm - 1580 nm
Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -23 dBm
Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -
Overload power (AVG) [dBm] -3 dBm
Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -3 dBm
3.2.7.6 1.25Gbps-eSFP-MMF-850nm-500m-extended (S4017307)
Table 3-53 1.25Gbps-eSFP-MMF-850nm-500m-extended specifications
Item Value
Basic Information
Module name 1.25Gbps-eSFP-MMF-850nm-500m-
extended
Part Number S4017307
Model OMGD50N02
Form factor eSFP
Application standard IEEE 802.3, 1000BASE-SX
Connector type LC
Optical fiber type MMF
Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12
Working case temperature [°C(°F)] -20°C to 85°C(-4°F to 185°F)
DDM options SFF-8472
Environment standard RoHS
Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1
ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 86
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
Item Value
Transmission rate [bit/s] 1.25 Gbit/s
Target transmission distance [km] 0.5 km(OM1)
Transmitter Optical Characteristics
Center wavelength [nm] 850 nm
Tx operating wavelength range [nm] 770 nm - 860 nm
Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) 0 dBm
[dBm]
Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]
Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) -9.5 dBm
[dBm]
Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]
Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 9 dB
Receiver Optical Characteristics
Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 760 nm - 860 nm
Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -17 dBm
Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -
Overload power (AVG) [dBm] 0 dBm
Overload power (OMA) [dBm] 0 dBm
3.2.7.7 1.25Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1310nm-40km-commercial (S4017309)
Table 3-54 1.25Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1310nm-40km-commercial specifications
Item Value
Basic Information
Module name 1.25Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1310nm-40km-
commercial
Part Number S4017309
Model OSG040N02
Form factor eSFP
Application standard IEEE 802.3, 1000BASE-EX
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 87
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
Item Value
Connector type LC
Optical fiber type SMF
Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12
Working case temperature [°C(°F)] 0°C to 70°C(32°F to 158°F)
DDM options SFF-8472
Environment standard RoHS
Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1
ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V
Transmission rate [bit/s] 1.25 Gbit/s
Target transmission distance [km] 40 km
Transmitter Optical Characteristics
Center wavelength [nm] 1310 nm
Tx operating wavelength range [nm] 1275 nm - 1350 nm
Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) 0 dBm
[dBm]
Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]
Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) -5 dBm
[dBm]
Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]
Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 9.5 dB
Receiver Optical Characteristics
Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1260 nm - 1580 nm
Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -23 dBm
Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -
Overload power (AVG) [dBm] -3 dBm
Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -3 dBm
3.2.8 1.25Gbps SFP BIDI Optical Module
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 88
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
3.2.8.1 1.25Gbps-SFP-SMF-1310nm(Tx)/1490nm(Rx)-10km-industry
Table 3-55 1.25Gbps-SFP-SMF-1310nm(Tx)/1490nm(Rx)-10km-industry
specifications
Item Value
Basic Information
Module name 1.25Gbps-SFP-SMF-1310nm(Tx)/
1490nm(Rx)-10km-industry
Part Number 34060644
Model OGEBIDI10
Form factor SFP
Application standard IEEE 802.3ah, 1000Base-BX10-U
Connector type LC
Optical fiber type SMF
Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12
Working case temperature [°C(°F)] -40°C to 85°C(-40°F to 185°F)
DDM options SFF-8472
Environment standard RoHS
Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1
ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V
Transmission rate [bit/s] 1.25 Gbit/s
Target transmission distance [km] 10 km
Transmitter Optical Characteristics
Center wavelength [nm] 1310 nm
Tx operating wavelength range [nm] 1260 nm - 1360 nm
Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) -3 dBm
[dBm]
Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]
Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) -9 dBm
[dBm]
Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]
Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 9 dB
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 89
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
Item Value
Receiver Optical Characteristics
Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1480 nm - 1500 nm
Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -19.5 dBm
Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -
Overload power (AVG) [dBm] -3 dBm
Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -
3.2.8.2 1.25Gbps-SFP-SMF-1490nm(Tx)/1310nm(Rx)-10km-industry
Table 3-56 1.25Gbps-SFP-SMF-1490nm(Tx)/1310nm(Rx)-10km-industry
specifications
Item Value
Basic Information
Module name 1.25Gbps-SFP-SMF-1490nm(Tx)/
1310nm(Rx)-10km-industry
Part Number 34060676
Model OGEBIDI11
Form factor SFP
Application standard IEEE 802.3ah, 1000Base-BX10-D
Connector type LC
Optical fiber type SMF
Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12
Working case temperature [°C(°F)] -40°C to 85°C(-40°F to 185°F)
DDM options SFF-8472
Environment standard RoHS
Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1
ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V
Transmission rate [bit/s] 1.25 Gbit/s
Target transmission distance [km] 10 km
Transmitter Optical Characteristics
Center wavelength [nm] 1490 nm
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 90
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
Item Value
Tx operating wavelength range [nm] 1480 nm - 1500 nm
Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) -3 dBm
[dBm]
Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]
Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) -9 dBm
[dBm]
Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]
Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 9 dB
Receiver Optical Characteristics
Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1260 nm - 1360 nm
Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -19.5 dBm
Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -
Overload power (AVG) [dBm] -3 dBm
Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -
3.2.9 1.25Gbps eSFP BIDI Optical Module
3.2.9.1 1.25Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1310nm(Tx)/1490nm(Rx)-10km-
commercial(34060470)
Table 3-57 1.25Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1310nm(Tx)/1490nm(Rx)-10km-
commercial(34060470) specifications
Item Value
Basic Information
Module name 1.25Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1310nm(Tx)/
1490nm(Rx)-10km-
commercial(34060470)
Part Number 34060470
Model SFP-GE-LX-SM1310-BIDI
Form factor eSFP
Application standard IEEE 802.3ah, 1000Base-BX10-U
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 91
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
Item Value
Connector type LC
Optical fiber type SMF
Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12
Working case temperature [°C(°F)] 0°C to 70°C(32°F to 158°F)
DDM options SFF-8472
Environment standard RoHS
Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1
ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V
Transmission rate [bit/s] 1.25 Gbit/s
Target transmission distance [km] 10 km
Transmitter Optical Characteristics
Center wavelength [nm] 1310 nm
Tx operating wavelength range [nm] 1260 nm - 1360 nm
Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) -3 dBm
[dBm]
Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]
Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) -9 dBm
[dBm]
Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]
Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 6 dB
Receiver Optical Characteristics
Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1480 nm - 1500 nm
Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -19.5 dBm
Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -
Overload power (AVG) [dBm] -3 dBm
Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -
NOTE
Used in pair with 34060475.
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 92
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
3.2.9.2 1.25Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1490nm(Tx)/1310nm(Rx)-10km-commercial
Table 3-58 1.25Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1490nm(Tx)/1310nm(Rx)-10km-commercial
specifications
Item Value
Basic Information
Module name 1.25Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1490nm(Tx)/
1310nm(Rx)-10km-commercial
Part Number 34060475
Model SFP-GE-LX-SM1490-BIDI
Form factor eSFP
Application standard IEEE 802.3ah, 1000Base-BX10-D
Connector type LC
Optical fiber type SMF
Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12
Working case temperature [°C(°F)] 0°C to 70°C(32°F to 158°F)
DDM options SFF-8472
Environment standard RoHS
Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1
ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V
Transmission rate [bit/s] 1.25 Gbit/s
Target transmission distance [km] 10 km
Transmitter Optical Characteristics
Center wavelength [nm] 1490 nm
Tx operating wavelength range [nm] 1480 nm - 1500 nm
Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) -3 dBm
[dBm]
Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]
Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) -9 dBm
[dBm]
Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]
Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 6 dB
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 93
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
Item Value
Receiver Optical Characteristics
Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1260 nm - 1360 nm
Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -19.5 dBm
Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -
Overload power (AVG) [dBm] -3 dBm
Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -
NOTE
Used in pair with 34060470.
3.2.9.3 1.25Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1310nm(Tx)/1490nm(Rx)-40km-commercial
Table 3-59 1.25Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1310nm(Tx)/1490nm(Rx)-40km-commercial
specifications
Item Value
Basic Information
Module name 1.25Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1310nm(Tx)/
1490nm(Rx)-40km-commercial
Part Number 34060539
Model OGEBIDI41
Form factor eSFP
Application standard IEEE 802.3ah, 1000Base-BX40-U
Connector type LC
Optical fiber type SMF
Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12
Working case temperature [°C(°F)] 0°C to 70°C(32°F to 158°F)
DDM options SFF-8472
Environment standard RoHS
Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1
ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V
Transmission rate [bit/s] 1.25 Gbit/s
Target transmission distance [km] 40 km
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 94
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
Item Value
Transmitter Optical Characteristics
Center wavelength [nm] 1310 nm
Tx operating wavelength range [nm] 1260 nm - 1360 nm
Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) 3 dBm
[dBm]
Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]
Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) -2 dBm
[dBm]
Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]
Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 9 dB
Receiver Optical Characteristics
Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1480 nm - 1500 nm
Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -
Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -23 dBm
Overload power (AVG) [dBm] -3 dBm
Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -
NOTE
Used in pair with 34060540.
3.2.9.4 1.25Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1490nm(Tx)/1310nm(Rx)-40km-commercial
Table 3-60 1.25Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1490nm(Tx)/1310nm(Rx)-40km-commercial
specifications
Item Value
Basic Information
Module name 1.25Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1490nm(Tx)/
1310nm(Rx)-40km-commercial
Part Number 34060540
Model OGEBIDI40
Form factor eSFP
Application standard IEEE 802.3ah, 1000Base-BX40-D
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 95
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
Item Value
Connector type LC
Optical fiber type SMF
Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12
Working case temperature [°C(°F)] 0°C to 70°C(32°F to 158°F)
DDM options SFF-8472
Environment standard RoHS
Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1
ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V
Transmission rate [bit/s] 1.25 Gbit/s
Target transmission distance [km] 40 km
Transmitter Optical Characteristics
Center wavelength [nm] 1490 nm
Tx operating wavelength range [nm] 1480 nm - 1500 nm
Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) 3 dBm
[dBm]
Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]
Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) -2 dBm
[dBm]
Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]
Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 9 dB
Receiver Optical Characteristics
Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1260 nm - 1360 nm
Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -
Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -23 dBm
Overload power (AVG) [dBm] -3 dBm
Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -
NOTE
Used in pair with 34060539.
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 96
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
3.2.9.5 1.25Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1570nm(Tx)/1490nm(Rx)-80km-commercial
Table 3-61 1.25Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1570nm(Tx)/1490nm(Rx)-80km-commercial
specifications
Item Value
Basic Information
Module name 1.25Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1570nm(Tx)/
1490nm(Rx)-80km-commercial
Part Number 34060595
Model OGEBIDI80
Form factor eSFP
Application standard IEEE 802.3ah, 1000Base-BX80-D
Connector type LC
Optical fiber type SMF
Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12
Working case temperature [°C(°F)] 0°C to 70°C(32°F to 158°F)
DDM options SFF-8472
Environment standard RoHS
Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1
ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V
Transmission rate [bit/s] 1.25 Gbit/s
Target transmission distance [km] 80 km
Transmitter Optical Characteristics
Center wavelength [nm] 1570 nm
Tx operating wavelength range [nm] 1560 nm - 1580 nm
Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) 4 dBm
[dBm]
Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]
Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) -2 dBm
[dBm]
Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]
Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 9 dB
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 97
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
Item Value
Receiver Optical Characteristics
Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1480 nm - 1500 nm
Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -26 dBm
Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -
Overload power (AVG) [dBm] -3 dBm
Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -
NOTE
Used in pair with 34060596.
3.2.9.6 1.25Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1490nm(Tx)/1570nm(Rx)-80km-commercial
Table 3-62 1.25Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1490nm(Tx)/1570nm(Rx)-80km-commercial
specifications
Item Value
Basic Information
Module name 1.25Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1490nm(Tx)/
1570nm(Rx)-80km-commercial
Part Number 34060596
Model OGEBIDI81
Form factor eSFP
Application standard IEEE 802.3ah, 1000Base-BX80-U
Connector type LC
Optical fiber type SMF
Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12
Working case temperature [°C(°F)] 0°C to 70°C(32°F to 158°F)
DDM options SFF-8472
Environment standard RoHS
Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1
ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V
Transmission rate [bit/s] 1.25 Gbit/s
Target transmission distance [km] 80 km
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 98
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
Item Value
Transmitter Optical Characteristics
Center wavelength [nm] 1490 nm
Tx operating wavelength range [nm] 1480 nm - 1500 nm
Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) 4 dBm
[dBm]
Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]
Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) -2 dBm
[dBm]
Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]
Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 9 dB
Receiver Optical Characteristics
Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1560 nm - 1580 nm
Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -26 dBm
Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -
Overload power (AVG) [dBm] -3 dBm
Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -
NOTE
Used in pair with 34060595.
3.2.9.7 0.1~1.25Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1310nm(Tx)/1550nm(Rx)-40km-commercial
Table 3-63 0.1~1.25Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1310nm(Tx)/1550nm(Rx)-40km-commercial
specifications
Item Value
Basic Information
Module name 0.1~1.25Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1310nm(Tx)/
1550nm(Rx)-40km-commercial
Part Number 34060638
Model eSFP-1310/1550-L1.1-BIDI
Form factor eSFP
Application standard IEEE 802.3ah, 1000Base-BX40-U
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 99
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
Item Value
Connector type LC
Optical fiber type SMF
Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12
Working case temperature [°C(°F)] -5°C to 70°C(23°F to 158°F)
DDM options SFF-8472
Environment standard RoHS
Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1
ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V
Transmission rate [bit/s] 0.1~1.25 Gbit/s
Target transmission distance [km] 40 km
Transmitter Optical Characteristics
Center wavelength [nm] 1310 nm
Tx operating wavelength range [nm] 1260 nm - 1360 nm
Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) 2 dBm
[dBm]
Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]
Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) -3 dBm
[dBm]
Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]
Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 9 dB
Receiver Optical Characteristics
Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1480 nm - 1580 nm
Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -25 dBm
Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -
Overload power (AVG) [dBm] -3 dBm
Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -
NOTE
When an optical module is used on the OptiX PTN equipment, the rate of the optical
module cannot exceed 155 Mbit/s.
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 100
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
3.2.9.8 0.1~1.25Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1550nm(Tx)/1310nm(Rx)-40km-commercial
Table 3-64 0.1~1.25Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1550nm(Tx)/1310nm(Rx)-40km-commercial
specifications
Item Value
Basic Information
Module name 0.1~1.25Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1550nm(Tx)/
1310nm(Rx)-40km-commercial
Part Number 34060639
Model eSFP-1550/1310-L1.1-BIDI
Form factor eSFP
Application standard IEEE 802.3ah, 1000Base-BX40-D
Connector type LC
Optical fiber type SMF
Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12
Working case temperature [°C(°F)] -5°C to 70°C(23°F to 158°F)
DDM options SFF-8472
Environment standard RoHS
Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1
ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V
Transmission rate [bit/s] 0.1~1.25 Gbit/s
Target transmission distance [km] 40 km
Transmitter Optical Characteristics
Center wavelength [nm] 1550 nm
Tx operating wavelength range [nm] 1530 nm - 1580 nm
Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) 2 dBm
[dBm]
Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]
Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) -3 dBm
[dBm]
Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]
Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 9 dB
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 101
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
Item Value
Receiver Optical Characteristics
Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1260 nm - 1360 nm
Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -25 dBm
Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -
Overload power (AVG) [dBm] -3 dBm
Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -
NOTE
When an optical module is used on the OptiX PTN equipment, the rate of the optical
module cannot exceed 155 Mbit/s.
3.2.10 1.25Gbps eSFP CWDM Optical Module
3.2.10.1 1.25Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1571nm-80km-commercial
Table 3-65 1.25Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1571nm-80km-commercial specifications
Item Value
Basic Information
Module name 1.25Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1571nm-80km-
commercial
Part Number 34060476
Model eSFP-LH80-SM1571
Form factor eSFP
Application standard ITU-T G.957, STM-16
Connector type LC
Optical fiber type SMF
Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12
Working case temperature [°C(°F)] 0°C to 70°C(32°F to 158°F)
DDM options SFF-8472
Environment standard RoHS
Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1
ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 102
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
Item Value
Transmission rate [bit/s] 1.25 Gbit/s
Target transmission distance [km] 80 km
Transmitter Optical Characteristics
Center wavelength [nm] 1571 nm
Tx operating wavelength range [nm] 1564.5 nm - 1577.5 nm
Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) 5 dBm
[dBm]
Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]
Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) 0 dBm
[dBm]
Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]
Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 8.5 dB
Receiver Optical Characteristics
Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1260 nm - 1620 nm
Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -28 dBm
Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -
Overload power (AVG) [dBm] -9 dBm
Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -
3.2.10.2 1.25Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1591nm-80km-commercial
Table 3-66 1.25Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1591nm-80km-commercial specifications
Item Value
Basic Information
Module name 1.25Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1591nm-80km-
commercial
Part Number 34060477
Model eSFP-LH80-SM1591
Form factor eSFP
Application standard ITU-T G.957, STM-16
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 103
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
Item Value
Connector type LC
Optical fiber type SMF
Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12
Working case temperature [°C(°F)] 0°C to 70°C(32°F to 158°F)
DDM options SFF-8472
Environment standard RoHS
Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1
ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V
Transmission rate [bit/s] 1.25 Gbit/s
Target transmission distance [km] 80 km
Transmitter Optical Characteristics
Center wavelength [nm] 1591 nm
Tx operating wavelength range [nm] 1584.5 nm - 1597.5 nm
Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) 5 dBm
[dBm]
Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]
Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) 0 dBm
[dBm]
Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]
Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 8.5 dB
Receiver Optical Characteristics
Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1260 nm - 1620 nm
Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -28 dBm
Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -
Overload power (AVG) [dBm] -9 dBm
Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 104
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
3.2.10.3 1.25Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1551nm-80km-commercial
Table 3-67 1.25Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1551nm-80km-commercial specifications
Item Value
Basic Information
Module name 1.25Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1551nm-80km-
commercial
Part Number 34060478
Model eSFP-LH80-SM1551
Form factor eSFP
Application standard ITU-T G.957, STM-16
Connector type LC
Optical fiber type SMF
Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12
Working case temperature [°C(°F)] 0°C to 70°C(32°F to 158°F)
DDM options SFF-8472
Environment standard RoHS
Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1
ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V
Transmission rate [bit/s] 1.25 Gbit/s
Target transmission distance [km] 80 km
Transmitter Optical Characteristics
Center wavelength [nm] 1551 nm
Tx operating wavelength range [nm] 1544.5 nm - 1557.5 nm
Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) 5 dBm
[dBm]
Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]
Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) 0 dBm
[dBm]
Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]
Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 8.5 dB
Receiver Optical Characteristics
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 105
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
Item Value
Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1260 nm - 1620 nm
Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -28 dBm
Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -
Overload power (AVG) [dBm] -9 dBm
Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -
3.2.10.4 1.25Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1511nm-80km-commercial
Table 3-68 1.25Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1511nm-80km-commercial specifications
Item Value
Basic Information
Module name 1.25Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1511nm-80km-
commercial
Part Number 34060479
Model eSFP-LH80-SM1511
Form factor eSFP
Application standard ITU-T G.957, STM-16
Connector type LC
Optical fiber type SMF
Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12
Working case temperature [°C(°F)] 0°C to 70°C(32°F to 158°F)
DDM options SFF-8472
Environment standard RoHS
Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1
ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V
Transmission rate [bit/s] 1.25 Gbit/s
Target transmission distance [km] 80 km
Transmitter Optical Characteristics
Center wavelength [nm] 1511 nm
Tx operating wavelength range [nm] 1504.5 nm - 1517.5 nm
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 106
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
Item Value
Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) 5 dBm
[dBm]
Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]
Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) 0 dBm
[dBm]
Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]
Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 8.5 dB
Receiver Optical Characteristics
Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1260 nm - 1620 nm
Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -28 dBm
Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -
Overload power (AVG) [dBm] -9 dBm
Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -
3.2.10.5 1.25Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1611nm-80km-commercial
Table 3-69 1.25Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1611nm-80km-commercial specifications
Item Value
Basic Information
Module name 1.25Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1611nm-80km-
commercial
Part Number 34060480
Model eSFP-LH80-SM1611
Form factor eSFP
Application standard ITU-T G.957, STM-16
Connector type LC
Optical fiber type SMF
Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12
Working case temperature [°C(°F)] 0°C to 70°C(32°F to 158°F)
DDM options SFF-8472
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 107
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
Item Value
Environment standard RoHS
Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1
ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V
Transmission rate [bit/s] 1.25 Gbit/s
Target transmission distance [km] 80 km
Transmitter Optical Characteristics
Center wavelength [nm] 1611 nm
Tx operating wavelength range [nm] 1604.5 nm - 1617.5 nm
Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) 5 dBm
[dBm]
Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]
Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) 0 dBm
[dBm]
Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]
Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 8.5 dB
Receiver Optical Characteristics
Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1260 nm - 1620 nm
Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -28 dBm
Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -
Overload power (AVG) [dBm] -9 dBm
Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -
3.2.10.6 1.25Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1491nm-80km-commercial
Table 3-70 1.25Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1491nm-80km-commercial specifications
Item Value
Basic Information
Module name 1.25Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1491nm-80km-
commercial
Part Number 34060481
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 108
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
Item Value
Model eSFP-LH80-SM1491
Form factor eSFP
Application standard ITU-T G.957, STM-16
Connector type LC
Optical fiber type SMF
Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12
Working case temperature [°C(°F)] 0°C to 70°C(32°F to 158°F)
DDM options SFF-8472
Environment standard RoHS
Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1
ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V
Transmission rate [bit/s] 1.25 Gbit/s
Target transmission distance [km] 80 km
Transmitter Optical Characteristics
Center wavelength [nm] 1491 nm
Tx operating wavelength range [nm] 1484.5 nm - 1497.5 nm
Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) 5 dBm
[dBm]
Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]
Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) 0 dBm
[dBm]
Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]
Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 8.5 dB
Receiver Optical Characteristics
Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1260 nm - 1620 nm
Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -28 dBm
Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -
Overload power (AVG) [dBm] -9 dBm
Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 109
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
3.2.10.7 1.25Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1531nm-80km-commercial
Table 3-71 1.25Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1531nm-80km-commercial specifications
Item Value
Basic Information
Module name 1.25Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1531nm-80km-
commercial
Part Number 34060482
Model eSFP-LH80-SM1531
Form factor eSFP
Application standard ITU-T G.957, STM-16
Connector type LC
Optical fiber type SMF
Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12
Working case temperature [°C(°F)] 0°C to 70°C(32°F to 158°F)
DDM options SFF-8472
Environment standard RoHS
Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1
ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V
Transmission rate [bit/s] 1.25 Gbit/s
Target transmission distance [km] 80 km
Transmitter Optical Characteristics
Center wavelength [nm] 1531 nm
Tx operating wavelength range [nm] 1524.5 nm - 1537.5 nm
Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) 5 dBm
[dBm]
Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]
Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) 0 dBm
[dBm]
Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]
Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 8.5 dB
Receiver Optical Characteristics
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 110
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
Item Value
Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1260 nm - 1620 nm
Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -28 dBm
Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -
Overload power (AVG) [dBm] -9 dBm
Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -
3.2.10.8 1.25Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1471nm-80km-commercial
Table 3-72 1.25Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1471nm-80km-commercial specifications
Item Value
Basic Information
Module name 1.25Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1471nm-80km-
commercial
Part Number 34060483
Model eSFP-LH80-SM1471
Form factor eSFP
Application standard ITU-T G.957, STM-16
Connector type LC
Optical fiber type SMF
Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12
Working case temperature [°C(°F)] 0°C to 70°C(32°F to 158°F)
DDM options SFF-8472
Environment standard RoHS
Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1
ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V
Transmission rate [bit/s] 1.25 Gbit/s
Target transmission distance [km] 80 km
Transmitter Optical Characteristics
Center wavelength [nm] 1471 nm
Tx operating wavelength range [nm] 1464.5 nm - 1477.5 nm
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 111
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
Item Value
Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) 5 dBm
[dBm]
Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]
Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) 0 dBm
[dBm]
Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]
Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 8.5 dB
Receiver Optical Characteristics
Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1260 nm - 1620 nm
Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -28 dBm
Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -
Overload power (AVG) [dBm] -9 dBm
Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -
3.2.11 125M~2.67Gbps eSFP DWDM Optical Module
3.2.11.1 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1560.61nm-120km-commercial
Table 3-73 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1560.61nm-120km-commercial
specifications
Item Value
Basic Information
Module name 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-
SMF-1560.61nm-120km-commercial
Part Number 34060366
Model eSFP-LH120-SM192.10
Form factor eSFP
Application standard SONET OC-48 LR-2, Gigabit Ethernet
Connector type LC
Optical fiber type SMF
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 112
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
Item Value
Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12
Working case temperature [°C(°F)] 0°C to 70°C(32°F to 158°F)
DDM options SFF-8472
Environment standard RoHS
Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1
ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V
Transmission rate [bit/s] 155 Mbit/s ~ 2.67 Gbit/s
Target transmission distance [km] 120 km
Transmitter Optical Characteristics
Center wavelength [nm] 1560.61 nm
Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) 4 dBm
[dBm]
Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]
Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) 0 dBm
[dBm]
Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]
Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 8.2 dB
Receiver Optical Characteristics
Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1520 nm - 1570 nm
Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -28 dBm
Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -
Overload power (AVG) [dBm] -8 dBm
Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -
3.2.11.2 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1559.79nm-120km-commercial
Table 3-74 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1559.79nm-120km-commercial
specifications
Item Value
Basic Information
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 113
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
Item Value
Module name 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-
SMF-1559.79nm-120km-commercial
Part Number 34060372
Model eSFP-LH120-SM192.20
Form factor eSFP
Application standard SONET OC-48 LR-2, Gigabit Ethernet
Connector type LC
Optical fiber type SMF
Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12
Working case temperature [°C(°F)] 0°C to 70°C(32°F to 158°F)
DDM options SFF-8472
Environment standard RoHS
Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1
ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V
Transmission rate [bit/s] 155 Mbit/s ~ 2.67 Gbit/s
Target transmission distance [km] 120 km
Transmitter Optical Characteristics
Center wavelength [nm] 1559.79 nm
Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) 4 dBm
[dBm]
Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]
Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) 0 dBm
[dBm]
Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]
Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 8.2 dB
Receiver Optical Characteristics
Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1520 nm - 1570 nm
Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -28 dBm
Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -
Overload power (AVG) [dBm] -8 dBm
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 114
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
Item Value
Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -
3.2.11.3 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1558.98nm-120km-commercial
Table 3-75 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1558.98nm-120km-commercial
specifications
Item Value
Basic Information
Module name 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-
SMF-1558.98nm-120km-commercial
Part Number 34060373
Model eSFP-LH120-SM192.30
Form factor eSFP
Application standard SONET OC-48 LR-2, Gigabit Ethernet
Connector type LC
Optical fiber type SMF
Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12
Working case temperature [°C(°F)] 0°C to 70°C(32°F to 158°F)
DDM options SFF-8472
Environment standard RoHS
Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1
ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V
Transmission rate [bit/s] 155 Mbit/s ~ 2.67 Gbit/s
Target transmission distance [km] 120 km
Transmitter Optical Characteristics
Center wavelength [nm] 1558.98 nm
Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) 4 dBm
[dBm]
Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]
Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) 0 dBm
[dBm]
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 115
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
Item Value
Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]
Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 8.2 dB
Receiver Optical Characteristics
Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1520 nm - 1570 nm
Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -28 dBm
Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -
Overload power (AVG) [dBm] -8 dBm
Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -
3.2.11.4 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1558.17nm-120km-commercial
Table 3-76 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1558.17nm-120km-commercial
specifications
Item Value
Basic Information
Module name 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-
SMF-1558.17nm-120km-commercial
Part Number 34060374
Model eSFP-LH120-SM192.40
Form factor eSFP
Application standard SONET OC-48 LR-2, Gigabit Ethernet
Connector type LC
Optical fiber type SMF
Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12
Working case temperature [°C(°F)] 0°C to 70°C(32°F to 158°F)
DDM options SFF-8472
Environment standard RoHS
Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1
ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V
Transmission rate [bit/s] 155 Mbit/s ~ 2.67 Gbit/s
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 116
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
Item Value
Target transmission distance [km] 120 km
Transmitter Optical Characteristics
Center wavelength [nm] 1558.17 nm
Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) 4 dBm
[dBm]
Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]
Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) 0 dBm
[dBm]
Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]
Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 8.2 dB
Receiver Optical Characteristics
Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1520 nm - 1570 nm
Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -28 dBm
Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -
Overload power (AVG) [dBm] -8 dBm
Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -
3.2.11.5 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1557.36nm-120km-commercial
Table 3-77 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1557.36nm-120km-commercial
specifications
Item Value
Basic Information
Module name 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-
SMF-1557.36nm-120km-commercial
Part Number 34060375
Model eSFP-LH120-SM192.50
Form factor eSFP
Application standard SONET OC-48 LR-2, Gigabit Ethernet
Connector type LC
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 117
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
Item Value
Optical fiber type SMF
Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12
Working case temperature [°C(°F)] 0°C to 70°C(32°F to 158°F)
DDM options SFF-8472
Environment standard RoHS
Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1
ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V
Transmission rate [bit/s] 155 Mbit/s ~ 2.67 Gbit/s
Target transmission distance [km] 120 km
Transmitter Optical Characteristics
Center wavelength [nm] 1557.36 nm
Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) 4 dBm
[dBm]
Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]
Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) 0 dBm
[dBm]
Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]
Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 8.2 dB
Receiver Optical Characteristics
Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1520 nm - 1570 nm
Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -28 dBm
Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -
Overload power (AVG) [dBm] -8 dBm
Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 118
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
3.2.11.6 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1556.55nm-120km-commercial
Table 3-78 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1556.55nm-120km-commercial
specifications
Item Value
Basic Information
Module name 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-
SMF-1556.55nm-120km-commercial
Part Number 34060376
Model eSFP-LH120-SM192.60
Form factor eSFP
Application standard SONET OC-48 LR-2, Gigabit Ethernet
Connector type LC
Optical fiber type SMF
Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12
Working case temperature [°C(°F)] 0°C to 70°C(32°F to 158°F)
DDM options SFF-8472
Environment standard RoHS
Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1
ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V
Transmission rate [bit/s] 155 Mbit/s ~ 2.67 Gbit/s
Target transmission distance [km] 120 km
Transmitter Optical Characteristics
Center wavelength [nm] 1556.55 nm
Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) 4 dBm
[dBm]
Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]
Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) 0 dBm
[dBm]
Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]
Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 8.2 dB
Receiver Optical Characteristics
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 119
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
Item Value
Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1520 nm - 1570 nm
Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -28 dBm
Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -
Overload power (AVG) [dBm] -8 dBm
Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -
3.2.11.7 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1555.75nm-120km-commercial
Table 3-79 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1555.75nm-120km-commercial
specifications
Item Value
Basic Information
Module name 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-
SMF-1555.75nm-120km-commercial
Part Number 34060377
Model eSFP-LH120-SM192.70
Form factor eSFP
Application standard SONET OC-48 LR-2, Gigabit Ethernet
Connector type LC
Optical fiber type SMF
Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12
Working case temperature [°C(°F)] 0°C to 70°C(32°F to 158°F)
DDM options SFF-8472
Environment standard RoHS
Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1
ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V
Transmission rate [bit/s] 155 Mbit/s ~ 2.67 Gbit/s
Target transmission distance [km] 120 km
Transmitter Optical Characteristics
Center wavelength [nm] 1555.75 nm
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 120
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
Item Value
Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) 4 dBm
[dBm]
Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]
Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) 0 dBm
[dBm]
Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]
Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 8.2 dB
Receiver Optical Characteristics
Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1520 nm - 1570 nm
Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -28 dBm
Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -
Overload power (AVG) [dBm] -8 dBm
Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -
3.2.11.8 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1554.94nm-120km-commercial
Table 3-80 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1554.94nm-120km-commercial
specifications
Item Value
Basic Information
Module name 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-
SMF-1554.94nm-120km-commercial
Part Number 34060378
Model eSFP-LH120-SM192.80
Form factor eSFP
Application standard SONET OC-48 LR-2, Gigabit Ethernet
Connector type LC
Optical fiber type SMF
Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12
Working case temperature [°C(°F)] 0°C to 70°C(32°F to 158°F)
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 121
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
Item Value
DDM options SFF-8472
Environment standard RoHS
Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1
ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V
Transmission rate [bit/s] 155 Mbit/s ~ 2.67 Gbit/s
Target transmission distance [km] 120 km
Transmitter Optical Characteristics
Center wavelength [nm] 1554.94 nm
Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) 4 dBm
[dBm]
Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]
Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) 0 dBm
[dBm]
Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]
Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 8.2 dB
Receiver Optical Characteristics
Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1520 nm - 1570 nm
Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -28 dBm
Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -
Overload power (AVG) [dBm] -8 dBm
Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -
3.2.11.9 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1554.13nm-120km-commercial
Table 3-81 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1554.13nm-120km-commercial
specifications
Item Value
Basic Information
Module name 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-
SMF-1554.13nm-120km-commercial
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 122
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
Item Value
Part Number 34060379
Model eSFP-LH120-SM192.90
Form factor eSFP
Application standard SONET OC-48 LR-2, Gigabit Ethernet
Connector type LC
Optical fiber type SMF
Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12
Working case temperature [°C(°F)] 0°C to 70°C(32°F to 158°F)
DDM options SFF-8472
Environment standard RoHS
Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1
ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V
Transmission rate [bit/s] 155 Mbit/s ~ 2.67 Gbit/s
Target transmission distance [km] 120 km
Transmitter Optical Characteristics
Center wavelength [nm] 1554.13 nm
Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) 4 dBm
[dBm]
Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]
Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) 0 dBm
[dBm]
Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]
Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 8.2 dB
Receiver Optical Characteristics
Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1520 nm - 1570 nm
Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -28 dBm
Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -
Overload power (AVG) [dBm] -8 dBm
Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 123
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
3.2.11.10 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1553.33nm-120km-commercial
Table 3-82 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1553.33nm-120km-commercial
specifications
Item Value
Basic Information
Module name 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-
SMF-1553.33nm-120km-commercial
Part Number 34060380
Model eSFP-LH120-SM193.00
Form factor eSFP
Application standard SONET OC-48 LR-2, Gigabit Ethernet
Connector type LC
Optical fiber type SMF
Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12
Working case temperature [°C(°F)] 0°C to 70°C(32°F to 158°F)
DDM options SFF-8472
Environment standard RoHS
Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1
ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V
Transmission rate [bit/s] 155 Mbit/s ~ 2.67 Gbit/s
Target transmission distance [km] 120 km
Transmitter Optical Characteristics
Center wavelength [nm] 1553.33 nm
Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) 4 dBm
[dBm]
Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]
Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) 0 dBm
[dBm]
Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]
Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 8.2 dB
Receiver Optical Characteristics
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 124
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
Item Value
Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1520 nm - 1570 nm
Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -28 dBm
Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -
Overload power (AVG) [dBm] -8 dBm
Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -
3.2.11.11 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1552.52nm-120km-commercial
Table 3-83 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1552.52nm-120km-commercial
specifications
Item Value
Basic Information
Module name 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-
SMF-1552.52nm-120km-commercial
Part Number 34060381
Model eSFP-LH120-SM193.10
Form factor eSFP
Application standard SONET OC-48 LR-2, Gigabit Ethernet
Connector type LC
Optical fiber type SMF
Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12
Working case temperature [°C(°F)] 0°C to 70°C(32°F to 158°F)
DDM options SFF-8472
Environment standard RoHS
Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1
ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V
Transmission rate [bit/s] 155 Mbit/s ~ 2.67 Gbit/s
Target transmission distance [km] 120 km
Transmitter Optical Characteristics
Center wavelength [nm] 1552.52 nm
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 125
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
Item Value
Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) 4 dBm
[dBm]
Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]
Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) 0 dBm
[dBm]
Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]
Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 8.2 dB
Receiver Optical Characteristics
Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1520 nm - 1570 nm
Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -28 dBm
Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -
Overload power (AVG) [dBm] -8 dBm
Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -
3.2.11.12 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1551.72nm-120km-commercial
Table 3-84 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1551.72nm-120km-commercial
specifications
Item Value
Basic Information
Module name 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-
SMF-1551.72nm-120km-commercial
Part Number 34060382
Model eSFP-LH120-SM193.20
Form factor eSFP
Application standard SONET OC-48 LR-2, Gigabit Ethernet
Connector type LC
Optical fiber type SMF
Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12
Working case temperature [°C(°F)] 0°C to 70°C(32°F to 158°F)
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 126
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
Item Value
DDM options SFF-8472
Environment standard RoHS
Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1
ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V
Transmission rate [bit/s] 155 Mbit/s ~ 2.67 Gbit/s
Target transmission distance [km] 120 km
Transmitter Optical Characteristics
Center wavelength [nm] 1551.72 nm
Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) 4 dBm
[dBm]
Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]
Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) 0 dBm
[dBm]
Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]
Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 8.2 dB
Receiver Optical Characteristics
Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1520 nm - 1570 nm
Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -28 dBm
Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -
Overload power (AVG) [dBm] -8 dBm
Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -
3.2.11.13 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1550.92nm-120km-commercial
Table 3-85 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1550.92nm-120km-commercial
specifications
Item Value
Basic Information
Module name 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-
SMF-1550.92nm-120km-commercial
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 127
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
Item Value
Part Number 34060383
Model eSFP-LH120-SM193.30
Form factor eSFP
Application standard SONET OC-48 LR-2, Gigabit Ethernet
Connector type LC
Optical fiber type SMF
Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12
Working case temperature [°C(°F)] 0°C to 70°C(32°F to 158°F)
DDM options SFF-8472
Environment standard RoHS
Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1
ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V
Transmission rate [bit/s] 155 Mbit/s ~ 2.67 Gbit/s
Target transmission distance [km] 120 km
Transmitter Optical Characteristics
Center wavelength [nm] 1550.92 nm
Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) 4 dBm
[dBm]
Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]
Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) 0 dBm
[dBm]
Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]
Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 8.2 dB
Receiver Optical Characteristics
Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1520 nm - 1570 nm
Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -28 dBm
Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -
Overload power (AVG) [dBm] -8 dBm
Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 128
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
3.2.11.14 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1550.12nm-120km-commercial
Table 3-86 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1550.12nm-120km-commercial
specifications
Item Value
Basic Information
Module name 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-
SMF-1550.12nm-120km-commercial
Part Number 34060384
Model eSFP-LH120-SM193.40
Form factor eSFP
Application standard SONET OC-48 LR-2, Gigabit Ethernet
Connector type LC
Optical fiber type SMF
Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12
Working case temperature [°C(°F)] 0°C to 70°C(32°F to 158°F)
DDM options SFF-8472
Environment standard RoHS
Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1
ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V
Transmission rate [bit/s] 155 Mbit/s ~ 2.67 Gbit/s
Target transmission distance [km] 120 km
Transmitter Optical Characteristics
Center wavelength [nm] 1550.12 nm
Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) 4 dBm
[dBm]
Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]
Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) 0 dBm
[dBm]
Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]
Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 8.2 dB
Receiver Optical Characteristics
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 129
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
Item Value
Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1520 nm - 1570 nm
Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -28 dBm
Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -
Overload power (AVG) [dBm] -8 dBm
Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -
3.2.11.15 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1549.32nm-120km-commercial
Table 3-87 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1549.32nm-120km-commercial
specifications
Item Value
Basic Information
Module name 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-
SMF-1549.32nm-120km-commercial
Part Number 34060385
Model eSFP-LH120-SM193.50
Form factor eSFP
Application standard SONET OC-48 LR-2, Gigabit Ethernet
Connector type LC
Optical fiber type SMF
Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12
Working case temperature [°C(°F)] 0°C to 70°C(32°F to 158°F)
DDM options SFF-8472
Environment standard RoHS
Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1
ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V
Transmission rate [bit/s] 155 Mbit/s ~ 2.67 Gbit/s
Target transmission distance [km] 120 km
Transmitter Optical Characteristics
Center wavelength [nm] 1549.32 nm
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 130
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
Item Value
Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) 4 dBm
[dBm]
Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]
Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) 0 dBm
[dBm]
Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]
Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 8.2 dB
Receiver Optical Characteristics
Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1520 nm - 1570 nm
Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -28 dBm
Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -
Overload power (AVG) [dBm] -8 dBm
Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -
3.2.11.16 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1548.51nm-120km-commercial
Table 3-88 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1548.51nm-120km-commercial
specifications
Item Value
Basic Information
Module name 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-
SMF-1548.51nm-120km-commercial
Part Number 34060386
Model eSFP-LH120-SM193.60
Form factor eSFP
Application standard SONET OC-48 LR-2, Gigabit Ethernet
Connector type LC
Optical fiber type SMF
Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12
Working case temperature [°C(°F)] 0°C to 70°C(32°F to 158°F)
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 131
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
Item Value
DDM options SFF-8472
Environment standard RoHS
Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1
ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V
Transmission rate [bit/s] 155 Mbit/s ~ 2.67 Gbit/s
Target transmission distance [km] 120 km
Transmitter Optical Characteristics
Center wavelength [nm] 1548.51 nm
Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) 4 dBm
[dBm]
Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]
Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) 0 dBm
[dBm]
Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]
Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 8.2 dB
Receiver Optical Characteristics
Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1520 nm - 1570 nm
Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -28 dBm
Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -
Overload power (AVG) [dBm] -8 dBm
Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -
3.2.11.17 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1547.72nm-120km-commercial
Table 3-89 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1547.72nm-120km-commercial
specifications
Item Value
Basic Information
Module name 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-
SMF-1547.72nm-120km-commercial
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 132
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
Item Value
Part Number 34060387
Model eSFP-LH120-SM193.70
Form factor eSFP
Application standard SONET OC-48 LR-2, Gigabit Ethernet
Connector type LC
Optical fiber type SMF
Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12
Working case temperature [°C(°F)] 0°C to 70°C(32°F to 158°F)
DDM options SFF-8472
Environment standard RoHS
Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1
ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V
Transmission rate [bit/s] 155 Mbit/s ~ 2.67 Gbit/s
Target transmission distance [km] 120 km
Transmitter Optical Characteristics
Center wavelength [nm] 1547.72 nm
Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) 4 dBm
[dBm]
Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]
Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) 0 dBm
[dBm]
Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]
Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 8.2 dB
Receiver Optical Characteristics
Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1520 nm - 1570 nm
Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -28 dBm
Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -
Overload power (AVG) [dBm] -8 dBm
Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 133
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
3.2.11.18 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1546.92nm-120km-commercial
Table 3-90 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1546.92nm-120km-commercial
specifications
Item Value
Basic Information
Module name 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-
SMF-1546.92nm-120km-commercial
Part Number 34060388
Model eSFP-LH120-SM193.80
Form factor eSFP
Application standard SONET OC-48 LR-2, Gigabit Ethernet
Connector type LC
Optical fiber type SMF
Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12
Working case temperature [°C(°F)] 0°C to 70°C(32°F to 158°F)
DDM options SFF-8472
Environment standard RoHS
Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1
ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V
Transmission rate [bit/s] 155 Mbit/s ~ 2.67 Gbit/s
Target transmission distance [km] 120 km
Transmitter Optical Characteristics
Center wavelength [nm] 1546.92 nm
Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) 4 dBm
[dBm]
Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]
Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) 0 dBm
[dBm]
Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]
Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 8.2 dB
Receiver Optical Characteristics
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 134
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
Item Value
Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1520 nm - 1570 nm
Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -28 dBm
Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -
Overload power (AVG) [dBm] -8 dBm
Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -
3.2.11.19 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1546.12nm-120km-commercial
Table 3-91 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1546.12nm-120km-commercial
specifications
Item Value
Basic Information
Module name 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-
SMF-1546.12nm-120km-commercial
Part Number 34060389
Model eSFP-LH120-SM193.90
Form factor eSFP
Application standard SONET OC-48 LR-2, Gigabit Ethernet
Connector type LC
Optical fiber type SMF
Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12
Working case temperature [°C(°F)] 0°C to 70°C(32°F to 158°F)
DDM options SFF-8472
Environment standard RoHS
Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1
ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V
Transmission rate [bit/s] 155 Mbit/s ~ 2.67 Gbit/s
Target transmission distance [km] 120 km
Transmitter Optical Characteristics
Center wavelength [nm] 1546.12 nm
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 135
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
Item Value
Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) 4 dBm
[dBm]
Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]
Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) 0 dBm
[dBm]
Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]
Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 8.2 dB
Receiver Optical Characteristics
Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1520 nm - 1570 nm
Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -28 dBm
Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -
Overload power (AVG) [dBm] -8 dBm
Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -
3.2.11.20 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1545.32nm-120km-commercial
Table 3-92 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1545.32nm-120km-commercial
specifications
Item Value
Basic Information
Module name 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-
SMF-1545.32nm-120km-commercial
Part Number 34060390
Model eSFP-LH120-SM194.00
Form factor eSFP
Application standard SONET OC-48 LR-2, Gigabit Ethernet
Connector type LC
Optical fiber type SMF
Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12
Working case temperature [°C(°F)] 0°C to 70°C(32°F to 158°F)
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 136
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
Item Value
DDM options SFF-8472
Environment standard RoHS
Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1
ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V
Transmission rate [bit/s] 155 Mbit/s ~ 2.67 Gbit/s
Target transmission distance [km] 120 km
Transmitter Optical Characteristics
Center wavelength [nm] 1545.32 nm
Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) 4 dBm
[dBm]
Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]
Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) 0 dBm
[dBm]
Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]
Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 8.2 dB
Receiver Optical Characteristics
Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1520 nm - 1570 nm
Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -28 dBm
Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -
Overload power (AVG) [dBm] -8 dBm
Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -
3.2.11.21 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1544.53nm-120km-commercial
Table 3-93 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1544.53nm-120km-commercial
specifications
Item Value
Basic Information
Module name 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-
SMF-1544.53nm-120km-commercial
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 137
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
Item Value
Part Number 34060391
Model eSFP-LH120-SM194.10
Form factor eSFP
Application standard SONET OC-48 LR-2, Gigabit Ethernet
Connector type LC
Optical fiber type SMF
Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12
Working case temperature [°C(°F)] 0°C to 70°C(32°F to 158°F)
DDM options SFF-8472
Environment standard RoHS
Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1
ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V
Transmission rate [bit/s] 155 Mbit/s ~ 2.67 Gbit/s
Target transmission distance [km] 120 km
Transmitter Optical Characteristics
Center wavelength [nm] 1544.53 nm
Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) 4 dBm
[dBm]
Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]
Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) 0 dBm
[dBm]
Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]
Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 8.2 dB
Receiver Optical Characteristics
Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1520 nm - 1570 nm
Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -28 dBm
Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -
Overload power (AVG) [dBm] -8 dBm
Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 138
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
3.2.11.22 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1543.73nm-120km-commercial
Table 3-94 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1543.73nm-120km-commercial
specifications
Item Value
Basic Information
Module name 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-
SMF-1543.73nm-120km-commercial
Part Number 34060392
Model eSFP-LH120-SM194.20
Form factor eSFP
Application standard SONET OC-48 LR-2, Gigabit Ethernet
Connector type LC
Optical fiber type SMF
Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12
Working case temperature [°C(°F)] 0°C to 70°C(32°F to 158°F)
DDM options SFF-8472
Environment standard RoHS
Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1
ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V
Transmission rate [bit/s] 155 Mbit/s ~ 2.67 Gbit/s
Target transmission distance [km] 120 km
Transmitter Optical Characteristics
Center wavelength [nm] 1543.73 nm
Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) 4 dBm
[dBm]
Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]
Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) 0 dBm
[dBm]
Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]
Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 8.2 dB
Receiver Optical Characteristics
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 139
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
Item Value
Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1520 nm - 1570 nm
Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -28 dBm
Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -
Overload power (AVG) [dBm] -8 dBm
Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -
3.2.11.23 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1542.94nm-120km-commercial
Table 3-95 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1542.94nm-120km-commercial
specifications
Item Value
Basic Information
Module name 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-
SMF-1542.94nm-120km-commercial
Part Number 34060393
Model eSFP-LH120-SM194.30
Form factor eSFP
Application standard SONET OC-48 LR-2, Gigabit Ethernet
Connector type LC
Optical fiber type SMF
Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12
Working case temperature [°C(°F)] 0°C to 70°C(32°F to 158°F)
DDM options SFF-8472
Environment standard RoHS
Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1
ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V
Transmission rate [bit/s] 155 Mbit/s ~ 2.67 Gbit/s
Target transmission distance [km] 120 km
Transmitter Optical Characteristics
Center wavelength [nm] 1542.94 nm
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 140
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
Item Value
Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) 4 dBm
[dBm]
Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]
Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) 0 dBm
[dBm]
Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]
Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 8.2 dB
Receiver Optical Characteristics
Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1520 nm - 1570 nm
Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -28 dBm
Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -
Overload power (AVG) [dBm] -8 dBm
Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -
3.2.11.24 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1542.14nm-120km-commercial
Table 3-96 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1542.14nm-120km-commercial
specifications
Item Value
Basic Information
Module name 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-
SMF-1542.14nm-120km-commercial
Part Number 34060394
Model eSFP-LH120-SM194.40
Form factor eSFP
Application standard SONET OC-48 LR-2, Gigabit Ethernet
Connector type LC
Optical fiber type SMF
Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12
Working case temperature [°C(°F)] 0°C to 70°C(32°F to 158°F)
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 141
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
Item Value
DDM options SFF-8472
Environment standard RoHS
Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1
ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V
Transmission rate [bit/s] 155 Mbit/s ~ 2.67 Gbit/s
Target transmission distance [km] 120 km
Transmitter Optical Characteristics
Center wavelength [nm] 1542.14 nm
Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) 4 dBm
[dBm]
Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]
Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) 0 dBm
[dBm]
Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]
Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 8.2 dB
Receiver Optical Characteristics
Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1520 nm - 1570 nm
Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -28 dBm
Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -
Overload power (AVG) [dBm] -8 dBm
Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -
3.2.11.25 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1541.35nm-120km-commercial
Table 3-97 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1541.35nm-120km-commercial
specifications
Item Value
Basic Information
Module name 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-
SMF-1541.35nm-120km-commercial
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 142
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
Item Value
Part Number 34060395
Model eSFP-LH120-SM194.50
Form factor eSFP
Application standard SONET OC-48 LR-2, Gigabit Ethernet
Connector type LC
Optical fiber type SMF
Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12
Working case temperature [°C(°F)] 0°C to 70°C(32°F to 158°F)
DDM options SFF-8472
Environment standard RoHS
Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1
ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V
Transmission rate [bit/s] 155 Mbit/s ~ 2.67 Gbit/s
Target transmission distance [km] 120 km
Transmitter Optical Characteristics
Center wavelength [nm] 1541.35 nm
Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) 4 dBm
[dBm]
Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]
Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) 0 dBm
[dBm]
Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]
Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 8.2 dB
Receiver Optical Characteristics
Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1520 nm - 1570 nm
Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -28 dBm
Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -
Overload power (AVG) [dBm] -8 dBm
Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 143
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
3.2.11.26 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1540.56nm-120km-commercial
Table 3-98 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1540.56nm-120km-commercial
specifications
Item Value
Basic Information
Module name 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-
SMF-1540.56nm-120km-commercial
Part Number 34060396
Model eSFP-LH120-SM194.60
Form factor eSFP
Application standard SONET OC-48 LR-2, Gigabit Ethernet
Connector type LC
Optical fiber type SMF
Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12
Working case temperature [°C(°F)] 0°C to 70°C(32°F to 158°F)
DDM options SFF-8472
Environment standard RoHS
Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1
ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V
Transmission rate [bit/s] 155 Mbit/s ~ 2.67 Gbit/s
Target transmission distance [km] 120 km
Transmitter Optical Characteristics
Center wavelength [nm] 1540.56 nm
Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) 4 dBm
[dBm]
Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]
Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) 0 dBm
[dBm]
Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]
Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 8.2 dB
Receiver Optical Characteristics
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 144
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
Item Value
Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1520 nm - 1570 nm
Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -28 dBm
Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -
Overload power (AVG) [dBm] -8 dBm
Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -
3.2.11.27 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1539.77nm-120km-commercial
Table 3-99 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1539.77nm-120km-commercial
specifications
Item Value
Basic Information
Module name 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-
SMF-1539.77nm-120km-commercial
Part Number 34060397
Model eSFP-LH120-SM194.70
Form factor eSFP
Application standard SONET OC-48 LR-2, Gigabit Ethernet
Connector type LC
Optical fiber type SMF
Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12
Working case temperature [°C(°F)] 0°C to 70°C(32°F to 158°F)
DDM options SFF-8472
Environment standard RoHS
Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1
ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V
Transmission rate [bit/s] 155 Mbit/s ~ 2.67 Gbit/s
Target transmission distance [km] 120 km
Transmitter Optical Characteristics
Center wavelength [nm] 1539.77 nm
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 145
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
Item Value
Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) 4 dBm
[dBm]
Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]
Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) 0 dBm
[dBm]
Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]
Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 8.2 dB
Receiver Optical Characteristics
Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1520 nm - 1570 nm
Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -28 dBm
Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -
Overload power (AVG) [dBm] -8 dBm
Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -
3.2.11.28 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1538.98nm-120km-commercial
Table 3-100 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1538.98nm-120km-commercial
specifications
Item Value
Basic Information
Module name 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-
SMF-1538.98nm-120km-commercial
Part Number 34060398
Model eSFP-LH120-SM194.80
Form factor eSFP
Application standard SONET OC-48 LR-2, Gigabit Ethernet
Connector type LC
Optical fiber type SMF
Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12
Working case temperature [°C(°F)] 0°C to 70°C(32°F to 158°F)
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 146
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
Item Value
DDM options SFF-8472
Environment standard RoHS
Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1
ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V
Transmission rate [bit/s] 155 Mbit/s ~ 2.67 Gbit/s
Target transmission distance [km] 120 km
Transmitter Optical Characteristics
Center wavelength [nm] 1538.98 nm
Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) 4 dBm
[dBm]
Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]
Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) 0 dBm
[dBm]
Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]
Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 8.2 dB
Receiver Optical Characteristics
Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1520 nm - 1570 nm
Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -28 dBm
Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -
Overload power (AVG) [dBm] -8 dBm
Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -
3.2.11.29 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1538.19nm-120km-commercial
Table 3-101 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1538.19nm-120km-commercial
specifications
Item Value
Basic Information
Module name 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-
SMF-1538.19nm-120km-commercial
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 147
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
Item Value
Part Number 34060399
Model eSFP-LH120-SM194.90
Form factor eSFP
Application standard SONET OC-48 LR-2, Gigabit Ethernet
Connector type LC
Optical fiber type SMF
Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12
Working case temperature [°C(°F)] 0°C to 70°C(32°F to 158°F)
DDM options SFF-8472
Environment standard RoHS
Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1
ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V
Transmission rate [bit/s] 155 Mbit/s ~ 2.67 Gbit/s
Target transmission distance [km] 120 km
Transmitter Optical Characteristics
Center wavelength [nm] 1538.19 nm
Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) 4 dBm
[dBm]
Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]
Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) 0 dBm
[dBm]
Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]
Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 8.2 dB
Receiver Optical Characteristics
Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1520 nm - 1570 nm
Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -28 dBm
Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -
Overload power (AVG) [dBm] -8 dBm
Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 148
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
3.2.11.30 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1537.40nm-120km-commercial
Table 3-102 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1537.40nm-120km-commercial
specifications
Item Value
Basic Information
Module name 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-
SMF-1537.40nm-120km-commercial
Part Number 34060400
Model eSFP-LH120-SM195.00
Form factor eSFP
Application standard SONET OC-48 LR-2, Gigabit Ethernet
Connector type LC
Optical fiber type SMF
Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12
Working case temperature [°C(°F)] 0°C to 70°C(32°F to 158°F)
DDM options SFF-8472
Environment standard RoHS
Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1
ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V
Transmission rate [bit/s] 155 Mbit/s ~ 2.67 Gbit/s
Target transmission distance [km] 120 km
Transmitter Optical Characteristics
Center wavelength [nm] 1537.4 nm
Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) 4 dBm
[dBm]
Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]
Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) 0 dBm
[dBm]
Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]
Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 8.2 dB
Receiver Optical Characteristics
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 149
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
Item Value
Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1520 nm - 1570 nm
Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -28 dBm
Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -
Overload power (AVG) [dBm] -8 dBm
Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -
3.2.11.31 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1536.61nm-120km-commercial
Table 3-103 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1536.61nm-120km-commercial
specifications
Item Value
Basic Information
Module name 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-
SMF-1536.61nm-120km-commercial
Part Number 34060401
Model eSFP-LH120-SM195.10
Form factor eSFP
Application standard SONET OC-48 LR-2, Gigabit Ethernet
Connector type LC
Optical fiber type SMF
Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12
Working case temperature [°C(°F)] 0°C to 70°C(32°F to 158°F)
DDM options SFF-8472
Environment standard RoHS
Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1
ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V
Transmission rate [bit/s] 155 Mbit/s ~ 2.67 Gbit/s
Target transmission distance [km] 120 km
Transmitter Optical Characteristics
Center wavelength [nm] 1536.61 nm
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 150
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
Item Value
Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) 4 dBm
[dBm]
Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]
Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) 0 dBm
[dBm]
Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]
Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 8.2 dB
Receiver Optical Characteristics
Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1520 nm - 1570 nm
Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -28 dBm
Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -
Overload power (AVG) [dBm] -8 dBm
Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -
3.2.11.32 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1535.82nm-120km-commercial
Table 3-104 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1535.82nm-120km-commercial
specifications
Item Value
Basic Information
Module name 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-
SMF-1535.82nm-120km-commercial
Part Number 34060402
Model eSFP-LH120-SM195.20
Form factor eSFP
Application standard SONET OC-48 LR-2, Gigabit Ethernet
Connector type LC
Optical fiber type SMF
Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12
Working case temperature [°C(°F)] 0°C to 70°C(32°F to 158°F)
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 151
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
Item Value
DDM options SFF-8472
Environment standard RoHS
Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1
ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V
Transmission rate [bit/s] 155 Mbit/s ~ 2.67 Gbit/s
Target transmission distance [km] 120 km
Transmitter Optical Characteristics
Center wavelength [nm] 1535.82 nm
Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) 4 dBm
[dBm]
Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]
Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) 0 dBm
[dBm]
Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]
Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 8.2 dB
Receiver Optical Characteristics
Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1520 nm - 1570 nm
Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -28 dBm
Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -
Overload power (AVG) [dBm] -8 dBm
Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -
3.2.11.33 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1535.04nm-120km-commercial
Table 3-105 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1535.04nm-120km-commercial
specifications
Item Value
Basic Information
Module name 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-
SMF-1535.04nm-120km-commercial
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 152
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
Item Value
Part Number 34060403
Model eSFP-LH120-SM195.30
Form factor eSFP
Application standard SONET OC-48 LR-2, Gigabit Ethernet
Connector type LC
Optical fiber type SMF
Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12
Working case temperature [°C(°F)] 0°C to 70°C(32°F to 158°F)
DDM options SFF-8472
Environment standard RoHS
Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1
ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V
Transmission rate [bit/s] 155 Mbit/s ~ 2.67 Gbit/s
Target transmission distance [km] 120 km
Transmitter Optical Characteristics
Center wavelength [nm] 1535.04 nm
Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) 4 dBm
[dBm]
Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]
Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) 0 dBm
[dBm]
Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]
Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 8.2 dB
Receiver Optical Characteristics
Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1520 nm - 1570 nm
Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -28 dBm
Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -
Overload power (AVG) [dBm] -8 dBm
Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 153
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
3.2.11.34 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1534.25nm-120km-commercial
Table 3-106 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1534.25nm-120km-commercial
specifications
Item Value
Basic Information
Module name 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-
SMF-1534.25nm-120km-commercial
Part Number 34060404
Model eSFP-LH120-SM195.40
Form factor eSFP
Application standard SONET OC-48 LR-2, Gigabit Ethernet
Connector type LC
Optical fiber type SMF
Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12
Working case temperature [°C(°F)] 0°C to 70°C(32°F to 158°F)
DDM options SFF-8472
Environment standard RoHS
Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1
ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V
Transmission rate [bit/s] 155 Mbit/s ~ 2.67 Gbit/s
Target transmission distance [km] 120 km
Transmitter Optical Characteristics
Center wavelength [nm] 1534.25 nm
Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) 4 dBm
[dBm]
Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]
Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) 0 dBm
[dBm]
Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]
Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 8.2 dB
Receiver Optical Characteristics
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 154
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
Item Value
Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1520 nm - 1570 nm
Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -28 dBm
Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -
Overload power (AVG) [dBm] -8 dBm
Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -
3.2.11.35 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1533.47nm-120km-commercial
Table 3-107 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1533.47nm-120km-commercial
specifications
Item Value
Basic Information
Module name 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-
SMF-1533.47nm-120km-commercial
Part Number 34060405
Model eSFP-LH120-SM195.50
Form factor eSFP
Application standard SONET OC-48 LR-2, Gigabit Ethernet
Connector type LC
Optical fiber type SMF
Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12
Working case temperature [°C(°F)] 0°C to 70°C(32°F to 158°F)
DDM options SFF-8472
Environment standard RoHS
Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1
ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V
Transmission rate [bit/s] 155 Mbit/s ~ 2.67 Gbit/s
Target transmission distance [km] 120 km
Transmitter Optical Characteristics
Center wavelength [nm] 1533.47 nm
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 155
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
Item Value
Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) 4 dBm
[dBm]
Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]
Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) 0 dBm
[dBm]
Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]
Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 8.2 dB
Receiver Optical Characteristics
Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1520 nm - 1570 nm
Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -28 dBm
Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -
Overload power (AVG) [dBm] -8 dBm
Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -
3.2.11.36 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1532.68nm-120km-commercial
Table 3-108 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1532.68nm-120km-commercial
specifications
Item Value
Basic Information
Module name 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-
SMF-1532.68nm-120km-commercial
Part Number 34060406
Model eSFP-LH120-SM195.60
Form factor eSFP
Application standard SONET OC-48 LR-2, Gigabit Ethernet
Connector type LC
Optical fiber type SMF
Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12
Working case temperature [°C(°F)] 0°C to 70°C(32°F to 158°F)
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 156
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
Item Value
DDM options SFF-8472
Environment standard RoHS
Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1
ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V
Transmission rate [bit/s] 155 Mbit/s ~ 2.67 Gbit/s
Target transmission distance [km] 120 km
Transmitter Optical Characteristics
Center wavelength [nm] 1532.68 nm
Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) 4 dBm
[dBm]
Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]
Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) 0 dBm
[dBm]
Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]
Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 8.2 dB
Receiver Optical Characteristics
Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1520 nm - 1570 nm
Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -28 dBm
Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -
Overload power (AVG) [dBm] -8 dBm
Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -
3.2.11.37 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1531.90nm-120km-commercial
Table 3-109 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1531.90nm-120km-commercial
specifications
Item Value
Basic Information
Module name 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-
SMF-1531.90nm-120km-commercial
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 157
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
Item Value
Part Number 34060407
Model eSFP-LH120-SM195.70
Form factor eSFP
Application standard SONET OC-48 LR-2, Gigabit Ethernet
Connector type LC
Optical fiber type SMF
Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12
Working case temperature [°C(°F)] 0°C to 70°C(32°F to 158°F)
DDM options SFF-8472
Environment standard RoHS
Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1
ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V
Transmission rate [bit/s] 155 Mbit/s ~ 2.67 Gbit/s
Target transmission distance [km] 120 km
Transmitter Optical Characteristics
Center wavelength [nm] 1531.9 nm
Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) 4 dBm
[dBm]
Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]
Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) 0 dBm
[dBm]
Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]
Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 8.2 dB
Receiver Optical Characteristics
Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1520 nm - 1570 nm
Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -28 dBm
Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -
Overload power (AVG) [dBm] -8 dBm
Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 158
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
3.2.11.38 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1531.12nm-120km-commercial
Table 3-110 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1531.12nm-120km-commercial
specifications
Item Value
Basic Information
Module name 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-
SMF-1531.12nm-120km-commercial
Part Number 34060408
Model eSFP-LH120-SM195.80
Form factor eSFP
Application standard SONET OC-48 LR-2, Gigabit Ethernet
Connector type LC
Optical fiber type SMF
Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12
Working case temperature [°C(°F)] 0°C to 70°C(32°F to 158°F)
DDM options SFF-8472
Environment standard RoHS
Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1
ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V
Transmission rate [bit/s] 155 Mbit/s ~ 2.67 Gbit/s
Target transmission distance [km] 120 km
Transmitter Optical Characteristics
Center wavelength [nm] 1531.12 nm
Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) 4 dBm
[dBm]
Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]
Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) 0 dBm
[dBm]
Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]
Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 8.2 dB
Receiver Optical Characteristics
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 159
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
Item Value
Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1520 nm - 1570 nm
Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -28 dBm
Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -
Overload power (AVG) [dBm] -8 dBm
Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -
3.2.11.39 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1530.33nm-120km-commercial
Table 3-111 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1530.33nm-120km-commercial
specifications
Item Value
Basic Information
Module name 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-
SMF-1530.33nm-120km-commercial
Part Number 34060409
Model eSFP-LH120-SM195.90
Form factor eSFP
Application standard SONET OC-48 LR-2, Gigabit Ethernet
Connector type LC
Optical fiber type SMF
Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12
Working case temperature [°C(°F)] 0°C to 70°C(32°F to 158°F)
DDM options SFF-8472
Environment standard RoHS
Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1
ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V
Transmission rate [bit/s] 155 Mbit/s ~ 2.67 Gbit/s
Target transmission distance [km] 120 km
Transmitter Optical Characteristics
Center wavelength [nm] 1530.33 nm
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 160
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
Item Value
Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) 4 dBm
[dBm]
Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]
Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) 0 dBm
[dBm]
Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]
Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 8.2 dB
Receiver Optical Characteristics
Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1520 nm - 1570 nm
Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -28 dBm
Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -
Overload power (AVG) [dBm] -8 dBm
Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -
3.2.11.40 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1529.55nm-120km-commercial
Table 3-112 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1529.55nm-120km-commercial
specifications
Item Value
Basic Information
Module name 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-
SMF-1529.55nm-120km-commercial
Part Number 34060410
Model eSFP-LH120-SM196.00
Form factor eSFP
Application standard SONET OC-48 LR-2, Gigabit Ethernet
Connector type LC
Optical fiber type SMF
Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12
Working case temperature [°C(°F)] 0°C to 70°C(32°F to 158°F)
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 161
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
Item Value
DDM options SFF-8472
Environment standard RoHS
Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1
ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V
Transmission rate [bit/s] 155 Mbit/s ~ 2.67 Gbit/s
Target transmission distance [km] 120 km
Transmitter Optical Characteristics
Center wavelength [nm] 1529.55 nm
Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) 4 dBm
[dBm]
Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]
Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) 0 dBm
[dBm]
Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]
Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 8.2 dB
Receiver Optical Characteristics
Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1520 nm - 1570 nm
Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -28 dBm
Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -
Overload power (AVG) [dBm] -8 dBm
Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -
3.2.12 10Gbps SFP+ Optical Module
3.2.12.1 10Gbps-SFP+-SMF-1550nm-80km-commercial
Table 3-113 10Gbps-SFP+-SMF-1550nm-80km-commercial specifications
Item Value
Basic Information
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 162
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
Item Value
Module name 10Gbps-SFP+-SMF-1550nm-80km-
commercial
Part Number 02310PVU
Model OSX080N04
Form factor SFP+
Application standard IEEE 802.3ae, 10GBASE-ZR/ZW
Connector type LC
Optical fiber type SMF
Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12
Working case temperature [°C(°F)] 0°C to 70°C(32°F to 158°F)
DDM options SFF-8472
Environment standard RoHS
Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1
ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V
Transmission rate [bit/s] 9.953 Gbit/s
10.3125 Gbit/s
Target transmission distance [km] 80 km
Transmitter Optical Characteristics
Center wavelength [nm] 1550 nm
Tx operating wavelength range [nm] 1530 nm - 1565 nm
Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) 4 dBm
[dBm]
Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]
Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) 0 dBm
[dBm]
Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]
Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 9 dB
Receiver Optical Characteristics
Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1260 nm - 1565 nm
Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -24 dBm
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 163
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
Item Value
Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -
Overload power (AVG) [dBm] -7 dBm
Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -
NOTE
The interface standard is Huawei-specific. Self-loop is not supported. An optical attenuator
must be added if self-loop is required.
3.2.12.2 10Gbps-SFP+-SMF-1310nm-40km-commercial (02311YEB)
Table 3-114 10Gbps-SFP+-SMF-1310nm-40km-commercial specifications
Item Value
Basic Information
Module name 10Gbps-SFP+-SMF-1310nm-40km-
commercial
Part Number 02311YEB
Model OSX040N14
Form factor SFP+
Application standard IEEE 802.3ae, 10GBASE-ER/EW
Connector type LC
Optical fiber type SMF
Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12
Working case temperature [°C(°F)] 0°C to 70°C(32°F to 158°F)
DDM options SFF-8472
Environment standard RoHS
Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1
ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V
Transmission rate [bit/s] 9.953 bit/s ~ 10.3125 Gbit/s
Target transmission distance [km] 40 km
Transmitter Optical Characteristics
Center wavelength [nm] 1310 nm
Tx operating wavelength range [nm] 1260 nm - 1355 nm
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 164
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
Item Value
Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) 4 dBm
[dBm]
Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]
Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) -2 dBm
[dBm]
Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]
Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 3.5 dB
Receiver Optical Characteristics
Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1260 nm - 1600 nm
Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -20 dBm
Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -20 dBm
Overload power (AVG) [dBm] -7 dBm
Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -7 dBm
NOTE
1310nm and 1550nm can not be connected,Self-loop is not supported. An optical
attenuator must be added if self-loop is required.
3.2.12.3 10Gbps-SFP+-SMF-1310nm-10km-industry
Table 3-115 10Gbps-SFP+-SMF-1310nm-10km-industry specifications
Item Value
Basic Information
Module name 10Gbps-SFP+-SMF-1310nm-10km-
industry
Part Number 34060599
Model OSX010N05
Form factor SFP+
Application standard IEEE 802.3ae, 10GBASE-LR/LW
Connector type LC
Optical fiber type SMF
Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 165
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
Item Value
Working case temperature [°C(°F)] -40°C to 85°C(-40°F to 185°F)
DDM options SFF-8472
Environment standard RoHS
Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1
ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V
Transmission rate [bit/s] 9.953 Gbit/s
10.3125 Gbit/s
Target transmission distance [km] 10 km
Transmitter Optical Characteristics
Center wavelength [nm] 1310 nm
Tx operating wavelength range [nm] 1260 nm - 1355 nm
Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) 0.5 dBm
[dBm]
Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -5.2 dBm
[dBm]
Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) -8.2 dBm
[dBm]
Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]
Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 3.5 dB
Receiver Optical Characteristics
Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1260 nm - 1355 nm
Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -14.4 dBm
Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -12.6 dBm
Overload power (AVG) [dBm] 0.5 dBm
Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -
3.2.12.4 10Gbps-SFP+-MMF-850nm-0.1km-industry
Table 3-116 10Gbps-SFP+-MMF-850nm-0.1km-industry specifications
Item Value
Basic Information
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 166
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
Item Value
Module name 10Gbps-SFP+-MMF-850nm-0.1km-
industry
Part Number 34060618
Model OMXD10N01
Form factor SFP+
Application standard IEEE 802.3ae, 10GBASE-SR/SW
Connector type LC
Optical fiber type MMF
Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12
Working case temperature [°C(°F)] -40°C to 85°C(-40°F to 185°F)
DDM options SFF-8472
Environment standard RoHS
Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1
ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V
Transmission rate [bit/s] 9.953 Gbit/s
10.3125 Gbit/s
Target transmission distance [km] 0.3 km(OM3)
0.082 km(OM2)
Transmitter Optical Characteristics
Center wavelength [nm] 850 nm
Tx operating wavelength range [nm] 840 nm - 860 nm
Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) -1 dBm
[dBm]
Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -7.3 dBm
[dBm]
Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) -5 dBm
[dBm]
Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]
Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 3 dB
Receiver Optical Characteristics
Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 840 nm - 860 nm
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 167
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
Item Value
Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -9.9 dBm
Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -11.1 dBm
Overload power (AVG) [dBm] -1 dBm
Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -
3.2.12.5 10Gbps-SFP+-SMF-1550nm-40km-industry
Table 3-117 10Gbps-SFP+-SMF-1550nm-40km-industry specifications
Item Value
Basic Information
Module name 10Gbps-SFP+-SMF-1550nm-40km-
industry
Part Number 34060684
Model OSX040N05
Form factor SFP+
Application standard IEEE 802.3ae, 10GBASE-ER/EW
Connector type LC
Optical fiber type SMF
Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12
Working case temperature [°C(°F)] -40°C to 85°C(-40°F to 185°F)
DDM options SFF-8472
Environment standard RoHS
Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1
ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V
Transmission rate [bit/s] 9.953 Gbit/s
10.3125 Gbit/s
Target transmission distance [km] 40 km
Transmitter Optical Characteristics
Center wavelength [nm] 1550 nm
Tx operating wavelength range [nm] 1530 nm - 1565 nm
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 168
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
Item Value
Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) 4 dBm
[dBm]
Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -1.7 dBm
[dBm]
Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) -4.7 dBm
[dBm]
Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]
Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 3 dB
Receiver Optical Characteristics
Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1530 nm - 1565 nm
Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -15.8 dBm
Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -14.1 dBm
Overload power (AVG) [dBm] -1 dBm
Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -
NOTE
Self-loop is not supported. An optical attenuator must be added if self-loop is required.
3.2.12.6 10Gbps-SFP+-SMF-1310nm-40km-commercial (34061409)
Table 3-118 10Gbps-SFP+-SMF-1310nm-40km-commercial specifications
Item Value
Basic Information
Module name 10Gbps-SFP+-SMF-1310nm-40km-
commercial
Part Number 34061409
Model Default
Form factor SFP+
Application standard IEEE 802.3ae, 10GBASE-ER/EW
Connector type LC
Optical fiber type SMF
Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12
Working case temperature [°C(°F)] 0°C to 70°C(32°F to 158°F)
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 169
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
Item Value
DDM options SFF-8472
Environment standard RoHS
Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1
ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V
Transmission rate [bit/s] 10.3125 Gbit/s
Target transmission distance [km] 40 km
Transmitter Optical Characteristics
Center wavelength [nm] 1310 nm
Tx operating wavelength range [nm] 1260 nm- 1355nm
Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) 4 dBm
[dBm]
Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]
Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) -2 dBm
[dBm]
Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]
Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 9 dB
Receiver Optical Characteristics
Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1260 nm-1600nm
Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -20 dBm
Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -
Overload power (AVG) [dBm] -7 dBm
Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -
NOTE
The interface standard is Huawei-specific. Self-loop is not supported. An optical attenuator
must be added if self-loop is required.
3.2.12.7 10Gbps-SFP+-MMF-850nm-0.3km-commercial
Table 3-119 10Gbps-SFP+-MMF-850nm-0.3km-commercial specifications
Item Value
Basic Information
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 170
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
Item Value
Module name 10Gbps-SFP+-MMF-850nm-0.3km-
commercial
Part Number S4017482
Model OSX040N03
Form factor SFP+
Application standard IEEE 802.3ae, 10GBASE-SR/SW
Connector type LC
Optical fiber type MMF
Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12
Working case temperature [°C(°F)] 0°C to 70°C(32°F to 158°F)
DDM options SFF-8472
Environment standard RoHS
Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1
ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V
Transmission rate [bit/s] 9.953 Gbit/s
10.3125 Gbit/s
Target transmission distance [km] 0.3 km(OM3)
Transmitter Optical Characteristics
Center wavelength [nm] 850 nm
Tx operating wavelength range [nm] 840 nm - 860 nm
Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) -1 dBm
[dBm]
Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]
Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) -7.3 dBm
[dBm]
Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]
Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 3 dB
Receiver Optical Characteristics
Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 840 nm - 860 nm
Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -9.9 dBm
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 171
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
Item Value
Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -11.1 dBm
Overload power (AVG) [dBm] -1 dBm
Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -1 dBm
3.2.12.8 10Gbps-SFP+-SMF-1310nm-10km-commercial
Table 3-120 10Gbps-SFP+-SMF-1310nm-10km-commercial specifications
Item Value
Basic Information
Module name 10Gbps-SFP+-SMF-1310nm-10km-
commercial
Part Number S4017483
Model OSX001002
Form factor SFP+
Application standard IEEE 802.3ae, 10GBASE-LR/LW
Connector type LC
Optical fiber type SMF
Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12
Working case temperature [°C(°F)] 0°C to 70°C(32°F to 158°F)
DDM options SFF-8472
Environment standard RoHS
Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1
ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V
Transmission rate [bit/s] 9.953 Gbit/s
10.3125 Gbit/s
Target transmission distance [km] 10 km
Transmitter Optical Characteristics
Center wavelength [nm] 1310 nm
Tx operating wavelength range [nm] 1260 nm - 1355 nm
Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) 0.5 dBm
[dBm]
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 172
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
Item Value
Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]
Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) -8.2 dBm
[dBm]
Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]
Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 3.5 dB
Receiver Optical Characteristics
Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1260 nm - 1355 nm
Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -14.4 dBm
Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -12.6 dBm
Overload power (AVG) [dBm] 0.5 dBm
Overload power (OMA) [dBm] 0.5 dBm
3.2.12.9 10Gbps-SFP+-SMF-1550nm-40km-commercial
Table 3-121 10Gbps-SFP+-SMF-1550nm-40km-commercial specifications
Item Value
Basic Information
Module name 10Gbps-SFP+-SMF-1550nm-40km-
commercial
Part Number S4017484
Model OMXD30002
Form factor SFP+
Application standard IEEE 802.3ae, 10GBASE-ER/EW
Connector type LC
Optical fiber type SMF
Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12
Working case temperature [°C(°F)] 0°C to 70°C(32°F to 158°F)
DDM options SFF-8472
Environment standard RoHS
Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 173
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
Item Value
ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V
Transmission rate [bit/s] 9.953 Gbit/s
10.3125 Gbit/s
Target transmission distance [km] 40 km
Transmitter Optical Characteristics
Center wavelength [nm] 1550 nm
Tx operating wavelength range [nm] 1530 nm - 1565 nm
Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) 4 dBm
[dBm]
Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]
Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) -4.7 dBm
[dBm]
Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]
Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 3 dB
Receiver Optical Characteristics
Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1530 nm - 1565 nm
Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -15.8 dBm
Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -14.1 dBm
Overload power (AVG) [dBm] -1 dBm
Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -1 dBm
NOTE
Self-loop is not supported. An optical attenuator must be added if self-loop is required.
3.2.13 1.25/9.953/10.3125Gbps SFP+ Optical Module
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 174
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
3.2.13.1 1.25/9.953/10.3125Gbps-SFP+-MMF-850nm-0.3km-commercial
Table 3-122 1.25/9.953/10.3125Gbps-SFP+-MMF-850nm-0.3km-commercial
specifications
Item Value
Basic Information
Module name 1.25/9.953/10.3125Gbps-SFP+-
MMF-850nm-0.3km-commercial
Part Number 34061041
Model OSXD50N00
Form factor SFP+
Application standard IEEE 802.3ae, 10GBASE-SR/SW,
1000BASE-SX
Connector type LC
Optical fiber type MMF
Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12
Working case temperature [°C(°F)] 0°C to 70°C(32°F to 158°F)
DDM options SFF-8472
Environment standard RoHS
Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1
ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V
Transmission rate [bit/s] 1.25 Gbit/s
9.953 Gbit/s
10.3125 Gbit/s
Target transmission distance [km] 0.55 km(OM3/GE)
0.3 km(OM3/10GE)
Transmitter Optical Characteristics
Center wavelength [nm] 850 nm
Tx operating wavelength range [nm] 840 nm - 860 nm
Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) GE: 0 dBm
[dBm] 10GE: -1 dBm
Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 175
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
Item Value
Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) GE: -9.5 dBm
[dBm] 10GE: -7.3 dBm
Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]
Minimum extinction ratio [dB] GE: 9 dB
10G: 3 dB
Receiver Optical Characteristics
Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 840 nm - 860 nm
Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] GE: -17 dBm
10GE: -9.9 dBm
Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -
Overload power (AVG) [dBm] -1 dBm
Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -1 dBm
3.2.13.2 1.25/9.953/10.3125Gbps-SFP+-SMF-1310nm-10km-commercial
Table 3-123 1.25/9.953/10.3125Gbps-SFP+-SMF-1310nm-10km-commercial
specifications
Item Value
Basic Information
Module name 1.25/9.953/10.3125Gbps-SFP+-
SMF-1310nm-10km-commercial
Part Number 34061042
Model OSX010N13
Form factor SFP+
Application standard IEEE 802.3ae, 10GBASE-LR/LW,
1000BASE-LX
Connector type LC
Optical fiber type SMF
Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12
Working case temperature [°C(°F)] 0°C to 70°C(32°F to 158°F)
DDM options SFF-8472
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 176
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
Item Value
Environment standard RoHS
Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1
ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V
Transmission rate [bit/s] 1.25 Gbit/s
9.953 Gbit/s
10.3125 Gbit/s
Target transmission distance [km] GE: 10 km
10GE: 10 km
Transmitter Optical Characteristics
Center wavelength [nm] 1310 nm
Tx operating wavelength range [nm] 1260 nm - 1360 nm
Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) GE: 0.5 dBm
[dBm] 10GE: 0.5 dBm
Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]
Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) GE: -8.2 dBm
[dBm] 10GE: -8.2 dBm
Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]
Minimum extinction ratio [dB] GE: 9 dB
10GE: 3.5 dB
Receiver Optical Characteristics
Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1260 nm - 1360 nm
Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] GE: -19 dBm
10GE: -14.4 dBm
Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -
Overload power (AVG) [dBm] 0.5 dBm
Overload power (OMA) [dBm] 0.5 dBm
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 177
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
3.2.13.3 1.25/9.953/10.3125Gbps-SFP+-SMF-1550nm-40km-commercial
Table 3-124 1.25/9.953/10.3125Gbps-SFP+-SMF-1550nm-40km-commercial
specifications
Item Value
Basic Information
Module name 1.25/9.953/10.3125Gbps-SFP+-
SMF-1550nm-40km-commercial
Part Number 34061043
Model OSX040N12
Form factor SFP+
Application standard IEEE 802.3ae, 10GBASE-ER/EW,
1000BASE-LX
Connector type LC
Optical fiber type SMF
Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12
Working case temperature [°C(°F)] 0°C to 70°C(32°F to 158°F)
DDM options SFF-8472
Environment standard RoHS
Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1
ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V
Transmission rate [bit/s] 1.25 Gbit/s
9.953 Gbit/s
10.3125 Gbit/s
Target transmission distance [km] GE: 40 km
10GE: 40 km
Transmitter Optical Characteristics
Center wavelength [nm] 1550 nm
Tx operating wavelength range [nm] 1530 nm - 1565 nm
Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) GE: 4 dBm
[dBm] 10GE: 4 dBm
Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 178
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
Item Value
Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) GE: -4.7 dBm
[dBm] 10GE: -4.7 dBm
Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]
Minimum extinction ratio [dB] GE: 9 dB
10GE: 3.0 dB
Receiver Optical Characteristics
Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1530 nm - 1565 nm
Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] GE: -15.8 dBm
10GE: -15.8 dBm
Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -
Overload power (AVG) [dBm] -1 dBm
Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -1 dBm
3.2.14 10Gbps SFP+ CWDM Optical Module
3.2.14.1 10Gbps-SFP+-SMF-1511nm-70km-commercial
Table 3-125 10Gbps-SFP+-SMF-1511nm-70km-commercial specifications
Item Value
Basic Information
Module name 10Gbps-SFP+-SMF-1511nm-70km-
commercial
Part Number 34060686
Model OSX070001
Form factor SFP+
Application standard IEEE 802.3ae, 10GBASE-X
Connector type LC
Optical fiber type SMF
Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12
Working case temperature [°C(°F)] 0°C to 70°C(32°F to 158°F)
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 179
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
Item Value
DDM options SFF-8472
Environment standard RoHS
Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1
ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V
Transmission rate [bit/s] 9.953 Gbit/s
10.3125 Gbit/s
Target transmission distance [km] 70 km
Transmitter Optical Characteristics
Center wavelength [nm] 1511 nm
Tx operating wavelength range [nm] 1504.5 nm - 1517.5 nm
Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) 4 dBm
[dBm]
Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]
Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) 0 dBm
[dBm]
Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]
Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 8.2 dB
Receiver Optical Characteristics
Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1460 nm - 1620 nm
Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -23 dBm
Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -
Overload power (AVG) [dBm] -7 dBm
Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -
3.2.14.2 10Gbps-SFP+-SMF-1471nm-70km-commercial
Table 3-126 10Gbps-SFP+-SMF-1471nm-70km-commercial specifications
Item Value
Basic Information
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 180
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
Item Value
Module name 10Gbps-SFP+-SMF-1471nm-70km-
commercial
Part Number 34060687
Model OSX070002
Form factor SFP+
Application standard IEEE 802.3ae, 10GBASE-X
Connector type LC
Optical fiber type SMF
Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12
Working case temperature [°C(°F)] 0°C to 70°C(32°F to 158°F)
DDM options SFF-8472
Environment standard RoHS
Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1
ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V
Transmission rate [bit/s] 9.953 Gbit/s
10.3125 Gbit/s
Target transmission distance [km] 70 km
Transmitter Optical Characteristics
Center wavelength [nm] 1471 nm
Tx operating wavelength range [nm] 1464.5 nm - 1477.5 nm
Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) 4 dBm
[dBm]
Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]
Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) 0 dBm
[dBm]
Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]
Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 8.2 dB
Receiver Optical Characteristics
Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1460 nm - 1620 nm
Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -23 dBm
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 181
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
Item Value
Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -
Overload power (AVG) [dBm] -7 dBm
Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -
3.2.14.3 10Gbps-SFP+-SMF-1491nm-70km-commercial
Table 3-127 10Gbps-SFP+-SMF-1491nm-70km-commercial specifications
Item Value
Basic Information
Module name 10Gbps-SFP+-SMF-1491nm-70km-
commercial
Part Number 34060688
Model OSX070003
Form factor SFP+
Application standard IEEE 802.3ae, 10GBASE-X
Connector type LC
Optical fiber type SMF
Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12
Working case temperature [°C(°F)] 0°C to 70°C(32°F to 158°F)
DDM options SFF-8472
Environment standard RoHS
Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1
ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V
Transmission rate [bit/s] 9.953 Gbit/s
10.3125 Gbit/s
Target transmission distance [km] 70 km
Transmitter Optical Characteristics
Center wavelength [nm] 1491 nm
Tx operating wavelength range [nm] 1484.5 nm - 1497.5 nm
Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) 4 dBm
[dBm]
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 182
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
Item Value
Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]
Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) 0 dBm
[dBm]
Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]
Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 8.2 dB
Receiver Optical Characteristics
Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1460 nm - 1620 nm
Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -23 dBm
Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -
Overload power (AVG) [dBm] -7 dBm
Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -
3.2.14.4 10Gbps-SFP+-SMF-1531nm-70km-commercial
Table 3-128 10Gbps-SFP+-SMF-1531nm-70km-commercial specifications
Item Value
Basic Information
Module name 10Gbps-SFP+-SMF-1531nm-70km-
commercial
Part Number 34060689
Model OSX070004
Form factor SFP+
Application standard IEEE 802.3ae, 10GBASE-X
Connector type LC
Optical fiber type SMF
Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12
Working case temperature [°C(°F)] 0°C to 70°C(32°F to 158°F)
DDM options SFF-8472
Environment standard RoHS
Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 183
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
Item Value
ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V
Transmission rate [bit/s] 9.953 Gbit/s
10.3125 Gbit/s
Target transmission distance [km] 70 km
Transmitter Optical Characteristics
Center wavelength [nm] 1531 nm
Tx operating wavelength range [nm] 1524.5 nm - 1537.5 nm
Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) 4 dBm
[dBm]
Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]
Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) 0 dBm
[dBm]
Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]
Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 8.2 dB
Receiver Optical Characteristics
Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1460 nm - 1620 nm
Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -23 dBm
Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -
Overload power (AVG) [dBm] -7 dBm
Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -
3.2.14.5 10Gbps-SFP+-SMF-1551nm-70km-commercial
Table 3-129 10Gbps-SFP+-SMF-1551nm-70km-commercial specifications
Item Value
Basic Information
Module name 10Gbps-SFP+-SMF-1551nm-70km-
commercial
Part Number 34060690
Model OSX070005
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 184
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
Item Value
Form factor SFP+
Application standard IEEE 802.3ae, 10GBASE-X
Connector type LC
Optical fiber type SMF
Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12
Working case temperature [°C(°F)] 0°C to 70°C(32°F to 158°F)
DDM options SFF-8472
Environment standard RoHS
Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1
ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V
Transmission rate [bit/s] 9.953 Gbit/s
10.3125 Gbit/s
Target transmission distance [km] 70 km
Transmitter Optical Characteristics
Center wavelength [nm] 1551 nm
Tx operating wavelength range [nm] 1544.5 nm - 1557.5 nm
Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) 4 dBm
[dBm]
Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]
Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) 0 dBm
[dBm]
Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]
Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 8.2 dB
Receiver Optical Characteristics
Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1460 nm - 1620 nm
Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -23 dBm
Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -
Overload power (AVG) [dBm] -7 dBm
Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 185
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
3.2.14.6 10Gbps-SFP+-SMF-1571nm-70km-commercial
Table 3-130 10Gbps-SFP+-SMF-1571nm-70km-commercial specifications
Item Value
Basic Information
Module name 10Gbps-SFP+-SMF-1571nm-70km-
commercial
Part Number 34060691
Model OSX070006
Form factor SFP+
Application standard IEEE 802.3ae, 10GBASE-X
Connector type LC
Optical fiber type SMF
Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12
Working case temperature [°C(°F)] 0°C to 70°C(32°F to 158°F)
DDM options SFF-8472
Environment standard RoHS
Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1
ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V
Transmission rate [bit/s] 9.953 Gbit/s
10.3125 Gbit/s
Target transmission distance [km] 70 km
Transmitter Optical Characteristics
Center wavelength [nm] 1571 nm
Tx operating wavelength range [nm] 1564.5 nm - 1577.5 nm
Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) 4 dBm
[dBm]
Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]
Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) 0 dBm
[dBm]
Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]
Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 8.2 dB
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 186
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
Item Value
Receiver Optical Characteristics
Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1460 nm - 1620 nm
Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -23 dBm
Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -
Overload power (AVG) [dBm] -7 dBm
Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -
3.2.14.7 10Gbps-SFP+-SMF-1591nm-70km-commercial
Table 3-131 10Gbps-SFP+-SMF-1591nm-70km-commercial specifications
Item Value
Basic Information
Module name 10Gbps-SFP+-SMF-1591nm-70km-
commercial
Part Number 34060692
Model OSX070007
Form factor SFP+
Application standard IEEE 802.3ae, 10GBASE-X
Connector type LC
Optical fiber type SMF
Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12
Working case temperature [°C(°F)] 0°C to 70°C(32°F to 158°F)
DDM options SFF-8472
Environment standard RoHS
Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1
ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V
Transmission rate [bit/s] 9.953 Gbit/s
10.3125 Gbit/s
Target transmission distance [km] 70 km
Transmitter Optical Characteristics
Center wavelength [nm] 1591 nm
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 187
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
Item Value
Tx operating wavelength range [nm] 1584.5 nm - 1597.5 nm
Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) 4 dBm
[dBm]
Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]
Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) 0 dBm
[dBm]
Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]
Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 8.2 dB
Receiver Optical Characteristics
Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1460 nm - 1620 nm
Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -21 dBm
Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -
Overload power (AVG) [dBm] -7 dBm
Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -
3.2.14.8 10Gbps-SFP+-SMF-1611nm-70km-commercial
Table 3-132 10Gbps-SFP+-SMF-1611nm-70km-commercial specifications
Item Value
Basic Information
Module name 10Gbps-SFP+-SMF-1611nm-70km-
commercial
Part Number 34060693
Model OSX070008
Form factor SFP+
Application standard IEEE 802.3ae, 10GBASE-X
Connector type LC
Optical fiber type SMF
Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12
Working case temperature [°C(°F)] 0°C to 70°C(32°F to 158°F)
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 188
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
Item Value
DDM options SFF-8472
Environment standard RoHS
Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1
ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V
Transmission rate [bit/s] 9.953 Gbit/s
10.3125 Gbit/s
Target transmission distance [km] 70 km
Transmitter Optical Characteristics
Center wavelength [nm] 1611 nm
Tx operating wavelength range [nm] 1604.5 nm - 1617.4 nm
Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) 4 dBm
[dBm]
Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]
Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) 0 dBm
[dBm]
Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]
Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 8.2 dB
Receiver Optical Characteristics
Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1460 nm - 1620 nm
Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -21 dBm
Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -
Overload power (AVG) [dBm] -7 dBm
Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -
3.2.15 10Gbps SFP+ BIDI Optical Module
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 189
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
3.2.15.1 10Gbps-SFP+-SMF-1270nm(Tx)/1330nm(Rx)-40km-commercial
(02311JNF)
Table 3-133 10Gbps-SFP+-SMF-1270nm(Tx)/1330nm(Rx)-40km-commercial
specifications
Item Value
Basic Information
Module name 10Gbps-SFP+-SMF-1270nm(Tx)/
1330nm(Rx)-40km-commercial
Part Number 02311JNF
Model OSX040B10
Form factor SFP+
Application standard IEEE 802.3ae, 10GBASE-BX-U
Connector type LC
Optical fiber type SMF
Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12
Working case temperature [°C(°F)] 0°C to 70°C(32°F to 158°F)
DDM options SFF-8472
Environment standard RoHS
Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1
ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V
Transmission rate [bit/s] 9.953 Gbit/s
10.3125 Gbit/s
Target transmission distance [km] 40 km
Transmitter Optical Characteristics
Center wavelength [nm] 1270 nm
Tx operating wavelength range [nm] 1260 nm - 1280 nm
Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) 5 dBm
[dBm]
Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]
Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) 0 dBm
[dBm]
Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 190
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
Item Value
Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 3.5 dB
Receiver Optical Characteristics
Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1320 nm - 1340 nm
Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -18 dBm
Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -
Overload power (AVG) [dBm] -9 dBm
Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -
3.2.15.2 10Gbps-SFP+-SMF-1330nm(Tx)/1270nm(Rx)-40km-commercial
(02311JNQ)
Table 3-134 10Gbps-SFP+-SMF-1330nm(Tx)/1270nm(Rx)-40km-commercial
specifications
Item Value
Basic Information
Module name 10Gbps-SFP+-SMF-1330nm(Tx)/
1270nm(Rx)-40km-commercial
Part Number 02311JNQ
Model OSX040B11
Form factor SFP+
Application standard IEEE 802.3ae, 10GBASE-BX40-D
Connector type LC
Optical fiber type SMF
Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12
Working case temperature [°C(°F)] 0°C to 70°C(32°F to 158°F)
DDM options SFF-8472
Environment standard RoHS
Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1
ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V
Transmission rate [bit/s] 9.953 Gbit/s
10.3125 Gbit/s
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 191
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
Item Value
Target transmission distance [km] 40 km
Transmitter Optical Characteristics
Center wavelength [nm] 1330 nm
Tx operating wavelength range [nm] 1320 nm - 1340 nm
Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) 5 dBm
[dBm]
Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]
Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) 0 dBm
[dBm]
Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]
Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 3.5 dB
Receiver Optical Characteristics
Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1260 nm - 1280 nm
Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -18 dBm
Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -
Overload power (AVG) [dBm] -9 dBm
Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -
3.2.15.3 10Gbps-SFP+-SMF-1270nm(Tx)/1330nm(Rx)-10km-industry
Table 3-135 10Gbps-SFP+-SMF-1270nm(Tx)/1330nm(Rx)-10km-industry
specifications
Item Value
Basic Information
Module name 10Gbps-SFP+-SMF-1270nm(Tx)/
1330nm(Rx)-10km-industry
Part Number 34060544-001
Model SFP-GE-LX-SM1270-BIDI
Form factor SFP+
Application standard IEEE 802.3ae, 10GBASE-BX10-U
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 192
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
Item Value
Connector type LC
Optical fiber type SMF
Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12
Working case temperature [°C(°F)] -40°C to 85°C(-40°F to 185°F)
DDM options SFF-8472
Environment standard RoHS
Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1
ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V
Transmission rate [bit/s] 9.953 Gbit/s
10.3125 Gbit/s
Target transmission distance [km] 10 km
Transmitter Optical Characteristics
Center wavelength [nm] 1270 nm
Tx operating wavelength range [nm] 1260 nm - 1280 nm
Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) 0.5 dBm
[dBm]
Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]
Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) -8.2 dBm
[dBm]
Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -5.2 dBm
[dBm]
Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 3.5 dB
Receiver Optical Characteristics
Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1320 nm - 1340 nm
Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -14.4 dBm
Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -10.3 dBm
Overload power (AVG) [dBm] 0.5 dBm
Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 193
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
3.2.15.4 10Gbps-SFP+-SMF-1330nm(Tx)/1270nm(Rx)-10km-industry
Table 3-136 10Gbps-SFP+-SMF-1330nm(Tx)/1270nm(Rx)-10km-industry
specifications
Item Value
Basic Information
Module name 10Gbps-SFP+-SMF-1330nm(Tx)/
1270nm(Rx)-10km-industry
Part Number 34060546-001
Model SFP-GE-LX-SM1330-BIDI
Form factor SFP+
Application standard IEEE 802.3ae, 10GBASE-BX10-D
Connector type LC
Optical fiber type SMF
Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12
Working case temperature [°C(°F)] -40°C to 85°C(-40°F to 185°F)
DDM options SFF-8472
Environment standard RoHS
Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1
ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V
Transmission rate [bit/s] 9.953 Gbit/s
10.3125 Gbit/s
Target transmission distance [km] 10 km
Transmitter Optical Characteristics
Center wavelength [nm] 1330 nm
Tx operating wavelength range [nm] 1320 nm - 1340 nm
Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) 0.5 dBm
[dBm]
Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]
Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) -8.2 dBm
[dBm]
Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -5.2 dBm
[dBm]
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 194
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
Item Value
Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 3.5 dB
Receiver Optical Characteristics
Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1260 nm - 1280 nm
Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -14.4 dBm
Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -12.6 dBm
Overload power (AVG) [dBm] 0.5 dBm
Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -
3.2.16 10Gbps SFP+ OTN Optical Module
3.2.16.1 10Gbps-SFP+-SMF-1528nm~1568nm-80km-commercial
Table 3-137 10Gbps-SFP+-SMF-1528nm~1568nm-80km-commercial specifications
Item Value
Basic Information
Module name 10Gbps-SFP+-
SMF-1528nm~1568nm-80km-
commercial
Part Number 34060852
Model ODX0880T1
Form factor SFP+
Application standard IEEE 802.3ae, 10GBASE-ZR/ZW, ITUT
G.709
Connector type LC
Optical fiber type SMF
Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12(10GE)
<1x10E-4(OTU2, OTU2e)
Working case temperature [°C(°F)] 0°C to 70°C(32°F to 158°F)
DDM options SFF-8472
Environment standard RoHS
Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 195
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
Item Value
ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V
Transmission rate [bit/s] 9.953 Gbit/s
10.3125 Gbit/s
11.1 Gbit/s
Target transmission distance [km] 80 km
Transmitter Optical Characteristics
Center wavelength [nm] -
Tx operating wavelength range [nm] 1529.163 nm - 1560.606 nm
Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) 3 dBm
[dBm]
Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]
Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) -1 dBm
[dBm]
Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]
Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 9 dB
Receiver Optical Characteristics
Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1260 nm - 1600 nm
Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -24 dBm(10GE 1e-12)
-26 dBm(OTU2,OTU2e,1e-4)
Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -
Overload power (AVG) [dBm] -7 dBm
Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -
NOTE
The interface standard is Huawei-specific.
3.2.17 10Gbps SFP+ DWDM Optical Module
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 196
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
3.2.17.1 10Gbps-SFP+-SMF-1528nm~1568nm-40km-commercial
Table 3-138 10Gbps-SFP+-SMF-1528nm~1568nm-40km-commercial specifications
Item Value
Basic Information
Module name 10Gbps-SFP+-
SMF-1528nm~1568nm-40km-
commercial
Part Number 02314MED
Model OSX040C01
Form factor SFP+
Application standard IEEE 802.3ae, 10GBASE-ER/EW, ITUT G.
709
Connector type LC
Optical fiber type SMF
Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12(10GE)
<1x10E-4(OTU2, OTU2e)
Working case temperature [°C(°F)] 0°C to 70°C(32°F to 158°F)
DDM options SFF-INF-8077i
Environment standard RoHS
Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1
ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V
Transmission rate [bit/s] 9.953 Gbit/s
10.3125 Gbit/s
11.1 Gbit/s
Target transmission distance [km] 40 km
Transmitter Optical Characteristics
Center wavelength [nm] -
Tx operating wavelength range [nm] 1529.163 nm - 1567.133 nm
Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) 3 dBm
[dBm]
Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]
Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) -1 dBm
[dBm]
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 197
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
Item Value
Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]
Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 8.2 dB
Receiver Optical Characteristics
Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1525 nm - 1575 nm
Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -16 dBm(EOL)(@ BER 1E-12,
9.95Gbps~10.7Gbps)
-19 dBm(EOL)(@ BER 2E-03, 11.3Gbps,
dispersion 800ps/nm, at room
temperature and OSNR > 31dB)
Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -
Overload power (AVG) [dBm] -1 dBm
Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -
3.2.17.2 10Gbps-SFP+-SMF-1528nm~1568nm-80km-commercial
Table 3-139 10Gbps-SFP+-SMF-1528nm~1568nm-80km-commercial specifications
Item Value
Basic Information
Module name 10Gbps-SFP+-
SMF-1528nm~1568nm-80km-
commercial
Part Number 34060852
Model ODX0880T1
Form factor SFP+
Application standard IEEE 802.3ae, 10GBASE-ZR/ZW, ITUT
G.709
Connector type LC
Optical fiber type SMF
Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12(10GE)
<1x10E-4(OTU2, OTU2e)
Working case temperature [°C(°F)] 0°C to 70°C(32°F to 158°F)
DDM options SFF-8472
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 198
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
Item Value
Environment standard RoHS
Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1
ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V
Transmission rate [bit/s] 9.953 Gbit/s
10.3125 Gbit/s
11.1 Gbit/s
Target transmission distance [km] 80 km
Transmitter Optical Characteristics
Center wavelength [nm] -
Tx operating wavelength range [nm] 1529.163 nm - 1560.606 nm
Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) 3 dBm
[dBm]
Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]
Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) -1 dBm
[dBm]
Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]
Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 9 dB
Receiver Optical Characteristics
Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1260 nm - 1600 nm
Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -24 dBm(10GE 1e-12)
-26 dBm(OTU2,OTU2e,1e-4)
Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -
Overload power (AVG) [dBm] -7 dBm
Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -
NOTE
The interface standard is Huawei-specific.
3.3 Cables
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 199
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
3.3.1 AC Power Cable
This section describes the structure and technical specifications of the AC-input
power cable.
NO TICE
If no special requirements are imposed on power cables, power cables are
delivered according to default configurations. Otherwise, power cables need to be
purchased locally.
Overview
An AC power cable is used to connect to the AC power module of a device to
supply power to the device.
NO TE
Cables must be in compliance with standards of the destination country or region. The
actual cable type depends on the requirements of the target country or customer.
Appearance
Figure 3-19 Connector C13 (PDU)
Figure 3-20 Connector C13 (wall-mounted)
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 200
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
Figure 3-21 Heat shrink tubing
Technical Specifications
Table 3-140 Technical specifications of AC power cables in different countries or
regions (PDU)
Par Mod Description Connec Con Len Num Fire
t el tor X1 nect gth ber Rati
Nu or of ng
mb X2 Core
er s
040 - Power Cords Cable,China C14SM C13S 1.5 3 -
501 AC Power 250V10A, F m cores
88 1.5m,C14SM,
227IEC53(RVV)1.0mm2(3C
),C13SF,PDU Cable
040 - Power Cords Cable,Europe C14SM C13S 1.8 3 -
5G0 AC 250V10A, F m cores
19 1.8m,C14SM,H05VV-F-
3*1.00mm2,C13SF,PDU
Cable
040 - Power cord,Europe AC C14SM C13S 3 m 3 -
5G0 250V10A, F cores
19- 3.0m,C14SM,H05VV-F-
002 3*1.00^2,C13SF,250V,
10A,PDU Cable
040 - Power Cords Cable,North C14SM C13S 1.8 3 -
5G0 America AC Power F m cores
29 250V10A,1.8m,C14SM,SJT
18AWG(3C),C13SF,PDU
Cable
040 - Power Cords Cable,Japan C14SM C13S 1.8 3 -
5G0 AC Power 250V12A, F m cores
2D 1.8m,C14SM,HVCTF
1.25mm2(3C),C13SF,PDU
Cable
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 201
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
Par Mod Description Connec Con Len Num Fire
t el tor X1 nect gth ber Rati
Nu or of ng
mb X2 Core
er s
040 - Power Cords C14SM C13S 1.8 3 -
5G0 Cable,Australia AC Power F m cores
2F 250V10A,
1.8m,C14SM,H05VV-
F-1.0mm2(3C),C13SF,PDU
Cable
040 - Power Cords Cable,Korea C14SM C13S 1.8 3 -
5G0 AC Power 250V10A, F m cores
2H 1.8m,C14SM,H05VV-
F-1.0mm2(3C),C13SF,PDU
Cable
Table 3-141 Technical specifications of AC power cables in different countries or
regions (wall-mounted)
Par Mod Description Connec Con Len Num Fire
t el tor X1 nect gth ber Rati
Nu or of ng
mb X2 Core
er s
040 - Power Cords Cable,China PISM C13S 3m 3 -
411 AC Power 250V10A, F cores
04 3.0m,PISM,
227IEC53-1.0mm2(3C),C13
SF,Black
040 - Power Cable,America AC PBSM C13S 3m 3 -
207 Power Cable,125V10A, F cores
28 3.0m,PBSM,
18SJT(3C),C13SF,Black
040 - Power cord,Europe AC PFSM C13S 3m 3 -
410 Power Cable,250V10A, F cores
56 3.0m,PFSM,(H05VVF
1.0mm2(3C)),C13SF,250V,
10A,BLack
040 - Power Cable,Britain AC PGAM C13S 3m 3 -
408 Power Cable 250V10A, F cores
90 3.0m,PGAM ,H05VV-
F-1.0mm2(3C),C13SF,Black
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 202
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
Par Mod Description Connec Con Len Num Fire
t el tor X1 nect gth ber Rati
Nu or of ng
mb X2 Core
er s
040 - Power Cable,Japan AC PBSM C13S 3m 3 -
408 Power Cable 125V12A, F cores
87 3.0m,PBSM,HVCTF-1.25m
m2(3C),C13SF,Black
040 - Power cord,BS546 PM- C13S 3m 3 -
408 250V10A,3.0m,PM- IAM F cores
89 IAM,H05VV-
F-1.5mm2(3C),C13SF,250V,
10A,Black
040 - Power Cords PISM C13S 3m 3 -
408 Cable,Australia AC Power F cores
88 Cable,250V 10A,
3.0m,PISM,H05VV-
F-1.0mm2(3C),C13SF,Black
040 - Power Cable,Switzerland PJSM C13S 3m 3 -
411 AC Power Cable 250V10A, F cores
19 3.0m,PJSM ,H05VV-
F-1.0mm2(3C),C13SF,Black
040 - Power Cable,Italy AC PLSM C13S 3m 3 -
411 Power Cable 250V10A, F cores
20 3.0m,PLSM,H05VV-
F-1.0mm2(3C),C13SF,Black
040 - Power Cords PISM C13S 3m 3 -
477 Cable,Argentina AC Power F cores
85 250V10A,
3.0m,PISM,H05VV-
F-1.0mm2(3C),C13SF,Black
041 - Power Cable,Brazil AC PNSM C13S 3m 3 -
502 Power Cable 250V10A, F cores
58 3.0m,PNSM ,H05VV-
F-1.0mm2(3C),C13SF,Black
040 - Power Cords Cable,Korea PFSM C13S 3m 3 -
5G0 AC Power 250V10A, F cores
28 3m,PFSM,H05VV-F
3*1.0mm2(3C),C13SF,Black
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 203
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
Par Mod Description Connec Con Len Num Fire
t el tor X1 nect gth ber Rati
Nu or of ng
mb X2 Core
er s
040 - Power Cords PKSM C13S 3m 3 -
5G0 Cable,Denmark AC Power F cores
2K 250V10A,
3m,PKSM,H05VV-
F-3*1.0mm2(3C),C13SF,Bla
ck
040 - Power Cords Cable,India PM- C13S 3m 3 -
510 AC Power 250V10A, IIAM F cores
35 3.0m,PM-IIAM,IS
694-1.0mm2(3C), C13 SF,
250V,10A,Black
040 - Power cord,South Africa PMAM C13S 3m 3 -
510 AC Power 250V10A, F cores
80 3m,PMAM,H05VV-
F-1.0mm2(3C),C13SF,250V,
10A,Black
040 - Power cord,Taiwan AC PBSM C13S 3m 3 -
521 125V11A, F cores
37 3.0m,PBSM,HVCTF
3*1.25mm2,C13SF,125V,
11A,Black,BSMI
3.3.2 Fiber Jumper
Overview
A fiber jumper consists of one or more optical fibers of a certain length and the
optical connectors at both ends. A fiber jumper connects an optical module to a
fiber terminal box.
Comply with the following rules when selecting fiber jumpers:
1. Determine the length of fiber jumpers based on the onsite cabling distance.
2. Determine the fiber type based on the optical module type.
– Use a multimode fiber jumper for a multimode optical module.
– Use a single-mode fiber jumper for a single-mode optical module.
3. Determine the optical connector type based on the port type.
Ensure that the optical connector at each end of a fiber jumper is the same
type as the port to which it will be connected.
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 204
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
NO TICE
The optical transmission module of the multi-transverse mode needs to be
connected to the multi-mode fiber. The optical transmitting module in single-
longitudinal or multi-longitudinal mode needs to be connected to the single-
mode fiber.
Optical Fiber
Optical fibers are classified into single-mode fibers and multimode fibers.
● Single-mode fibers have a diameter of 5 μm to 10 μm and transmit laser in
one mode under a specified wavelength. These fibers support a wide
frequency band and a large transmission capacity, so they are used for long-
distance transmission. Most single-mode fibers are yellow, as shown in Figure
3-23.
● Multimode fibers have a diameter of 50 μm or 62.5 μm and transmit laser in
multiple modes with a specified wavelength. These fibers have a lower
transmission capacity than single-mode fibers and are used for short-distance
transmission. Model dispersion occurs during transmission over multimode
fibers.
In the latest cabling infrastructure of ISO/IEC 11801, multimode fibers are
classified into four categories: OM1, OM2, OM3, and OM4.
– OM1: traditional 62.5 μm/125 μm multimode fibers. OM1 fibers have a
large core diameter and numerical aperture, and provide high light
gathering ability and bending resistance.
– OM2: traditional 50 μm/125 μm multimode fibers. OM2 fibers have a
small core diameter and numerical aperture. Compared with OM1 fibers,
OM2 fibers provide higher bandwidth because they significantly reduce
the modal dispersion. When transmitting data at 1 Gbit/s with 850 nm
wavelength, OM1 and OM2 fibers support maximum link lengths of 220
m and 550 m, respectively. OM1 and OM2 fibers can provide sufficient
bandwidth within a distance of 300 m. Generally, OM1 and OM2 fibers
are orange, as shown in Figure 3-24.
– OM3: new-generation multimode fibers, with longer transmission
distances than OM1 and OM2 fibers.
– OM4: laser optimized multimode fibers with 50 μm core diameter. OM4
is an improvement to OM3 and only increases the modal bandwidth.
OM4 fibers provide 4700 MHz*km of modal bandwidth, whereas OM3
fibers provide only 2000 MHz*km of modal bandwidth. Generally, OM3
and OM4 fibers are light green. You can identify OM3 and OM4 fibers by
their labels or printed marks.
Figure 3-22 shows an LC/PC optical connector.
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 205
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
Figure 3-22 LC/PC optical connector
NO TICE
When connecting or removing an LC/PC optical connector, align the connector
with the optical port and do not rotate the fiber. Pay attention to the following
points:
● To connect a fiber, align the optical connector with the optical port and gently
insert the optical fiber into the port.
● To remove a fiber, press the clip on the connector, push the connector inward
slightly, and pull the fiber out.
Appearance
Figure 3-23 shows the appearance of an LC single-mode fiber.
Figure 3-23 Appearance of an LC single-mode fiber
Figure 3-24 shows the appearance of an LC multimode fiber.
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 206
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
Figure 3-24 Appearance of an LC multimode fiber
3.3.3 Ethernet Cable
Overview
Ethernet cables are also referred to as network cables and can be classified into
straight-through cables and crossover cables according to the connection sequence
of the copper cores in the cables.
The Ethernet service interfaces on the equipment support Auto MDI-X to the
straight-through cables and crossover cables. Hence, you can connect either type
of the network cables to the Ethernet service interfaces as required.
NO TE
Ethernet cables need to be made on site.
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 207
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
Appearance
Figure 3-25 Appearance of the network cable
Cable Pinouts
Table 3-142 Pin assignment of the straight-through cable connector
Connector X1 Pin Connector X2 Pin Color Relation
X1.1 X2.1 White-orange Twisted pair
X1.2 X2.2 Orange
X1.3 X2.3 White-green Twisted pair
X1.6 X2.6 Green
X1.4 X2.4 Blue Twisted pair
X1.5 X2.5 White-blue
X1.7 X2.7 White-brown Twisted pair
X1.8 X2.8 Brown
Table 3-143 Pin assignment of the crossover cable connector
Connector X1 Pin Connector X2 Pin Color Relation
X1.1 X2.3 White-orange Twisted pair
X1.2 X2.6 Orange
X1.3 X2.1 White-green Twisted pair
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 208
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
Connector X1 Pin Connector X2 Pin Color Relation
X1.6 X2.2 Green
X1.4 X2.4 Blue Twisted pair
X1.5 X2.5 White-blue
X1.7 X2.7 White-brown Twisted pair
X1.8 X2.8 Brown
Technical Specifications
Table 3-144 Technical specifications of the straight-through cable
Descr Twisted-Pair Cable, 100ohm, Category 5e, STP, 0.52mm, 24AWG, 8Cores,
iptio 4Pairs, PANTONE 430U
n
Conn Network Interface Connector, 8-Bit 8PIN, Shielded, Crystal Model
ector Connector, 24-26AWG, Leads Single Solide Cable
X1
Conn Network Interface Connector, 8-Bit 8PIN, Shielded, Crystal Model
ector Connector, 24-26AWG, Leads Single Solide Cable
X2
Leng 1m,3m,5m,10m,20m,30m
th
Inner 0.52mm
Diam
eter
Num 8 Cores
ber
of
Cores
Table 3-145 Technical specifications of the crossover cable
Descr Twisted-Pair Cable, 100ohm, Category 5e, STP, 0.52mm, 24AWG, 8Cores,
iptio 4Pairs, PANTONE 430U
n
Conn Network Interface Connector, 8-Bit 8PIN, Shielded, Crystal Model
ector Connector, 24-26AWG, Leads Single Solide Cable
X1
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 209
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
Conn Network Interface Connector, 8-Bit 8PIN, Shielded, Crystal Model
ector Connector, 24-26AWG, Leads Single Solide Cable
X2
Leng 2m,3m,5m,10m,20m,30m
th
Inner 0.52mm
Diam
eter
Num 8 Cores
ber
of
Cores
3.3.4 Chassis Ground Cable
Overview
One end of a chassis ground cable is connected to the ground screw on the right-
side cabinet column, and the other end is connected to the ground screw on the
chassis.
Appearance
Figure1 shows the appearance of chassis ground cable.
Figure 3-26 Appearance of chassis ground cable.
1. OT one-hole naked crimping connector
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 210
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
Technical Specifications
Table 3-146 Technical specifications of chassis ground cable
Part Mo Description Con Connec Le Nu Fire
Nu del nec tor X2 ngt mbe Rating
mb tor h r of
er X1 Cor
es
250 CPG Electronic|Electric Cable, 141 141700 10 - IEC
306 N01 450V/750V,H07Z-K 700 56: m 60332-
98 001 UL3386,10mm2,Yellow/ 16: Naked 1
Green,80A,LSZH Nak Crimpin &VW-1
Cable,VDE,UL ed g
Cri Termina
mpi l,OT,
ng 10mm2,
Ter M8,Tin
min Plating,
al,O Naked
T, Ring
10 Termina
mm l
2,M
6,Ti
n
Plati
ng,
Nak
ed
Rin
g
Ter
min
al
3.3.5 Management Cable
A device uses Ethernet interfaces to input or output network management signals.
Both the management network interface MGMT-ETH and management serial
interface Console use RJ-45 connectors. Table 3-147 and Table 3-148 describe the
pins of the MGMT-ETH and Console interfaces, respectively.
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 211
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
Table 3-147 MGMT-ETH interface
Connector Pin Description
1 Transmit positive of the MGMT-ETH
interface
2 Transmit negative of the MGMT-ETH
interface
3 Receive positive of the MGMT-ETH
interface
6 Receive negative of the MGMT-ETH
interface
4 Not defined
5 Not defined
7 Not defined
8 Not defined
Table 3-148 CONSOLE interface
Connector Pin Description
1 Not defined
2 Not defined
3 Transmit end of the Console interface
4 Not defined
5 Ground end of the Console interface
6 Receive end of the Console interface
7 Not defined
8 Not defined
Management Network Interface Cable
When the MGMT-ETH interface functions as a management network interface, an
Ethernet cable is used as the management cable to implement communication
between the device and network management computer.
The MGMT-ETH interface supports auto-sensing of the straight-through cable
mode and crossover cable mode. For details about Ethernet cables, see Hardware
Description > Cables > Ethernet Cable.
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 212
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
Console Interface Cable
The panel of the device has an independent Console interface. The console
interface uses a serial cable as the management cable to implement
communication between the device and the network management computer.
Figure 3-27 shows the serial cable.
Figure 3-27 Standard serial cable (04040838 - Single Cable,Serial Port Cable,
3m,D9F,CC2P0.32PWG1U,MP8-VI,S3026V)
Table 3-149 describes the pin assignment of a serial cable.
Table 3-149 Pin assignment of a serial cable
Connector X1 Connector X2 Pin Color Description
Pin
X1.4 X2.5 White and green Ground end of
the Console
interface
X1.5 X2.6 Green Receive end of
the Console
interface
X1.8 X2.3 White and blue Transmit end of
the Console
interface
NO TICE
To use a USB-to-Ethernet serial cable, you need to download the driver from the
website http://www.wch-ic.com/products/CH340.html and configure the driver
as required.
3.3.6 USB-to-Ethernet Cable
This section describes the structure and technical specifications of the USB-to-
Ethernet cable.
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 213
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
Overview
One end of a USB-to-Ethernet cable is a USB port used to connect to a client, and
the other end is split into two RJ45 connectors used to connect to routers. The two
RJ45 connectors include one standard console port and one non-standard console
port. Pin assignment for the two ports is different. For details, see Table 1.
Appearance
Figure 3-28 Structure of the USB-to-Ethernet cable
Pin Assignment
Table 3-150 Pin assignment of the USB-to-Ethernet cable
Wire Rela Colo Desc Start Conv End Desc Colo Rela Wire
tion r ripti Pin erter Pin ripti r tion
on on
W3- Pair Whit +5V X1.1 USB X2.6 RS23 Blue Pair W1-
Main e DC to 2_RX Labe
Labe RS23 l 1
l Blue Data X1.2 2 X2.3 RS23 Whit (RS2
- conv 2_TX e 32)
Pair Oran Data X1.3 ersio X2.5 GND Oran -
ge + n ge
Whit GND X1.4 X3.5 RS23 Blue Pair W2-
e 2_RX Labe
l 2
- - - - - X3.8 RS23 Whit (Spe
2_TX e cial
- - - - - X3.4 GND Oran - RS23
ge 2)
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 214
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
Technical Specifications
Table 3-151 Technical specifications of the USB-to-Ethernet cable
Part Mod Description Conn Conn Leng Nu Fire
Num el ector ector th mbe Ratin
ber X1 X2 r of g
Core
s
0407 - Signal Cable,USB-to- USB- MP8- 1.5 m - -
1851 Ethernet cable, A(Ma II
1.5m,USB- le)
A(Male),CC2P0.48B(S),
2*MP8-II
NO TICE
To use the USB-to-Ethernet serial cable, download the driver from the website and
configure the driver as required. Download the driver from http://www.wch-
ic.com/search?q=CH340&t=downloads.
3.4 Power Distribution
3.4.1 PDC120S12-CN (DC-DC Module,120W,-40degC,
65degC,-72V,28.8V,11.4V-12.6V,12V/10A,0,2000uF)
Overview
Table 3-152 Basic information about the PDC120S12-CN
Item Details
Description DC-DC Module,120W,-40degC,
65degC,-72V,28.8V,11.4V-12.6V,12V/
10A,0,2000uF
Part Number 02270211
Model PDC120S12-CN
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 215
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
Appearance
Figure 3-29 Appearance of the PDC120S12-CN (PDC120S12-CN)
Version Mapping
Table 3-153 Mappings between PDC120S12-CN and product
Product First Supported Unsupported Limitations
Version Model
NetEngine A821 E V800R022C00SPC - -
600
NetEngine A822 E V800R022C00SPC - -
600
NetEngine A813 E V800R022C00SPC - -
600
Functions and Features
Table 3-154 Functions and features of the PDC120S12-CN
Functions and Features Description
Input overvoltage protection In this protection state, the power
module stops supplying power to a
device and can automatically recover.
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 216
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
Functions and Features Description
Input undervoltage protection In this protection state, the power
module stops supplying power to a
device and can automatically recover.
Output overcurrent protection When overcurrent occurs, the output
enters the hiccup mode. When
overcurrent is cleared, the output
automatically recovers.
Output overvoltage protection When output overvoltage occurs, the
output enters the hiccup protection
mode. After the fault is rectified, the
output automatically recovers.
Technical Specifications
Table 3-155 Technical specifications of the PDC120S12-CN
Item Specification
Dimensions without packaging (H x W 40 mm x 50 mm × 165 mm (1.57 in. x
x D) [mm(in.)] 1.97 in. x 6.50 in.)
Weight without packaging [kg(lb)] 0.5 kg (1.10 lb)
Installation type Installing to the CPE power adapter
bracket
Rated input voltage [V] 1. –48 V/–60 V
2. +24 V
3. +48 V
NOTE
Do not connect the positive and negative
power systems at the same time.
Input voltage range [V] 1. –72 V to –38.4 V
2. +19 V to +30 V
3. +38.4 V to +72 V
Rated output voltage [V] 12 V
Output voltage range [V] 11.64 V DC to 12.36 V DC
Maximum input current [A] 4 A
Maximum output current [A] 1. –72 V to –38.4 V: 10 A
2. +19 V to +30 V: 5 A
3. +38.4 V to +72 V: 10 A
Number of inputs 2
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 217
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
Item Specification
Number of outputs 1
Front-end circuit breaker/fuse [A] 6 A
Input terminal 4-pin phoenix terminal
Output terminal 3-pin common connector
Long-term operating temperature -40°C to 65°C(-40°F to 149°F)
[°C(°F)]
Storage temperature [°C(°F)] –40°C to +70°C (–40°F to +158°F)
Long-term operating relative humidity 5% to 95% (non-condensing)
[RH]
Storage relative humidity [RH] 5% to 95% (non-condensing)
Long-term operating altitude [m(ft.)] -60 m to 5000 m (When the altitude
ranges from 1800 m to 5000 m, the
operating temperature decreases by
1°C for each additional 200 m.)
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 218
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement
4 Hardware Installation and Parts
Replacement
4.1 Hardware installation and maintenance
4.1 Hardware installation and maintenance
4.1.1 Installation Guide
4.1.1.1 Equipment Installation Process
This section describes the general equipment installation process. Before installing
equipment, you need to determine the installation mode according to installation
environment. After unpacking and inspecting the equipment, you need to install
the chassis, fibers, and cables in sequence, and then check the installation result.
After determining that the installation is correct, you can power on the equipment
and then check fiber connections.
Table 4-1 lists the general installation process.
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 219
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement
Table 4-1 Equipment installation process
Installation Process Description
Before installation, plan installation
space, build telecommunications
rooms, and determine the installation
mode according to requirements of the
equipment for running environment.
This ensures that the equipment can
Installation preparation
be properly installed and
commissioned, and then can run
stably. For details on the requirements
of the equipment for running
environment, see 4.1.1.2 Installation
Preparation.
When a project starts, the project
supervisor needs to work with the
Unpacking and inspecting equipment customer to unpack and inspect the
delivered equipment. For details, see
4.1.1.3.1 Unpacking Inspection.
The installation modes for chassis vary
with installation environment. For
Installing chassis
details, see 4.1.1.3.2 Installing
chassis.
The installation modes for fibers and
Installing fibers and cables cables in chassis vary with installation
environment.
After hardware installation is
complete, check the installation to
Checking installation
ensure that the equipment can run
stably.
Before powering on the equipment,
check the external power supply to
ensure proper voltage and fuse
Powering on the equipment capacity. After powering on the
equipment, observe the indicators to
determine whether the equipment
runs properly.
During installation of fiber jumpers,
the fiber jumpers may be incorrectly
connected or attenuate much optical
power. To avoid impacts on services,
check fiber jumper connections after
Checking fiber connections
the fiber jumpers are routed from
optical interfaces to the optical
distribution frame (ODF). For details,
see 4.1.1.3.4 Checking Tail Fiber
Connection.
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 220
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement
4.1.1.2 Installation Preparation
Before installation, plan installation space, build telecommunications rooms, and
determine the installation mode according to requirements of the equipment for
running environment. This ensures that the equipment can be properly installed
and commissioned, and then can run stably. The equipment can run in various
environment, and the running environment can be classified into three types, that
is, running environment A, B, and C. This section describes the three types of
environment.
For the requirements for running environment, see Product Description Technical
Specifications and Environmental Requirements.
In environment A, B, and C, installation modes are different. For details on how to
choose equipment installation modes and references, see Table 4-2.
Table 4-2 Running environment and installation modes
Running Installation
Description Example Reference
Environment Mode
For details on
the
The
Indoor Standard installation
equipment is
environment central mode, see
installed in a
Running where telecommunic 4.1.1.2.1
19-inch
environment temperature ations room Requirement
cabinet, an
A and humidity or s for Running
N63E cabinet,
are under communicatio Environment
or a T63
control n shelter A and
cabinet.
Installation
Planning.
Indoor Wall in the
environment corridor
For details on
where
the
temperature
installation
and humidity
mode, see
are partially The
4.1.1.2.2
under control equipment
Room where Requirement
Running or without can be
temperature s for Running
environment control, or installed in a
is not under Environment
B common standard
control such B and
outdoor network
as an attic in Installation
environment cabinet.
a residential Planning for
with a simple
building details on the
shelter such
installation
as an awning,
mode.
where
humidity
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 221
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement
Running Installation
Description Example Reference
Environment Mode
Simple
telecommunic
ations room,
telecommunic
ations room
reconstructed
from a
cottage, or
telecommunic
ations room
reconstructed
from a
common
residential
building
reaches 100% (In such a
occasionally telecommunic
ations room,
air
conditioners
and mains are
available, but
sealing
conditions are
poor.)
Public area
inside a
residential
building such
as a stairwell
or cleaning
tool room
● Outdoor
area close
to a For details on
pollution the
source The installation
equipment mode, see
Outdoor or
Running ● Environme can be 4.1.1.2.3
an attic in a
environment nt close to installed in a Requirement
residential
C a pollution standard s for Running
building
source outdoor Environment
with only cabinet C and
simple Installation
shields Planning.
such as
awnings
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 222
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement
Running Installation
Description Example Reference
Environment Mode
● Place on
the sea
NOTE
An area close
to a pollution
source refers
to an area
where saline
water such as
the sea or a
salina is
within 3.7 km
away from it,
where a heavy
pollution
source such as
For details on
a Area The
metallurgical the
complying equipment
plant, coal installation
with can be
mine, or mode, see
thermal environment installed in an
4.1.1.2.3
power plant is B but close to outdoor
Requirement
within 3 km the sea or a cabinet with
s for Running
away from it, pollution an air
where a Environment
source conditioner or
medium C and
heat
pollution Underground Installation
source such as garage exchanger
a chemical Planning.
plant, a
rubber plant,
or an
electroplating
factory is
within 2 km
away from it,
or where a
light pollution
source such as
a food factory,
leather
factory, or
heating boiler
is within 1 km
away from it.
4.1.1.2.1 Requirements for Running Environment A and Installation Planning
This section describes the requirements for running environment A (environment
under full control) and requirements for installation planning.
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 223
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement
Equipment Room Environment Requirements
The equipment room where the router equipment is installed must be able to
provide an equipment operating environment that meets the ETSI EN 300 019-1-3
class3.2 standard at least.
A good operation environment is the key to guarantee safe operation of the OptiX
transmission equipment. Therefore, the equipment room should not be located in
any area with high temperature, heavy dust, poisonous gas, dangerous explosives,
low pressure, serious vibration or loud noises. Moreover, it should be built away
from the general step-down electrical substations and traction substations. When
designing the project, you need to consider the hydrographic, geological, seismic
and traffic factors according to the communication network planning and
communication technology, so as to choose the place that meets the environment
design requirement.
The engineering design in terms of construction, structure, heating, ventilation,
power supply, lighting and fire fighting should comply with the environment
requirements for optical synchronous transmission equipment. It should also
comply with the international standards and specifications related to industrial
enterprise, environment protection, fire fighting, and human protection, as well as
the regulations and requirements for constructing and designing buildings.
Site requirements are as follows:
● The altitude should be within the range of -60 m to 4000 m.
● The site should be kept away from pollution sources. For sources of heavy
pollution such as the smeltery and coal mine, keep a distance of 5 km. For
sources of medium pollution such as the chemical, rubber and galvanization
industries, keep a distance of 3.7 km. For sources of light pollution such as
food and tanner industries, keep a distance of 2 km. If these sources of
pollution cannot be avoided, the equipment room must be in the perennial
upwind direction of the pollution sources. In addition, quality equipment room
or protection product must be adopted.
● The ventilation port for air exchange of the equipment room must be kept
away from the exhaust of city waste pipes, big cesspools and sewage
treatment tanks. The equipment room should be kept in the positive pressure
state lest the corrosive gases enter the equipment room and erode
components and circuit boards.
● The equipment room should be kept away from the industrial and heating
boilers.
● The equipment room is located on the second floor or the higher floor. If this
requirement cannot be satisfied, the ground for equipment installation in the
equipment room shall be at least 600 mm above the maximum flood level in
the local record.
● The equipment room should be kept away from livestock farms. If this
requirement cannot be satisfied, it should be located in the perennial upwind
direction of the livestock farms.
● The equipment room should be kept 3.7 km away from the seaside or salt
lake. If this requirement cannot be satisfied, the equipment room should be
airtight with cooling facilities. In addition, the alkalized soil cannot be used as
the construction material. Otherwise, the equipment applicable in atrocious
environment must be adopted.
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 224
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement
● The historical livestock room or the chemical fertilizer warehouse cannot be
used as the equipment room.
● The equipment room should be solid enough to withstand wind and
downpour.
● The equipment room should be kept away from the road or sand field with
dusts flying around. If this requirement cannot be satisfied, the windows and
doors of the equipment room should be kept away from the sources of
pollution.
● The equipment room should not be placed near any water source. If this
cannot be avoided, the equipment room must be closed, with an air
conditioning system installed.
● Mechanical stress requirements
Item Subitem Range
Random vibration Acceleration 0.02 m2/s3
Frequency ● 5 Hz to 10 Hz
● 10 Hz to 50 Hz
● 50 Hz to 100 Hz
dB/oct -12 to +12
Layout of Equipment Room
This section describes the principles of the overall layout of the equipment room.
The communication equipment room houses a complete set of communication
transmission equipment, for example, SPC switching equipment, power supply,
and so on. They should be arranged compactly for ease of maintenance and
management. Figure 4-1 shows a typical layout of the equipment room.
Figure 4-1 Layout of the equipment room
The principles for layout of the equipment room are as follows:
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 225
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement
● Meet the requirements for wiring and maintaining the communication cable
and power cable.
● Avoid line roundabout for convenient maintenance, thus lowering the cable
cost, reducing communication failures and improving the work efficiency.
● Install the transmission equipment in a separate room close to the MDF room,
or near the switch.
Construction of the Equipment Room
This topic describes the requirements for the construction of the equipment room.
The construction of the equipment room shall meet the requirements listed in
Table 4-3.
Table 4-3 Construction requirements for the equipment room
Item Requirements
Area The equipment room should be able to house all the devices
of the terminal office at least.
Net height Minimum indoor height refers to the net height under the roof
beam or under the ventilation pipe. Normally it is no less than
3 m.
Indoor floor The floor of the equipment room should be semi-conductive
and not dust-arousing. Generally, ESD raised floor is required.
The floor boards should be laid tightly and firmly. For each
square meter of floor space, the horizontal tolerance should
not be greater than 2 mm. If no raised floor is available,
electrostatic conductive floor material with a volume resistivity
ranging 1.0x107 ohms·cm - 1.0x1010 ohms·cm should be laid.
The electrostatic conductive floor material or the ESD raised
floor should be grounded well. It can be connected to the
grounding device through a current limiting resistor and a
connection wire. Resistance of the current limiting resistor
should be 1 megaohm.
NOTICE
If thermal insulation cotton is required under the support for the floor,
or an ESD raised floor is required, do not use the thermal insulation
cotton and the ESD raised floor containing sulfur to prevent devices
from being corroded.
Load-bearing >450 kg/m2
capacity of
floor
Doors and Doors are single-leaf, 2 m high and 1 m wide. All doors and
windows windows should be sealed with dust-proof rubber strips.
Double-layer glass is recommended for windows.
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 226
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement
Item Requirements
Wall The wall can be covered with wallpaper or lusterless paint, but
not the paint that is apt to get pulverized or peeled.
NOTICE
If organic materials such as soundproof cotton are required, use
materials that do not contain sulfur.
Indoor ducts Indoor ducts are used for cabling. The inside of the ducts
should be smooth and clean. The reserved length and width
(margins) as well as the number, position and size of the holes
should comply with the relevant requirements for placing the
optical synchronous transmission equipment.
Water supply The service pipes, drain pipes and rain pipes should not pass
and drainage through the equipment room. Fire hydrants should not be
placed in the equipment room, but in corridors or the place
near the staircase where they can be easily seen and accessed
to.
Waterproof The equipment should be kept away from indoor places with
requirement water sources, such as the air conditioner external units, water
pipes, and ducts.
Internal The place where the equipment is installed is separated from
partition wall the equipment room door. The partition wall can hold back
some dusts, as be shown in Figure 4-2.
Installation The air conditioner should be installed in the place where the
position of the discharged air from the air conditioner shall not be directed to
air conditioner the equipment. The air conditioner must be away from a
window to prevent the air conditioner blowing moisture on the
window to devices in the equipment room when the window is
not securely closed.
Other In addition to the rodent-proof measures (for example,
requirements measures against mice), measures against proliferation of
fungi and mildew should be taken in the equipment room.
When there is high humidity such as on rainy days, do not
open the door of the equipment room to prevent moisture
increase that may be condensed into water on cold surfaces of
the devices in the equipment room.
Storage batteries must be placed separately from devices in
the equipment room.
In the equipment room, do not use organic materials such as
thermal insulation cotton that contains sulfur or chlorine and
rubber gaskets. PEF thermal insulation cotton can be used as a
thermal insulation material.
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 227
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement
Figure 4-2 Internal partition wall of the equipment room
Cleanliness of the Equipment Room
This section describes the requirements for the cleanness of the equipment room.
Dust on the equipment may lead to electrostatic adherence, and consequently
result in poor connection between metal connectors or connecting points. This will
reduce the service life of the equipment, and even makes it faulty.
To ensure long-term and reliable equipment operating, reduce dust particles in the
equipment room.
Table 4-4 shows the specifications for the density and diameter of dust particles
in the equipment room.
Table 4-4 Mechanical active substance
Mechanical Active Substance Content
Suspended dust ≤ 0.4 mg/m3
Deposited dust ≤ 15 mg/(m2·h)
Gravel ≤ 300 mg/m3
The equipment room shall be guarded against dust and corrosion by harmful
gases such as SO2, H2S, NH3, NO2, and CL2. Corrosive Gas Control Requirements
shows the limits for them.
To meet the above requirements, take the following measures:
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 228
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement
● Keep the equipment room far away from pollution sources and do not smoke
in the equipment room.
● Seal the doors and windows.
● Use dustproof materials for the floor, walls, and roof.
● Install screen doors and screen windows. Ensure that the outer windows are
dustproof.
● Always wear clean lab coat and protective footwear before getting into the
equipment room.
● Cover the ceiling and walls of the equipment room with wallpapers or
lusterless paint (pulverized paint prohibited) to prevent dust flake-off.
Air cleanness requirements
● The air is free from explosive, electric-conductive, magnetic-conductive, or
corrosive dust.
● The concentrations of mechanically active substances meet the requirements
defined in the following table.
Mechanically Concentration
Active
Substance
Suspended dust ≤ 5.00 mg/m3
Deposited dust ≤ 20.0 mg/(m2·h)
Gravel ≤ 300 mg/m3
● The concentrations of chemically active substances meet the requirements
defined in the following table.
Chemically Monthly Average Concentration
Active
Substance
3
SO2 ≤ 0.30 mg/m
3
H2S ≤ 0.10 mg/m
3
NO2 ≤ 0.50 mg/m
HF ≤ 0.01 mg/m3
3
NH3 ≤ 1.00 mg/m
3
Cl2 ≤ 0.10 mg/m
HCl ≤ 0.10 mg/m3
3
O3 ≤ 0.05 mg/m
Biological environment requirements
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 229
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement
– Ensure that the location where the equipment is stored is free from
microbial infestation.
– There are no rodents, such as mice.
Temperature and Humidity
This section describes the requirements for the relative humidity and ambient
temperature in the equipment room.
Item Description
Temperature -40ºC to +70ºC (-40ºF to +158ºF)
Relative humidity 5% to 100%
Temperature ≤ 1ºC/min
change rate
Atmospheric 70 kPa to 106 kPa
pressure
Solar radiation ≤ 1120 W/m2
Heat radiation ≤ 600 W/m2
NO TICE
It is recommended that the storage environment humidity be less than 60%.
● If the humidity of the storage environment is greater than 90%, it is
recommended that the storage duration be less than one month and the
installation be completed within one month after the device arrives.
● If the humidity of the storage environment is greater than 70%, it is
recommended that the storage period be less than or equal to two months and
the installation be completed within two months after the device is delivered.
Proper temperature and humidity should be maintained inside the equipment
room for the transmission equipment to work well constantly, as shown in
Hardware Description Technical Specifications .
Corrosive Gas Control Requirements
This topic describes the requirements for the corrosive gases in the equipment
room.
Besides dust-proof efforts, measures should be taken to prevent the equipment
room from being corroded by harmful gases, for example, SO2, H2S, NH3 and so
on. Table 4-5 shows the content limit on corrosive gases.
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 230
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement
Table 4-5 Corrosive gas content specification
Item Unit Monthly Average
Content
3
SO2 mg/m ≤ 0.30
3
H2S mg/m ≤ 0.10
3
NH3 mg/m ≤ 1.0
3
Cl2 mg/m ≤ 0.10
3
N02 mg/m ≤ 0.50
HF mg/m3 ≤ 0.01
3
O3 mg/m ≤ 0.05
To fulfill the above requirements, take the following measures for the equipment
room:
● Build the equipment room away from places with high-density corrosive gases
such as mines, metallurgical plants, tire plants, rubber plants, and chemical
plants.
● Keep the equipment room far away from sewers, effluent pipes, shafts,
dumps, and septic tanks. The air intake of the equipment room should be at
the opposite side to the pollution source.
● Do not use sulfur-containing organic materials to decorate the equipment
room. These materials include ESD pads, thermal insulation cotton, and
soundproof cotton that are made up from sulfur-containing rubber.
● Do not store diesels or gasoline engines in the equipment room where devices
are placed. When an oil-fired engine is outside the equipment room, ensure
that the exhaust of the engine is in the downstream direction of the
equipment room and the engine is far away from the air intake vent of the air
conditioner for the equipment room.
● Place storage batteries isolated from one another. You are suggested to put
one battery in a room.
● Make an agreement with a professional monitoring company to monitor the
environment regularly.
Electromagnetic Requirements
This section describes the electromagnetic conditions and the measures for
suppressing electromagnetic interferences.
The electromagnetic requirements are showed in Table 4-6.
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 231
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement
Table 4-6 Electromagnetic specification
Item Parameter
Low frequency magnetic Frequency (Hz) 50 to 20 000
field
Ampl. A/m (rms) 10 to 0.025
Amplitude modulation Frequency (MHz) 0.009 to1000
radiated electromagnetic
fields Ampl. V/m (rms) 3
Pulse modulation Frequency (GHz) 1 to 20
radiated electromagnetic
fields Ampl. (V/m (peak)) 3
To suppress electromagnetic interferences, take the following measures:
● Build the equipment room way from electric transformers, high-voltage power
lines and other equipment or devices with high current. For example, you may
build it 20 meters or more away from the transformer, or more than 50
meters from high-voltage power lines.
● Build the room way from high-power radio transmitters. For example, build it
at a place free of high-power radio transmitters within 500 meters.
● If there is a mobile communication transmitter in the comprehensive building,
make sure its interference level complies with the corresponding standard.
Shielding and isolation measures can be taken for further protection if
necessary.
● Release and execute stipulations that forbid any personnel using wireless
handy communication devices close to equipment in the equipment room.
ESD Protection
This section describes the requirements for the ESD prevention and the preventive
measures for the equipment room.
The absolute static voltage value should be less than 2000 V.
To fulfill this requirement, take the following measures:
● Train the operators on ESD prevention.
● Control the humidity in the room to reduce the impact from static electricity.
● Lay ESD floor in the room.
● Wear ESD shoes and uniforms before entering the room.
● Use ESD tools such as ESD wrist straps, ESD tweezers and extraction tools
when dealing with the equipment.
● Ground all conducting materials in the room, including computer terminals.
● Use ESD worktables.
● Keep non-ESD materials (such as common bags, foams, and rubbers) at least
30 cm away from boards and ESD-sensitive components.
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 232
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement
Surge Protection and Grounding Requirements
This section describes the requirements for surge protection and grounding.
Table 4-7 shows the requirements for surge protection and grounding.
Table 4-7 Requirements for surge protection and grounding
Item Description
On structure of the equipment room Build the equipment room with steel
and concrete. The equipment room
should be equipped with facilities such
as surge protector to protect it against
direct lightning strokes. Make sure the
surge protection grounding of the
equipment room, or that of devices
such as the surge protector, shares the
same grounding body with the
protection grounding of the building
where the room is located in.
Use TN-S for AC power supply Equip the communication office with
special electric transformers and
metal-jacketed or insulation-jacketed
power cable. The power cable is to
pass through a steel pipe and buried in
the earth before entering the office.
Both ends of both the metal jacket
and the steel pipe should be grounded
by proximate. Make sure the buried
length is no less than 15 meters. Each
of the three live cables at the low-
voltage side of the AC transformer
should be equipped with a gapless zinc
oxide arrester respectively. The chassis,
the AC neutral cable of the low-
voltage side, and the metal jacket of
the cable connected to the chassis
should all proximately grounded.
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 233
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement
Item Description
Equip the incoming power cable with a After the AC low-voltage power cables
surge protector are led into the room, install the surge
protector for the power cables in the
AC voltage stabilizer and the AC power
distribution panel (box). Correctly
ground the surge protector nearby.
After the DC power cable is led into
the equipment room or outdoor
cabinet from outdoors or outside the
cabinet, install a power lightning
protection device for the DC power
cable. The lightning protection device
should be grounded in proximity. For
an equipment room in urban area,
install a power supply surge protector
with the nominal discharge current of
no less than 20 kA. For an equipment
room that is built in a suburb and
subject to lightning strikes, install a
power supply surge protector with the
nominal discharge current of more
than 60 kA. For an equipment room
that is built in a mountain area and
subject to frequent lightning strikes, or
in a separate high-rise building in a
city, install a power supply surge
protector with the nominal discharge
current of more than 100 kA. The
ground cable of the surge protector
should be no longer than 1 m (3.28
ft).
DC power supply grounding The working ground of the office, that
is, the anode of a -48 V DC power
supply or the cathode of a 24 V power
supply, should be led from the in-door
grounding bus line by proximate. The
ground cable should satisfy the
maximum load of the equipment. The
power supply facilities for the office
are to possess a DC working neutral
line, which is introduced from the
general grounding bus line or the
protection ground bar of the
equipment room.
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 234
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement
Item Description
Equipotent connection All communication equipment and
auxiliary equipment in the room such
as the mobile base station and the
transmitting, exchanging, power and
distribution frame should be
connected to the protection ground.
The protection grounding of all
equipment in the communication
office should share a same general
ground bar, while that of the same
equipment room all connect to the
same protection ground bar. The
working ground and protection ground
of the communication equipment in
the equipment room should adopt the
joint grounding mode, that is, they
share a same grounding network.
Protection grounding efforts should
also be done to the indoor cable tray,
equipment chassis, metal ventilation
pipe, metal door or window.
General requirements on grounding The AC neutral line cannot be
connected to the protection ground of
any communication equipment. Make
sure there is no fuse, switch or other
devices of the like on a grounding line.
All grounding lines should be as short
and straightforward as possible. Make
all efforts to avoid winding of them.
On the grounding resistor < 10 ohms. The upper end of the
grounding body should be 0.7 meters
or more underground. In cold areas,
the grounding body should be buried
in the frozen layer or lower. Make
regular monitor efforts on the
grounding resistor to make sure the
grounding is always valid.
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 235
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement
Item Description
On routing of the signal cable Signal cables should be led into the
communication office from
underground. Aerial routing of signal
cables is forbidden. The leadin or
leadout communication cable should
be metal-jacketed. Otherwise, they
should be routed in metal pipes. The
ground cable of the arrester should be
as short as possible. The empty pairs
in the cable should be connected to
the protection ground in the
equipment room.
Lightning-proof requirements of When the equipment is installed in an
outdoor cables outdoor cabinet, the cables connected
to the equipment may be exposed
outdoors. If the length of the exposed
cables exceeds 5 m, a signal lightning
protector must be installed on the
equipment.
On the grounding bus line The general grounding bus line can be
grounding loop or bar. The ground
cable should be not of aluminum
material. If interconnection occurs
between different metal connectors,
take measures to avoid by electric
chemical corrosion. Generally, the
cross-sectional area is a copper bar of
no less than 120 mm2 or zinc-plated
flat steel of the same resistance. The
grounding bus line should be kept
insulated from the construction steel.
On the grounding lead-in wire The grounding lead-in should be no
longer than 30 meter. As for the
material, it is recommended to use
zinc plated flat steel with the cross-
sectional area being 40 mm x 4 mm or
50 mm x 5 mm.
Power Supply
This section describes the DC power supply system.
The working power voltage for the equipment ranges from -38.4 V to -72 V. The
transmission equipment offers a transmission path for communication networks,
so its interruption will have a wide influence. Therefore, the DC power distribution
system should be protected against power failure and configured with storage
batteries. To deal with a long-term power outage, a diesel generator should be
equipped as the standby AC power supply for the backbone transmission
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 236
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement
equipment. The DC power supply system consists of storage battery, primary
power supply (rectifier), DC distributor and control panel.
Storage battery
Storage battery is an essential component of the DC power distribution system of
router equipment. Functionally, it serves to:
● Stabilize the voltage for the transmission equipment to work reliably.
● Store energy. In the case of outage of mains, the storage battery can feed
power for a period of time, which depends on its capacity, so that the
communication will not be interrupted immediately.
● Filter for large capacitors. The storage batteries are useful for absorbing surge
voltage from rectifiers and preventing noise and power frequency interference
from getting into the communication equipment.
● Automatically shut down. When the voltage of the storage battery drops to
below -43.2 V, the control circuit can automatically shut down the output.
The storage battery of router equipment is charged and discharges under a low,
constant voltage. Table 4-8 shows the relevant requirements:
Table 4-8 DC charge/discharge status and voltage requirements
Power Mains Battery DC Voltage Terminal The
Supply Supply Charge / Value Voltage of Number of
Categor Status Discharge Each Storage
y Storage Batteries
Battery in Each
Group
DC -48 V Normal Floating Floating charge 2.23 V 24 PCS
charged voltage reaches
by the 53.5 V.
rectifier
Outage Discharge Discharge 1.8 V
voltage reaches
43.2 V.
Resumed Under When the 2.35 V
loading charging
conditions, voltage reaches
automatic 56.4 V, it
ally automatically
charged changes to
with a constant
current 0.1 voltage mode,
to 0.15 that is changes
times of the charging
the status to
battery floating charge.
capacity.
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 237
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement
Primary power supply (rectifier)
● Primary power supplies shall be able to operate in parallel, and there should
be current equalizing device between them.
● The primary power supplies should be equipped with a current limiting device.
● The output voltage of the primary power supply should meet the requirement
for initial charging of storage batteries, that is 2.35 x 24= 56.4 V DC (when
the power supply is -48 V DC)
● A DC voltmeter and an ammeter should be installed for the primary power
supplies.
● The efficiency of the primary power supply should be more than 85% and its
power factor more than 0.8.
● Natural cooling is recommended for the primary power supply. The primary
power supply should be able to work continuously with full load within
0°C-40°C.
● The output noise voltage (measured with a psophometer, plus weighing
factors) of the primary power supply should meet the requirements shown in
Table 4-9.
● The primary power supply should be able to automatically shut down the
output at a low voltage.
Table 4-9 DC voltage specifications
Item DC Power Supply for Transmission Equipment
Nominal value (V) -48
Voltage fluctuation range -38.4 to-57.6
(V)
Noise 0 Hz-300Hz ≤ 400 mV (peak value)
voltage
300 Hz ≤ 2 mV (weighted noise of psophometer)
-3400Hz
3.4 kHz-150 Single frequency: ≤ 5mV Broadband: ≤
kHz effective value 100 mV
effective value
150 kHz-200 Single frequency: ≤ 3 mV Broadband: ≤
kHz effective value 30 mV
effective value
200 kHz-500 Single frequency: ≤ 2 mV
kHz effective value
500 kHz -30 Single frequency: ≤ 1 mV
MHz effective value
DC distributor and control panel
● The capacity of the primary power supply should be designed according to
the power consumption of the transmission equipment of the terminal office,
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 238
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement
and a certain margin should be reserved. Generally, high frequency switching
power supplies with a high switching efficiency should be adopted, which
should work in N+1 hot standby mode. There should be an output current
equalizer for each power module. The failure of a single power module will
not affect the normal operation of the whole DC power distribution system.
● Each control panel can access a minimum of two groups of storage batteries.
When one of them fails, the other can supply power instead.
● Each control panel can access a minimum of 5 primary power supplies.
● The power supply equipment should be capable of automation, so as to
satisfy the non-attendant requirement.
● When the primary power supply charges the storage batteries in floating
charge mode, the number of primary power supplies put into operation
depends on the load. When one primary power supply becomes faulty, it will
drop out automatically, while the standby primary power supply will
automatically go into operation.
● In the case of mains outage, storage batteries will discharge. When the mains
resumes, it will automatically recharge the discharged storage batteries with a
current 0.1 to 0.15 times of the battery capacity. When the charging voltage
reaches 56.4 V, it will automatically change to constant-voltage charging.
● When the storage batteries are fully charged, they will automatically change
to floating charge.
router equipment also has critical restriction on random transient noises, which
include the abnormal operation noise of the equipment caused by external
magnetic interference and the interference from the equipment itself and the
ground cables. The shorter the duration of the transient pulse, the larger values of
such transient noises can be allowed. For the allowable values, see Figure 4-3.
Figure 4-3 Transient noises
● When the power supply equipment fails or works abnormally, visual and
audible alarms should be given. Such alarm information should be sent to the
operation and maintenance center.
● In case short circuit occurs in a tributary of the power supply system, the
whole power distribution system should not be affected by the sharp voltage
reduction.
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 239
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement
Lighting in the Equipment Room
The OptiX transmission equipment room is equipped with three lighting systems.
● Active lighting system, which is powered by mains supply.
● Backup lighting system, which is powered by backup power supply (diesel
electric generator) of the office.
● Emergency lighting system, which is powered by storage batteries when the
mains supply has been interrupted but the backup power supply has not yet
started to supply power.
Protection System
This section describes the requirements for the protection system.
ESD protection
The equipment-affecting electrostatic induction comes from the external electric
field such as outdoor high voltage transmission line or lightning. It also comes
from the internal system such as indoor environment, floor materials or
equipment structure.
Static electricity may damage the metallic parts on integrated circuit boards and
cause faults in software and electronic switch. Statistics shows that 60 percent of
the damaged circuit boards are caused by static electricity. It is essential to take
effective ESD protection measures.
The following measures are recommended:
● Ground the equipment well. When laying the raised floor covered with
semiconductive materials, copper foil should be used for grounding at a
number of points on the floor (the copper foil should be placed between the
concrete floor and the semiconductive floor and should be connected to the
ground cable).
● Take dust-proof measure. Dust may do great harm to router equipment. Dusts
or other particles getting into the equipment room may cause poor
connection between connectors or metal connecting points. When the
humidity in the room is high, dust can cause electrical leakage. It is found in
maintenance that the equipment failure is often caused by accumulated
dusts. Especially, when the humidity in the room is very low, electrostatic
adherence is likely to occur.
● Keep proper temperature and humidity. Too high humidity may make the
metal components rusty, while too low humidity may induce static electricity.
● Always wear an ESD wrist strap and lab coat when touching a circuit board to
prevent electrostatic damage to the equipment.
Interference prevention
With the development of technologies and social economy, more and more
electromagnetic signals are transmitted in the air. They may affect the
communication quality by causing cross-talk and stray noise, and even result in
communication interruption. The electromagnetic interference (EMI) sources
include:
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 240
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement
● The corona discharge of the electric transmission line
● The transformer
● Switches
● Waveform distortion of the power supply network caused during the
operation of large equipment
● Radio frequency (RF) interference
● Natural interference sources such as terrestrial magnetic field and external
radiation
The interference, from either inside or outside the equipment or the application
system, affects the equipment through conductive modes such as capacitance
coupling, inductance coupling, electromagnetic wave radiation, common
impedance (including grounding system) and cable (power and signal cables). In
terms of external relationships of the equipment, interference is from the signal
cable, power cable, grounding system and spatial electromagnetic wave.
Integrated circuits (ICs) have the interference resistance capability to a degree.
However when the external noises go beyond their anti-interference tolerance,
corrupted signals and even system malfunction will be caused. It is impossible to
eliminate or shield all the interference sources, but the following measures can be
taken to suppress the interference signals:
● High frequency interference in the power supply network is generated when
the primary coil of the power supply transformer is coupled to the secondary
coil through distributed capacitors. To suppress such interference, we can use
an appropriate transformer, and install a low-pass filter at the inlet of the
power supply cable.
● The interference of the transient voltage in the power supply network can be
reduced by inputting power directly from the primary transformer with a filter
capacitor for router equipment.
● When router equipment works in the 50 Hz mains power supply network with
the above interference, the surge voltage caused by the power supply network
and the over-voltage generated by lightening will be passed to the power
supply of the optical synchronous transmission equipment, which leads to
computing errors of the processors. Therefore, before directly using the mains
supply, effective measures against interference from power supply network
should be taken.
● The key to eliminate the interference from the grounding system is to avoid
loops among various grounds, such as the signal ground (including analog
and digital grounds), BGND, PGND and shield ground, or loops formed by
large distributed capacitors. Otherwise, the common impedance interference
from the grounding system may affect the operation of the equipment. In
buildings other than high-rises, the working ground of router equipment
should be separated as far as possible from the ground for electricity
equipment and surge protection device.
● Prevent electromagnetic radiation interference from the surroundings to the
equipment. In some integrated communication buildings, if there is a high
frequency transmitter there, its influence on router equipment should meet
the relevant requirements. Independent power supplies are recommended for
them.
● EMI from the telecommunications line should be restrained. Influenced by
high frequency electromagnetic field (external interference), high longitudinal
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 241
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement
voltage will occur in the core and sheath of the communication cable.
Because of the asymmetry of cores in the cables, the longitudinal voltage will
generate a horizontal noise voltage at the ends of the cores. When both ends
of the cable sheath are grounded, the sheath will function as a shield layer,
greatly reducing the longitudinal voltage and reducing the interference
voltage. Other effective methods include: reduce the voltage or current of the
interference source; reduce the line length and the spacing of the conducting
wires to reduce the area of the affected loop; directly place the insulated
conducting wires on the grounded floor; use a special grounding feedback
cable to avoid co-impedance; or twist the signal cable and the feedback cable
together to offset partial peripheral electromagnetic interference, and so on.
Fire protection
For small equipment rooms, a certain number of portable fire extinguishers should
be equipped in each room for an initial fire control. In large equipment rooms, fire
extinguishing facilities should be equipped. An automatic fire alarm system should
also be equipped in the equipment room. All telecom buildings with fire alarm
system should have fire emergency lighting system and evacuation instruction
marks at important places, paths and gateways.
Anti-earthquake demand
The designed anti-earthquake intensity of the telecom equipment room must be
one degree (Richter scale) higher than that for the common buildings. The
equipment room building that cannot meet the requirement should be reinforced.
When installing router equipment, the following anti-earthquake measures should
be taken.
● Use steel framework for the cabinet of the equipment. There are locking
devices to fix the boards in the cabinet.
● The cabinet is reinforced with guide rail on the top and supports at the
bottom.
surge protection
Chimneys, antennas or other things that are over 15 m tall on the top of the
equipment room building should be designed according to the surge protection
requirements for civil buildings.
Measures should be taken against direct flash and intrusion of lightning current.
In the main high-rise transmission building, protective measures should be taken
to prevent side lightning strokes, especially in frequent lightning areas. Therefore
designers should take actual conditions into consideration and take appropriate
measures. For example, connect the metal external window frame to the surge
protection wire; along the height of the building, place the surge protection metal
bands at a definite spacing on the outside wall, and so on.
The main equipment-room building should be provided with the following surge
protection measures:
● The building should have surge protector nets or bands installed at the
positions susceptible to lightning strokes. Lightning prevention wires or
lightning rods should be installed on the top of chimneys and antennas that
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 242
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement
are protruding from the building. The cross-sectional area of the grounding
wire of the surge protection device should not be smaller than 120 mm2,
while the space between the wires not larger than 30 m.
● The earth resistance of the earthing/grounding system is recommended to be
less than 10 ohms, and the equipment grounding should be in accordance
with national and local electrical codes as well.
● Outdoor cables and metal pipes should be grounded before entering the
building, and the outdoor cables should be equipped with lightening
protection devices at the inlet of the building.
● It is suggested to use roof plates, beams and pillars made of reinforced
concrete and the reinforcement bar as the ground cables of lightening
arresters.
In the past surge protection grounding of the building was separate from the
grounding for telecom system and power supply system, and a large distance was
required between the grounding objects. However, the distance requirement is not
satisfied due to small space of the building. In fact, they cannot be separated in
most cases, so joint grounding system is recommended for the lightening
protection grounding of the building. The joint grounding system shall connect the
telecom BGND, PGND, surge protection grounding of the building, and grounding
of the power frequency AC power supply system. A high earth resistance of the
joint grounding system is required. The earth resistance required by
telecommunication is far lower than 10 ohms, and the grounding requirements for
different telecom devices vary, so the resistance of the joint grounding system
should be determined according to the minimum resistance required for the
grounding device.
It is recommended to use steel bars in the walls and pillars of the building as
ground cables for lightening protection. These wires should be electrically
connected so as to equalize the electric potential in the building.
Condensation Prevention
● Before installing the equipment, ensure that no condensation is on the
equipment. Otherwise, the equipment may fail to be powered on.
● If the indoor and outdoor temperature difference is 15°C or more, wait eight
hours after moving devices to the equipment and then install them.
● Generally, when the outdoor humidity is greater than 80% and the indoor and
outdoor temperature difference is greater than 5°C, condensation forms. In
highly humid weather, before installing a device or board, you are advised to
remove the package inside an equipment room and check whether
condensation forms as follows: Touch the surface of the device or board with
dry fingers or ESD gloves to check whether water marks exist. If they do,
condensation forms, and the device or board must be kept in the equipment
room for 8 hours before being powered on.
NO TE
If the temperature difference is undetermined, wait one night before installing the
equipment.If the temperature difference is undetermined, wait one night before
installing the equipment.
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 243
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement
CA UTION
In damp scenarios such as subways and tunnels, power on the equipment within
24 hours after unpacking to prevent condensation. During future maintenance,
ensure that the power-off time does not exceed 24 hours.
Transportation environment requirements
NO TE
The transportation environment must comply with ETSI EN 300 019-1-2.
● Climate requirements
Item Description
Temperature -40ºC to +70ºC (-40ºF to +158ºF)
Relative 5% to 95%
humidity
Temperature ≤ 1ºC/min
change rate
Atmospheric 70 kPa to 106 kPa
pressure
Solar radiation ≤ 1120 W/m2
Heat radiation ≤ 600 W/m2
● Waterproof requirements
– The equipment packaging is intact.
– Rainproof measures are taken for the transportation tools to prevent
water from entering the packaging.
– No water accumulates in the transportation tools.
● Biological environment requirements
– Ensure that the location where the equipment is placed is free from
microbial infestation.
– There are no rodents, such as mice.
● Air cleanness requirements
– The air is free from explosive, electric-conductive, magnetic-conductive, or
corrosive dust.
– The concentrations of mechanically active substances meet the
requirements defined in the following table.
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 244
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement
Mechanically Concentration
Active
Substance
Deposited dust ≤ 3.0 mg/(m2·h)
Gravel ≤ 100 mg/m3
– The concentrations of chemically active substances meet the
requirements defined in the following table.
Chemically Monthly Average Concentration
Active
Substance
3
SO2 ≤ 1.00 mg/m
3
H2S ≤ 0.50 mg/m
3
NO2 ≤ 1.00 mg/m
HF ≤ 0.03 mg/m3
3
NH3 ≤ 3.00 mg/m
HCl ≤ 0.50 mg/m3
3
O3 ≤ 0.10 mg/m
● Mechanical stress requirements
Item Subitem Range
Random vibration Acceleration 1 m2/s3
Frequency ● 5 Hz to 20 Hz
● 20 Hz to 200 Hz
dB/oct -3
Collision Shock response 100 m/s2, 11 ms, 100
spectrum I (sample times on each side
weight > 50 kg)
Shock response 180 m/s2, 6 ms, 100
spectrum II (sample times on each side
weight ≤ 50 kg)
NOTE
Shock response spectrum is a curve of the maximum acceleration responses generated
by the equipment under specified impact excitation.
Operating environment requirements
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 245
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement
NO TE
The operating environment must comply with ETSI EN 300 019-1-3.
● Climate requirements
Item Temperature Relative humidity
NetEngine -40ºC to +65ºC (-40ºF 5% to +95%
A821 E to +149ºF)
NetEngine -5ºC to +55ºC (-23ºF 5% to +95%
A813 E to +131ºF)
NetEngine
A822 E
NOTE
● If the equipment is installed in a cabinet, the impact of radiation can be ignored.
● The temperature and relative humidity are measured at the place 1.5 m (4.92 ft)
above the floor and 0.4 m (1.31 ft) away from the front side of a cabinet without
any front or rear protection panel.
To improve product application reliability, it is recommended that a dedicated
precision air conditioner be installed in an equipment room and the
temperature and relative humidity be controlled within the following ranges:
– Temperature range: 15ºC to 30ºC (59ºF to 86ºF)
– Relative humidity range: 40% to 75%
NO TE
Do not install the air conditioner above the equipment and ensure that the air exhaust
vent of the air conditioner does not face the equipment. Keep the air conditioner away
from a window as far as possible to ensure that no moisture from the window is
blown towards the equipment through the air conditioner.
Item Description
Altitude ≤ 4000 m (13123.2 ft)
(When the altitude is lower than 1800 m (5905.44 ft),
the equipment operates normally. When the altitude is
within the range from 1800 m to 4000 m (from 3280.8 ft
to 13123.2 ft), the actual equipment operating
temperature decreases by 1ºC (1.8ºF) for every 220 m
(721.78 ft) increase in altitude.)
Temperature ≤ 0.5ºC/min
change rate
Wind speed ≤ 5 m/s
Solar radiation ≤ 700 W/m2
Heat radiation ≤ 600 W/m2
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 246
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement
● Biological environment requirements
– Ensure that the location where the equipment is installed is free from
microbial infestation.
– There are no rodents, such as mice.
● Air cleanness requirements
– The air is free from explosive, electric-conductive, magnetic-conductive, or
corrosive dust.
– The concentrations of mechanically active substances meet the
requirements defined in the following table.
Mechanically Concentration
Active
Substance
Suspended ≤ 0.4 mg/m3
dust
Deposited dust ≤ 15 mg/(m2·h)
Gravel ≤ 300 mg/m3
– The concentrations of chemically active substances meet the
requirements defined in the following table.
Chemically Monthly Average Concentration
Active
Substance
3
SO2 ≤ 0.30 mg/m
3
H2S ≤ 0.10 mg/m
3
NO2 ≤ 0.50 mg/m
HF ≤ 0.01 mg/m3
3
NH3 ≤ 1.00 mg/m
3
Cl2 ≤ 0.10 mg/m
HCl ≤ 0.10 mg/m3
3
O3 ≤ 0.05 mg/m
● Mechanical stress requirements
Item Subitem Range
Sinusoidal vibration Velocity ≤ 5 mm/s
Acceleration ≤ 2 m/s2
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 247
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement
Item Subitem Range
Frequency ● 5 Hz to 62 Hz
● 62 Hz to 200 Hz
Collision Shock response Half-sine wave, 30
spectrum II m/s2, 11 ms, 3 times on
each side
Static payload 0 kPa
NOTE
Shock response spectrum is a curve of the maximum acceleration responses generated
by the equipment under specified impact excitation.
Static payload refers to the capability of the equipment in package to bear the
pressure from the top in normal pile-up method.
4.1.1.2.2 Requirements for Running Environment B and Installation Planning
This section describes the requirements for equipment location selection,
dustproof and waterproof, surge protection and grounding, heat dissipation,
cooperation between air ducts, power supply of equipment, cabling space,
selection of network cabinets and outdoor cabinets, and corrosion protection
when equipment is installed in running environment B.
Requirements for Selecting a Site for Equipment
To ensure that equipment operates stably over a long term, the site of equipment
in environment of class B must satisfy requirements with respect to
communication network design, communication technologies, hydrographic,
geology, and transportation.
When selecting a site for equipment, make sure that the site satisfies the
following requirements:
● Equipment is installed in a place free from electromagnetic interference
source (such as a large radar station, launching tower, and transformer
substation), harmful gas source (such as a chemical plant and salt mist area),
dust, noise, and shock.
● Equipment is kept away from intensive vibration or noise, transformer
substations, industrial boilers, and heating boilers.
● Equipment is kept away from a tree or other plants. Otherwise, insects may
be absorbed by fans, resulting in damage to fans.
● Equipment is installed at least 500m ( away from the seashore. If the network
cabinet or outdoor cabinet is configured with fans, ensure that the air intake
vents do not face the direction in which the sea wind blows.
● In an area prone to snow or rain, the vents of the network cabinet or outdoor
cabinet are at least one meter higher than the position with accumulated
water or snow.
● Equipment is installed in a position away from water drips (outdoor part of
an air conditioner and dripping eave).
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 248
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement
● The AC power system feeds power stably and no other devices with high
power consumption are operating. The rated voltage of the AC power system
is 220 V and the voltage on the power grid fluctuates within ±10%. After
equipment is installed, the voltage between L and N is 220 V, the voltage
between L and PE is lower than 220 V, and the voltage between N and PE is
lower than 5 V. Otherwise, electrical leakage may occur on the equipment
and the user may fall victim to electric shock.
● Equipment does not face directly to windows of residential buildings. A
network cabinet is at least 5 m away from windows and an outdoor cabinet is
at least 10 m away from windows.
● Equipment is not directly exposed to rainwater or near windows or doors
through which rain water may enter.
● Equipment doors do not face residents or stand parallel with residents.
● When equipment is installed on a wall, the equipment is at least one meter
above the ground. This distance keeps equipment beyond the reach of
residents.
● The air intake vents on equipment are far away from outlets of a sewer, large
digestion tank, or sewage treatment pool. Equipment is under positive
pressure, which helps block aggressive gas. Aggressive gas may erode
electronic components or PCBs.
● When installed in a basement, a network cabinet should be installed in a
place unable to be flooded. In this scenario, the municipal drainage system of
the building needs to be taken into consideration.
● If the first floor of the building is low-lying, do not install the equipment in
the weak-current well on the first floor or ground-mount the equipment in
the corridor.
● Do not lead the cables or optical cables on the top of the network cabinet
and then downwards into the network cabinet from the side or top. In
addition, take water-proof measures for all cables led into the network
cabinet so that rainwater will not enter the network cabinet along the cables.
● Cabinets have special protective equipment, such as rat guards. Ensure that
these facilities have been installed.
● Cabinets have access control and environmental monitoring equipment.
Ensure that these facilities have been installed and used.
● A filler panel is installed in each empty slot.
● Natural cooling equipment has enough space for heat dissipation.
● To prevent the air duct from being blocked, do not place any object around
the air intake or exhaust vent.
Dust Resistance and Water Resistance
The protection rating of the equipment is IP20. A network cabinet installed
outdoors or in a corridor that is exposed to rain must meet the requirements of
IP55 rating protection at least. A network cabinet installed indoors or in a corridor
that is free from rain must meet the requirements of IP31 rating protection at
least.
For equipment at a customer site, it is recommended that the equipment be
stored indoors.
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 249
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement
Ensure that no water accumulates on the floor or drops to the equipment
packaging. Keep the equipment away from places where water is apt to leak, such
as the places near automatic fire-fighting facilities and heating facilities.
If the equipment has to be stored outdoors, ensure that:
● The packaging is intact.
● Rainproof measures are taken to prevent water from entering the packaging.
● No water accumulates under the packaging.
● The packaging is not exposed to sunlight.
Dustproof and Waterproof Capability of the Device
The protection rating of the equipment is IP20. (The first number "2" indicates
that the equipment can prevent a solid foreign object with the diameter larger
than 5 mm from entering the equipment. The second number "0" indicates that
the waterproof function is not provided.)
Install the device in a place that is free from flooding and prevent foreign objects
such as screw and cable end from entering the heat-dissipation hole of the device.
Otherwise, the device may be burnt due to short circuit.
Outdoor Dustproof and Waterproof Requirement
If the network cabinet is installed outdoors or in a corridor that is exposed to rain,
the network cabinet must meet the requirements of IP55 rating protection at
least. ("IP" indicates International Protection Rating. The first number "5" refers to
the rating for preventing the solid particle from entering the network cabinet.
That is, ingress of dust is not totally prevented, but dust shall not penetrate in a
quantity to interfere with satisfactory operation of apparatus or to impair safety.
The second number "5" refers to the rating for preventing water from entering the
network cabinet. That is, water projected in jets against the enclosure from any
direction shall have no harmful effects.)
In regions with heavy dust, it is recommended that customers add air filters to
their customized network cabinets to improve the reliability of the network
cabinet.
Indoor Dustproof and Waterproof Requirement
If the network cabinet is installed indoors or in a corridor that is free from rain,
the network cabinet must meet the requirements of IP31 rating protection at
least. (The first number "3" indicates that the network cabinet can prevent a solid
object with the diameter equal to or larger than 2.5 mm from entering the
network cabinet. The second number "1" indicates that vertically falling drops
shall have no harmful effects.)
In regions with heavy dust, it is recommended that customers add air filters to
their customized network cabinets to improve the reliability of the network
cabinet.
Corrosion Protection
To ensure normal running of the equipment installed in environment B,
concentration of corrosive gas must satisfy relevant requirements.
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 250
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement
Table 4-10 lists requirements for concentration of corrosive gas in installation
environment.
Table 4-10 Requirements for concentration of corrosive gas
Chemical Active Unit Content
Substance
3
SO2 mg/m ≤ 0.30
3
H2S mg/m ≤ 0.10
3
NH3 mg/m ≤ 1.00
3
Cl2 mg/m ≤ 0.10
The equipment installation environment cannot be surrounded with pollution
sources such as drainage ditches, coal-fired power plants, smokestacks, fertilizer
plants, paper mills, or daily commodity factories.
Principle for Heat Dissipation of a Network Cabinet
The router equipment needs to be installed in a standard network cabinet that
complies with heat dissipation requirements of the router equipment.
1. When the router equipment is installed in a network cabinet, the temperature
at the air intake vent cannot exceed the maximum temperature permitted by
the equipment to run normally, and the network cabinet must be capable of
dissipating the heat generated by all the equipment installed in the network
cabinet.
2. Fans need to have the backup function. After a fan fails, the other fans can
still work normally. A failed fan needs to be replaced in time. For more
information about the air volume of fans, see the air volume of an indoor
cabinet.
3. The heat dissipation capability of a network cabinet without fans is greater
than the maximum total heat dissipation consumption of the equipment in
the network cabinet, and the internal temperature of the network cabinet is
lower than the maximum working temperature of the equipment.
Thermal Design of a Network Cabinet with Natural Heat Dissipation
When the equipment is installed in a network cabinet with natural heat
dissipation, the air duct direction of the equipment needs to be consistent with the
air duct direction of the network cabinet. The equipment can be installed
horizontally or vertically.
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 251
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement
Table 4-11 Requirements for a network cabinet with natural heat dissipation
where the router is installed horizontally
Supported installation mode Horizontal installation
Sets of equipment that can be housed
1 2
in the network cabinet
Dimensions (mm): H x W x D 200×580×500 400×580×500
Air exhaust vents are close to the top
Positions of the air vents on the of the network cabinet and air intake
network cabinet vents are close to the bottom of the
network cabinet.
Cross-sectional area of the air vents on
88 176
the network cabinet (cm2)
Requirements for The distance between each side (left
the position Requirements for or right side) of the equipment and
where the router the width the corresponding side panel of the
equipment is network cabinet is at least 40 mm.
installed in the
network cabinet ● The bottom of
the equipment
does not block
● The bottom of the air intake
the equipment vents.
does not block ● The top of the
the air intake equipment is
vents. not higher
● The top of the than the
equipment is lowest row of
not higher air exhaust
than the vents.
Requirements for lowest row of ● The distance
the height air exhaust between two
vents. sets of
● The distance equipment is
between the at least 90
top of the mm.
equipment and ● The distance
the top panel between the
of the network top of the
cabinet is at equipment and
least 135 mm. the top panel
of the network
cabinet is at
least 225 mm.
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 252
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement
Table 4-12 Requirements for a network cabinet with natural heat dissipation
where the router is installed vertically
Supported installation mode Vertical installation
Sets of equipment that can be housed
1 2
in the network cabinet
Dimensions (mm): H x W x D 580×100×500 580×200×500
Air exhaust vents are close to the top
Positions of the air vents on the of the network cabinet and air intake
network cabinet vents are close to the bottom of the
network cabinet.
Cross-sectional area of the air vents on
40 80
the network cabinet (cm2)
Requirements for ● The
the position recommended
where the router distance
equipment is between each
installed in the side (left or
network cabinet The right side) of
recommended the equipment
distance between and the
each side of the
Requirements for corresponding
equipment and
the width side panel of
the corresponding the network
side panel of the cabinet is at
network cabinet is least 9 mm.
at least 10 mm.
● The distance
between two
sets of
equipment is
at least 9 mm.
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 253
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement
Supported installation mode Vertical installation
● The distance
● The distance between the
between the bottom of the
air intake vent equipment and
at the bottom the bottom of
of the the network
equipment and cabinet is at
the bottom of least 45 mm.
the network ● The top of the
cabinet is at equipment is
least 45 mm. not higher
● The top of the than the
equipment is lowest row of
not higher air exhaust
Requirements for
than the vents.
the height
lowest row of ● The distance
air exhaust between two
vents. sets of
● The distance equipment is
between the at least 90
air exhaust mm.
vent on the top ● The distance
of the between the
equipment and top of the
the top panel equipment and
of the network the top panel
cabinet is at of the network
least 45 mm. cabinet is at
least 70 mm.
Thermal Design of a Network Cabinet with Fan Cooling
Table 4-13 lists requirements for the device.
Table 4-13 Requirements for a network cabinet with fan cooling where the router
is installed
Sets of equipment that can 1 2 3
be housed in the network
cabinet
Dimensions (mm): H x W x D 200 x 580 x 400 x 580 x 600 x 580 x
500 500 500
Air volume of the cabinet ≥ 42 ≥ 84 ≥ 126
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 254
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement
Sets of equipment that can 1 2 3
be housed in the network
cabinet
Dimensions and number of One 9 cm fan One 12 cm One 15 cm
fans or two 8 cm fan or two 9 fan or two 12
fans cm fans cm fans
connected in connected in connected in
parallel mode parallel mode parallel mode
(Air volume = (Air volume = (Air volume =
Maximum air Maximum air Maximum air
volume of a volume of a volume of a
single fan x single fan x single fan x
0.5 x Number 0.5 x Number 0.5 x Number
of fans) of fans) of fans)
Fan positions The fans need to be arranged in the diagonal
direction of the entrance on the network
cabinet.
Cross-sectional area of the air ≥ 81 ≥ 144 ≥ 225
vents on the network cabinet
(cm2)
Requirements Requirements The distance between each side (left or right
for the for the width side) of the equipment and the corresponding
position side panel of the network cabinet is at least 40
where the mm.
router If air vents are blocked, the blocked area of the
equipment is air vents does not exceed 10% of the total area
installed in of the air vents.
the network
cabinet Requirements The equipment needs to be stacked without
for the height any space.
The distance between the equipment and the
ODF or power supply on the top or in the
bottom of the network cabinet is at least 45
mm.
Table 4-14 lists requirements for the device.
Table 4-14 Requirements for a network cabinet with fan cooling where the router
is installed
Sets of equipment that can 1 2 3
be housed in the network
cabinet
Dimensions (mm): H x W x D 100×580×500 200×580×500 300×580×500
Air volume of the cabinet ≥150 ≥300 ≥450
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 255
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement
Sets of equipment that can 1 2 3
be housed in the network
cabinet
Dimensions and number of Two 9 cm fan Two12 cm fan Two 15 cm
fans or three 8 cm or three 9 cm fan or three
fans fans 12 cm fans
connected in connected in connected in
parallel mode parallel mode parallel mode
(Air volume = (Air volume = (Air volume =
Maximum air Maximum air Maximum air
volume of a volume of a volume of a
single fan x single fan x single fan x
0.5 x Number 0.5 x Number 0.5 x Number
of fans) of fans) of fans)
Fan positions The fans need to be arranged in the diagonal
direction of the entrance on the network
cabinet.
Cross-sectional area of the air ≥162 ≥288 ≥450
vents on the network cabinet
(cm2)
Requirements Requirements The distance between each side (left or right
for the for the width side) of the equipment and the corresponding
position side panel of the network cabinet is at least 60
where the mm.
router If air vents are blocked, the blocked area of the
equipment is air vents does not exceed 10% of the total area
installed in of the air vents.
the network
cabinet Requirements The equipment needs to be stacked without
for the height any space.
The distance between the equipment and the
ODF or power supply on the top or in the
bottom of the network cabinet is at least 45
mm.
Cooperation Between Air Ducts
When selecting a network cabinet, make sure that the air ducts for the network
cabinet match those for equipment.
Recommended Air Ducts for Equipment
Figure 4-4 shows the recommended air ducts for equipment installed horizontally.
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 256
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement
Figure 4-4 Recommended air ducts for equipment installed horizontally
Recommended Air Ducts for a Network Cabinet
In the case of a network cabinet with natural heat dissipation, make sure that air
intake vents are kept as far away from air exhaust vents as possible, to achieve a
better chimney effect. Air intake vents must be in the lower part of the network
cabinet and close to the bottom panel; air exhaust vents must be on the top panel
of the network cabinet.
A network cabinet with natural heat dissipation enables air to flow in three typical
modes, that is, bottom in top out, bottom in side out, and side in side out, as
shown in Figure 4-5.
Figure 4-5 Recommended air ducts for a network cabinet with natural heat
dissipation
In the case of a network cabinet with fan cooling, arrange air intake vents and
fans properly so that air flows evenly without forming an air reflow zone.
A network cabinet with fan cooling also enables air to flow in three typical modes,
that is, bottom in top out, bottom in side out, and side in side out, as shown in
Figure 4-6.
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 257
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement
Figure 4-6 Recommended air ducts for a network cabinet with fan cooling
The fan tray assembly must match the design of vents on a network cabinet and
generate sufficient air volume.
A general rule to design vents is to determine the area of vents based on the size
of the fan tray assembly. This ensures a minimum of 30% of the maximum air
volume generated by fans.
For example, a fan tray assembly with dimensions of 120 mm x 120 mm x 25 mm
generates 144 CFM air volume to the maximum. In this case, when the area of
vents is 14400 mm 2 (40 mm x 360 mm or 120 mm x 120 mm), the system can
obtain 57.6 CFM air volume at least.
Cabling Space
When installing the router equipment in environment B, you need to consider the
cabling space in front of the equipment.
● When installing the router equipment in a network cabinet, you need to
follow the standard of installing the equipment in a 19-inch cabinet. The
cabling space in front of the equipment must be no less than 75 mm.
● When installing the router equipment in an outdoor cabinet, you also need to
follow the standard of installing the equipment in a 19-inch cabinet. The
cabling space in front of the equipment must be no less than 75 mm.
● When a network cabinet is installed on a wall, sufficient space must be left
around the cabinet.
– At least 800 mm space must be left in front of the network cabinet.
– At least 200 mm space must be left at the rear of the network cabinet.
– At least 200 mm space must be left on the top of the network cabinet.
– At least 300 mm space must be left below the network cabinet.
Power Supply for Equipment
The router equipment supports DC power supply and AC power supply.
Requirements for Power Supply
For details, see Product Description Technical Specifications and Environmental
Requirements.
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 258
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement
General Requirements on surge protection and Grounding
Telecommunications devices have stricter requirements on surge protection and
grounding than other devices. Taking proper surge protection and grounding
measures is the major requirement to ensure that the device works normally.
DANGER
When routing power cables or service cables connected to equipment to the
outdoor area, do not route them overhead.
1. Ground the equipment in compliance with national regulations, industry
standards, and carrier regulations.
NO TE
● When the device is installed inside the building, and the subscriber cable and power
cable are routed in the overhead cabling mode, install an elementary surge protection
device on the input side of the AC power system and ensure that the surge protection
rating is not smaller than 5 kA (8/20 μs).
2. If the building has installation environment with a dedicated grounding
system, use the grounding system of the building directly to ground the
device. Do not use the downlead of the lightning belt or lightning rod of the
building to ground the device.
3. If the building does not have installation environment with a dedicated
grounding system, it is recommended that you use the protective earthing
(PE) of the AC power distribution system of the building to ground the device.
4. If the building does not have any dedicated installation environment for
grounding devices or the PE of the AC power distribution system, construct a
new grounding system. It is recommended that you install the network
cabinet on a lower floor of the building to reduce the grounding cost.
5. Routing the aerial open wire into the network cabinet is prohibited. Use the
cable with metallic jacket and route the cable underground into the network
cabinet.
6. After the power supply enters the network cabinet, use a surge protection bar.
7. Connect all devices and metal parts in the network cabinet to the ground bar
in the network cabinet in an equipotential manner. Connect the ground bar in
the network cabinet to the external ground device by using a ground cable.
Grounding Without Dedicated Grounding Environment
The equipment is generally installed in harsh environmental conditions. Even if in
the installation scenario without dedicated grounding environment, you also need
to ground the equipment properly if possible.
TN-C-S/TN-S AC Power System (N Wire and PE Wire Are Combined into One
Wire on the surge protection Bar or N Wire and PE Wire Are Provided
Separately)
It is recommended that you use the PE wire of the AC power cable to ground the
equipment. The prerequisite is that the PE wire of the AC power cable for the
corridor of the building is already grounded properly.
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 259
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement
DANGER
The PE wire of the AC power cable must be grounded. Otherwise, electrical
leakage may occur on the device and cause personnel injury.
Figure 4-7 shows the grounding connections of the TN-C-S AC power system.
Figure 4-7 Grounding connections of the TN-C-S AC power system
Figure 4-8 shows the grounding connections of the TN-S AC power system.
Figure 4-8 Grounding connections of the TN-S AC power system
Use a ground cable (the cross-sectional area of the ground cable must be at least
6 mm2) to connect all devices in the network cabinet to the ground bar of the
network cabinet. Connect the ground bar to the network cabinet in an
equipotential manner through a metallic structure.
Use a ground cable to connect the grounding point of the reinforcing rib of the
optical fiber to the ground bar. You can also connect this grounding point to the
network cabinet in an equipotential manner through a metallic structure.
Use a ground cable (the cross-sectional area of the ground cable must be at least
16 mm2) to connect the ground bar of the network cabinet to the PE wire of the
corridor AC power supply.
TT AC Power System (Provide Only L Line and N Line and Directly Ground
the Device)
It is recommended that an external ground device be adopted. For example, use
the dedicated ground device (such as the ground flat steel sheet, ground post, and
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 260
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement
ground bar) of the building or the base concrete bar of the reinforcement concrete
of the building, or deploy a new earth screen.
Figure 4-9 shows the grounding connections of the TT AC power system.
Figure 4-9 Grounding connections of the TT AC power system
Use a ground cable (the cross-sectional area of the ground cable must be at least
6 mm2) to connect all devices in the network cabinet to the ground bar of the
network cabinet. Connect the ground bar to the network cabinet in an
equipotential manner through a metallic structure.
Use the ground cable to connect the grounding point of the reinforcing rib of the
optical fiber to the ground bar. You can also connect this grounding point to the
network cabinet in an equipotential manner through a metallic structure.
Use a ground cable (the cross-sectional area of the ground cable must be at least
16 mm2) to connect the ground bar of the network cabinet to an external ground
device.
NO TE
● In an installation environment with dedicated ground devices, the corridor ground
device is recommended for grounding.
● In an installation environment without dedicated ground devices, it is recommended
that the base concrete bar of the reinforcement concrete of the building be used or a
new earth screen be deployed for grounding.
Selection of the Network Cabinet
When selecting a network cabinet, mainly consider the factors such as capacity,
parts performance, protection performance, engineering installation performance,
ventilation, and heat dissipation. These factors help to select a reliable network
cabinet at the initial stage of network device deployment to ensure that the device
runs reliably.
The network cabinet is generally installed in a basement or corridor. The network
cabinet needs to support the wall-installation mode and AC power distribution,
and must be capable of obtaining power from the power system inside the
building. Its EMC and noise must comply with standards. When an ONU is
running, the network cabinet must ensure that the noise is lower than 5 dB to
avoid disturbing residents.
Space of the Network Cabinet
The space of the network cabinet in different configurations must meet the
requirements of terminal block layout and the space for routing FE network
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 261
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement
cables, power cables, and optical fibers. For the requirements of the cable routing
space, see Cabling Space.
surge protection and Grounding of the Network Cabinet
● The electrical continuity between parts of the network cabinet must be
satisfactory to provide reliable grounding, safety, and protection performance.
Ensure that the resistance between any two connected points is less than 0.1
ohm. You can use a multimeter to measure the resistance.
● For the AC-powered cabinet, it is recommended that you reserve a surge
protection bar and ensure that the surge protection rating is not smaller than
5 kA (8/20 μs).
● The network cabinet must provide a ground bar for grounding all devices in
the cabinet in a unified way. The resistance of the PGND cable must be
smaller than 10 ohms.
Protection Performance of the Network Cabinet
The device is not waterproof. Therefore, when the device is installed indoors,
install it in the network cabinet that is free from splashing water.
In regions with heavy dust, it is recommended that customers add air filters to
their customized network cabinets to improve the reliability of the network
cabinet.
Ensure that all cable apertures for external cables are sealed properly.
If the network cabinet is installed indoors or in a corridor that is free from rain,
the network cabinet must meet the requirements of IP31 rating protection. (The
first number "3" indicates that the network cabinet can prevent a solid particle
with the diameter equal to or larger than 2.5 mm from entering the network
cabinet. The second number "1" indicates that vertically falling drops shall have
no harmful effects.)
Test conditions/parameters of IP X1: drippage: 1 mm/minute; duration: 10 minutes.
Eligible adjudging criterion for protection:
● No water enters the cabinet.
● The water that enters the cabinet must be within the amount that may affect
the normal operation and safety performance of the cabinet. Water must not
accumulate on the insulating parts that may cause electrical leakage within
the creepage distance. Water must not enter the electrical parts or enter the
winding (resistance) that cannot be used in the damp state. No water
accumulates around the cable head or enters the cable.
Engineering Installation of the Network Cabinet
The engineering installation performance of the network cabinet must meet the
requirements of installing the cabinet on a wall in the main indoor application
scenarios of the network cabinet, such as a basement or corridor.
● The network cabinet can be adaptively installed on different walls.
● When the wall is not flat, the network cabinet can be leveled so as to be
installed reliably (the recommended adjustable scope is 10 mm at least).
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 262
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement
The space for routing power cables, optical fibers, and subscriber cables are
planned properly in the network cabinet. Various types of cables are routed
separately and the cables do not cross over each other. The positions of the MDF
and the ODF are proper to ensure that the cable length is proper after the device
is installed.
Ventilation and Heat Dissipation Performance of the Network Cabinet
Requirements on the ventilation and heat dissipation performance of the network
cabinet: Obvious air intake vent and air exhaust vent are distributed in the air duct
of the network cabinet after the device is installed. Due to the difference between
internal and external network cabinet temperatures, the temperature of the air
intake vent must be 10 °C lower than the maximum ambient temperature of the
router device when it is operating. This ensures that each board on the router
equipment satisfies requirements for heat dissipation.
4.1.1.2.3 Requirements for Running Environment C and Installation Planning
In environment C, you need to install equipment in an outdoor cabinet with an air
conditioner or heat exchanger.
When router equipment is installed in an outdoor cabinet, do not install other
type of equipment in the cabinet. If other type of equipment and router
equipment have to be installed in the same outdoor cabinet, make sure that the
equipment satisfies requirements for heat dissipation and anti-erosion.
When installed in environment C, the equipment needs to be installed in an
outdoor cabinet with an air conditioner or heat exchanger, which keeps the
equipment fully isolated from the outside environment. Environment C involves
the following cases:
● Outdoor area close to a pollution source
● Environment with only simple shields such as awnings
● Place on the sea
NO TE
An area close to a pollution source refers to an area where saline water such as the sea or a
salina is within 3.7 km away from it, where a heavy pollution source such as a metallurgical
plant, coal mine, or thermal power plant is within 3 km away from it, where a medium pollution
source such as a chemical plant, rubber plant, or electroplating factory is within 2 km away
from it, or where a light pollution source such as a food factory, leather factory, or heating
boiler is within 1 km away from it.
Selection of the Outdoor Cabinet
When selecting an outdoor cabinet, mainly consider the factors such as capacity,
parts performance, protection performance, engineering installation performance,
ventilation, and heat dissipation. These factors help to select a reliable outdoor
cabinet at the initial stage of network device deployment to ensure that the device
runs reliably.
An outdoor cabinet is mainly installed in an outdoor area or an indoor area close
to contamination sources, such as an underground garage. Its EMC and noise must
comply with standards. When an ONU is running, the outdoor cabinet must
ensure that the noise is lower than 7 dB to avoid disturbing residents.
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 263
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement
Space of the Outdoor Cabinet
The space of the outdoor cabinet in different configurations must meet the
requirements of terminal block layout and the space for routing FE network
cables, power cables and optical fibers. For the requirements of the cable routing
space, see Cabling Space.
surge protection and Grounding of the Outdoor Cabinet
● The electrical continuity between parts of the outdoor cabinet must be
satisfactory to provide reliable grounding, safety, and protection performance.
Ensure that the resistance between any two connected points is less than 0.1
ohm. You can use a multimeter to measure the resistance.
● Surge protection devices are required to be installed near the outdoor cabinet
for AC/DC power cables directly connected to the outdoor cabinet. The surge
protection rating must not be smaller than 20 kA (8/20 μs). The signal cable
connected to the outdoor cabinet needs to be connected to the surge
protection board on an outdoor cabinet.
● The MDF must have protective units installed and the surge protection rating
must not be smaller than 1 kA (8/20 μs).
● The cabinet must provide an internal ground bar for grounding all devices in
the cabinet in a unified way. The resistance of the PGND cable must be
smaller than 10 ohms.
Protection Performance of the Outdoor Cabinet
When installed outdoors, an outdoor cabinet with rainproof heat-dissipation hole
and bottom lead-out cabling mode is recommended.
In regions with heavy dust, it is recommended that customers add air filters to
their customized outdoor cabinets to improve the reliability of the device.
Ensure that all cable apertures for external cables are sealed properly. Waterproof
plugs must be used when the device is installed in an outdoor cabinet.
If the cabinet is installed outdoors or in a corridor that is exposed to rain, the
cabinet must meet the requirements of IP55 rating protection. ("IP" indicates
International Protection Rating. The first number "5" refers to the rating for
preventing the solid particle from entering the cabinet. That is, ingress of dust is
not totally prevented, but dust shall not penetrate in a quantity to interfere with
satisfactory operation of apparatus or to impair safety. The second number "5"
refers to the rating for preventing water from entering the cabinet. That is, water
projected in jets against the enclosure from any direction shall have no harmful
effects.) For details, refer to Standards of the Outdoor Cabinet.
For example, test conditions/parameters of IP X5: flow: 12.5 L/minute±5%;
distance: 2.5 -3 m; spray duration: 1 minute/m2, at least 3 minutes.
Eligible adjudging criterion for protection:
● No water enters the cabinet.
● The water that enters the cabinet must be within the amount that may affect
the normal operation and safety performance of the cabinet. Water must not
accumulate on the insulating parts that may cause electrical leakage within
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 264
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement
the creepage distance. Water must not enter the electrical parts or enter the
winding (resistance) that cannot be used in the damp state. No water
accumulates around the cable head or enters the cable.
Engineering Installation of the Outdoor Cabinet
The engineering installation performance of the outdoor cabinet must meet the
requirements of installing the cabinet on a wall in the main outdoor application
scenarios of the outdoor cabinet, such as an elevated platform.
● The outdoor cabinet can be adaptively installed on different elevated
platforms.
● When installed on a concrete floor, the cabinet can be leveled so as to be
installed reliably (the recommended adjustable scope is 10 mm at least).
The space for routing power cables, optical fibers, and subscriber cables are
planned properly in the outdoor cabinet. Various types of cables are routed
separately and the cables do not cross over each other. The positions of the DDF
and the ODF are proper to ensure that the cable length is proper after the device
is installed.
The fiber management tray is installed in a proper position beyond the air exhaust
vent.
The top of the device is not higher than the lower edge of the air exhaust vent in
the cabinet when the device is installed in an outdoor cabinet. After installation,
the distance between the device top and the barrier of the cabinet top is at least
50 mm.
Place the battery and device in different compartments of the outdoor cabinet if
possible to protect the device against corrosion.
Ventilation and Heat Dissipation Performance of the Outdoor Cabinet
Requirements on the ventilation and heat dissipation performance of the outdoor
cabinet: Obvious air intake vent and air exhaust vent are distributed in the air duct
of the outdoor cabinet after the device is installed. The vent position and vent
dimensions are proper and meet the environment specifications of the device.
Outdoor Cabinet Monitoring
The outdoor cabinet can monitor the door status, temperature, and surge
protection.
Standards of the Outdoor Cabinet
Standard Description
ID
IEC 529 First characteristic Dust-protected: Ingress of dust is not totally
numeral: 5. prevented but dust does not enter in sufficient
quantity to interfere with satisfactory
operation of the equipment
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 265
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement
Standard Description
ID
Second Protected against water jets: Water projected
characteristic by a nozzle against the enclosure from any
numeral: 5. direction shall have no harmful effect
4.1.1.2.4 Basic Installation Specifications
A correct installation mode is the prerequisite for ensuring that the ONU works
normally.
Basic Installation Specifications
Keep off electromagnetic interference. Do not route ground cables or
subscriber cables into the room in the
overhead mode.
Connect the ground cable to the It is recommended that you use the
ground bar. metal tube that is grounded to route
cables out of the outdoor cabinet.
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 266
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement
Basic Installation Specifications
Do not use the cabinet that is not Ground subscriber cables in a unified
waterproof outdoors. The protection way.
rating of the outdoor cabinet must
reach IP55.
Use a dedicated surge protection bar. The device does not have any ground
cable.
Seal the cable apertures of the cabinet Ensure that the cabinet door is locked
properly to prevent dust or insects when the device is running.
from entering the cabinet.
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 267
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement
Basic Installation Specifications
Ensure that the ventilation openings of The ends of the optical fiber that is
the network cabinet are free of not used must be protected with
obstacle. dustproof caps.
When devices are installed into an IMB The corrugated tube does not enter
network cabinet or APM30H cabinet the network cabinet and the cut of the
without a temperature control unit corrugated tube is not smoothened.
(such as air conditioner or heat
exchanger), ensure that the IMB
network cabinet or APM30H cabinet is
not completely closed. The air intake
vent and air exhaust vent on the IMB
network cabinet or APM30H cabinet
must match air channels.
The metal wire of the optical cable Signal cables must be routed
that is not in the overhead mode must separately from power cables.
be fastened.
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 268
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement
Basic Installation Specifications
When the device is installed on a wall, Ensure that cable connectors and ports
instead of using plastic or other parts, do not face upwards.
use the mounting brackets and
expansion bolts delivered with the
device to fasten the device.
When the device is installed indoors, if When the device is installed in
the device is close to the sewer or overhead/side cabling mode network
heating line, water may easily damp or cabinet, the water may enter the
enter the device. device through cables. It is
recommended that route cables under
the aperture, keep the distance about
100mm.
Do not install devices close to the Do not install devices in resting places.
window. For example, install the IMB
network cabinet at least 5 meters
away from the window and install the
APM30H cabinet at least 10 meters
away from the window to avoid the
influence of noises while protecting
devices against wind and rain. The
following figure shows the distance
requirements for installing an IMB
network cabinet.
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 269
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement
4.1.1.3 General Installation Guidelines
This chapter describes the general installation guidelines on unpacking and
inspecting equipment, installing boards, checking optical fiber connections,
equipment grounding regulations, engineering labels, cable routing and bundling,
and making and testing cable connectors.
4.1.1.3.1 Unpacking Inspection
When a project starts, the project supervisor should work with the customer to
unpack and inspect the delivered equipment.
Unpacking the Chassis
Unpack the chassis before starting the installation.
Prerequisites
The chassis must be delivered to the site.
Tools, Instruments, and Materials
● ESD gloves
● Diagonal pliers
● Paper knife
Precautions
NO TICE
● Integrated circuits (ICs) are sensitive to electrostatic discharge from the human
body. When handling boards or metallic parts of the equipment, wear ESD
gloves and hold only the edges of the boards during operation.
● If the equipment is transported from a cold and dry place to a warm and damp
place, wait at least 30 minutes before unpacking it. Otherwise, the moisture
condenses on the board surface and damages the components.
Procedure
Step 1 Transport the packing box to the equipment room.
Step 2 Check the packing box, and stop unpacking it in any of the following cases:
● The outer package is severely damaged.
● There is water leakage on the outer package.
Find the causes and provide feedback to the local representative office of Huawei.
Step 3 Observe the labels on the carton to check the equipment configuration and take a
record.
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 270
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement
Step 4 Cut the strap with the diagonal plier and then split the adhesive tape properly
along the seam between the cover and the body of the box with the paper knife.
Do not scratch the articles inside the box.
Step 5 Open the carton and take out the chassis box from the carton.
Step 6 Open the chassis box and take out the chassis. Then, check whether the chassis is
damaged.
----End
Unpacking Boards
If the board is separately delivered, unpack the board before you install it.
Prerequisites
None
Tools, Equipment and Materials
● ESD wrist strap or ESD gloves
● Diagonal pliers
● Paper knife
Background Information
Generally, the board has been installed in the chassis properly before delivery and
is shipped together with the chassis. If a carton is used to pack boards for
shipping, unpacking and checking are necessary when the boards arrive at the
destination. (Generally, a carton is used when boards are required for capacity
expansion.) The boards are put into shielding bags for transportation. Take ESD
protection measures when you unpack the boards to prevent damage to them.
Precautions
NO TICE
Electronic circuits and components are extremely sensitive to electrostatic
discharge (ESD). When handling circuit boards, make sure that you wear a
securely grounded ESD wrist strap or ESD gloves, and only hold the edge of boards
during operation.
Procedure
Step 1 Wear a securely grounded ESD wrist strap (or ESD gloves) and make sure that it is
securely grounded. Check the packing box of the board and make sure it is intact
without any damage.
Step 2 Cut the straps with diagonal pliers and use a paper knife to split the tape along
the seam between the cover and the box body. See Figure 4-10.
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 271
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement
NO TICE
Do not cut too deep into the carton with the paper knife. Otherwise, the knife
might scratch the articles inside.
Figure 4-10 Board carton
NO TE
● Each board is packed in both a cushion foam and an shielding bag. Keep the bags
properly. They can be used later for keeping the boards or packing the damaged boards
returned for repair.
● The ambient temperature and humidity may have an impact on the boards. In each
shielding bag there is a small bag of desiccant, which shall not be thrown away.
● Wait for at least 30 minutes before unpacking if the board is just moved from a cold,
dry place to a warm, damp place. Otherwise, moisture will condense on the board
surface and damage the components.
Step 3 Open the carton and check whether the number and type of the boards are
consistent with what is marked on the carton label. Check that there is no evident
damage on the board package.
Step 4 Open the board box and take the board out of the shielding bag.
● Hold the bottom of the shielding bag with the left hand.
● Take the board out of the bag gently by its front panel with the right hand.
● Do not touch any electronic component on the board surface to avoid
damage.
● Keep the bags properly.
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 272
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement
Step 5 Check whether the board is physically damaged or is not in line with the packing
list. Table 4-15 lists the checklist. In this case of any damage to the board, contact
local representatives of Huawei.
Table 4-15 Board checklist
Item Requirement
Name and quantity The board name and quantity should
be in line with the contract or packing
list.
Outer view The board should be clean and free of
any scratch, loose component, or
damage.
Connector The connector should be properly
installed and free of tilted or deformed
pins.
Step 6 If no problem is found, put the board back into the board box and put it in the
place specified by the customer.
● If you are going to install the board right after unpacking, place the board on
an ESD surface to discharge the static electricity.
● If you are going to install the board at a later time, pack the board using the
original materials and place them at a cool dry place without direct sunshine
or strong electromagnetic radiation.
----End
Requirements of Inspection
The received goods must be inspected against the Packing List item by item.
● After the goods are inspected complete and intact, both the engineering
supervisor and the customer must sign the Packing List. After that, the
customer takes over the goods.
● During the inspection, if some equipment is stated undelivered in the Packing
List, directly report the situation to the order management engineer of the
local office of Huawei for subsequent handling. Both the engineering
supervisor and the customer shall sign the Packing List to confirm the
situation.
● If any short, wrong, extra or damaged equipment is found during the
inspection, both parties shall sign the Unpacking Memo and the Packing List.
The project supervisor shall fill in the Equipment Problem Report and send it
to the order management engineer of the local office of Huawei within three
days.
4.1.1.3.2 Installing chassis
The installation modes for chassis vary with installation environment.
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 273
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement
NO TE
For installation on a desk, on a wall, in a 19-inch open rack, in a 19-inch cabinet, or in an
A63E cabinet, see the "Quick Installation Guide for A800 (Indoor)".
4.1.1.3.3 Installing Router Tray and Power Adapter
There may be different models of power adapters. Refer to the installation
procedure in this guide to install a power adapter.
NO TE
For details, see the Support E website: https://support.huawei.com/enterprise/en/doc/
EDOC1100289139?
idPath=24030814%7C9856750%7C22715517%7C253427857%7C253450399.
If you need to install a DC power connector, refer to the following procedure:
1. Take the power connector out of the packaging bag, and strip a power cable
at a length in line with the value marked on the silkscreen attached to the
connector.
CA UTION
To avoid damage to copper wires when a length of 8 mm power cable is
stripped, do not apply too much force when peeling insulation coating off the
wires.
2. Put the cord end terminal onto the exposed conductor and ensure that the
conductor is aligned with the edge of the cord end terminal.
3. Crimp the joint parts of the cord end terminal and the cable conductor.
When installing a DC power connector on the product. Insert the NEG(-) wires
(blue) into the hole marked a negative sign ("1-" and "2-") and the RTN(+)
wires (black/brown) into the hole marked a positive sign ("1+" and "2+").
When the wires touch the end of the holes, slide the cover on the top of the
power connector to expose M4 screws and then use a torque screwdriver to
tighten the M2.5 screws, with a torque of 0.45 N
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 274
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement
DANGER
Inserting the conducting wires to wrong holes may cause damage to the
device. Verify that the positive and negative wires are inserted in the correct
holes before powering on the device.
4. Pull each wire slightly to check whether it is securely connected. If a cable
slides outward or the wires of a cable are exposed outside the hole for the
cable, remove the cable, cut the split wires, strip a power cable, and reinstall
the cable.
4.1.1.3.4 Checking Tail Fiber Connection
This section describes how to check the fiber connection by using an optical
interface board.
Prerequisites
The fiber must be installed and routed from the optical interface to the ODF.
On the power supply device side, the power switch must be turned on.
Tools, Equipment and Materials
Optical power meter
Short fiber
Precautions
DANGER
Avoid direct eye exposure to laser beams when connecting the fiber.
Connection Diagram for the Check
When using an optical interface board to test the fiber connection, connect the
fiber to the optical power meter on the ODF side and connect the fiber to the
OUT port of the optical interface board on the chassis side.
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 275
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement
Procedure
Step 1 On the chassis side, remove the fiber that connects to the OUT port of an optical
interface board.
Step 2 Connect the optical power meter to the OUT port of the optical interface through
the fiber.
Step 3 Turn on the optical power switch and set the working wavelength according to the
optical interface type. The optical power meter reads that the launched optical
power of the optical interface board is A.
Step 4 Recover the fiber connection to the OUT port.
Step 5 On the ODF side, remove the fiber that connects to the OUT port. Connect the
fiber to the optical power meter. The tested optical power is B.
Step 6 Remove the fiber from the corresponding OUT port of the optical interface board.
The optical power meter reads the LO state and receives no optical signals.
Step 7 Compare A with B.
● If the deviation between A and B is less than 1 dB, it indicates that the fiber is
correctly connected and the attenuation of the fiber is within the normal
range.
● If the deviation between A and B is more than 1 dB, make sure the fiber is
fine and correctly routed, and then check whether the fiber terminal is clean.
NO TICE
If the fiber is connected through a flange, the deviation between A and B should
be less than 2 dB. Otherwise, it indicates that the fiber is incorrectly connected
and the attenuation of the fiber is not within the normal range. Make sure that
the fiber is fine and correctly routed, and then check whether the fiber terminal is
clean.
Step 8 Check the fiber of the IN port in the same way.
Step 9 Recover the fiber connections on the chassis side and ODF side.
Step 10 Repeat Steps 1 - 9 to check fiber connections to other optical interfaces.
----End
4.1.1.3.5 Grounding Specifications
Suitable grounding helps to avoid accidental personal injury and guarantee the
safe running of the equipment, and provide EMC shielding to improve the quality
of service (QoS).
General Grounding Specifications
This section introduces the general grounding specifications.
General grounding specifications, as shown in Table 4-16.
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 276
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement
Table 4-16 General grounding specifications
No. Description
1 Working ground, protection ground (including shielding ground and
lightning ground) should be bonded to the same grounding electrode.
2 Cable racks, equipment frames and enclosures, metallic air ducts and
doors and windows in the equipment room should be grounded.
3 All the metallic equipment units that are normally neutral should be
grounded.
4 The ground cables should firmly contact with the ground bar in the
equipment.
5 Connection to the already grounded equipment for grounding purpose is
not allowed.
Grounding Specifications for the Building
This section introduces the grounding specifications for the building.
Grounding specifications for the building, as shown in Table 4-17.
Table 4-17 Grounding specifications for the building
No. Description
1 Usually, the earth resistance of the telecommunication site where the
base station equipment is located is recommended to be less than 10
ohm. It also should comply with the relative stipulation of the country.
Equipment Grounding Specifications
This section introduces the equipment grounding specifications.
Equipment grounding specifications, as shown in Table 4-18.
Table 4-18 Equipment grounding specifications
No. Description
1 All the network telecommunications equipment including mobile base
station, transmission equipment, switching equipment and office power
should be grounded. All the protection grounds (PGNDs) of such
equipment should be finally bonded to a general ground bar. The PGNDs
in an equipment room should be bonded to the general ground bar in the
same equipment room.
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 277
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement
No. Description
2 The PGND of the equipment should be connected to the nearby ground
bar (user-supplied). Copper-core conducting cable with green-yellow
plastic insulation cover should be used. The cross-sectional area of the
conductive cable is required to be 25 mm2 or wider.
3 The grounding terminals at the front door, rear door and side panels of
the cabinet should be separately connected to the grounding post of the
cabinet. The cross-sectional area of the cable is required to be 1.6 mm2.
4 The metallic units of the equipment cabinet should have good
conductance. Any nonconductive paint should be removed from the
metal-to-metal contact.
5 The cabinets contact the adjacent cabinets in a row through the fixing
bolts and washers on the cabinet top. A surface of 30 x 50 mm2 around
the bolt holes should not be covered with paint. Rust-proof and rot-proof
measures should be taken. The surface of the washer and nut should be
plated with nickel to ensure good electrical conductance.
6 When the cabinets of the same type are connected, cables not longer
than 300 mm should be used to connect the grounding busbars of
adjacent cabinets, if these busbars exist. The cross-sectional area of the
short cables is required to be 6 mm2. Two ends of the short cable should
be secured to the terminals of the ground bar.
Grounding Specifications for Office Power
This section introduces the grounding specifications for office power
Grounding specifications for office power, as shown in Table 4-19.
Table 4-19 Grounding specifications for office power
No. Description
1 TN-S AC power system should be adopted in the equipment room.
2 A C-level AC lightning protector with rated current not less than 20 KA
should be installed at the AC power cable inlet of the equipment room.
3 PGNDs of the office power and telecommunications equipment should
finally connect to the same grounding electrode. Grounds of
telecommunications equipment and office power in an equipment room
should be bonded to the ground bar in the same equipment room.
4 Lightning-proof circuit should be added to AC power interface.
5 The positive electrode of -48V/-60V DC power or the negative electrode
of 24 DC power should be grounded at the DC power outlet.
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 278
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement
No. Description
6 The working ground and PGND of DC power system and the PGND of
switching equipment should finally connect to the same grounding
electrode. Grounds of telecommunications equipment and office power in
an equipment room should be bonded to the ground bar in the same
equipment room.
7 Surge-proof circuit should be added to DC power interface.
Grounding Specifications for Signal Cables
This section introduces the grounding specifications for signal cables.
Grounding specifications for signal cables, as shown in Table 4-20.
Table 4-20 Grounding specifications for signal cables
No. Description
1 The outside cable should have metallic protection cover and two ends of
the cover should be well grounded. The end in the equipment room can
be connected to the ground bar in the equipment room. Lightning
protector should be installed in the interface connecting the coming
cable. The ground cable of the lightning protector should be as short as
possible.
2 Both the outer conductor of coaxial cable and the metal shield of
shielded cable should firmly contact with the metal surface of the target
equipment.
3 Idle wire pair in the signal cable should be grounded in the equipment
room.
4 The TDA tone cable should pass through the main distribution frame
(MDF) that has a security unit before it goes out the office. Metal shield
of the cable should connect to the PGND of the MDF. The MDF and the
cabinet should share the same grounding electrode.
5 Overhead signal cables in the telecommunications office or mobile base
station area is not allowed.
Specifications for Managing Ground Cables
This section introduces the Specifications for managing ground cables.
Specifications for managing ground cables, as shown in Table 4-21.
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 279
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement
Table 4-21 Specifications for managing ground cables
No. Description
1 Ground cables should be routed separately with signal cables.
2 Ground cables should not be routed into the equipment room through
overhead cable trays. They should be routed under ground or inside the
room.
3 The PGNG cable must be a jointless copper-core cable. Installing
connectors, splices or breakers to ground cables is not allowed.
4 The PGND cable should use copper-core conducting cable with green-
yellow plastic insulation cover.
5 The neutral wire of the AC power cable should not connect to the PGNDs
of the telecommunications equipment in the equipment room.
6 The PGND cable should be as short as possible (no more than 30 m).
Otherwise, the user should adjust the position of ground bar.
4.1.1.3.6 Engineering Labels
Engineering labels are attached to both ends of various cables to identify the
physical positions of cables on different devices. There are two types of
engineering labels, specialized for the power cables and signal cables respectively.
The power cables include - 48 V / - 60 V power cables, power ground cables
(BGND) and protection ground cables (PGND). The signal cables include external
alarm cables, network cables, clock cables, optical fibers and so on.
Engineering labels for cables ensure the orderly and correct installation of cables
of equipment and facilitate the easy subsequent equipment maintenance and
inspection.
NO TE
In case there is special requirement from the user of the equipment on the description
method of the labels, the labels should be printed accordingly. However, this must be stated
in the self-check report.
Introduction to Labels
Introduces the labels used in the equipment.
?.1. Material
This section describes the requirements for the thickness, color, materials, ambient
temperature, and fill-in method of the labels.
The label's characteristic are as follows:
● Thickness: 0.09 mm
● Color: chalk white
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 280
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement
● Material: Polyester (PET), with UL and CSA certifications
● Ambient temperature: - 29 to 149 degrees Celsius
● Laser printing or handwriting with oiliness markers
?.2. Type and Shape
There are two types of engineering labels for power cables and signal cables
respectively.
Label for Signal Cables
The label for signal cables is L-shaped with fixed dimensions, as shown in Figure
4-11.
Figure 4-11 Label for signal cables
1.Dividing line 2.Cut dotted line
The dividing lines on the label help to specify more clearly the position of a cable.
For example, there is one between the cabinet number and the frame number and
another one between the frame number and the slot number. The dividing line is
1.5 mm x 0.6 mm in size with the color of PONTONE 656c (light blue).
The cut dotted line helps to fold the label when attaching it to the cable, and its
size is 1.0 mm x 2.0 mm.
There is a mark "TO:" (upside down in the figure) at the lower right corner of the
label. The mark is used to identify the opposite end of the cable on which the
label is attached.
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 281
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement
Label for Power Cables
The label for power cables should be attached to the identification plate on the
cable ties that are bundled to the cable. The identification plate has an
embossment of 0.2 mm x 0.6 mm around (symmetric on both sides), and the area
in the middle is for attaching the label, as shown in Figure 4-12.
Figure 4-12 Label for power cables
1.Cable tie 2.Label 3.Dividing line on the label
Information Carried on Labels
This section gives the information carried on labels for signal cable and power
cable.
?.1. For Power Cables
Labels for power cables are only attached on one side of the identification plates.
On the labels, there is information (the part after the mark "TO:") about the
location of the device on the other end of the cable, like the location of control
cabinet, distribution box or power socket.
?.2. For Signal Cables
The two sides of the label attached on the signal cable carry information about
the location of the ports connected to both ends of the cable.
The information is given like this:
● Area 1 contains the location information of local end of the cable.
● Area 2 (with the mark "TO:") contains the location information of the
opposite end of the cable.
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 282
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement
● Area 3 has been folded up inside the label.
Printed parts on the label for signal cables, as shown in Figure 4-13.
Figure 4-13 Label for signal cables
Seen from the cabling end of the equipment, the text part of the label is on the
right side of the cable. The side with "TO:" that is facing outside carries the
location information of the opposite end, and the other side carries the location
information of the local end. Therefore, the information in Area 1 at one end is
the same as the information in Area 2 at the other end of the cable, and vice
versa. In other words, the local information at one end is called the opposite
information at the other end.
?.3. Remarks
To use labels, focus on the following points.
● When printing/writing and attaching labels, pay attention to keep the labels
clean.
● Since the label paper is made of moistureproof and waterproof material, ink-
jet printers and ink pens are forbidden for printing and writing labels.
● Labels should be attached with good order in alignment.
● Cable ties should be bundled in the same position of power cables, with
identification plates on the same side.
● The positions of "up", "down", "right" or "left" are all based on the viewpoint
of the engineering person who is working on the label.
Filling Information on Labels
This section describes how to fill information on labels. The contents can be
printed or written on the labels. Printing is recommended for the sake of high
efficiency and eye-pleasant layout.
?.1. Printing Labels
Use a laser printer to print the label according to the template.
Template for the Printing
Template is available to print out the label. You can obtain the template by:
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 283
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement
● Downloading the template from http://support.huawei.com. The directory of
the template is Documentation > Engineering Service > Engineering Quality >
Quality Standard and Template.
● Asking for the template from Huawei local office.
Figure 4-14 shows the template style.
Figure 4-14 Template of label
1.Cell 2.Cell
Cells Merging on the Template
When using the template, you can directly modify the contents on the template,
and the following should be observed:
● The settings of centered characters, direction, and fonts should not be
changed.
● When there are too many characters to be filled in, zoom out the characters,
but make sure the printouts are clear and legible.
To merge the cells, you should first recover the table structure (if gridlines are
displayed, you can start from Step 3 directly).
1. Select the menu item Edit >Select All.
2. Select the menu item Format > Borders and Shading >Borders. Select Box and
click OK.
3. Drag the mouse to select the cells to be merged and select the menu item
Table > Merge Cells.
4. Change the content based on the original thing.
If two merged cells are still not enough to accommodate the characters, use
multiple lines.
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 284
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement
Requirements on the Printer
To print the labels, laser jet printer must be used, although there is no restriction
on the model of the printer. Before printing the label, set up the page and try the
printing on ordinary blank paper (both sides are blank):
1. Cover the blank paper onto the whole page of label paper, and check whether
the page setup conforms to the requirement.
2. Make sure the printer properties, such as "paper size" and "direction", have
been set correctly.
3. If the warning prompt as shown in Figure 4-15 appears before printing, click
Ignore to continue the printing.
Figure 4-15 Warning prompt before printing
If the printout conforms to the requirement, print it to label paper. If the printout
does not conform, adjust the page setup and try the printing again, until the
correct printout is produced. The method of adjusting the page setup is as follows:
1. Select the menu item File > Page Setup.
2. Select the Margins tab page.
3. Select Left for Gutter Position.
4. Set Header and Footer to 0, and adjust the values of Top, Bottom, Left, and
Right.
After the page setup has been made correct, save it for future use. This page setup
is only necessary the first time you use the template to print the labels.
Requirements on the Printed Label
After you print the labels, check whether they comply with the template
specifications:
● All the printouts must be on the label, and nothing should be printed on the
bottom page of the label.
● Contents in the cells should be aligned in the center. In a single-line printout,
the dividing lines and the mark "TO:" should not be covered by the printed
characters.
● When the cells are merged and the printouts are made in multiple lines, avoid
covering the mark "TO:" when printing the texts by using the space bar to
move the printing contents to the next line.
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 285
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement
NO TICE
Different from the ordinary paper, the label paper is composed of two pages. No
matter what model of printer you are using, feed in the labels one after another
by hand. Never use the auto-feed mode in order to avoid jamming the labels.
Different models of printers may have different feeding modes, make sure to feed
in the labels correctly.
?.2. Writing Labels
Use the black oiliness markers delivered together with the equipment to write the
labels. For easy recognition and good-looking, the font in handwriting should be
close to the standard typeface as much as possible.
Writing pen
Use the black oiliness markers delivered together with the device to write the
labels.
In special cases, black ball-pens are allowed, although not recommended. When
writing with the ball-pen, take care not to leave the oil on the label, which may
contaminate the label and blur the words.
NO TE
The delivered marker has two nibs. Make sure to use the smaller nib to write the labels.
Handwriting
For the sake of easy recognition and good looking, the font in handwriting should
be close to the standard typeface as much as possible.Table 4-22 shows the
standard typeface.
Table 4-22 Standard typeface for handwriting
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
9 A B C D E F G H
I J K L M N O P Q
R S T U V W X Y Z
The font size depends on the number of figures and letters. The words must be
medium-sized, legible, tidy and good-looking.
Writing direction
Write the characters in proper size, and the direction is shown in Figure 4-16.
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 286
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement
Figure 4-16 Writing direction of the label
attaching Labels
After printing or writing the label, remove the label from the bottom page and
attach it to the signal cable, or the identification plate of the power cable.
?.1. Attaching the Label to the Signal Cable
This section describes the positions where the labels should be attached on the
signal cables and the means by which the labels are folded.
Paste the label at the proper position
It is recommended to paste a label at a point 2 cm from the connector.
NO TE
In special cases, for example, to avoid cable bent or affecting other cables, other positions
are allowed to attach the labels.
The steps to attach the label to the cable are shown in Figure 4-17 The finished
labels should be on the right or top of the cables, according to different cabling
methods. The left part of the figures shows the method to attach the label when
the cable is laid vertically, while the right part of the figures shows the method to
attach the label when the cable is laid horizontally.
● Stick the label to the proper position on the cable, fold the narrow part of the
label according to the directions shown in Figure 4-17.
Figure 4-17 Sticking the label onto proper position of the signal cable
1. Cable 2. Label
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 287
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement
Fold the part
Fold the printed part along the dotted line according to the directions shown in
(2) of Figure 4-17.
The length of the narrow part is based on an external cable diameter of 2.6 mm,
after this part has been stuck to the back of the label, it may not overlap the
entire printed part.
After the printed part of the label has been folded, the narrow part of the label
should be covered completely, as shown in Figure 4-17.
Fold the Label
Fold the label upwards along the dashed line, and attach it. After being attached,
the label is shaped as (3) of Figure 4-17.
?.2. attaching the Label to the Power Cable
This section describes the positions where the labels should be attached on the
power cables and the means by which the cable ties are bound to the power
cables.
Remove the label from the bottom page, then attach it to the identification plate
on the cable tie. The label should be stuck to the rectangular flute, and should be
stuck to only one side of the identification plate. Make sure to attach the labels on
the same side of the identification plates. The cable ties are bundled 2 cm from
the connectors, and other positions are allowed in special circumstances.
Cable ties should be bundled on both ends of a cable. After the bundling, the
finished identification plate should be on top of the cable in horizontal cabling, or
on the right side of the cable in vertical cabling. Make sure the label is facing out,
as shown in Figure 4-18.
Figure 4-18 Appearance of attached labels on power cables
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 288
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement
Frequently Used Engineering Labels
This section describes the frequently used engineering labels. The other labels are
omitted here. You can perform the operation as required on site.
?.1. Engineering Labels for Power Cables
The labels are attached to the DC cables that provide power for the cabinets, and
the protection ground cables, including the -48 V, PGND, and BGND cables. The
labels for DC power cables are attached to one side of the identification plates on
cable ties.
Table 4-23 shows the information carried on the labels for the DC power cables.
Table 4-23 Information on labels attached to the DC power cables
Content Meaning
MN(BC) - -1 MN (BC): BC is written right under
MN. On the loaded cabinet side, MN
MN(BC) - -2 identifies the row and column number
MN(BC) - BGND of the power distribution equipment
like the control cabinet and
MN(BC) - PGND distribution box, BC identifies the row
and column number of the -48 V
connector (if there is no row number
or column number, or the connector
can be identified without them, BC can
be omitted). BGND and PGND have no
row and column number for
identification. On the power cabinet
side, only MN is used to identify the
cabinet.
The label only carries location information about the opposite equipment, the
control cabinet or the distribution box, while information of the local end is not
necessary. Table 4-23 lists the information of two -48 V power supplies on the
label. The information for other DC voltages (such as 24 V, 60 V) should be given
in similar methods. Make sure that labels are attached in correct direction. That is,
after the cable ties are bundled onto the cable, the identification plates with the
labels should face up, and the text on the labels in the same cabinet should be in
the same direction, as shown in Figure 4-19.
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 289
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement
Figure 4-19 Example of the labels on the DC power cable
On the loaded cabinet side, the label marked with "A01/B08- -2" on the cable
indicates that the cable is -2 DC supply, which is from the eighth connector on the
second row of -48V bus bar in the cabinet on Row A, and Column 1 in the
equipment room.
On the distribution unit side, the label marked with "B03- -2" indicates that the
cable is -2 DC supply, which is from the loaded cabinet on Row B, Column 03 in
the equipment room.
NO TE
● In the power distribution unit (or the first power cabinet of a row in the transmission
equipment room), every terminal block on the - connector bar has a numeric
identification. For example, in the above label of "A01/B08--48V2", "08" (or sometimes
"8") is the numeric identification of the terminal block.
● PGND and BGND are two copper bars, on which the terminal blocks are connected,
therefore which terminal is connected makes no difference. It is only necessary to give
the row and column of the power distribution unit, instead of giving the specific serial
number of the terminal block on the copper bar. For example, if the label on the loaded
cabinet side is "A01-BGND", it means that the power cable is a BGND that connects
BGND copper bar in the power distribution unit on Row A, Column 01 in the equipment
room. Information on the labels for PGND cables should be given in the similar way.
?.2. Engineering Labels for External Cables of Alarm Box
The external cables of alarm box are connected to the first subscriber cabinet of
each row (used for power distribution). Labels posted on the first cabinet of each
row should indicate which equipment is using the access terminal.
Labels are not needed on the equipment side unless there is special requirement.
In this case, only Area 2 of the label should be filled in.
Table 4-24 shows the information on the labels of alarm box external cables.
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 290
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement
Table 4-24 Information on labels attached to the external cables of alarm box
Content Meaning Example
MN MN: serial M: The cabinets going from front to back (in a
number of the row) in the equipment room are numbered from
cabinet in the A to Z.
equipment N: The cabinets going from left to right (in a
room column) are numbered from 01 to 99.
For example, A01 is the cabinet in Row A and
Column 01.
The label on the alarm cable carries simple information, and only part of the text
area needs to be filled in. It is recommended to keep the whole length of the label
instead of cutting out the blank area.
Figure 4-20 shows a label on the alarm cable, on which "A01" indicates that the
alarm cable connects the first cabinet and the cabinet on Row A, Column 01 in the
equipment room.
Figure 4-20 Example of the label on the alarm cable
?.3. Engineering Labels for Ethernet Cables
Engineering labels of Ethernet cables are used to identify network port cables of
boards. The label content includes the cabinet number, position number, subrack
serial number, position number of the physical board, and serial number of the
network port.
Meaning of the Label
Table 4-25 shows the information on both sides of the labels attached to the
Ethernet cables that connect the boards in the frames.
Table 4-25 Information on labels attached to the Ethernet cables
Content Meaning Example
MN-B-C-D MN: cabinet For example, A01
number
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 291
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement
Content Meaning Example
B: frame Numbered in top-down order with two digits,
number for example, 01
C: physical Numbered in top-down and left-right order
slot number with two digits, for example, 01
D: Ethernet Numbered in top-down and left-right order
port number with two digits, for example, 01
MN-Z MN: cabinet For example, B02
number
Z: location Valid location number of the terminal device
number onsite. If the cable is connected to a router in a
cabinet, the serial numbers of the cabinet, the
frame and the Ethernet interface of the router
should be specified, for example, B02-03-12. If
the cable is connected to the network
management station (NMS), specific location
of the NMS should be given.
Example of the Label
Figure 4-21 shows the label on the Ethernet cable:
Figure 4-21 Example of the label on the Ethernet cable
"A01-03-10-05" indicates that on the local end of the Ethernet cable is connected
to Ethernet Port 05, Slot 10, Frame 03 of the cabinet on Row A, Column 01 in the
equipment room.
"B02-03-12" indicates that the opposite end of the Ethernet cable is connected to
Ethernet Port 12, Frame 03 of the cabinet on Row B, Column 02 in the equipment
room.
?.4. Engineering Labels of the Fibers Between Two Devices
These labels are attached to the fibers that connect the optical interfaces on the
boards in a frame, or on the device boxes. There are two types of labels for fibers:
one is for the fiber that connects the optical interfaces on two devices, the other is
for the fiber that connects the device and the optical distribution frame (ODF).
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 292
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement
Meaning of the Label
Table 4-26 shows the information on both sides of the labels attached to the fiber
that connects two devices.
Table 4-26 Information on labels attached to the fiber between two devices
Content Meaning Example
MN-B-C-D-R/T MN: cabinet number For example, A01
B: frame number Numbered in top-down order with
two digits, for example, 01
C: physical slot number Numbered in top-down and left-
right order with two digits, for
example, 01
D: optical interface Numbered in top-down and left-
number right order with two digits, for
example, 05
R: optical receiving -
interface
T: optical transmitting
interface
MN-B-C-D-R/T MN: cabinet number The meanings are the same as
above. When the local device and
B: frame number the opposite end device are not in
C: physical slot number the same equipment room, MN
can be the name of the
D: optical interface equipment room.
number
R: optical receiving -
interface
T: optical transmitting
interface
Example of the Label
Figure 4-22 shows the label on the fiber jumper between two devices:
Figure 4-22 Example of the label on the fiber between two devices
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 293
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement
"A01-01-05-05-R" indicates that the local end of the fiber jumper is connected to
Optical Receiving Interface 05 on Slot 5, Frame 01 in the cabinet on Row A,
Column 01 in the equipment room.
"G01-01-01-01-T" indicates that the opposite end of the fiber jumper is connected
to optical transmitting interface 01 on Slot 01, Frame 01 in the cabinet on Row G,
Column 01 in the equipment room.
?.5. Labels for the Fiber that Connects the Device and the ODF
The label stuck on the fiber from the equipment to the ODF contains all necessary
information on the cabinet and the ODF.
Meaning of the Label
Table 4-27 shows the information on both sides of the labels attached to the fiber
that connects the device and the ODF.
Table 4-27 Information on labels attached to the fiber between the device and
the ODF
Content Meaning Example
MN-B-C-D-R/T MN: cabinet number For example, A01
B: frame number Numbered in bottom-up
order with two digits, for
example, 01
C: physical slot number Numbered in top-down
and left-right order with
two digits, for example,
01
D: optical interface number Numbered in top-down
and left-right order with
two digits, for example,
05
MN-B-C-D-R/T R: optical receiving interface -
T: optical transmitting
interface
ODF-MN-B-C-R/T MN: row number and column M indicates a row that is
number of ODF numbered A to Z from
front to back in order.
N indicates a column
that is numbered 01 to
99 from left to right in
order, for example, G01
is the ODF of Row G and
Column 01.
B: row number of the Range from 01 to 99, for
terminal device example, 01-01
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 294
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement
Content Meaning Example
C: column number of the
terminal device
R: optical receiving interface -
T: optical transmitting
interface
Example of the Label
Figure 4-23 shows the label on the fiber jumper between the device and the ODF.
Figure 4-23 Example of the label on the fiber between the device and the ODF
"ODF-G01-01-01-R" indicates that the local end of the fiber jumper is connected
to the optical receiving terminal on Row 01, Column 01 of the ODF in Row G
Column 01 in the equipment room.
"A01-01-05-05-R" indicates that the opposite end of the fiber jumper is connected
to Optical Receiving Interface 5 on Slot 05, frame 01 in the cabinet on Row A,
Column 01 in the equipment room.
4.1.1.3.7 The Requirements of Cabling and Bundling
Introduces the requirements of cabling and bundling the cables.
The Requirements of Cabling
Describes the method and requirements of cable routing.
● For equipment room installed with supports and ESD protection floor, cables
can be arranged in downward mode. That is, all cables can be routed through
the interlayer of the floor or the cable trough. If the overhead cabling mode is
adopted, cable tray is required above the cabinet for holding cables.
● The specifications and cross-sectional area of the cable, and the route and
position for cabling should be designed beforehand.
● All cables should be arranged neatly, with their sheaths remaining intact.
● Communication cables, such as alarm cables, network cables and clock cables,
should be arranged separately with the power cable and optical fibers.
● Turnings of the cable should be smooth, with the bend radius reaching 60mm
or above.
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 295
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement
● Any damage to the insulation layer of the conducting line is not allowed.
● The cable arrangement should take the future maintenance and capacity
expansion into consideration.
The Requirements of Bundling
Describes the method and requirements of cable binding.
● Bundling of the cable should be tidy, clear and elegant. As a general rule,
cables are grouped by types, or grouped as needed when they are in a large
number. Bind them with cable ties and route them in either upward or
underfloor cabling mode in the cabling area at the two sides of the cabinet.
● Cables must be bundled when arranged in ducts. Bind the cables closely with
appropriate tightness. The space between the cable ties should be even and
the overall appearance of the cabling nice.
● You may not bind the cables when arranged in cable troughs. But they should
be placed tidy and straight in the trough with no crossover. Moreover, the
cables can not overflow the trough. At two ends and turnings of the trough,
use a plastic clip for the cables.
● Cables both inside and outside the cabinet must be bundled. Keep the cables
bundled closely and neatly.
● Use cable ties of different specifications for cables according to actual
circumstances.
● Do not connect two cable ties in bundling. Otherwise, the binding strength
will be weakened.
● After the bundling, cut the remaining part of the cable tie smoothly, removing
all burrs.
● The space between the cable ties is even and is three or four times the size of
the bundle diameter.
● When making turning for the bundled cable, keep the bend radius as big as
possible to avoid breaking the cable cores at the turning.
Figure 4-24 shows the specific operation of bundling.
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 296
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement
Figure 4-24 Cable bundling
1. No cable tie at 2. Cable tie 3. Burr 4. Cut smoothly
turning
4.1.1.3.8 Binding Strap
This chapter introduces the architecture and usage of the binding strap, as well as
precautions for bundling the optical fibers.
NO TICE
To avoid any human-caused accidents, read this chapter carefully before bundling
the fiber jumpers.
Introduction to Binding Straps
The section describes the architecture and cutting of the binding strap.
?.1. Architecture
The binding strap fulfills its locking function by cooperation of these two sides.
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 297
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement
The binding strap for optical fiber is 12.7 mm wide, with one hook side
(transparent polypropylene material) and one mat side (black nylon material).
The architecture of the binding strap ,as shown in Figure 4-25.
Figure 4-25 Binding strap
1. Hook side 2. Mat side
?.2. Cutting
This procedure cutting the binding strap after installing the fiber jumpers.
Prerequisites
None
Tools, Equipment and Materials
● Cutterbar
● Binding strap
Precautions
NO TE
You can use a pair of scissors if there is no cutterbar on site.
Procedure
Step 1 Install the binding strap on the plastic axis of the cutterbar, as shown in Figure
4-26.
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 298
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement
Figure 4-26 Install binding strap on cutterbar
1. Binding strap 2. Plastic axis 3. Cutterbar
Step 2 Roll the binding strap and allow it to pass through the guiding trough of the
cutterbar.
Step 3 Cut the binding strap into appropriate length by slantly hauling the binding strap
towards the cutter tooth of the cutterbar, as shown in Figure 4-27.
Figure 4-27 Cut the binding strap
1. Binding strap 2. Guiding trough 3. Cutter tooth
----End
Bundling the Binding Strap
This section describes how to bund the binding strap.
?.1. Procedures for Bundling the Binding Strap
This procedure describes how to bind bundling of the binding strap
Prerequisites
None
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 299
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement
Tools, Equipment and Materials
● Optical fiber
● Binding strap
Precautions
NO TE
When you use a binding strap, keep the mat side inside and the hook side outside.
Procedure
Step 1 Arrange the optical fibers into a bundle.
Step 2 Cut off a piece of binding strap of appropriate length according to the size of the
bundle.
Step 3 Hold the fiber bundle with one hand and press one end of the binding strap on
the bundle with the thumb.
Step 4 Strain the binding strap by the other end with the other hand, as shown in Figure
4-28.
Figure 4-28 Step 2 of bundling optical fiber
Step 5 Turn the binding strap around the fiber bundle with appropriate strain till the mat
side adhibits the hook side snugly, as shown in Figure 4-29.
Figure 4-29 Step 3 of bundling optical fiber
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 300
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement
----End
?.2. Expected Result
The section describes the expected result of the binding strap.
Figure 4-30 shows the bundling result.
Figure 4-30 Bundling result of optical fiber
?.3. Precautions
Bundle the fibers as the follow items.
● It is only the mat side of the binding strap that contacts the optical fiber.
● Arrange the optical fibers tidily into a bundle before bundling.
● Bundle the optical fibers with appropriate tightness. Never bind them too
tight.
● The space between two binding straps should not exceed 40 cm.
4.1.1.3.9 Assembling and Testing the Cable Connector
This section describes how to assemble the cable connector and how to test the
connectivity of the cable.
Assembling the RJ45 connector with the Ethernet Cable and Testing the
Connectivity
This section describes how to assemble the RJ45 connector with the shielded
Ethernet cable or non-shielded Ethernet cable, and how to test the cable
connectivity and network cable connection.
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 301
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement
?.1. Connection Relations of Network Cables
The commonly used network cables are classified into straight through network
cables and crossover network cables based on the different pin assignments.
Figure 4-31 shows the pin assignment of the straight through network cables.
Figure 4-31 Pin assignment of the straight through network cables
Table 4-28 lists the pin assignment of the straight through network cables.
Table 4-28 Pin assignment of the straight through network cables
Connector Connector X2 Color Relation
X1
X1.1 X2.1 White or orange Twisted pair
X1.2 X2.2 Orange
X1.3 X2.3 White or green Twisted pair
X1.6 X2.6 Green
X1.4 X2.4 Blue Twisted pair
X1.5 X2.5 White or blue
X1.7 X2.7 White or brown Twisted pair
X1.8 X2.8 Brown
Figure 4-32 shows the pin assignment of the crossover network cables.
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 302
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement
Figure 4-32 Pin assignment of the crossover network cables
Table 4-29 lists the pin assignment of the crossover network cables.
Table 4-29 Pin assignment of the crossover network cables
Connector Connector X2 Color Relation
X1
X1.6 X2.2 Orange Twisted pair
X1.3 X2.1 White or orange
X1.1 X2.3 White or green Twisted pair
X1.2 X2.6 Green
X1.4 X2.4 Blue Twisted pair
X1.5 X2.5 White or blue
X1.7 X2.7 White or brown Twisted pair
X1.8 X2.8 Brown
Figure 4-33 shows the pin assignment of the RJ45 connector.
Figure 4-33 Pin assignment of the RJ45 connector
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 303
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement
?.2. Assembling the RJ45 connector with the Shielded Ethernet Cable
This section describes the materials of the RJ45 connector for the shielded
Ethernet cable and the procedures of assembling the RJ45 connector with the
shielded Ethernet cable.
Prerequisites
None
Tools, Equipment and Materials
Wire stripper, cable cutter and crimper
Shielded Ethernet cable, whose components are shown in Figure 4-34.
Shielded Ethernet connector, whose components are shown in Figure 4-34.
Figure 4-34 Components of the shielded RJ45 connector
A Connector B Connector C Connector D Connector
external metal cable tray plug
sleeve sleeve
E Network F Network G Twisted - -
cable cable pair cable
sleeve shield layer
Procedure
Step 1 Lead the network cable through the connector external sleeve A, as shown in
Figure 4-35.
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 304
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement
Figure 4-35 Leading the network cable through the connector external sleeve
Step 2 Strip a 300 mm length of the external sleeve E and cut the nylon rip cord inside
the external sleeve. Make a 5 mm cut on the cable external sleeve, as shown in
Figure 4-36.
Figure 4-36 Stripping the external sleeve of the twisted pair cable
NO TICE
● When stripping the sleeve of the twisted pair cable, do not scratch the shield
layer.
● When stripping the shield layer, do not scratch the insulation layer covering the
twisted cores.
Step 3 Lead the connector metal sleeve B through the twisted pair cable. The sleeve
should envelop the shield layer F, as shown in Figure 4-37.
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 305
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement
Figure 4-37 Leading the connector metal sleeve
Step 4 Lead the connector metal sleeve to the root of the twisted pair cable sleeve. Cut
the shield layer and aluminum foil straight along the edge of the metal sleeve
without leaving any aluminum wires. Expose the twisted pair G, which is about 20
mm long, as shown in Figure 4-38.
Figure 4-38 Stripping the shield layer of the twisted pair cable
Step 5 Lead the four pairs of twisted cables, which are marked in different colors,
through the connector cable tray C respectively according to the colors. See Figure
4-39 and Figure 4-40.
Figure 4-39 Leading twisted pair cables through connector cable tray
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 306
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement
Figure 4-40 Colors of cores in the cable tray
Step 6 Align the four pairs of twisted cables G on the connector cable tray C according to
the illustrated colors. See Figure 4-41 and Figure 4-42.
Figure 4-41 Aligning the four pairs of twisted cables on the connector cable tray
Figure 4-42 Alignment of cores in different colors on the cable tray
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 307
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement
Step 7 Cut the cables straight along the edge of the connector cable tray C, as shown in
Figure 4-43.
Figure 4-43 Cutting the cables
Step 8 Lead the connector cable tray through the connector body D, and rotate the metal
shield shell 90 degree to push the cable tray inward, as shown in Figure 4-44.
Figure 4-44 Inserting the cable tray through the connector body
CA UTION
Make sure the connector cable tray is inserted to the bottom of the connector
body.
Step 9 Move the connector metal shell B toward the connector body to envelop the
connector body and connector cable tray. Then, use the crimper to crimp the
connector, as shown in Figure 4-45.
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 308
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement
Figure 4-45 Crimping the connector
Step 10 Move the connector external sleeve A toward the connector body until the
external sleeve A hitches the connector metal shell. Then, the cable components
at one end are made. See Figure 4-46.
Figure 4-46 Hitching the connector external sleeve
Step 11 A network cable may be either a crossover cable or a straight-through cable.
Which operations should be performed at the other end depends on the network
cable type.
● To assemble a straight-through cable, repeat Steps 1-10 to make the cable
components at the other end.
● To assemble a crossover cable, perform the following operations.
a. Repeat Steps 1-4.
b. Repeat Steps 5-6. In Steps 5-6, for the wire sequence, refer to the
mapping relation of the crossover cables in Table 4-29.
c. Repeat Steps 7-10 to make the cable components at the other end.
----End
?.3. Assembling the RJ45 connector with the Non-Shielded Ethernet Cable
This section describes the materials of the RJ45 connector for the non-shielded
Ethernet cable and procedures of assembling the RJ45 connector with the non-
shielded Ethernet cable.
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 309
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement
Prerequisites
None
Tools, Equipment and Materials
Wire stripper, cable cutter and crimper
Non-shielded Ethernet cable, whose components are shown in Figure 4-47.
Non-shielded Ethernet connector, whose components are shown in Figure 4-47.
Figure 4-47 Material components
A Connector plug B Sleeve C Twisted pair
cable
Procedure
Step 1 Strip the twisted pair cable according to the illustrated size and cut a 16 mm
length off the sleeve, as shown in Figure 4-48.
Figure 4-48 Stripping the twisted pair cable
Step 2 Align the twisted pairs in sequence and match the colors according to Figure
4-49. Cut the ends of the twisted pairs straight.
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 310
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement
Figure 4-49 Aligning the stripped twisted pair cable
NO TICE
● When stripping the sleeve of the twisted pair cable, do not scratch the shield
layer.
● When stripping the shield layer, do not scratch the insulation layer covering the
twisted cores.
Step 3 Insert the cable B with the aligned twisted pairs into the connector plug A and
crimp the connector with a crimper, as shown in Figure 4-50.
Figure 4-50 Crimping the connector
Step 4 A network cable may be either a crossover cable or a straight-through cable.
Which operations should be performed at the other end depends on the network
cable type.
● To assemble a straight-through cable, repeat Steps 1-3 to make the cable
components at the other end.
● To assemble a crossover cable, perform the following operations.
a. Repeat Step 1.
b. Repeat Step 2. In Step 2, for the wire sequence, refer to the mapping
relation of the crossover cables in Table 4-29.
c. Repeat Step 3 to make the cable components at the other end.
----End
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 311
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement
?.4. Checking the Assembled Cable Connector
This section describes how to check the assembled cable connector.
Prerequisites
None
Tools, Equipment and Materials
None
Checking the Physical View of the Metal Contact Slices
The checking standards are listed as follows:
● The metal contact slices should be of the same height and are of the required
sizes. The crimp part should properly contact the core conductor.
● The metal contact slices should be basically parallel with a deviation of not
more than five degrees. The top edges should be basically parallel with the
axes of the RJ45 connector with a deviation of not more than 10 degrees. This
ensures reliable contact.
● No perceptible object, dirt or rust should be present on the surface of the
metal contact slice. Otherwise, the conductivity is affected.
● The metal contact slices should reliably contact the RJ45 connector socket.
The plastic spacers should remain the same before and after the crimping,
and should have the same spacing between each other. Each of them should
be straight and intact.
● The crimping blade of the metal contact slice should exceed the core end. The
core end should tightly contact the trunking side of the RJ45 connector. The
contact spacing should not exceed 0.5 mm.
Procedure
Step 1 Hold the crimped RJ45 connector and observe the side from the front. Check the
height of each metal contact slice. The standard height is 6.02 mm ± 0.13 mm. If
no special test instrument is available on site, compare the RJ45 connector with
another well crimped RJ45 connector. Figure 4-51 and Figure 4-52 show an
unqualified RJ45 connector and a qualified RJ45 connector respectively.
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 312
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement
Figure 4-51 Metal contact slices of inconsistent height
Figure 4-52 Metal contact slices of consistent height
NO TE
If the RJ45 connector does not meet the requirement, crimp the RJ45 connector again and
make sure the RJ45 connector meets the requirement.
Step 2 Hold the RJ45 connector and slant it to a 45-degree angle. Side-glance the top
edge of each metal contact slice. Figure 4-53 an unqualified RJ45 connector.
Figure 4-53 Metal contact slices of inconsistent parallelism and height
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 313
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement
Step 3 Hold the RJ45 connector. Observe the side and front of the metal contact slice,
and check for any perceptible object, dirt or rust. Remove the perceptible object,
dirt or rust, if there is any. If the removal fails, replace RJ45 connector and
assemble the connector again. Otherwise, the connector is unqualified. See Figure
4-54.
Figure 4-54 Metal contact slices with perceptible object, dirt or rust on the surface
Step 4 Hold the RJ45 connector. Observe the side and front of the metal contact slices,
and observe the plastic spacers. Make sure they are intact and do not tilt. If they
tilt or are not intact, rectify the RJ45 connector. If the rectification fails, replace the
RJ45 connector and assemble the connector again. Otherwise, the connector is
unqualified. See Figure 4-55.
Figure 4-55 RJ45 connector with tilted plastic spacers
Step 5 Hold the RJ45 connector and observe the side to check whether you can see the
core section. Make sure that the end of the cable core is close to the face of the
cable trough of the connector. The metal contact should be higher than the end of
the cable core, and be properly crimped to the cable core. If the RJ45 connector
does not meet this requirement, replace the RJ45 connector and assemble the
connector again. Otherwise, the RJ45 connector is intact. See Figure 4-56.
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 314
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement
Figure 4-56 Cable core not pushed to the proper position
----End
?.5. Testing Cable Connectivity
This section describes how to test the connectivity of the Ethernet cable by using
the network cable tester.
Prerequisites
During the process of routing or bundling cables, and assembling the connectors,
the circuit on the cable may become open or broken. Hence, after the preceding
procedures are completed, test the connectivity of the cable.
Tools, Equipment and Materials
Network cable tester
Assembled network cable
Background Information
You can also use a multimeter to test the connectivity of the network cable
according to the core connections.
Procedure
Step 1 Insert the RJ45 connectors at the two ends of the assembled network cable into
the RJ-45 female ports of the network cable tester in sequence.
Step 2 Make sure the RJ45 connectors are inserted properly. Turn on the network cable
tester and start the test. In the case of the crossover cable and straight through
network cable, the test procedures are the same but the indicators at the two
ends turn on in different sequences. Test the crossover cable according to the core
connections.
● In the case of the straight through network cable, the indicators at points 1, 8
and G turn on in sequence. This indicates that the connectivity is fine and core
connections are correct.
● In the case of the crossover cable, the indicators at points 1, 8 and G of the
main end turn on in sequence, and the indicators at points 3, 6, 1, 4, ,5 2, 7, 8
and G of the subsidiary end turns on in sequence. This indicates that the
connectivity of the crossover cable is proper.
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 315
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement
NO TE
Turn the switch to position S to extend the interval for indicators to turn on. In this way, you can
observe the change more accurately. See Figure 4-57.
Figure 4-57 Testing the connectivity
Step 3 Slightly shake the RJ45 connector of the assembled network interface and repeat
Step 2. Make sure that each metal contact slice of the RJ45 connector reliably
contacts the core and contacts the contact point of the female network port of the
network cable tester.
----End
Assembling Power Cables
This section describes how to assemble the OT terminals and cord end terminals
of power cables.
?.1. Assembling OT Terminals and Power Cables
This section briefs the components of ring terminals and power cables, and
describes the procedure for assembling them.
Prerequisites
none.
Tools, Equipment and Materials
Wire stripper
Heat gun
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 316
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement
The components of ring terminals and power cables are shown inFigure 4-58.
Figure 4-58 Components of a ring terminal and a power cable
A Heat shrink tube B Ring terminal C Insulation layer of D Conductor of power
power cable cable
Procedure
Step 1 Peel a part of the insulation layer C of a power cable according to the cross-
section of the cable conductor. The conductor D with length L1 appears, as shown
in Figure 4-59. The recommended values of L1 are shown in Table 4-30.
Figure 4-59 Peeling a power cable
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 317
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement
NO TICE
● When peeling the insulation layer of a power cable, do not hurt the metal
conductor of the cable.
● If the bare press-fitting terminal is not provided by Huawei, adapt the value of
L1 according to the actual value L of the terminal. L1 = L + (1-2) mm.
Table 4-30 Cross-sectional area of the conductor and value of L1
Cross-Sectional Area of Value of L1(mm)
Conductor(mm2)
1, 1.5, 2.5 7
4 8
6 9
10 11
16 13
Step 2 Put the power cable into heat shrink tubing A, as shown in Figure 4-60.
Step 3 Put the cable conductor into a ring terminal. And keep the ring terminal close to
the insulation layer C of the power cable, as shown in Figure 4-60.
Figure 4-60 Inserting the cable conductor into the ring terminal
NO TICE
After the conductor is put into the ring terminal, the L2 part will extrude. The
value of L2 should be less than or equal to 2 mm.
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 318
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement
Step 4 As shown in Figure 4-61, press-fit the joint parts of the bare press-fitting terminal
and the conductor by a press-fitting tool.
Figure 4-61 Press-Fitting joint parts of a bare press-fitting terminal and a
conductor
NO TE
The shapes of press-fit parts may vary with the types of the press-fitting dies.
Step 5 Push the heat shrink tubing A towards the connector till the tube covers the press-
fit part. Heat the heat shrink tubing using a heat gun, as shown in Figure 4-62.
Figure 4-62 1-5 Heating a heat shrink tubing
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 319
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement
NO TICE
Do not heat the heat shrink tubing for too long time. Otherwise, the insulation
layer may be damaged.
----End
?.2. Assembling Cord End Terminals and Power Cables
This section briefs the components of cord end terminals and power cables, and
describes the procedure for assembling them.
Prerequisites
none.
Tools, Equipment and Materials
Wire stripper
Cord end terminal crimper are shown in Figure 4-63.
The components of cord end terminals and power cables are shown in Figure
4-64.
Figure 4-63 Cord end terminal crimper
Figure 4-64 Components of a cord end terminal and a power cable
A Cold soldering terminal B Insulation layer of power C Conductor of power cable
cable
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 320
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement
Procedure
Step 1 Peel a part of the insulation layer B of a power cable according to the cross-
sectional area of the cable conductor. The conductor C with length L1 appears, as
shown in Figure 4-65. The recommended values of L1 are shown in Table 4-31.
Figure 4-65 Peeling a power cable
NO TICE
When peeling the insulation layer of a power cable, do not hurt the metal
conductor of the cable.
Table 4-31 Cross-sectional area of the conductor and value of L1
Cross-sectional Area of Conductor Value of L1(mm)
(mm2)
1, 1.5, 2.5 7
4 8
6 9
10 11
16 13
Step 2 Put the cable conductor into the cord end terminal A. Align the conductor with the
edge of the cord end terminal, as shown in Figure 4-66.
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 321
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement
Figure 4-66 Putting a cable into a cord end terminal
NO TICE
After the cord end terminal is assembled, the exposed part of the conductor
should not be more than 1 mm.
Step 3 Press-fit the joint parts of the cord end terminal and the conductor using soldering
tool, as shown in Figure 4-67.
Figure 4-67 Press-Fitting a cord end terminal and a power cable
Step 4 After press-fitting the terminal, check the maximum width of the press-fit part.
The width of the tubular terminal after press-fit should be less than the maximum
width described in Table 4-32
Table 4-32 Maximum width of tubular terminal after press-fit
Cross-Sectional Area of Tubular Maximum Width of Terminal after
Terminal(mm2) Press-Fit(mm)
0.25 1
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 322
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement
Cross-Sectional Area of Tubular Maximum Width of Terminal after
Terminal(mm2) Press-Fit(mm)
0.5 1
1.0 1.5
1.5 1.5
2.5 2.4
4 3.1
6 4
10 5.3
16 6
----End
4.1.1.3.10 Inspecting and Cleaning Optical Fiber Connectors and Adapters
This topic describes how to inspect and clean optical fiber connectors and
adapters. Cleaning optical components is to remove dust or other dirt to avoid
performance degradation of optical transmission systems.
Overview
This topic introduces the purpose and procedure of cleaning optical fiber
connectors, as well as polluters to optical fiber connectors.
Cleaning fiber connectors is to remove dust or other dirt to avoid performance
degradation of optical transmission systems.
Figure 4-68 shows an optical fiber connector.
Figure 4-68 Optical fiber connector
Optical fiber connectors should be free of:
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 323
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement
● Dust
● Grease (usually brought by hands)
● Condensate residue
● Powder (evaporated residue of water or solvent)
Dust is the most common dirt in optical fiber connectors. The dust particles that
can be seen only by a microscope can affect the quality of optical signals,
deteriorate the system performance, and cause instability in network operation.
A 1-micrometer dust particle on the single-mode fiber connector can block 1%
light and cause 0.05 dB attenuation. A 9-micrometer dust particle that cannot be
seen by human eyes can block an entire fiber core. Therefore, small dirt even that
cannot be seen by human eyes should be removed.
Procedure
Table 4-33 describes the procedure of inspecting and cleaning the optical fiber
connectors and adapters.
Table 4-33 Table 1 Procedure of inspecting and cleaning the optical fiber
connectors and adapters
Step Details
Clean optical fiber connectors using See " Cleaning Optical Fiber Connectors
the cassette cleaner Using the Cassette Cleaner".
Clean optical fiber connectors using See " Cleaning Optical Fiber Connectors
lens tissue Using Lens Tissue".
Clean optical fiber adapters using See " Cleaning Optical Fiber Adapters
dustfree absorbent swabs Using Dustfree Absorbent Swabs".
Protection of Optical Fiber Connectors
This topic describes requirements for fiber connector protection.
The requirements are as follows:
● All boards with optical ports must be packed properly, to avoid mechanical
and electrostatic damages and to reduce vibrations.
● The protective caps must be put in an ESD bag.
● Protective caps must be installed on all optical fiber connectors when not in
use. The optical fiber connectors must be stored in proper packages to keep
them clean.
● Figure 4-69 shows the recommended protective caps, whereas Figure 4-70
shows the protective caps not recommended.
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 324
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement
Figure 4-69 Protective caps recommended
Figure 4-70 Protective caps not recommended
NO TE
The protective caps not recommended are made of soft rubber, which are apt to absorb
dust and sundries, and difficult to clean.
Tools, Equipment, and Materials
Optical connectors should be cleaned using recommended tools, equipment and
materials.
The following provides the recommended tools, equipment and materials:
● Optical power meter
● 400X fiber microscope (A video fiber microscope is recommended.)
● CLETOP cassette cleaner shown in Figure 4-71
● Cleaning solvent (Isoamylol is preferred, propyl alcohol is the next, and
alcohol or formalin is forbidden.)
● Non-woven lens tissue, fiber cleaning tissue, and dustfree cloth (Non-woven
lens tissue is recommended.)
● Special compressed air
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 325
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement
● Special cleaning roll
● Dustfree absorbent swab (made of medical cotton or long fiber cotton)
shown in Figure 4-72 and Figure 4-73
Figure 4-71 CLETOP cassette cleaner
Figure 4-72 Dustfree absorbent swabs for cleaning the SC and FC connectors
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 326
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement
Figure 4-73 Dustfree absorbent swabs for cleaning the LC connectors
Inspecting Optical Fiber Connectors
This topic describes how to inspect the end face of optical fibers using a fiber
microscope.
Tools, Equipment, and Materials
The following provides the required tools, equipment and materials for inspecting
optical fiber connectors:
● Optical power meter
● 400X fiber microscope (A video fiber microscope is recommended.)
Precautions
CA UTION
Laser energy is invisible and may cause eye injuries. Never look directly into fiber
connectors or ports.
Use a fiber microscope equipped with a safety device or a desktop video fiber
microscope when inspecting the optical fiber connectors.
NO TICE
Electrostatic discharge is hazardous to the electronic equipment. Wear an ESD
wrist strap and ensure that the strap is grounded properly before touching the
equipment and boards, to protect the static-sensitive components against
electrostatic discharge of the human body. Otherwise, the equipment may be
damaged or the service may be interrupted.
Procedure
1. Shut down the laser and disconnect the fiber end before inspecting the fiber
connector.
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 327
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement
2. Test the optical power using a power meter to ensure that the laser is shut
down.
3. Use a fiber microscope to check whether the fiber connector is contaminated
or damaged. See the examples below.
– Clean fiber and face
Figure 4-74 shows an image of a clean fiber end face under the fiber
microscope.
Figure 4-74 Clean fiber and face
– Damaged fiber end face
Figure 4-75 shows images of the damaged fiber end face. The image on
the left shows a severely damaged fiber. Severely damaged fibers can
cause damage to the equipment and should not be used. The image on
the right shows a defective fiber. If the output power is within a certain
range, the defective fiber might not cause any damage to the equipment.
If the output power is unstable or out of the range, however, the
defective fiber can cause damage to the equipment.
Figure 4-75 Damaged or defective fiber end face
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 328
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement
NO TE
Figure 4-75 shows only the 800-micrometer fiber cores.
For details on acceptable and unacceptable fibers, see Figure 4-76, Figure
4-77 and Figure 4-78.
Figure 4-76 Clean fiber end face
Figure 4-77 Acceptable fibers with imperfections
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 329
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement
Figure 4-78 Unacceptable fibers with imperfections
4. If any dirt is detected, clean the optical fiber connector. For details, see "
Cleaning Optical Fiber Connectors Using the Cassette Cleaner" and "
Cleaning Optical Fiber Connectors Using Lens Tissue".
5. If any damage is detected, replace the fiber.
Inspecting the Optical Fiber Link
This section describes the insertion loss and reflection requirements of optical links
and the method of checking the quality of optical links for the application of 50G
optical modules with the PAM4 coding technology.
Tools, Equipment, and Materials
Tools and instruments for checking optical fiber links are as follows:
● OTDR meter
● Fiber microscope
Precautions
CA UTION
Because the transmit optical power of the OTDR meter is much higher than the
damaged optical power threshold at the receive end, the optical fiber must be
removed from the optical module when the OTDR meter is used to test the optical
path quality.
Currently, the Ethernet port rate is increasing. Since the 50G optical module link
uses the PAM4 encoding technology, there are higher requirements on the optical
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 330
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement
fiber and cable quality and the link is more sensitive to multipath reflection
interference of signals. If the fiber link connector, fiber section, or fiber splicing
surface is dirty, optical signals are reflected back and forth on the fiber link,
causing interference due to co-channel noise on the receive side. As a result, the
optical link is unstable or intermittently disconnected.
According to the national standard (GBT50312-2016), the loss of the optical fiber
link connector must meet the requirements described in Table 4-34.
Table 4-34 Maximum attenuation of the optical fiber connector
Type Maximum attenuation of an optical fiber
connector (dB)
Fiber splicing connector 0.3
Optical mechanical connector 0.3
Optical connector 0.75
NO TE
Fiber cores are connected through connectors, such as the ODF, optical attenuator, and
flange, in splicing and mechanical modes.
Table 4-35 describes requirements for the reflection of the optical fiber connector
when Ethernet ports (such as 200G and 50G) use PAM4 encoding to double the
rate. More connectors bring lower requirements for the reflection.
Table 4-35 Maximum reflection of connectors
Number of Maximum Reflection of Each Connector (dB)
Optical Fiber
Connectors 50GBASE-FR 50GBASE-LR 50GBASE-ER
1 -25 -22 -19
2 -31 -29 -27
4 -35 -33 -32
6 -38 -35 -35
8 -40 -37 -37
10 -41 -39 -39
Procedure
1. After the optical fiber at the peer end is disconnected, use the OTDR meter to
test the local end. Check whether the loss and reflection of each link and
node are normal. (The loss of a fiber splicing connector should be less than
0.3 dB, the loss of a connector should be less than 0.75 dB, and the reflection
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 331
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement
of a connector should be less than -30 dB.) If the test result is not within the
required range, process the abnormal port.
2. Locate the equipment room where the port resides based on the distance
between abnormal points in the OTDR test result. Preliminarily determine the
port location, disconnect the port, and perform an OTDR test on the port that
reports alarms. Check whether the distance is consistent with that in the
previous test. If not, continue to test other ports.
3. After the abnormal port is found, test the port using a fiber microscope. If the
port is dirty, clean it. For details, see "Inspecting and Cleaning Optical Fiber
Connectors and Adapters".
4. After the port is cleaned, restore the port, and ensure that the connector is
tightened. Perform an OTDR test on the port to check whether loss and
reflection of each link and node are normal.
5. If the fault persists, replace the flange and perform an OTDR test on the port
that reports alarms to check whether loss and reflection of each link and
node are normal.
6. If the fault persists, replace the optical fiber and perform an OTDR test on the
port that reports alarms to check whether loss and reflection of each link and
node are normal.
7. If multiple abnormal points exist on the link, repeat steps 2 to 6.
Cleaning Optical Fiber Connectors Using the Cassette Cleaner
This topic describes how to clean the fiber connectors using a CLETOP cassette
cleaner.
Prerequisites
Before cleaning, inspect the fiber end face with a fiber microscope or a magnifier
to confirm the degree of fiber contamination. Clean the fiber only when it is
severely contaminated. This is because the cleaning operation itself may introduce
dust, dirt, or cause damage to the fiber.
The following procedure provides the steps to clean the fiber connectors using
cartridge type cleaners. There are several types of cartridge cleaners. The following
describes a type of CLETOP cassette cleaner.
Tools, Equipment, and Materials
The following lists the required tools, equipment and materials for cleaning optical
fiber connectors:
● CLETOP cassette cleaner
● Optical power meter
● 400X fiber microscope (A video fiber microscope is recommended.)
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 332
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement
Precautions
CA UTION
Laser energy is invisible and may cause eye injuries. Never look directly into fiber
connectors or ports.
NO TICE
Electrostatic discharge is hazardous to the electronic equipment. Wear an ESD
wrist strap and ensure that the strap is grounded properly before touching the
equipment and boards, to protect the static-sensitive components against
electrostatic discharge of the human body. Otherwise, the equipment may be
damaged or the service may be interrupted.
Procedure
1. Shut down the laser and disconnect the fiber end before inspecting the fiber
connector.
2. Test the optical power using a power meter to ensure that the laser is shut
down.
3. Press down and hold the lever of the cassette cleaner. The shutter slides back
and exposes a new cleaning area. See Figure 4-79.
Figure 4-79 Using the CLETOP cassette cleaner
4. Place the fiber end face gently against the cleaning area.
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 333
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement
Drag the fiber end face gently on one cleaning area in the arrow direction
each time. See Figure 4-80. Do it again on the other cleaning area in the
same direction as the first time once. See Figure 4-81.
NO TICE
Do not drag the fiber end face on the same cleaning area more than once.
Otherwise, the connector can be contaminated or damaged.
Figure 4-80 Dragging the fiber end face gently on one cleaning area
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 334
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement
Figure 4-81 Dragging the fiber end face gently on the other cleaning area
5. Release the lever of the cassette cleaner to close the cleaning area.
6. Use a fiber microscope to inspect the fiber to check whether there is any dirt.
For details see the examples shown in Inspecting Optical Fiber Connectors.
If the fiber end face is still dirty, repeat 1 to 6.
7. Connect the fiber to the optical port immediately. If it is not used for the time
being, put a protective cap on it.
8. Turn on the laser after connecting the fiber to the board.
Cleaning Optical Fiber Connectors Using Lens Tissue
This topic describes how to clean the fiber connectors using lens tissue.
Prerequisites
Before cleaning, inspect the fiber end face with a fiber microscope or a magnifier
to confirm the degree of fiber contamination. Clean the fiber only when it is
severely contaminated. This is because the cleaning operation itself may introduce
dust, dirt, or cause damage to the fiber.
Tools, Equipment, and Materials
The following provides the required tools, equipment and materials:
● Optical power meter
● 400X fiber microscope (A video fiber microscope is recommended.)
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 335
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement
● Cleaning solvent (Isoamylol is preferred, propyl alcohol is the next, and
alcohol or formalin is forbidden.)
● Non-woven lens tissue, fiber cleaning tissue, and dustfree cloth (Non-woven
lens tissue is recommended.)
● Special compressed air or cleaning roll
Precautions
CA UTION
Laser energy is invisible and may cause eye injuries. Never look directly into fiber
connectors or ports.
NO TICE
Electrostatic discharge is hazardous to the electronic equipment. Wear an ESD
wrist strap and ensure that the strap is grounded properly before touching the
equipment and boards, to protect the static-sensitive components against
electrostatic discharge of the human body. Otherwise, the equipment may be
damaged or the service may be interrupted.
Procedure
1. Shut down the laser and disconnect the fiber end before inspecting the fiber
connector.
2. Test the optical power using a power meter to ensure that the laser is shut
down.
3. Put a little cleaning solvent on the lens tissue.
4. Clean the fiber end face on the lens tissue. See Figure 4-82 and Figure 4-83.
NO TICE
Drag the fiber end face on the same area in the lens tissue only once.
Otherwise, the connector can be contaminated or damaged.
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 336
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement
Figure 4-82 Cleaning the fiber end face using the lens tissue on the desk
Figure 4-83 Cleaning the fiber end face using the lens tissue on the hand
5. Repeat 4 several times on the areas of the lens tissue that have not been
used.
6. Use the compressed air to blow off dust on the fiber end face.
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 337
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement
NO TE
● When using the compressed air, keep the nozzle as close as possible to the fiber
end face without touching it.
● Before using the compressed air, first spray it into the air to expel deposits in the
compressed air.
● If the compressed air is not available, use a cleaning roll instead.
7. Use a fiber microscope to inspect the fiber to check whether there is any dirt.
For details, see the examples shown in Inspecting Optical Fiber Connectors.
If the fiber end face is still dirty, repeat 1 to 6.
8. Do not touch the fiber connector after cleaning it. Connect it to the optical
port immediately. If it is not used for the time being, put a protective cap on
it.
9. Turn on the laser after connecting the fiber to the board.
Cleaning Optical Fiber Adapters Using Dustfree Absorbent Swabs
This topic describes how to clean fiber adapters using dustfree absorbent swabs.
Prerequisites
There are several types of dustfree absorbent swabs available. Select appropriate
dustfree absorbent swabs based on site conditions. You can obtain the following
tools and materials from a fiber cable and connector manufacturer.
Tools, Equipment, and Materials
The following lists the required tools, equipment and materials:
● Optical power meter
● 400X fiber microscope (A video fiber microscope is recommended.)
● Cleaning solvent (Isoamylol is preferred, propyl alcohol is the next, and
alcohol or formalin is forbidden.)
● Special compressed air
● Dustfree absorbent swab (made of medical cotton or long fiber cotton)
Precautions
CA UTION
Laser energy is invisible and may cause eye injuries. Never look directly into fiber
connectors or ports.
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 338
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement
NO TICE
Electrostatic discharge is hazardous to the electronic equipment. Wear an ESD
wrist strap and ensure that the strap is grounded properly before touching the
equipment and boards, to protect the static-sensitive components against
electrostatic discharge of the human body. Otherwise, the equipment may be
damaged or the service may be interrupted.
Procedure
1. Shut down the laser and disconnect the fiber end before inspecting the fiber
connector.
2. Test the optical power using a power meter to ensure that the laser is shut
down.
3. Select the dustfree absorbent swab with a proper diameter based on the type
of an adapter.
NO TE
For SC and FC fiber adapters, use the dustfree absorbent swab with a diameter of 2.5
mm (0.1 in.); for the LC fiber adapter, use the dustfree absorbent swab with a
diameter of 1.25 mm (0.05 in.). See Figure 4-84 and Figure 4-85.
Figure 4-84 Dustfree absorbent swabs for cleaning the SC and FC connectors
Figure 4-85 Dustfree absorbent swabs for cleaning the LC connectors
4. Put a little cleaning solvent on the dustfree absorbent swab.
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 339
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement
5. Place the dustfree absorbent swab gently on the adapter so that the cleaning
solvent is against the fiber end face. Draw out the dustfree absorbent swab
from the fiber adapter and then rotate the dustfree absorbent swab clockwise
once. Ensure that the tip of the dustfree absorbent swab directly contacts the
fiber end face.
6. Use the compressed air to blow off dust on the fiber end face.
NO TE
● When using the compressed air, keep the nozzle as close as possible to the fiber
end face without touching it.
● Before using the compressed air, first spray it into the air to expel deposits in the
compressed air.
7. Step 7 Use a fiber microscope to inspect the fiber to check whether there is
any dirt. For details, see Inspecting Optical Fiber Connectors. If the fiber end
face is still dirty, repeat 1 to 6.
8. Connect the fiber to the optical port immediately. If it is not used for the time
being, put a protective cap on it.
9. Turn on the laser after connecting the fiber to the board.
4.1.2 Parts Replacement
4.1.2.1 Component Information
Whether Parts Can Be Replaced
Part Chassis Control PIC PIU FAN Optical
board board board board module
A821 E/ Yes No No No No Yes
A822 E/
A813 E
4.1.2.2 Basic Operation Process and Precautions
To ensure that the device provides uninterrupted communication services for users,
device parts are replaced when the power is on in most cases. Therefore, to ensure
safe operation of a device and minimize the impact of part replacement on
services, maintenance personnel must follow the basic operation process described
in this section.
NO TICE
Huawei engineers need to obtain the telephone number of the GTAC to contact
Huawei headquarters as soon as possible when an exception or a problem that
Huawei engineers cannot locate or solve temporarily occurs.
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 340
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement
1. Assess the feasibility of the operation.
During the process of troubleshooting or repairing a device, maintenance
personnel must assess whether the operation is feasible before replacing a
part.
– Whether the needed spare parts are available in the depot.
– Whether the maintenance personnel is qualified for carrying out the
operation.
NO TE
Parts replacement can be carried out only by maintenance personnel who are
professionally trained. Specifically, maintenance personnel must familiarize
themselves with the functions of each part, the basic operation process of part
replacement, and the basic skills of part replacement.
– Whether the risks of the operation can be controlled. Part replacement is
risky.
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 341
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement
NO TICE
Improper operation may cause abnormal running of the device, service
interruption, or injuries to the personnel. Therefore, before replacing
parts, maintenance personnel must comprehensively evaluate the risks of
the operation and determine whether the risks can be controlled through
certain measures when the power is on. Maintenance personnel can
replace the parts only when the risks can be controlled. Otherwise,
contact Huawei technical support personnel.
2. Prepare tools and spare parts.
After determining that the operation is feasible, maintenance personnel need
to prepare tools and spare parts.
– Prepare spare parts.
NO TICE
Before replacing the chassis or control board, contact Huawei engineers
to see if a license is required. You can apply for a license or use Stick
License to activate some license control items.
– The common tools include the multimeter, cable tester, ESD wrist strap,
Phillips screwdriver, flat-head screwdriver, needle-nose pliers, cutter, and
pliers.
3. Take protective measures.
Although part replacement is risky, in most cases, however, maintenance
personnel can avoid the risks by taking protective measures.
For example, before replacing a master control board, maintenance personnel
can switch services from the master control board to the slave control board.
After the slave control board runs properly, maintenance personnel can
replace the master control board. In this manner, interruption of services is
prevented.
Therefore, to ensure safe operation of a device and minimize the impact of
part replacement on services, maintenance personnel must take related
protective measures.
4. Replace parts.
When the protective measures are available, maintenance personnel can carry
out part replacement according to the procedures in this section.
DANGER
Wear an ESD wrist strap or ESD gloves before replacing parts when the power
is on.
Avoid direct eye exposure to the laser beam launched from the optical
interface board or fiber.
5. Verify the functions of the new parts.
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 342
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement
After completing part replacement, maintenance personnel must verify the
functions of the new parts through the testing methods described in this
section.
NO TE
The operation is considered successful only when the new parts are proved to be
running normally. Otherwise, contact Huawei technical support personnel.
6. Return and repair the faulty parts.
If a part that is replaced is faulty, maintenance personnel should fill in the
Offsite Repair Card for Faulty Materials, and send the card and the faulty part
to Huawei for timely maintenance.
NO TICE
Carefully maintain the damaged CF card and local disk that store data to
prevent information leak.
Before you replace the master control board or its CF card, delete data from
the CF card to prevent data embezzlement.
Use either of the following methods to delete data from the CF card on an
master control board:
● Connect a CF card reader to a PC and then delete data from the CF card
on the PC.
● Physically destroy the CF card.
4.1.2.3 Replacing the Chassis
Context
The chassis is damaged due to external forces or a hardware fault.
Impact on the System
Services will be interrupted for about 30 minutes because the device needs to be
powered off to replace the chassis.
Precautions
DANGER
Avoid direct eye exposure to the laser beam launched from the optical interface
board or fiber.
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 343
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement
NO TICE
● Before replacing the chassis, contact Huawei engineers to see if a license is
required. You can apply for a license or use Stick License to activate some
license control items.
● When replacing a part, make sure that the interface is not connected to any
optical fibers or cables.
● Optical interfaces and optical fiber connectors must be clean. Optical fiber
connectors must be properly capped to keep dusts away.
Tool
● ESD wrist strap or ESD gloves
● Phillips screwdriver
● ESD bag
Procedure
Step 1 Wear the ESD wrist strap, and insert the grounding end into the ESD jack on the
device, or wear ESD gloves.
Step 2 Make sure that the spare part is the same as the one to be replaced in terms of
name, model, and parameters. If they do not meet the requirements, contact
Huawei GTAC.
Step 3 Record the slot of each board and mapping between each fiber or cable and
interface on the device. When the part replacement is complete, restore the fiber
or cable connections.
NO TE
Two methods are available for backing up a device's configuration data:
● Using an NMS: Use an NE software management module to back up a device's
configuration data as a configuration file to an NMS server or client.
● Using a command: Run the save command to save a device's configuration data to
the device's storage unit as a configuration file and copy the configuration file to the
maintenance terminal for backup.
Step 4 Power off the device.
CA UTION
Make sure that indicators on all the boards are off which indicates that the device
is powered off.
Step 5 Remove the power connectors and all fibers and cables connected to the chassis.
For devices on which cards are pluggable, remove all boards.
Step 6 Remove the mounting ears on the chassis and then take down the chassis. (Skip
this step if the chassis is installed on a desk.)
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 344
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement
CA UTION
Hold the bottom of the chassis when you remove the mounting ears to prevent
injuries to human bodies or damage to other devices.
Step 7 Remove the mounting ears, and install them onto the spare chassis. Install the
spare chassis to the previous position. Then, restore all boards and fiber or cable
connections.
Step 8 Power on the device and observe indicators.
NO TE
Step 9 Log in to the device and run the display device command to query the running
status of the device. If the Status column displays only Normal, the device is
running properly.
----End
Follow-up Procedure
After replacing a part, collect the tools. If the part is faulty, maintenance personnel
should fill in the Offsite Repair Card for Faulty Materials, and send the card and
the faulty part to Huawei for timely maintenance.
4.1.2.4 Replacing the Optical Module
Impact on the System
If optical modules are not in service protection, replacement of an optical module
will cause service interruption.
Precautions
DANGER
Avoid direct eye exposure to the laser beam launched from the optical interface
board or fiber.
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 345
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement
NO TICE
● An optical module is an electrostatic sensitive device. Therefore, take ESD
measures during the whole process of replacing an optical module to prevent
the optical module from being damaged.
● Only an external optical module can be replaced. An external optical module is
pluggable.
● When replacing a part, make sure that the interface is not connected to any
optical fibers or cables.
● Be careful when you remove or insert an optical cable in case the connector of
an optical cable is damaged.
● Optical interfaces and optical fiber connectors must be clean. Optical fiber
connectors must be properly capped to keep dusts away.
Tool
● ESD wrist strap or ESD gloves
● ESD bag
Procedure
Step 1 Wear the ESD wrist strap, and insert the grounding end into the ESD jack on the
device, or wear ESD gloves.
Step 2 Record the slot and interface of the optical module.
Step 3 Remove fibers.
NO TE
You can remove fibers by hands. If dense fibers are installed, you can use a fiber extractor
to remove fibers. The following figure shows the appearance of a fiber extractor.
1. Clamp the top and bottom sides of an LC/PC connector using hands or a fiber
extractor and press the spring.
2. Remove the fiber connector.
3. Cover the fiber connector with a dust cap.
Step 4 Pull out the optical module to be replaced.
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 346
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement
1. Remove the optical cables from the connector and cover the optical cable
connector with a dust cap.
NO TE
If optical interfaces are concave in the board panel and difficult to remove by hands,
use a fiber extractor to unfold the handle of the optical module and pull it out.
2. Turn the pulled handle of the optical module downward, as shown in the
figure.
3. Hold the handle to pull out the optical module carefully from the optical
interface, as shown in the figure.
4. Place the removed optical module in the ESD bag.
Step 5 Insert the new optical module into the optical interface.
NO TICE
An optical module must not be inserted inversely. If you cannot completely insert
an optical module into the interface, do not push it. Instead, you should reverse it
and insert it into the interface again.
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 347
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement
1. Take out the new optical module from the ESD bag and check whether there
is any damage or component missing. Check whether the new optical module
is of the same type as the optical module to be replaced.
2. Insert the new optical module into the optical interface, as shown in the
figure. When the click of the reed in the optical module is heard, the optical
module is correctly inserted.
3. Remove the dust cap from the connector and insert the optical cables in the
original sequence.
NO TE
Check whether the LINK indicator on the optical interface works normally. If the
indicator is green, the links connected to the interface are Up.
----End
Follow-up Procedure
After replacing a part, collect the tools. If the part is faulty, maintenance personnel
should fill in the Offsite Repair Card for Faulty Materials, and send the card and
the faulty part to Huawei for timely maintenance.
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 348
V800R021C10 and Later Versions
Hardware Guide
Issue 05
Date 2023-03-31
HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD.
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2023. All rights reserved.
No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means without prior
written consent of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Trademarks and Permissions
and other Huawei trademarks are trademarks of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
All other trademarks and trade names mentioned in this document are the property of their respective
holders.
Notice
The purchased products, services and features are stipulated by the contract made between Huawei and
the customer. All or part of the products, services and features described in this document may not be
within the purchase scope or the usage scope. Unless otherwise specified in the contract, all statements,
information, and recommendations in this document are provided "AS IS" without warranties, guarantees
or representations of any kind, either express or implied.
The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Every effort has been made in the
preparation of this document to ensure accuracy of the contents, but all statements, information, and
recommendations in this document do not constitute a warranty of any kind, express or implied.
Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Address: Huawei Industrial Base
Bantian, Longgang
Shenzhen 518129
People's Republic of China
Website: https://www.huawei.com
Email: support@huawei.com
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. i
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide Contents
Contents
1 Document Declaration........................................................................................................... 1
2 Using the Hardware Tool.......................................................................................................4
3 Hardware Description.............................................................................................................5
3.1 Chassis......................................................................................................................................................................................... 5
3.1.1 NetEngine A813 E................................................................................................................................................................ 5
3.1.2 NetEngine A822 E............................................................................................................................................................. 14
3.1.3 NetEngine A821 E............................................................................................................................................................. 26
3.2 Optical Module...................................................................................................................................................................... 43
3.2.1 Understanding Pluggable Optical Modules............................................................................................................. 43
3.2.1.1 Optical Module Structure............................................................................................................................................43
3.2.1.2 Optical Module Classification.................................................................................................................................... 44
3.2.1.3 Optical Module Appearance.......................................................................................................................................46
3.2.1.4 Guide to Using Optical Modules.............................................................................................................................. 51
3.2.1.5 Optical Attenuator Configuration............................................................................................................................ 62
3.2.2 GPON ONU SFP Optical Module................................................................................................................................. 63
3.2.2.1 GPON ONU-SFP-SMF-1490nm(rx)/1310nm(tx)-20km-industry...................................................................63
3.2.3 1Gbps SyncE and 1588V2 Electrical Module............................................................................................................65
3.2.3.1 1Gbps-SFP-100m-industry-Support SyncE and 1588V2................................................................................... 65
3.2.4 155Mbps eSFP Optical Module.................................................................................................................................... 65
3.2.4.1 155Mbps-eSFP-SMF-1310nm-15km-industry...................................................................................................... 65
3.2.4.2 155Mbps-eSFP-SMF-1310nm-40km-industry...................................................................................................... 67
3.2.4.3 155Mbps-eSFP-SMF-1550nm-80km-industry...................................................................................................... 68
3.2.4.4 155Mbps-eSFP-SMF-1310nm-40km-commercial............................................................................................... 69
3.2.4.5 155Mbps-eSFP-SMF-1550nm-80km-commercial (S4015716).......................................................................71
3.2.4.6 155Mbps-eSFP-SMF-1310nm-15km-commercial............................................................................................... 72
3.2.5 155Mbps eSFP BIDI Optical Module...........................................................................................................................73
3.2.5.1 155Mbps-eSFP-SM-1310nm(Tx)/1550nm(Rx)-15km-commercial............................................................... 73
3.2.5.2 155Mbps-eSFP-SM-1550nm(Tx)/1310nm(Rx)-15km-commercial............................................................... 75
3.2.6 1Gbps Electrical Module................................................................................................................................................. 76
3.2.6.1 1Gbps-SFP-100m-industry (02310RAV)................................................................................................................. 76
3.2.6.2 1Gbps-SFP-100m-industry (02314FNP)................................................................................................................. 77
3.2.6.3 1Gbps-SFP-100m-commercial................................................................................................................................... 77
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. ii
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide Contents
3.2.6.4 1Gbps-SFP-100m-industry (34100099).................................................................................................................. 78
3.2.6.5 1Gbps-SFP-100m-industry (34100144).................................................................................................................. 79
3.2.7 1.25Gbps eSFP Optical Module.................................................................................................................................... 79
3.2.7.1 1.25Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1550nm-80km-commercial (02310RAW).................................................................... 80
3.2.7.2 1.25Gbps-eSFP-MMF-850nm-500m-extended.................................................................................................... 81
3.2.7.3 1.25Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1310nm-10km-industry...................................................................................................... 82
3.2.7.4 1.25Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1310nm-10km-commercial(34060473)........................................................................ 83
3.2.7.5 1.25Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1310nm-40km-commercial............................................................................................... 85
3.2.7.6 1.25Gbps-eSFP-MMF-850nm-500m-extended (S4017307)............................................................................ 86
3.2.7.7 1.25Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1310nm-40km-commercial (S4017309).......................................................................87
3.2.8 1.25Gbps SFP BIDI Optical Module............................................................................................................................. 88
3.2.8.1 1.25Gbps-SFP-SMF-1310nm(Tx)/1490nm(Rx)-10km-industry...................................................................... 89
3.2.8.2 1.25Gbps-SFP-SMF-1490nm(Tx)/1310nm(Rx)-10km-industry...................................................................... 90
3.2.9 1.25Gbps eSFP BIDI Optical Module...........................................................................................................................91
3.2.9.1 1.25Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1310nm(Tx)/1490nm(Rx)-10km-commercial(34060470)......................................91
3.2.9.2 1.25Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1490nm(Tx)/1310nm(Rx)-10km-commercial.............................................................93
3.2.9.3 1.25Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1310nm(Tx)/1490nm(Rx)-40km-commercial.............................................................94
3.2.9.4 1.25Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1490nm(Tx)/1310nm(Rx)-40km-commercial.............................................................95
3.2.9.5 1.25Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1570nm(Tx)/1490nm(Rx)-80km-commercial.............................................................97
3.2.9.6 1.25Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1490nm(Tx)/1570nm(Rx)-80km-commercial.............................................................98
3.2.9.7 0.1~1.25Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1310nm(Tx)/1550nm(Rx)-40km-commercial.................................................... 99
3.2.9.8 0.1~1.25Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1550nm(Tx)/1310nm(Rx)-40km-commercial.................................................. 101
3.2.10 1.25Gbps eSFP CWDM Optical Module................................................................................................................ 102
3.2.10.1 1.25Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1571nm-80km-commercial.......................................................................................... 102
3.2.10.2 1.25Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1591nm-80km-commercial.......................................................................................... 103
3.2.10.3 1.25Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1551nm-80km-commercial.......................................................................................... 105
3.2.10.4 1.25Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1511nm-80km-commercial.......................................................................................... 106
3.2.10.5 1.25Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1611nm-80km-commercial.......................................................................................... 107
3.2.10.6 1.25Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1491nm-80km-commercial.......................................................................................... 108
3.2.10.7 1.25Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1531nm-80km-commercial.......................................................................................... 110
3.2.10.8 1.25Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1471nm-80km-commercial.......................................................................................... 111
3.2.11 125M~2.67Gbps eSFP DWDM Optical Module..................................................................................................112
3.2.11.1 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1560.61nm-120km-commercial.................................................................... 112
3.2.11.2 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1559.79nm-120km-commercial.................................................................... 113
3.2.11.3 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1558.98nm-120km-commercial.................................................................... 115
3.2.11.4 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1558.17nm-120km-commercial.................................................................... 116
3.2.11.5 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1557.36nm-120km-commercial.................................................................... 117
3.2.11.6 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1556.55nm-120km-commercial.................................................................... 119
3.2.11.7 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1555.75nm-120km-commercial.................................................................... 120
3.2.11.8 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1554.94nm-120km-commercial.................................................................... 121
3.2.11.9 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1554.13nm-120km-commercial.................................................................... 122
3.2.11.10 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1553.33nm-120km-commercial..................................................................124
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. iii
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide Contents
3.2.11.11 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1552.52nm-120km-commercial..................................................................125
3.2.11.12 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1551.72nm-120km-commercial..................................................................126
3.2.11.13 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1550.92nm-120km-commercial..................................................................127
3.2.11.14 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1550.12nm-120km-commercial..................................................................129
3.2.11.15 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1549.32nm-120km-commercial..................................................................130
3.2.11.16 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1548.51nm-120km-commercial..................................................................131
3.2.11.17 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1547.72nm-120km-commercial..................................................................132
3.2.11.18 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1546.92nm-120km-commercial..................................................................134
3.2.11.19 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1546.12nm-120km-commercial..................................................................135
3.2.11.20 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1545.32nm-120km-commercial..................................................................136
3.2.11.21 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1544.53nm-120km-commercial..................................................................137
3.2.11.22 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1543.73nm-120km-commercial..................................................................139
3.2.11.23 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1542.94nm-120km-commercial..................................................................140
3.2.11.24 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1542.14nm-120km-commercial..................................................................141
3.2.11.25 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1541.35nm-120km-commercial..................................................................142
3.2.11.26 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1540.56nm-120km-commercial..................................................................144
3.2.11.27 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1539.77nm-120km-commercial..................................................................145
3.2.11.28 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1538.98nm-120km-commercial..................................................................146
3.2.11.29 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1538.19nm-120km-commercial..................................................................147
3.2.11.30 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1537.40nm-120km-commercial..................................................................149
3.2.11.31 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1536.61nm-120km-commercial..................................................................150
3.2.11.32 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1535.82nm-120km-commercial..................................................................151
3.2.11.33 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1535.04nm-120km-commercial..................................................................152
3.2.11.34 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1534.25nm-120km-commercial..................................................................154
3.2.11.35 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1533.47nm-120km-commercial..................................................................155
3.2.11.36 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1532.68nm-120km-commercial..................................................................156
3.2.11.37 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1531.90nm-120km-commercial..................................................................157
3.2.11.38 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1531.12nm-120km-commercial..................................................................159
3.2.11.39 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1530.33nm-120km-commercial..................................................................160
3.2.11.40 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1529.55nm-120km-commercial..................................................................161
3.2.12 10Gbps SFP+ Optical Module...................................................................................................................................162
3.2.12.1 10Gbps-SFP+-SMF-1550nm-80km-commercial............................................................................................. 162
3.2.12.2 10Gbps-SFP+-SMF-1310nm-40km-commercial (02311YEB).....................................................................164
3.2.12.3 10Gbps-SFP+-SMF-1310nm-10km-industry.................................................................................................... 165
3.2.12.4 10Gbps-SFP+-MMF-850nm-0.1km-industry.................................................................................................... 166
3.2.12.5 10Gbps-SFP+-SMF-1550nm-40km-industry.................................................................................................... 168
3.2.12.6 10Gbps-SFP+-SMF-1310nm-40km-commercial (34061409)..................................................................... 169
3.2.12.7 10Gbps-SFP+-MMF-850nm-0.3km-commercial............................................................................................. 170
3.2.12.8 10Gbps-SFP+-SMF-1310nm-10km-commercial............................................................................................. 172
3.2.12.9 10Gbps-SFP+-SMF-1550nm-40km-commercial............................................................................................. 173
3.2.13 1.25/9.953/10.3125Gbps SFP+ Optical Module..................................................................................................174
3.2.13.1 1.25/9.953/10.3125Gbps-SFP+-MMF-850nm-0.3km-commercial............................................................ 175
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. iv
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide Contents
3.2.13.2 1.25/9.953/10.3125Gbps-SFP+-SMF-1310nm-10km-commercial............................................................ 176
3.2.13.3 1.25/9.953/10.3125Gbps-SFP+-SMF-1550nm-40km-commercial............................................................ 178
3.2.14 10Gbps SFP+ CWDM Optical Module................................................................................................................... 179
3.2.14.1 10Gbps-SFP+-SMF-1511nm-70km-commercial............................................................................................. 179
3.2.14.2 10Gbps-SFP+-SMF-1471nm-70km-commercial............................................................................................. 180
3.2.14.3 10Gbps-SFP+-SMF-1491nm-70km-commercial............................................................................................. 182
3.2.14.4 10Gbps-SFP+-SMF-1531nm-70km-commercial............................................................................................. 183
3.2.14.5 10Gbps-SFP+-SMF-1551nm-70km-commercial............................................................................................. 184
3.2.14.6 10Gbps-SFP+-SMF-1571nm-70km-commercial............................................................................................. 186
3.2.14.7 10Gbps-SFP+-SMF-1591nm-70km-commercial............................................................................................. 187
3.2.14.8 10Gbps-SFP+-SMF-1611nm-70km-commercial............................................................................................. 188
3.2.15 10Gbps SFP+ BIDI Optical Module......................................................................................................................... 189
3.2.15.1 10Gbps-SFP+-SMF-1270nm(Tx)/1330nm(Rx)-40km-commercial (02311JNF)................................... 190
3.2.15.2 10Gbps-SFP+-SMF-1330nm(Tx)/1270nm(Rx)-40km-commercial (02311JNQ).................................. 191
3.2.15.3 10Gbps-SFP+-SMF-1270nm(Tx)/1330nm(Rx)-10km-industry.................................................................. 192
3.2.15.4 10Gbps-SFP+-SMF-1330nm(Tx)/1270nm(Rx)-10km-industry.................................................................. 194
3.2.16 10Gbps SFP+ OTN Optical Module........................................................................................................................ 195
3.2.16.1 10Gbps-SFP+-SMF-1528nm~1568nm-80km-commercial...........................................................................195
3.2.17 10Gbps SFP+ DWDM Optical Module...................................................................................................................196
3.2.17.1 10Gbps-SFP+-SMF-1528nm~1568nm-40km-commercial...........................................................................197
3.2.17.2 10Gbps-SFP+-SMF-1528nm~1568nm-80km-commercial...........................................................................198
3.3 Cables..................................................................................................................................................................................... 199
3.3.1 AC Power Cable.............................................................................................................................................................. 200
3.3.2 Fiber Jumper..................................................................................................................................................................... 204
3.3.3 Ethernet Cable..................................................................................................................................................................207
3.3.4 Chassis Ground Cable.................................................................................................................................................... 210
3.3.5 Management Cable........................................................................................................................................................ 211
3.3.6 USB-to-Ethernet Cable.................................................................................................................................................. 213
3.4 Power Distribution............................................................................................................................................................. 215
3.4.1 PDC120S12-CN (DC-DC Module,120W,-40degC,65degC,-72V,28.8V,11.4V-12.6V,12V/10A,0,2000uF)
......................................................................................................................................................................................................... 215
4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement............................................................219
4.1 Hardware installation and maintenance .................................................................................................................. 219
4.1.1 Installation Guide............................................................................................................................................................219
4.1.1.1 Equipment Installation Process...............................................................................................................................219
4.1.1.2 Installation Preparation............................................................................................................................................. 221
4.1.1.2.1 Requirements for Running Environment A and Installation Planning...................................................223
4.1.1.2.2 Requirements for Running Environment B and Installation Planning...................................................248
4.1.1.2.3 Requirements for Running Environment C and Installation Planning...................................................263
4.1.1.2.4 Basic Installation Specifications.......................................................................................................................... 266
4.1.1.3 General Installation Guidelines...............................................................................................................................270
4.1.1.3.1 Unpacking Inspection............................................................................................................................................. 270
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. v
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide Contents
4.1.1.3.2 Installing chassis....................................................................................................................................................... 273
4.1.1.3.3 Installing Router Tray and Power Adapter...................................................................................................... 274
4.1.1.3.4 Checking Tail Fiber Connection........................................................................................................................... 275
4.1.1.3.5 Grounding Specifications....................................................................................................................................... 276
4.1.1.3.6 Engineering Labels...................................................................................................................................................280
4.1.1.3.7 The Requirements of Cabling and Bundling................................................................................................... 295
4.1.1.3.8 Binding Strap............................................................................................................................................................. 297
4.1.1.3.9 Assembling and Testing the Cable Connector................................................................................................301
4.1.1.3.10 Inspecting and Cleaning Optical Fiber Connectors and Adapters........................................................ 323
4.1.2 Parts Replacement.......................................................................................................................................................... 340
4.1.2.1 Component Information............................................................................................................................................340
4.1.2.2 Basic Operation Process and Precautions........................................................................................................... 340
4.1.2.3 Replacing the Chassis................................................................................................................................................. 343
4.1.2.4 Replacing the Optical Module................................................................................................................................ 345
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. vi
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 1 Document Declaration
1 Document Declaration
Purpose
This document describes hardware features of the NetEngine A800. It helps
intended readers obtain detailed information about each chassis, board, and cable,
and learn how to install and maintain devices.
NO TICE
The Hardware Guide includes hardware data of multiple versions. Before using this
document, check the first version supported by the hardware.
Related Version
NO TICE
The following table lists the product versions involved in this document. Before
reading this document, confirm whether your versions are included in this
document.
Product Name Version
HUAWEI NetEngine A800 Applicable to:
Series ● V800R021C00SPC100
● V800R021C10SPC600
● V800R022C00SPC600
● V800R022C10SPC500
Intended Audience
This document is intended for:
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 1 Document Declaration
● Network planning engineers
● Hardware installation engineers
● Commissioning engineers
● On-site maintenance engineers
● System maintenance engineers
Special Declaration
● The pictures of hardware in this document are for reference only.
● The supported boards are described in the document. Whether a
customization requirement can be met is subject to the information provided
at the pre-sales interface.
● All device dimensions described in this document are designed dimensions
and do not include dimension tolerances. In the process of component
manufacturing, the actual size is deviated due to factors such as processing or
measurement.
Symbol Conventions
The symbols that may be found in this document are defined as follows.
Symbol Description
Indicates a hazard with a high level of risk which, if
not avoided, will result in death or serious injury.
Indicates a hazard with a medium level of risk
which, if not avoided, could result in death or
serious injury.
Indicates a hazard with a low level of risk which, if
not avoided, could result in minor or moderate
injury.
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if
not avoided, could result in equipment damage,
data loss, performance deterioration, or
unanticipated results.
NOTICE is used to address practices not related to
personal injury.
Supplements the important information in the main
text.
NOTE is used to address information not related to
personal injury, equipment damage, and
environment deterioration.
Change History
● Changes in Issue 05 (2023-03-31)
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 1 Document Declaration
This is the fifth official release.
● Changes in Issue 04 (2022-10-31)
This is the fourth official release.
● Changes in Issue 03 (2022-07-31)
This is the third official release.
● Changes in Issue 02 (2022-05-31)
This is the second official release.
● Changes in Issue 01 (2022-03-31)
This is the first official release.
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 3
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 2 Using the Hardware Tool
2 Using the Hardware Tool
Enterprise:
In the enterprise network market, Info-Finder is a tool platform, It allows you to
search for key product information by product series and model. The key product
information includes basic information such as the software specifications, life
cycles, and hardware information, and operation and maintenance information
such as the licenses, alarms, logs, commands, and MIBs. The hardware-related
tools are as follows:
● Product image gallery: provides product photos, and network element icons
for you to produce design drawings and networking diagrams.
● Hardware configuration: automatically generates hardware configuration
diagrams after you select components are required and calculates the weight,
power consumption, and heat consumption.
● Hardware center: provides the technical specifications of devices and
components, as well as the mapping between devices, components, and
versions.
● 3D model: Using this function, you can query product images, product
overview, and component insertion/removal videos, enabling you to quickly
obtain product information in one-stop mode.
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 4
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
3 Hardware Description
3.1 Chassis
3.2 Optical Module
3.3 Cables
3.4 Power Distribution
3.1 Chassis
3.1.1 NetEngine A813 E
Overview
Table 3-1 Basic information about the NetEngine A813 E
Description Part Number Model First Integrated
supported fixed device
version
NetEngine 02354XWG CP8PHST1EA V800R022C00 Y
A813 E AC A6 SPC600
Chassis
(6*GE/FE(o)
+8*GE/FE(e))
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 5
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
Description Part Number Model First Integrated
supported fixed device
version
NetEngine 02354XWH CP8PHST1EA V800R022C00 Y
A813 E AC A8 SPC600
Basic
Configuratio
n(Includes
A813 E
Chassis,Fixed
Interface
(6*GE/FE(o)
+8*GE/FE(e)),
1*AC power,
no software
or doc, with
auxiliary
materials)
NetEngine 02355KNR CP8PHST1EA V800R022C10 Y
A813 E AC AD SPC500
Basic
Configuratio
n(Includes
A813 E
Chassis,Fixed
Interface
(6*GE/FE(o)
+8*GE/FE(e)),
1*AC power,
no software
or doc, with
auxiliary
materials)
NetEngine 02355KNT CP8PHST1EA V800R022C10 Y
A813 E AC AB SPC500
Chassis
(6*GE/FE(o)
+8*GE/FE(e))
NO TE
In specific areas, as the auxiliary materials are different, the sales BOM numbers may be
different. Different sales BOM numbers may correspond to the same description in the
device attribute table. The actual sales BOM number in an area prevails.
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 6
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
Appearance
Figure 3-1 Appearance of the NetEngine A813 E
Figure 3-2 Appearance of the NetEngine A813 E(with DC power adapter)
Panel
Table 3-2 Indicators on the NetEngine A813 E
Silkscreen Name Color Status Description
PWR Power status Green Steady on The power
indicator supply is
normal.
- Steady off The power
supply is lost
or fails.
STAT Working Green Steady on The board is
status working
indicator properly.
Red Steady on The board
hardware is
faulty.
Green Blinking The board
software is
being
initialized.
- Steady off The board is
not powered
on or is not
running.
ALM Alarm Red Steady on Device-level
indicator critical alarms
exist.
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 7
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
Silkscreen Name Color Status Description
Orange Steady on Device-level
major or
minor alarms
exist.
- Steady off Normal
status.
RSV Reserved - - -
indicator
(reserved)
L/A Connection/ Green Steady on The port
Data connection is
transmission normal.
status
indicator Green Blinking Data is being
received/sent
on ports.
- Steady off The physical
connection of
the port is
abnormal.
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 8
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
Table 3-3 Buttons on the NetEngine A813 E
Silkscreen Name Description
RST Reset button Used to reset a device.
When you press the RST
button and then release
it, the device starts to
reset.
The RST button can also
be used to delete the
password and
configuration file on the
device. The procedure is
as follows: Press and
release the RST button
to restart the NE. Then,
press and hold the RST
button for about 90
seconds. When the STAT
and ALM indicators both
blink (this status lasts
about 10 seconds),
release the RST button
immediately. The device
then starts to
automatically delete the
password and
configuration file.
However, if you release
the RST button after
they stop both blinking,
the device undergoes
only a reset without
clearing the password
and configuration file.
NOTE
After the RST button is
used to clear the
configuration file, the
original configuration file
is deleted. You are advised
to back up the
configuration file
periodically.
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 9
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
Table 3-4 Ports on the NetEngine A813 E
Port Connector Type Description Available
Components
MGMT-ETH RJ45 10M/100M auto- ETH management
sensing Ethernet cable
NM interface
NOTE
If a service port
can be connected
to an NMS, you
are advised to use
the service port as
the network
management port.
CONSOLE RJ45 Console interface: Console
connects to the management
console for on- cable
site system
configuration. The
default baud rate
is 9600 bit/s.
USB USB TYPE A USB port -
(reserved)
GE/FE (0–7) RJ45 Interface for Ethernet cable
inputting and
outputting FE/GE
electrical signals
GE/FE (8–13) SFP Interface for 1Gbps Electrical
inputting and Module
outputting FE/GE 1.25Gbps eSFP
optical signals Optical Module
1.25Gbps eSFP
BIDI Optical
Module
155Mbps eSFP
Optical Module
Table 3-5 Pins of the MGMT-ETH interface
Front View Pin Usage
1 Transmit positive of the
NM interface
2 Transmit negative of the
NM interface
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 10
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
Front View Pin Usage
3 Receive positive of the
NM interface
4 Unspecified
5 Unspecified
6 Receive negative of the
NM interface
7 Unspecified
8 Unspecified
Table 3-6 Pins of the CONSOLE interface
Front View Pin Usage
1 Unspecified
2 Unspecified
3 Transmit end of the
Console interface
4 Unspecified
5 Grounding end of the
Console interface
6 Receive end of the
Console interface
7 Unspecified
8 Unspecified
Interface Numbering Rules
On the NetEngine A813 E, an interface is numbered in the format of "slot
number/subcard number/port number". The following part describes the details:
● Slot number
The slot number of NetEngine A813 E, is always 0.
● Subcard number
The NetEngine A813 E, does not support subcards. Therefore, the subcard
number of the NetEngine A813 E, is fixed as 2.
● Port number
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 11
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
The port numbers of service interfaces on the NetEngine A813 E, begin with 0.
Port numbering depends on the number of interfaces on the NetEngine A813
E.
NO TE
The OAM interface is always numbered Ethernet0/0/0.
Labels
Figure 3-3 Label position
Table 3-7 Label description
Label Name Description
Chassis bar code The bar code will be retrieved by the device as the
label equipment serial number (ESN).
Grounding label This label suggests the position of the grounding terminal.
Qualification This label suggests that the device is qualified.
label
Product This label suggests the product name and certification.
nameplate label
Label for When installing a device against walls, keep 10 mm or
installing a longer distance between the device and walls.
device against
walls
Network access This label suggests the device network access certificate.
certificat label
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 12
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
Technical Specifications
Table 3-8 Technical specifications of the NetEngine A813 E AC+DC
Item Specification
Cabinet installation standards ETSI (21-inch); IEC (19-inch); IMB (3U)
Dimensions without packaging (H x W 43.6 mm x 320 mm x 220 mm (1.72 in.
x D) [mm(in.)] x 12.60 in. x 8.66 in.)
Chassis height [U] 1 U
Weight without packaging [kg(lb)] 2.3 kg (5.07 lb)
Typical power consumption (with 32.7 W
configuration) [W]
Typical heat dissipation (with 106.1 BTU/hour
configuration) [BTU/hour]
MTBF [year] 106.64 year
MTTR [hour] 2 hour
Availability 0.99999
CPU 4-core 1400 MHz
SDRAM 4 GB
Flash memory 16 MB
Storage 2 GB
Power supply mode AC+DC
Rated input voltage [V] AC: 110 V/220 V
DC: 12 V
NOTE
Supports –48 V DC, +48 V DC, or +24 V DC
through external power adapters.
Input voltage range [V] AC: 100 V–240 V
DC: 11.4 V–12.7 V
Maximum input current [A] AC: 1.2 A
DC (12 V): 5 A
Maximum input cable size [mm²] AC: standard C13 cable
DC (12 V): output cable for the power
adapter
Front-end circuit breaker/fuse [A] AC: > 2 A
DC (12 V): See the specifications of the
external power adapter.
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 13
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
Item Specification
Heat dissipation mode Air cooling
Airflow direction From left to right
Noise at normal temperature (acoustic 50 dB(A)
power) [dB(A)]
Switching capacity 28 Gbit/s (Bidirectional). The
maximum allowed error is 0.01%. To
be specific, 99.99% of the line rate is
guaranteed.
Redundant power supply Supports two power inputs for
redundancy backup through an
external power adapter.
Redundant fans If a single fan fails, the system can still
work for a short period of time at an
ambient temperature of 40°C (104°F).
Long-term operating temperature –5°C to +55°C (23.0°F to 131.0°F)
[°C(°F)]
Restriction on the operating ≤ 30°C/hour (54°F/hour)
temperature variation rate [°C(°F)]
Storage temperature [°C(°F)] –40°C to +70°C (–40°F to +158 °F)
Long-term operating relative humidity 5% to 95% RH, non-condensing
[RH]
Storage relative humidity [RH] 5% to 100% RH, non-condensing
Long-term operating altitude [m(ft.)] ≤ 4000 m (13123.2 ft.) (For the
altitude in the range of 1800 m to
4000 m [5905.44 ft. to 13123.2 ft.], the
operating temperature of the device
must decrease by 1°C [1.8°F] for every
220 m [721.78 ft.].)
Storage altitude [m(ft.)] < 5000 m (16404 ft.)
3.1.2 NetEngine A822 E
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 14
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
Overview
Table 3-9 Basic information about the NetEngine A822 E
Description Part Number Model First Integrated
supported fixed device
version
NetEngine 02354WPK CP8PHST2EA2 V800R022C00 Y
A822 E Basic 4 SPC600
Configuratio
n(Includes
A822 E
Chassis,Fixed
Interface(2*10
GE/GE/FE(o)
+4*GE/FE(o)
+8*GE/FE(e)),
1*AC power,
no software
or doc, with
auxiliary
materials)
NetEngine 02354WPL CP8PHST2EA2 V800R022C00 Y
A822 E AC 2 SPC600
Chassis
(2*10GE/GE/
FE(o)+4*GE/
FE(o)+8*GE/
FE(e))
NetEngine 02355KPD CP8PHST2EA2 V800R022C10 Y
A822 E AC 8 SPC500
Chassis
(2*10GE/GE/
FE(o)+4*GE/
FE(o)+8*GE/
FE(e))
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 15
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
Description Part Number Model First Integrated
supported fixed device
version
NetEngine 02355KPF CP8PHST2EA2 V800R022C10 Y
A822 E Basic B SPC500
Configuratio
n(Includes
A822 E
Chassis,Fixed
Interface(2*10
GE/GE/FE(o)
+4*GE/FE(o)
+8*GE/FE(e)),
1*AC power,
no software
or doc, with
auxiliary
materials)
NO TE
In specific areas, as the auxiliary materials are different, the sales BOM numbers may be
different. Different sales BOM numbers may correspond to the same description in the
device attribute table. The actual sales BOM number in an area prevails.
Appearance
Figure 3-4 Appearance of the NetEngine A822 E
Figure 3-5 Appearance of the NetEngine A822 E(with DC power adapter)
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 16
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
Panel
Table 3-10 Indicators on the NetEngine A822 E
Silkscreen Name Color Status Description
PWR Power status Green Steady on The power
indicator supply is
normal.
- Steady off The power
supply is lost
or fails.
STAT Working Green Steady on The board is
status working
indicator properly.
Red Steady on The board
hardware is
faulty.
Green Blinking The board
software is
being
initialized.
- Steady off The board is
not powered
on or is not
running.
ALM Alarm Red Steady on Device-level
indicator critical alarms
exist.
Orange Steady on Device-level
major or
minor alarms
exist.
- Steady off Normal
status.
RSV Reserved - - -
indicator
(reserved)
L/A Connection/ Green Steady on The port
Data connection is
transmission normal.
status
indicator Green Blinking Data is being
received/sent
on ports.
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 17
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
Silkscreen Name Color Status Description
- Steady off The physical
connection of
the port is
abnormal.
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 18
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
Table 3-11 Buttons on the NetEngine A822 E
Silkscreen Name Description
RST Reset button Used to reset a device.
When you press the RST
button and then release
it, the device starts to
reset.
The RST button can also
be used to delete the
password and
configuration file on the
device. The procedure is
as follows: Press and
release the RST button
to restart the NE. Then,
press and hold the RST
button for about 90
seconds. When the STAT
and ALM indicators both
blink (this status lasts
about 10 seconds),
release the RST button
immediately. The device
then starts to
automatically delete the
password and
configuration file.
However, if you release
the RST button after
they stop both blinking,
the device undergoes
only a reset without
clearing the password
and configuration file.
NOTE
After the RST button is
used to clear the
configuration file, the
original configuration file
is deleted. You are advised
to back up the
configuration file
periodically.
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 19
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
Table 3-12 Ports on the NetEngine A822 E
Port Connector Type Description Available
Components
MGMT-ETH RJ45 10M/100M auto- ETH management
sensing Ethernet cable
NM interface
NOTE
If a service port
can be connected
to an NMS, you
are advised to use
the service port as
the network
management port.
CONSOLE RJ45 Console interface: Console
connects to the management
console for on- cable
site system
configuration. The
default baud rate
is 9600 bit/s.
USB USB TYPE A USB port -
(reserved)
GE/FE (0–7) RJ45 Interface for Ethernet cable
inputting and
outputting FE/GE
electrical signals
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 20
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
Port Connector Type Description Available
Components
10G/GE/FE (8–9) SFP+ Interface for 10Gbps SFP+
inputting and Optical Module
outputting 1.25/9.953/10.31
FE/GE/10G optical 25Gbps SFP+
signals Optical Module
10Gbps SFP+
CWDM Optical
Module
10Gbps SFP+
BIDI Optical
Module
10Gbps SFP+
DWDM Optical
Module
125M~2.67Gbps
eSFP DWDM
Optical Module
1Gbps Electrical
Module
1.25Gbps eSFP
Optical Module
1.25Gbps SFP
BIDI Optical
Module
1.25Gbps eSFP
BIDI Optical
Module
1.25Gbps eSFP
CWDM Optical
Module
1Gbps SyncE and
1588V2 Electrical
Module
155Mbps eSFP
Optical Module
155Mbps eSFP
BIDI Optical
Module
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 21
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
Port Connector Type Description Available
Components
GE/FE (8–13) SFP Interface for 1Gbps Electrical
inputting and Module
outputting FE/GE 1.25Gbps eSFP
optical signals Optical Module
1.25Gbps SFP
BIDI Optical
Module
1.25Gbps eSFP
BIDI Optical
Module
1.25Gbps eSFP
CWDM Optical
Module
1Gbps SyncE and
1588V2 Electrical
Module
155Mbps eSFP
Optical Module
155Mbps eSFP
BIDI Optical
Module
Table 3-13 Pins of the MGMT-ETH interface
Front View Pin Usage
1 Transmit positive of the
NM interface
2 Transmit negative of the
NM interface
3 Receive positive of the
NM interface
4 Unspecified
5 Unspecified
6 Receive negative of the
NM interface
7 Unspecified
8 Unspecified
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 22
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
Table 3-14 Pins of the CONSOLE interface
Front View Pin Usage
1 Unspecified
2 Unspecified
3 Transmit end of the
Console interface
4 Unspecified
5 Grounding end of the
Console interface
6 Receive end of the
Console interface
7 Unspecified
8 Unspecified
Interface Numbering Rules
On the NetEngine A822 E, an interface is numbered in the format of "slot
number/subcard number/port number". The following part describes the details:
● Slot number
The slot number of NetEngine A822 E, is always 0.
● Subcard number
The NetEngine A822 E, does not support subcards. Therefore, the subcard
number of the NetEngine A822 E, is fixed as 2.
● Port number
The port numbers of service interfaces on the NetEngine A822 E, begin with 0.
Port numbering depends on the number of interfaces on the NetEngine A822
E.
NO TE
The OAM interface is always numbered Ethernet0/0/0.
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 23
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
Labels
Figure 3-6 Label position
Table 3-15 Label description
Label Name Description
Chassis bar code The bar code will be retrieved by the device as the
label equipment serial number (ESN).
Grounding label This label suggests the position of the grounding terminal.
Qualification This label suggests that the device is qualified.
label
Product This label suggests the product name and certification.
nameplate label
Label for When installing a device against walls, keep 10 mm or
installing a longer distance between the device and walls.
device against
walls
Network access This label suggests the device network access certificate.
certificat label
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 24
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
Technical Specifications
Table 3-16 Technical specifications of the NetEngine A822 E AC+DC
Item Specification
Cabinet installation standards ETSI (21-inch); IEC (19-inch); IMB (3U)
Dimensions without packaging (H x W 43.6 mm x 320 mm x 220 mm (1.72 in.
x D) [mm(in.)] x 12.60 in. x 8.66 in.)
Chassis height [U] 1 U
Weight without packaging [kg(lb)] 2.3 kg (5.07 lb)
Typical power consumption (with 35.0 W
configuration) [W]
Typical heat dissipation (with 113.55 BTU/hour
configuration) [BTU/hour]
MTBF [year] 106.64 year
MTTR [hour] 2 hour
Availability 0.99999
CPU 4-core 1400 MHz
SDRAM 4 GB
Flash memory 16 MB
Storage 2 GB
Power supply mode AC+DC
Rated input voltage [V] AC: 110 V/220 V
DC: 12 V
NOTE
Supports –48 V DC, +48 V DC, or +24 V DC
through external power adapters.
Input voltage range [V] AC: 100 V–240 V
DC: 11.4 V–12.7 V
Maximum input current [A] AC: 1.2 A
DC (12 V): 5 A
Maximum input cable size [mm²] AC: standard C13 cable
DC (12 V): output cable for the power
adapter
Front-end circuit breaker/fuse [A] AC: > 2 A
DC (12 V): See the specifications of the
external power adapter.
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 25
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
Item Specification
Heat dissipation mode Air cooling
Airflow direction From left to right
Noise at normal temperature (acoustic 50 dB(A)
power) [dB(A)]
Switching capacity 40G bit/s (Bidirectional). The
maximum allowed error is 0.01%. To
be specific, 99.99% of the line rate is
guaranteed.
Redundant power supply Supports two power inputs for
redundancy backup through an
external power adapter.
Redundant fans If a single fan fails, the system can still
work for a short period of time at an
ambient temperature of 40°C (104°F).
Long-term operating temperature –5°C to +55°C (23.0°F to 131.0°F)
[°C(°F)]
Restriction on the operating ≤ 30°C/hour (54°F/hour)
temperature variation rate [°C(°F)]
Storage temperature [°C(°F)] –40°C to +70°C (–40°F to +158 °F)
Long-term operating relative humidity 5% to 95% RH, non-condensing
[RH]
Storage relative humidity [RH] 5% to 100% RH, non-condensing
Long-term operating altitude [m(ft.)] ≤ 4000 m (13123.2 ft.) (For the
altitude in the range of 1800 m to
4000 m [5905.44 ft. to 13123.2 ft.], the
operating temperature of the device
must decrease by 1°C [1.8°F] for every
220 m [721.78 ft.].)
Storage altitude [m(ft.)] < 5000 m (16404 ft.)
3.1.3 NetEngine A821 E
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 26
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
Overview
Table 3-17 Basic information about the NetEngine A821 E
Descriptio Part Model First Integrated Remarks
n Number supported fixed
version device
NetEngine 02354QGQ CP8PHST2E V800R021C Y Default:
A821 E AC A01 10SPC500 2*10GE/GE
Chassis /FE(o)
(6*10GE/G +8*GE/
E/FE(o) FE(o)
+4*GE/ +8*GE/
FE(o) FE(e). The
+8*GE/ ports can
FE(e), be
Default upgraded
2*10GE/GE to
/FE(o) 6*10GE/GE
+8*GE/ /FE(o)
FE(o) +4*GE/
+8*GE/ FE(o)
FE(e)) +8*GE/
FE(e)
through
the RTU.
NetEngine 02354QGQ CP8PHST2E V800R021C Y Default:
A821 E AC -001 A01 10SPC600 2*10GE/GE
Chassis /FE(o)
(6*10GE/G +8*GE/
E/FE(o) FE(o)
+4*GE/ +8*GE/
FE(o) FE(e). The
+8*GE/ ports can
FE(e), be
Default upgraded
2*10GE/GE to
/FE(o) 6*10GE/GE
+8*GE/ /FE(o)
FE(o) +4*GE/
+8*GE/ FE(o)
FE(e)) +8*GE/
FE(e)
through
the RTU.
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 27
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
Descriptio Part Model First Integrated Remarks
n Number supported fixed
version device
NetEngine 02354QGQ CP8PHST2E V800R022C Y Default:
A821 E AC -006 A01 00SPC600 2*10GE/GE
Chassis /FE(o)
(6*10GE/G +8*GE/
E/FE(o) FE(o)
+4*GE/ +8*GE/
FE(o) FE(e). The
+8*GE/ ports can
FE(e), be
Default upgraded
2*10GE/GE to
/FE(o) 6*10GE/GE
+8*GE/ /FE(o)
FE(o) +4*GE/
+8*GE/ FE(o)
FE(e)) +8*GE/
FE(e)
through
the RTU.
NetEngine 02354QGS CP8PHST2E V800R021C Y -
A821 E AC A03 10SPC500
Basic
Configurati
on(Include
s A821 E
AC
Chassis,Fix
ed
Interface(2
*10GE/GE/
FE(o)
+8*GE/
FE(o)
+8*GE/
FE(e)),1*AC
Power,with
out
Software
and
Document)
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 28
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
Descriptio Part Model First Integrated Remarks
n Number supported fixed
version device
NetEngine 02354QGS- CP8PHST2E V800R021C Y -
A821 E 001 A03 10SPC600
Basic
Configurati
on(Include
s A821 E
Chassis,Fix
ed
Interface(2
*10GE/GE/
FE(o)
+8*GE/
FE(o)
+8*GE/
FE(e)),1*AC
Power,with
out
Software
and
Document)
NetEngine 02354QGS- CP8PHST2E V800R022C Y -
A821 E 006 A03 00SPC600
Basic
Configurati
on(Include
s A821 E
Chassis,Fix
ed
Interface(2
*10GE/GE/
FE(o)
+8*GE/
FE(o)
+8*GE/
FE(e)),1*AC
Power,with
out
Software
and
Document)
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 29
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
Descriptio Part Model First Integrated Remarks
n Number supported fixed
version device
NetEngine 02355KNY CP8PHSB2 V800R022C Y Default:
A821 E AC EA05 10SPC500 2*10GE/GE
Chassis /FE(o)
(6*10GE/G +8*GE/
E/FE(o) FE(o)
+4*GE/ +8*GE/
FE(o) FE(e). The
+8*GE/ ports can
FE(e), be
Default upgraded
2*10GE/GE to
/FE(o) 6*10GE/GE
+8*GE/ /FE(o)
FE(o) +4*GE/
+8*GE/ FE(o)
FE(e)) +8*GE/
FE(e)
through
the RTU.
NetEngine 02355KPB CP8PHSB2 V800R022C Y -
A821 E EA07 10SPC500
Basic
Configurati
on(Include
s A821 E
Chassis,Fix
ed
Interface(2
*10GE/GE/
FE(o)
+8*GE/
FE(o)
+8*GE/
FE(e)),1*AC
Power,with
out
Software
and
Document)
NO TE
In specific areas, as the auxiliary materials are different, the sales BOM numbers may be
different. Different sales BOM numbers may correspond to the same description in the
device attribute table. The actual sales BOM number in an area prevails.
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 30
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
Appearance
Figure 3-7 Appearance of the NetEngine A821 E
Figure 3-8 Appearance of the NetEngine A821 E(with DC power adapter)
Panel
Table 3-18 Indicators on the NetEngine A821 E
Silkscreen Name Color Status Description
PWR Power supply green The power Steady on
status supply is
indicator normal.
- No power is Off
accessed.
The power
supply poles
are inversely
connected.
STAT Board status green The device is Steady on
indicator working
normally.
red The device Steady on
hardware is
faulty.
green Loading of Blink
the board
software is in
process.
- The device is Off
not running
or no power
is input.
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 31
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
Silkscreen Name Color Status Description
ALM Alarm Red Critical Steady on
indicator alarms are
generated.
Orange Major or Steady on
minor alarms
are
generated.
- No alarms are Off
generated.
RSV Reserve - - -
indicator(Rese
rved)
LINK Port green The physical Steady on
Connection port
Status connection is
Indicator normal.
- The physical Off
port
connection
fails.
ACT Port green The data Blink
Transmitting/ interface is
Receiving transmitting
Status or receiving
Indicator data.
NOTE:
The color of
the indicator
on the
electrical port
is orange.
The color of
the indicator
on the optical
port is green.
- The data Off
interface is
not
transmitting
or receiving
data.
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 32
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
Silkscreen Name Color Status Description
L/A Connection/ green The Steady on
data connection on
transmission the physical
status port is
indicator normal.
green The Blink
connection on
the physical
port is
normal, and
data is
received or
transmitted
on the port.
- The physical Off
connection
fails.
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 33
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
Table 3-19 Buttons on the NetEngine A821 E
Silkscreen Name Description
RST Reset button Used to reset a device.
When you press the RST
button and then release
it, the device starts to
reset.
The RST button can be
used to clear the
password and
configuration file of a
device. Once you press
and release the RST
button, the device begins
to reset. After you press
and hold down the RST
button for about 90s and
release the button when
the STAT and ALM
indicators blink
simultaneously, the
device begins to
automatically clear the
password and
configuration file. If you
still hold down the RST
button after the
indicators blink
simultaneously and then
release the button after
they do not blink
simultaneously (for
about 10s), the device
undergoes only a reset
without clearing the
password and
configuration file.
- If you press the RST
button, the original
configuration file is
cleared. You are advised
to periodically back up
the configuration file.
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 34
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
Table 3-20 Ports on the NetEngine A821 E
Port Connector Type Description Available
Components
MGMT-ETH RJ45 10M/100M auto- ETH management
sensing Ethernet cable
NM interface
NOTE
If a service port
can be connected
to an NMS, you
are advised to use
the service port as
the network
management port.
CONSOLE RJ45 Console interface: Console
connects to the management
console for on- cable
site system
configuration. The
default baud rate
is 9600 bit/s.
USB USB TYPE A USB port -
(reserved)
GE/FE (0–7) RJ45 Interface for Ethernet cable
inputting and
outputting FE/GE
electrical signals
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 35
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
Port Connector Type Description Available
Components
10GE/GE/FE (8–9) SFP+/SFP Interface for 10Gbps SFP+
inputting and Optical Module
outputting FE/GE/ 1.25/9.953/10.31
10GE optical 25Gbps SFP+
signals Optical Module
NOTE 10Gbps SFP+
1. Ports 8 and 9
work in standard CWDM Optical
Ethernet mode by Module
default. You can 10Gbps SFP+
run the flexe
BIDI Optical
enable port port-id
command in the Module
system view to 10Gbps SFP+
switch the ports to DWDM Optical
the FlexE mode. An
interface working Module
in GE mode cannot 125M~2.67Gbps
be switched to the eSFP DWDM
FlexE mode. Optical Module
2. Interfaces 8 and
9 in FlexE mode 1Gbps Electrical
cannot connect to Module
standard 10GE 1.25Gbps eSFP
interfaces. Optical Module
3. This FlexE mode
supports only GE- 1.25Gbps SFP
granularity hard BIDI Optical
pipes and Module
interconnection
1.25Gbps eSFP
with Huawei FlexE
interfaces with the BIDI Optical
same GE Module
granularity. 1.25Gbps eSFP
4. In CWDM Optical
V800R021C10, Module
electrical modules
inserted into ports 1Gbps SyncE and
8 to 9 support only 1588V2 Electrical
1000 Mbit/s, and Module
do not support 10
Mbit/s, 100 Mbit/s, 155Mbps eSFP
or 10M/100M Optical Module
auto-sensing (no 155Mbps eSFP
this restriction in
later versions). BIDI Optical
Module
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 36
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
Port Connector Type Description Available
Components
10GE/GE/FE (10– SFP+ FE/GE/10GE 10Gbps SFP+
13) optical signal Optical Module
input and output 1.25/9.953/10.31
interface 25Gbps SFP+
Description: Optical Module
By default, only 10Gbps SFP+
the GE/FE CWDM Optical
interface is Module
supported. To use 10Gbps SFP+
the 10GE BIDI Optical
interface, you Module
need to purchase
the RTU. 10Gbps SFP+
DWDM Optical
For details about Module
how to use the
RTU, see 125M~2.67Gbps
Installation > eSFP DWDM
License Usage Optical Module
Guide. 1Gbps Electrical
Module
1.25Gbps eSFP
Optical Module
1.25Gbps SFP
BIDI Optical
Module
1.25Gbps eSFP
BIDI Optical
Module
1.25Gbps eSFP
CWDM Optical
Module
1Gbps SyncE and
1588V2 Electrical
Module
155Mbps eSFP
Optical Module
155Mbps eSFP
BIDI Optical
Module
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 37
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
Port Connector Type Description Available
Components
GE/FE (14–17) SFP Interface for 1Gbps Electrical
inputting and Module
outputting FE/GE 1.25Gbps eSFP
optical signals Optical Module
1.25Gbps SFP
BIDI Optical
Module
1.25Gbps eSFP
BIDI Optical
Module
1.25Gbps eSFP
CWDM Optical
Module
1Gbps SyncE and
1588V2 Electrical
Module
155Mbps eSFP
Optical Module
155Mbps eSFP
BIDI Optical
Module
Table 3-21 Pins of the MGMT-ETH interface
Front View Pin Usage
1 Transmit positive of the
NM interface
2 Transmit negative of the
NM interface
3 Receive positive of the
NM interface
4 Unspecified
5 Unspecified
6 Receive negative of the
NM interface
7 Unspecified
8 Unspecified
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 38
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
Table 3-22 Pins of the CONSOLE interface
Front View Pin Usage
1 Unspecified
2 Unspecified
3 Transmit end of the
Console interface
4 Unspecified
5 Grounding end of the
Console interface
6 Receive end of the
Console interface
7 Unspecified
8 Unspecified
Interface Numbering Rules
On the NetEngine A821 E, an interface is numbered in the format of "slot
number/subcard number/port number". The following part describes the details:
● Slot number
The slot number of NetEngine A821 E, is always 0.
● Subcard number
The NetEngine A821 E, does not support subcards. Therefore, the subcard
number of the NetEngine A821 E, is fixed as 2.
● Port number
The port numbers of service interfaces on the NetEngine A821 E, begin with 0.
Port numbering depends on the number of interfaces on the NetEngine A821
E,.
NO TE
The OAM interface is always numbered Ethernet0/0/0.
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 39
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
Labels
Figure 3-9 Label position
Table 3-23 Label description
Label Name Description
Chassis bar code The bar code will be retrieved by the device as the
label equipment serial number (ESN).
Grounding label This label suggests the position of the grounding terminal.
Qualification This label suggests that the device is qualified.
label
Product This label suggests the product name and certification.
nameplate label
Label for When installing a device against walls, keep 10 mm or
installing a longer distance between the device and walls.
device against
walls
Network access This label suggests the device network access certificate.
certificat label
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 40
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
Technical Specifications
Table 3-24 Technical specifications of the NetEngine A821 E AC+DC
Item Specification
Cabinet installation standards ETSI (21-inch); IEC (19-inch); IMB (3U)
Dimensions without packaging (H x W 43.6 mm x 320 mm x 220 mm (1.72 in.
x D) [mm(in.)] x 12.60 in. x 8.66 in.)
Chassis height [U] 1 U
Weight without packaging [kg(lb)] 2.7 kg (5.95 lb)
Typical power consumption (with 69.87 W
configuration) [W]
Typical heat dissipation (with 226.70 BTU/hour
configuration) [BTU/hour]
MTBF [year] ● CP8PHSB2EA05 (02355KNY): 56
year
● CP8PHSB2EA07 (02355KPB): 56
year
● CP8PHST2EA01 (02354QGQ): 44.55
year
● CP8PHST2EA01 (02354QGQ-001):
44.55 year
● CP8PHST2EA01 (02354QGQ-006):
56 year
● CP8PHST2EA03 (02354QGS): 44.55
year
● CP8PHST2EA03 (02354QGS-001):
44.55 year
● CP8PHST2EA03 (02354QGS-006):
56 year
MTTR [hour] 2 hour
Availability 0.99999
CPU 4-core 1400 MHz
SDRAM 4 GB
Flash memory 64 MB
Storage 2 GB
Power supply mode AC+DC
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 41
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
Item Specification
Rated input voltage [V] AC: 110 V/220 V
DC: 12 V
NOTE
Supports –48 V DC and +48 V DC through
the external power adapter.
Input voltage range [V] AC: 100 V–240 V
DC: 11.4 V–12.7 V
Maximum input current [A] AC: 1.5 A
DC (12 V): 10 A
Maximum input cable size [mm²] AC: standard C13 cable
DC (12 V): output cable for the power
adapter
Front-end circuit breaker/fuse [A] AC: > 2 A
DC (12 V): See the specifications of the
external power adapter.
Heat dissipation mode Air cooling
Airflow direction From left to right
Noise at normal temperature (acoustic 50 dB(A)
power) [dB(A)]
Switching capacity 144 Gbit/s (Bidirectional). The
maximum allowed error is 0.01%. To
be specific, 99.99% of the line rate is
guaranteed.
Redundant power supply Supports two power inputs for
redundancy backup through an
external power adapter.
Redundant fans If a single fan fails, the system can still
work for a short period of time at an
ambient temperature of 50°C (122°F).
Long-term operating temperature –40°C to +65°C (–40°F to +149°F)
[°C(°F)]
Restriction on the operating ≤ 30°C/hour (54°F/hour)
temperature variation rate [°C(°F)]
Storage temperature [°C(°F)] –40°C to +70°C (–40°F to +158 °F)
Long-term operating relative humidity 5% to 95% RH, non-condensing
[RH]
Storage relative humidity [RH] 5% to 100% RH, non-condensing
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 42
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
Item Specification
Long-term operating altitude [m(ft.)] ≤ 4000 m (13123.2 ft.) (For the
altitude in the range of 1800 m to
4000 m [5905.44 ft. to 13123.2 ft.], the
operating temperature of the device
must decrease by 1°C [1.8°F] for every
220 m [721.78 ft.].)
Storage altitude [m(ft.)] < 5000 m (16404 ft.)
FlexE supported ● CP8PHSB2EA05 (02355KNY): -
● CP8PHSB2EA07 (02355KPB): -
● CP8PHST2EA01 (02354QGQ):
Yes
Physical port 8 can be added to one
group. port-id ranges from 1000 to
3000. A maximum of eight FlexE
clients can be created.
Physical port 9 can be added to one
group. port-id ranges from 1000 to
3000. A maximum of eight FlexE
clients can be created.
● CP8PHST2EA01 (02354QGQ-001): -
● CP8PHST2EA01 (02354QGQ-006): -
● CP8PHST2EA03 (02354QGS): -
● CP8PHST2EA03 (02354QGS-001): -
● CP8PHST2EA03 (02354QGS-006): -
3.2 Optical Module
3.2.1 Understanding Pluggable Optical Modules
3.2.1.1 Optical Module Structure
Figure1 shows the structure of an optical module.
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 43
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
Figure 3-10 Optical module structure
1. Handle 2. Receiver 3. Transmitter 4. Shell
5. Label 6. Dust cap 7. Spring 8. Module
connector
3.2.1.2 Optical Module Classification
Optical modules are available in various types to meet diversified requirements.
● Classified by transmission rates
Currently, the transmission rates of optical modules cover a wide range.
According to different transmission rates, optical modules can be classified
into 400 Gbit/s optical modules, 200 Gbit/s optical modules, 100 Gbit/s optical
modules, 40 Gbit/s optical modules, 25 Gbit/s optical modules, and 10 Gbit/s
optical modules, 2.5 Gbit/s optical modules, 1.25 Gbit/s optical modules, 1000
Mbit/s optical modules, 155 Mbit/s optical modules, and 100 Mbit/s optical
modules.
● Classified by encapsulation types
The higher transmission rate an optical module provides, the more complex
structure it has. According to the encapsulation type, optical modules are
classified into SFP, eSFP, SFP+, XFP, SFP28, QSFP28, QSFP+, CXP, CFP and CSFP.
– SFP: small form-factor pluggable.
– eSFP: enhanced small form-factor pluggable. An eSFP module is an SFP
module that supports monitoring of voltage, temperature, bias current,
transmit optical power, and receive optical power. Because all the SFP
optical modules support these monitoring functions, eSFP is also called
SFP.
– SFP+: small form-factor pluggable plus, SFP with a higher rate. SFP+
modules are more sensitive to electromagnetic interference (EMI)
because they have a higher rate. To reduce EMI, SFP+ modules have more
springs than SFP modules and the cages for SFP+ modules on a card are
tighter.
– XFP: X is the Roman numeral 10, meaning that all XFP optical modules
provide a 10 Gbit/s transmission rate. XFP optical modules support LC
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 44
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
fiber connectors. XFP optical modules are wider and longer than SFP+
optical modules.
– SFP28: with the same interface size as an SFP+ module. An SFP28
interface can use a 25GE SFP28 optical module or 10GE SFP+ optical
module.
– QSFP28: with the same interface size as a QSFP+ module. A QSFP28
interface can use a 100GE QSFP28 optical module or a 40GE QSFP+
optical module.
– QSFP+: quad small form-factor pluggable. QSFP+ optical modules
support MPO fiber connectors and are larger than SFP+ modules.
– QSFP-DD: quad small form factor pluggable-double density, it is a high-
speed pluggable module defined by the QSFP-DD MSA group.
– CXP: hot-pluggable high-density parallel optics transceiver form factor,
which provides 12 channels of traffic in each of the Tx and Rx directions.
It applies only to short multimode links.
– CFP: C form-factor pluggable, a new standard for high-speed, hot-
pluggable optical transceivers that support data communication and
telecommunication applications. Dimensions of a CFP optical module are
144.75 mm x 82 mm x 13.6 mm (W x D x H).
– CSFP: A Compact Small Form-Factor Pluggable (SFP) module is a Gigabit
Ethernet transceiver with two bidirectional channels inside a conventional
SFP form factor to address high-density port requirements in FTTx
deployments. Typically, this CSFP optical module is interconnected with
two BIDI SFP optical modules. During interconnection, the transmit and
receive wavelengths must match, and the transmission distances of the
optical modules at the two ends must be the same.
● Classified by physical layer standards
Different physical layer standards are defined to allow data transmission in
different modes. Therefore, different types of optical modules are produced to
comply with these standards. For details, see Standards compliance of the
specific optical module.
● Classified by modes
Optical fibers are classified into single-mode and multimode fibers. Therefore,
optical modules are also classified into single-mode and multimode modules
to support different optical fibers.
– Single-mode optical modules are used with single-mode fibers. Single-
mode fibers support a wide band and large transmission capacity, and are
used for long-distance transmission.
– Multimode optical modules are used with multimode fibers. Multimode
fibers have lower transmission performance than single-mode fibers
because of modal dispersion, but their costs are also lower. They are used
for small-capacity, short-distance transmission.
Wavelength division multiplexing modules differ from other optical modules in
center wavelengths. A common optical module has a center wavelength of 850
nm, 1310 nm, or 1550 nm, whereas a wavelength division multiplexing module
transmits lights with different center wavelengths. Wavelength division
multiplexing modules are classified into two types: coarse wavelength division
multiplexing (CWDM) and dense wavelength division multiplexing (DWDM).
Within the same band, DWDM modules are available in more types and use
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 45
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
wavelength resources more efficiently than CWDM modules. DWDM and CWDM
modules allow lights with different center wavelengths to be transmitted on one
fiber without interfering each other. Therefore, a passive multiplexer can be used
to combine the lights into one channel, which is then split into multiple channels
by a demultiplexer on the remote end. This reduces the optical fibers required.
DWDM and CWDM modules are used for long-distance transmission.
The transmit power of a long-distance optical module is often larger than its
overload power. Therefore, when using such optical modules, select optical fibers
of an appropriate length to ensure that the actual receive power is smaller than
the overload power. If the optical fibers connected to a long-distance optical
module are too short, use an optical attenuator to reduce the receive power on
the remote optical module. Otherwise, the remote optical module may be burnt.
3.2.1.3 Optical Module Appearance
The following lists some common optical modules, which may not be supported
by this product. The figures are for reference only.
Table 3-25 Commonly used optical modules
Encaps Interface Appearance
ulatio type
n type
SFP LC Single-fiber-bidirectional transceiver
RJ45 1Gbps Electrical Module
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 46
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
Encaps Interface Appearance
ulatio type
n type
eSFP LC Two-fiber bidirectional
Single-fiber-bidirectional transceiver
SFP+ LC Two-fiber bidirectional
Single-fiber-bidirectional transceiver
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 47
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
Encaps Interface Appearance
ulatio type
n type
XFP LC Two-fiber bidirectional
Single-fiber-bidirectional transceiver
SFP28 LC Two-fiber bidirectional
Single-fiber-bidirectional transceiver
QSFP2 LC/MPO Two-fiber bidirectional
8
Single-fiber-bidirectional transceiver
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 48
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
Encaps Interface Appearance
ulatio type
n type
QSFP+ LC/MPO
CXP MPO
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 49
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
Encaps Interface Appearance
ulatio type
n type
CFP LC/MPO CFP
CFP2
CFP4
CFP8
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 50
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
Encaps Interface Appearance
ulatio type
n type
CSFP LC
QSFP- LC
DD
3.2.1.4 Guide to Using Optical Modules
This section describes instructions on how to use an optical module.
NO TE
Only optical modules matching Huawei products can be used. These optical modules are
strictly tested by Huawei. If non-matching optical modules are used, device requirements
may fail to be met, and services may fail to run properly. To replace optical modules, see
Parts Replacement-Replacing an Optical Module.
ESD Measures
Before touching any optical module, wear an ESD wrist strap or ESD gloves. Take
full ESD measures when installing optical apparatus such as optical modules
indoors or outdoors.
Figure 3-11 Methods of wearing ESD gloves
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 51
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
Figure 3-12 Methods of wearing ESD wrist strap
Placing Optical Apparatus and fibers
Do not touch pins or connecting fingers with bare hands. Handle the optical fibers
gently. Use two fingers to hold the fiber connector instead of grasping the fiber or
the fiber cover.
Do not apply axial or lateral fiber wallop bumps on the fiber. Do not fold, twist, or
crush the tail fiber. Do not drag the tail fiber or press the coupling point of the tail
fiber. Figure 3-13 shows how to properly place optical apparatus and fibers.
Figure 3-13 Methods of placing optical apparatus and fibers
NO TE
Install the fiber in circles with diameter longer than 6 cm ( 0.20 ft ).
Uninstalling Optical Apparatus
● Open the buckle and slowly take out the optical apparatus. Do not drag the
optical fiber to forcibly take out the optical fiber. Ensure that the optical fiber
is connected to and removed from the interface horizontally.
Figure 3-14 The tab is closed
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 52
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
Figure 3-15 The tab is open
● 155Mbps SFP Electrical Transceiver, in Figure 3-16 (1) shows a black plastic
latch. Press the latch to unlock the electrical module. As (2) indicates, hold
the two sides of the electrical module to remove it.
Figure 3-16 Removing a 155 Mbit/s electrical module
Please do not remove the black plastic latch when removing the electrical
module.
If the black plastic latch falls off, use an auxiliary tool, such as a pair of
tweezers, to press the cage buckle, as shown in the following figure. Then,
hold the two sides of the electrical module to remove it.
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 53
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
● CFP2 optical module(02311LYG), in Figure 3-17, Push the puller to the
bottom until the latch shown in (1) automatically unlocks the optical module.
Then, horizontally drag the puller to remove the optical module.
Figure 3-17 Removing a CFP2 optical module
● When removing a CFP optical module, loosen the two screw rods of the
module and then remove the module slowly. Do not directly drag the optical
fiber to pull out the optical module or forcibly pull out the optical module.
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 54
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
CA UTION
The QSFP28 and QSFP-DD modules will get very hot during operation. To
prevent injuries, do not touch the module shells when removing the modules.
Precautions for the loosened optical module
● When installing an optical module, force it into position. If a crack sound is
heard or a slight tremor is felt, it indicates that the latch boss is secured.
When the latch boss is not secured, the connecting finger is unstably
connected to the connector on the board, and the link may become Up. On
the condition that the optical module tremors or collides with another object,
however, the optical module will be loosened or the optical signals will be
temporarily cut off.
● When inserting the optical module, make sure that the tab is closed. (At this
time, the latch boss locks the optical module.) After the optical module is
inserted, try pulling it out to see if it is installed in position. If the optical
module cannot be pulled out, it is secured.
● If you cannot push the optical module into an optical module cage any
longer, the optical module is in good contact with the board connector.
● When installing a CFP optical module, push the module panel horizontally
into the connector using even force with both thumbs. After the module is
inserted, push the module slightly to ensure that it has reached the stop
position.
● After the CFP optical module is securely inserted, tighten the two screw rods
of the module alternately. To prevent the module from getting loosened due
to vibration or collision, you are advised to use a screwdriver to tighten the
screw rods.
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 55
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
Precautions for receptacle contamination
● Clean tissues must be prepared for deployment on site. You need to clean the
optical connector before inserting it in the receptacle. This protects the
receptacle against the contamination.
NO TE
Use at least three cleaning tissues. Wipe the end of an optical connector horizontally
in one direction, and then move the connector end to the unused part of the cleaning
tissue to continue. Generally, one cleaning tissue is used for cleaning an optical
connector.
● To prevent contamination, the optical module should be covered with either a
dust cap or an optical connector.
Cover an optical module with a dust cap.
Cover an optical module with an optical connector
● Lay the optical fibers on the Optical-fiber Distribution Frame (ODF) or coil
them up in a fiber management tray. Make sure that the optical fibers are not
squeezed.
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 56
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
● If a receptacle or an optical connector has not been used for a long time and
has not been covered with a dust cap, you should clean it before using it. A
cotton swab is used to clean a receptacle, and a cleaning tissue is used to
clean an optical connector.
NO TE
During the cleaning process, insert the cotton swab and turn it slowly in the
receptacle. Do not use too much force, because the receptacle may be damaged.
● If, for no apparent reason, optical signals are lost during the operation of a
device, use the preceding method to clean the receptacle or the optical
connector. This will eliminate contamination as the cause of the signal loss.
Precautions for the overload-caused burnt optical module
● When using an OTDR to test the connectivity or the attenuation of optical
signals, disconnect the optical connector from the optical module. Otherwise,
the optical module may be burnt.
● When performing a self-loop test, use an optical attenuator. Do not loosen
the optical connector.
● It is required that a long-distance optical module have an input optical power
of less than -7 dBm. If the input optical power is larger than -7 dBm, you
need to add an optical attenuator. For example, if the transmitting optical
power is X dBm and the optical attenuation is Y dB, the receiving optical
power is X-Y, which must be smaller than -7dBm (X-Y<-7 dBm).
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 57
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
Inspecting Optical Fiber Connectors
The Ethernet port rate is increasing and the quality requirement for optical fibers
and optical cables is higher. Table 3-26 describes requirements for the loss of
optical fiber connectors according to the national standard (GBT50312-2016).
Table 3-26 Maximum attenuation of the optical fiber connector
Type Maximum attenuation of an optical fiber
connector (dB)
Fiber splicing connector 0.3
Optical mechanical connector 0.3
Optical connector 0.75
NO TE
Fiber cores are connected through connectors, such as the ODF, optical attenuator, and
flange, in splicing and mechanical modes.
Table 3-27 describes requirements for the reflection of the optical fiber connector
when Ethernet ports (such as 200G and 50G) use PAM4 encoding to double the
rate. More connectors bring lower requirements for the reflection.
Table 3-27 Maximum reflection of connectors
Number of Optical Fiber Maximum Reflection of Each Connector
Connectors (dB)
1 -22
2 -29
4 -33
6 -35
8 -37
10 -39
Link splice loss and reflectance values of the test methods and the following
processing steps:
1. After the optical fiber at the peer end is disconnected, use the OTDR meter to
test the local end. Check whether the loss and reflection of each link and
node are normal. (The loss of a fiber splicing connector should be less than
0.3 dB, the loss of a connector should be less than 0.75 dB, and the reflection
of a connector should be less than -30 dB.) If the test result is not within the
required range, process the abnormal port.
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 58
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
2. Locate the equipment room where the port resides based on the distance
between abnormal points in the OTDR test result. Preliminarily determine the
port location, disconnect the port, and perform an OTDR test on the port that
reports alarms. Check whether the distance is consistent with that in the
previous test. If not, continue to test other ports.
3. After the abnormal port is found, test the port using a fiber microscope. If the
port is dirty, clean it.
4. After the port is cleaned, restore the port, and ensure that the connector is
tightened. Perform an OTDR test on the port to check whether loss and
reflection of each link and node are normal.
5. If the fault persists, replace the flange and perform an OTDR test on the port
that reports alarms to check whether loss and reflection of each link and
node are normal.
6. If the fault persists, replace the optical fiber and perform an OTDR test on the
port that reports alarms to check whether loss and reflection of each link and
node are normal.
7. If multiple abnormal points exist on the link, repeat steps 2 to 6.
Other precautions
● The optical connector should be horizontally inserted in the receptacle to
avoid damages to the receptacle.
● Mixed use of multi-mode and single-mode optical fibers is prohibited.
Otherwise, faults such as signal loss may occur.
Method of distinguishing optical modules in single mode and multi-mode.
Table 3-28 Method of distinguishing optical modules in single mode and
multi-mode
Item Single mode Multi-mode
Transmission distance 10 km or longer Below 0.5 km
Wavelength Non-850 nm 850 nm
Information on the SM MM
label
50G Optical Module Installation Guide
1. Precautions for optical module installation
(1) If a cabinet with a door is used, a sufficient distance must be reserved between
the optical module and the cabinet door to prevent the puller or patch cord from
bumping on the door.
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 59
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
(2) Long-distance optical modules must be equipped with optical attenuators for
self-loops. For a 50GBase-ER (40 km) long-distance optical module, the receive
optical power damage threshold is lower than the average minimum transmit
optical power, making the module prone to damage caused by self-loops.
Therefore, the module must be equipped with an optical attenuator for self-loops.
(3) When optical path quality is tested using an OTDR, optical fibers must be
removed from the associated optical module. This is because the OTDR's transmit
optical power is far greater than the optical power damage threshold at the
receive end of an optical module.
2. Method of checking an optical path
Figure 3-18 Method of checking an optical path
3. Method of cleaning the end faces of an optical fiber
Before cleaning the end faces of an optical fiber that is in use, ensure that the
optical fiber has no optical signals. To achieve this, shut down the ports at both
ends of the fiber. Then, clean the end faces and insert the optical fiber back into
the corresponding port.
To clean the end faces of an optical fiber that is not in use, remove the dust-proof
cap from the fiber connector (or the patch cord connector of the involved optical
component), and put the dust-proof cap into a dedicated cleaning kit. After the
cleaning is complete, re-install the dust-proof cap.
● Use the untouched part of a lint-free wipe to wipe the connector end face
along one direction.
● If the end face of an optical fiber cannot be cleaned due to serious
contamination, use a lint-free wipe dipped with cleanser to wipe the end face
along one direction. Then, use a dry lint-free wipe to clean the end face.
Ensure that the end face is dry before using the optical fiber.
● After the cleaning is complete, immediately install a dust-proof cap for any
optical fiber connector that is not in use.
4. Precautions for using a lint-free wipe to clean the end face of an optical
fiber
● Use a smooth surface of the lint-free wipe for cleaning.
● Ensure that the optical fiber connector is vertical to the lint-free wipe during
cleaning.
● Wipe the end face along the direction of the lint-free wipe's grain.
● Wipe the end face along one direction only.
● Any part of a lint-free wipe can be used only once, and a small piece of lint-
free wipe can be used to clean only one connector.
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 60
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
5. Method of using lint-free swabs to clean the optical port of an optical
module
Remove the dust-proof cap from the optical port of the optical module, and put
the dust-proof cap into a dedicated cleaning kit.
● Select a proper lint-free swab based on the type of the optical port to be
cleaned. (For SC optical ports, use lint-free swabs with a diameter of 2.5 mm;
for LC and MTRJ optical ports, use lint-free swabs with a diameter of 1.25
mm.) Dip the lint-free swab into cleanser, insert it into the inside of the
optical port, and clean the optical port by rotating the swab 360 degrees in
one direction along the inner wall of the optical port.
● Insert a dry lint-free swab of the same type into the inside of the optical port
and clean the optical port by rotating the swab 360 degrees in one direction
along the inner wall of the optical port.
● Cap the optical port after the cleaning is complete.
6. Precautions for using lint-free swabs to clean the optical port of an optical
module
● When cleaning the optical port of an optical module, clean the end faces of
associated optical fibers to prevent the optical fibers from dirtying the optical
port.
● In general, each lint-free swab can be used for cleaning only once. If a used
lint-free swab is confirmed clean and can be reused, it can be used for a
maximum of three times. For example, a lint-free swab that is ever used to
dry an optical port can be used for a maximum of three times.
7. Safety precautions
● Electrostatic protection: Active optical and electrical components are
extremely sensitive to electrostatic. Therefore, take strict measures to protect
against electrostatic. For example, wear ESD gloves during operations and
touch only the shell of the involved component.
● Laser protection: Do not look into optical ports without eye protection when
reseating a module.
8. Discrete reflectance
Focus on the reflection indicators of each node during link deployment. The
discrete reflection indicators must meet the IEEE standards.
Table 3-29 Maximum discrete reflectance of QSFP28 50G defined by IEEE
Number of QSFP28 50G-FR QSFP28 50G-LR QSFP28 50G-ER
discrete (Maximum value (Maximum value (Maximum value
reflectances of each discrete of each discrete of each discrete
greater than –55 reflectance) reflectance) reflectance)
dB
1 -25 dB -22 dB -19 dB
2 -31 dB -29 dB -27 dB
4 -35 dB -33 dB -32 dB
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 61
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
Number of QSFP28 50G-FR QSFP28 50G-LR QSFP28 50G-ER
discrete (Maximum value (Maximum value (Maximum value
reflectances of each discrete of each discrete of each discrete
greater than –55 reflectance) reflectance) reflectance)
dB
6 -38 dB -35 dB -35 dB
8 -40 dB -37 dB -37 dB
10 -41 dB -39 dB -39 dB
3.2.1.5 Optical Attenuator Configuration
This section describes how to configure an optical attenuator.
Calculating the Optical Attenuation
You can calculate the optical attenuation based on the actual optical power.
Table 3-30 Description of the Paramater
Name Description
P(in)min maximum transmit optical power.
P(out)max transmission distance.
S transmission distance.
A attenuation coefficient. Note that the
attenuation coefficient is related to
optical fiber types and wavelengths. By
default, the attenuation coefficient of
a 1310-nm wavelength in a G.652
fiber is 0.45 dBm/km or 0.4 dBm/km;
the attenuation coefficient of a 1550-
nm wavelength in a G.652 fiber is
0.235 dBm/km or 0.25 dBm/km.
P(in)max maximum receive optical power, that
is, minimum overload point.
The principle for determining whether an attenuator needs to be configured at a
transmission point is as follows:
If P(out)max – S x Attenuation coefficient > P(in)max, an attenuator needs to be
configured. The optical attenuation is calculated in the following formula: T=
P(out)max - S x Attenuation coefficient - P(in)max.
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 62
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
Table 3-31 Reference for configuring an attenuator
BOM Descriptio P(out) P(out) P(in) P(in)
Number n max min min max
34060276 eSFP, -8 dBm -15 dBm -31 dBm -8 dBm
1310nm,ST
M1,LC,SM,
15km
NO TE
● If P(in)max of an optical module equals P(out)max, you do not need to configure an
attenuator.
● You can choose the 5 dBm and 10 dBm attenuators for optical modules on the device.
BOM Number and Description of Attenuators
Table 3-32 BOM number and description of attenuators
BOM Number Description
45030021 Fixed Optical Attenuator,
1260nm~1620nm-5dB-LC/PC-45dB
45030022 Fixed Optical Attenuator,
1260nm~1620nm-10dB-LC/PC-45dB
NO TE
This table is for reference only. BOM numbers of attenuators vary with configuration
documents.
3.2.2 GPON ONU SFP Optical Module
3.2.2.1 GPON ONU-SFP-SMF-1490nm(rx)/1310nm(tx)-20km-industry
Table 3-33 GPON ONU-SFP-SMF-1490nm(rx)/1310nm(tx)-20km-industry
specifications
Item Value
Basic Information
Module name GPON ONU-SFP-SMF-1490nm(rx)/
1310nm(tx)-20km-industry
Part Number 03031QHU
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 63
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
Item Value
Model H87MMA5671A2
Form factor SFP
Application standard FSAN G.984.2, OMCI support per ITU-T
G.988
Connector type SC/APC
Optical fiber type SMF
Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12
Working case temperature [°C(°F)] -40°C to 85°C(-40°F to 185°F)
DDM options SFF-8472
Environment standard RoHS
Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1
ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V
Transmission rate [bit/s] 2.488 Gbit/s(rx)/1.244 Gbit/s(TX)
Target transmission distance [km] 20 km
Transmitter Optical Characteristics
Center wavelength [nm] 1310 nm
Tx operating wavelength range [nm] 1290 nm - 1330 nm
Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) 5 dBm
[dBm]
Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]
Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) 0.5 dBm
[dBm]
Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]
Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 10 dB
Receiver Optical Characteristics
Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1480 nm - 1500 nm
Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -27 dBm
Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -
Overload power (AVG) [dBm] -8 dBm
Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 64
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
3.2.3 1Gbps SyncE and 1588V2 Electrical Module
3.2.3.1 1Gbps-SFP-100m-industry-Support SyncE and 1588V2
Table 3-34 1Gbps-SFP-100m-industry-Support SyncE and 1588V2 specifications
Item Value
Basic Information
Module name 1Gbps-SFP-100m-industry-Support
SyncE and 1588V2
Part Number 34100255
Model OEGD01N02
Form factor SFP
Application standard IEEE 802.3, 1000Base-T
Connector type RJ45
Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12
Working case temperature [°C(°F)] -40°C to 85°C(-40°F to 185°F)
Environment standard RoHS
Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1
ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V
Transmission rate [bit/s] 1000 Mbit/s
Target transmission distance [km] 0.1 km
3.2.4 155Mbps eSFP Optical Module
3.2.4.1 155Mbps-eSFP-SMF-1310nm-15km-industry
Table 3-35 155Mbps-eSFP-SMF-1310nm-15km-industry specifications
Item Value
Basic Information
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 65
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
Item Value
Module name 155Mbps-eSFP-SMF-1310nm-15km-
industry
Part Number 34060307
Model eSFP-1310nm-I-1
Form factor eSFP
Application standard ITU-T G.957, STM-1
Connector type LC
Optical fiber type SMF
Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12
Working case temperature [°C(°F)] -40°C to 85°C(-40°F to 185°F)
DDM options SFF-8472
Environment standard RoHS
Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1
ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V
Transmission rate [bit/s] 155 Mbit/s
Target transmission distance [km] 15 km
Transmitter Optical Characteristics
Center wavelength [nm] 1310 nm
Tx operating wavelength range [nm] 1261 nm - 1360 nm
Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) -8 dBm
[dBm]
Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]
Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) -15 dBm
[dBm]
Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]
Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 8.2 dB
Receiver Optical Characteristics
Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1260 nm - 1580 nm
Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -31 dBm
Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 66
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
Item Value
Overload power (AVG) [dBm] -8 dBm
Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -
3.2.4.2 155Mbps-eSFP-SMF-1310nm-40km-industry
Table 3-36 155Mbps-eSFP-SMF-1310nm-40km-industry specifications
Item Value
Basic Information
Module name 155Mbps-eSFP-SMF-1310nm-40km-
industry
Part Number 34060308
Model eSFP-1310nm-L-1.1
Form factor eSFP
Application standard ITU-T G.957, STM-1
Connector type LC
Optical fiber type SMF
Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12
Working case temperature [°C(°F)] -40°C to 85°C(-40°F to 185°F)
DDM options SFF-8472
Environment standard RoHS
Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1
ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V
Transmission rate [bit/s] 155 Mbit/s
Target transmission distance [km] 40 km
Transmitter Optical Characteristics
Center wavelength [nm] 1310 nm
Tx operating wavelength range [nm] 1263 nm - 1360 nm
Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) 0 dBm
[dBm]
Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 67
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
Item Value
Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) -5 dBm
[dBm]
Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]
Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 10.5 dB
Receiver Optical Characteristics
Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1263 nm - 1360 nm
Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -34 dBm
Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -
Overload power (AVG) [dBm] -10 dBm
Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -
3.2.4.3 155Mbps-eSFP-SMF-1550nm-80km-industry
Table 3-37 155Mbps-eSFP-SMF-1550nm-80km-industry specifications
Item Value
Basic Information
Module name 155Mbps-eSFP-SMF-1550nm-80km-
industry
Part Number 34060309
Model eSFP-1550nm-L-1.2
Form factor eSFP
Application standard ITU-T G.957, STM-1
Connector type LC
Optical fiber type SMF
Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12
Working case temperature [°C(°F)] -40°C to 85°C(-40°F to 185°F)
DDM options SFF-8472
Environment standard RoHS
Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1
ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 68
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
Item Value
Transmission rate [bit/s] 155 Mbit/s
Target transmission distance [km] 80 km
Transmitter Optical Characteristics
Center wavelength [nm] 1550 nm
Tx operating wavelength range [nm] 1480 nm - 1580 nm
Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) 0 dBm
[dBm]
Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]
Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) -5 dBm
[dBm]
Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]
Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 10.5 dB
Receiver Optical Characteristics
Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1263 nm - 1580 nm
Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -34 dBm
Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -
Overload power (AVG) [dBm] -10 dBm
Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -
3.2.4.4 155Mbps-eSFP-SMF-1310nm-40km-commercial
Table 3-38 155Mbps-eSFP-SMF-1310nm-40km-commercial specifications
Item Value
Basic Information
Module name 155Mbps-eSFP-SMF-1310nm-40km-
commercial
Part Number S4015715
Model eSFP-FE-LH40-SM1310
Form factor eSFP
Application standard ITU-T G.957, STM-1
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 69
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
Item Value
Connector type LC
Optical fiber type SMF
Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12
Working case temperature [°C(°F)] 0°C to 70°C(32°F to 158°F)
DDM options SFF-8472
Environment standard RoHS
Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1
ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V
Transmission rate [bit/s] 155 Mbit/s
Target transmission distance [km] 40 km
Transmitter Optical Characteristics
Center wavelength [nm] 1310 nm
Tx operating wavelength range [nm] 1263 nm - 1360 nm
Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) 0 dBm
[dBm]
Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]
Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) -5 dBm
[dBm]
Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]
Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 10.5 dB
Receiver Optical Characteristics
Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1263 nm - 1360 nm
Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -34 dBm
Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -
Overload power (AVG) [dBm] -10 dBm
Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -10 dBm
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 70
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
3.2.4.5 155Mbps-eSFP-SMF-1550nm-80km-commercial (S4015716)
Table 3-39 155Mbps-eSFP-SMF-1550nm-80km-commercial specifications
Item Value
Basic Information
Module name 155Mbps-eSFP-SMF-1550nm-80km-
commercial
Part Number S4015716
Model eSFP-FE-LH80-SM1550
Form factor eSFP
Application standard ITU-T G.957, STM-1
Connector type LC
Optical fiber type SMF
Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12
Working case temperature [°C(°F)] 0°C to 70°C(32°F to 158°F)
DDM options SFF-8472
Environment standard RoHS
Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1
ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V
Transmission rate [bit/s] 155 Mbit/s
Target transmission distance [km] 80 km
Transmitter Optical Characteristics
Center wavelength [nm] 1550 nm
Tx operating wavelength range [nm] 1480 nm - 1580 nm
Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) 0 dBm
[dBm]
Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]
Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) -5 dBm
[dBm]
Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]
Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 10.5 dB
Receiver Optical Characteristics
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 71
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
Item Value
Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1263 nm - 1580 nm
Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -34 dBm
Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -
Overload power (AVG) [dBm] -10 dBm
Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -10 dBm
3.2.4.6 155Mbps-eSFP-SMF-1310nm-15km-commercial
Table 3-40 155Mbps-eSFP-SMF-1310nm-15km-commercial specifications
Item Value
Basic Information
Module name 155Mbps-eSFP-SMF-1310nm-15km-
commercial
Part Number S4015755
Model eSFP-FE-LX-SM1310
Form factor eSFP
Application standard ITU-T G.957, STM-1
Connector type LC
Optical fiber type SMF
Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12
Working case temperature [°C(°F)] 0°C to 70°C(32°F to 158°F)
DDM options SFF-8472
Environment standard RoHS
Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1
ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V
Transmission rate [bit/s] 155 Mbit/s
Target transmission distance [km] 15 km
Transmitter Optical Characteristics
Center wavelength [nm] 1310 nm
Tx operating wavelength range [nm] 1261 nm - 1360 nm
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 72
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
Item Value
Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) -8 dBm
[dBm]
Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]
Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) -15 dBm
[dBm]
Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]
Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 8.2 dB
Receiver Optical Characteristics
Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1260 nm - 1580 nm
Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -28 dBm
Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -
Overload power (AVG) [dBm] -8 dBm
Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -8 dBm
3.2.5 155Mbps eSFP BIDI Optical Module
3.2.5.1 155Mbps-eSFP-SM-1310nm(Tx)/1550nm(Rx)-15km-commercial
Table 3-41 155Mbps-eSFP-SM-1310nm(Tx)/1550nm(Rx)-15km-commercial
specifications
Item Value
Basic Information
Module name 155Mbps-eSFP-SM-1310nm(Tx)/
1550nm(Rx)-15km-commercial
Part Number 34060363
Model SFP-FE-LX-SM1310-BIDI
Form factor eSFP
Application standard IEEE 802.3, 100BASE-BX10-U
Connector type LC
Optical fiber type SMF
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 73
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
Item Value
Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12
Working case temperature [°C(°F)] 0°C to 70°C(32°F to 158°F)
DDM options SFF-8472
Environment standard RoHS
Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1
ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V
Transmission rate [bit/s] 155 Mbit/s
Target transmission distance [km] 15 km
Transmitter Optical Characteristics
Center wavelength [nm] 1310 nm
Tx operating wavelength range [nm] 1260 nm - 1360 nm
Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) -8 dBm
[dBm]
Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]
Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) -14 dBm
[dBm]
Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]
Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 8.5 dB
Receiver Optical Characteristics
Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1480 nm - 1580 nm
Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -32 dBm
Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -
Overload power (AVG) [dBm] -8 dBm
Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 74
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
3.2.5.2 155Mbps-eSFP-SM-1550nm(Tx)/1310nm(Rx)-15km-commercial
Table 3-42 155Mbps-eSFP-SM-1550nm(Tx)/1310nm(Rx)-15km-commercial
specifications
Item Value
Basic Information
Module name 155Mbps-eSFP-SM-1550nm(Tx)/
1310nm(Rx)-15km-commercial
Part Number 34060364
Model SFP-FE-LX-SM1550-BIDI
Form factor eSFP
Application standard IEEE 802.3, 100BASE-BX10-D
Connector type LC
Optical fiber type SMF
Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12
Working case temperature [°C(°F)] 0°C to 70°C(32°F to 158°F)
DDM options SFF-8472
Environment standard RoHS
Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1
ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V
Transmission rate [bit/s] 155 Mbit/s
Target transmission distance [km] 15 km
Transmitter Optical Characteristics
Center wavelength [nm] 1550 nm
Tx operating wavelength range [nm] 1480 nm - 1580 nm
Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) -8 dBm
[dBm]
Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]
Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) -14 dBm
[dBm]
Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]
Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 8.5 dB
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 75
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
Item Value
Receiver Optical Characteristics
Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1260 nm - 1360 nm
Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -32 dBm
Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -
Overload power (AVG) [dBm] -8 dBm
Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -
3.2.6 1Gbps Electrical Module
3.2.6.1 1Gbps-SFP-100m-industry (02310RAV)
Table 3-43 1Gbps-SFP-100m-industry specifications
Item Value
Basic Information
Module name 1Gbps-SFP-100m-industry
Part Number 02310RAV
Model OEGD01N01
Form factor SFP
Application standard IEEE 802.3, 1000Base-T
Connector type RJ45
Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12
Working case temperature [°C(°F)] -40°C to 85°C(-40°F to 185°F)
Environment standard RoHS
Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1
ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V
Transmission rate [bit/s] 10 Mbit/s
100 Mbit/s
1000 Mbit/s
Target transmission distance [km] 0.1 km
Receiver Optical Characteristics
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 76
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
Item Value
Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -
3.2.6.2 1Gbps-SFP-100m-industry (02314FNP)
Table 3-44 1Gbps-SFP-100m-industry specifications
Item Value
Basic Information
Module name 1Gbps-SFP-100m-industry
Part Number 02314FNP
Model OEGD01N03
Form factor SFP
Application standard IEEE 802.3, 1000Base-T
Connector type RJ45
Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12
Working case temperature [°C(°F)] -40°C to 85°C(-40°F to 185°F)
Environment standard RoHS
Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1
ESD(HBM1) [V] 1000 V
Transmission rate [bit/s] 10 Mbit/s
100 Mbit/s
1000 Mbit/s
Target transmission distance [km] 0.1 km
3.2.6.3 1Gbps-SFP-100m-commercial
Table 3-45 1Gbps-SFP-100m-commercial specifications
Item Value
Basic Information
Module name 1Gbps-SFP-100m-commercial
Part Number 34100080
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 77
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
Item Value
Model SFP-GE-1000BaseT
Form factor SFP
Application standard IEEE 802.3, 1000Base-T
Connector type RJ45
Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12
Working case temperature [°C(°F)] 0°C to 70°C(32°F to 158°F)
Environment standard RoHS
Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1
ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V
Transmission rate [bit/s] 10 Mbit/s
100 Mbit/s
1000 Mbit/s
Target transmission distance [km] 0.1 km
3.2.6.4 1Gbps-SFP-100m-industry (34100099)
Table 3-46 1Gbps-SFP-100m-industry specifications
Item Value
Basic Information
Module name 1Gbps-SFP-100m-industry
Part Number 34100099
Model OSFPTRJ45
Form factor SFP
Application standard IEEE 802.3, 1000Base-T
Connector type RJ45
Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12
Working case temperature [°C(°F)] -40°C to 85°C(-40°F to 185°F)
Environment standard RoHS
Security standard FCC Class A, IEC 60825-1 Class 1
ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 78
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
Item Value
Transmission rate [bit/s] 10 Mbit/s
100 Mbit/s
1000 Mbit/s
Target transmission distance [km] 0.1 km
3.2.6.5 1Gbps-SFP-100m-industry (34100144)
Table 3-47 1Gbps-SFP-100m-industry specifications
Item Value
Basic Information
Module name 1Gbps-SFP-100m-industry
Part Number 34100144
Model SFP-1000BASE-T1
Form factor SFP
Application standard IEEE 802.3, 1000Base-T
Connector type RJ45
Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12
Working case temperature [°C(°F)] -40°C to 85°C(-40°F to 185°F)
Environment standard RoHS
Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1
ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V
Transmission rate [bit/s] 10 Mbit/s
100 Mbit/s
1000 Mbit/s
Target transmission distance [km] 0.1 km
3.2.7 1.25Gbps eSFP Optical Module
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 79
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
3.2.7.1 1.25Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1550nm-80km-commercial (02310RAW)
Table 3-48 1.25Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1550nm-80km-commercial specifications
Item Value
Basic Information
Module name 1.25Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1550nm-80km-
commercial
Part Number 02310RAW
Model OSG080N01
Form factor eSFP
Application standard IEEE 802.3, 1000BASE-ZX
Connector type LC
Optical fiber type SMF
Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12
Working case temperature [°C(°F)] 0°C to 70°C(32°F to 158°F)
DDM options SFF-8472
Environment standard RoHS
Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1
ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V
Transmission rate [bit/s] 1.25 Gbit/s
Target transmission distance [km] 80 km
Transmitter Optical Characteristics
Center wavelength [nm] 1550 nm
Tx operating wavelength range [nm] 1500 nm - 1580 nm
Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) 5 dBm
[dBm]
Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]
Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) -2 dBm
[dBm]
Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]
Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 9 dB
Receiver Optical Characteristics
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 80
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
Item Value
Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1260 nm - 1580 nm
Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -23 dBm
Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -
Overload power (AVG) [dBm] -3 dBm
Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -
NOTE
The interface standard is Huawei-specific.
3.2.7.2 1.25Gbps-eSFP-MMF-850nm-500m-extended
Table 3-49 1.25Gbps-eSFP-MMF-850nm-500m-extended specifications
Item Value
Basic Information
Module name 1.25Gbps-eSFP-MMF-850nm-500m-
extended
Part Number 34060286
Model eSFP-850nm-1000Base-Sx/FC200MM
Form factor eSFP
Application standard IEEE 802.3, 1000BASE-SX
Connector type LC
Optical fiber type MMF
Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12
Working case temperature [°C(°F)] -20°C to 85°C(-4°F to 185°F)
DDM options SFF-8472
Environment standard RoHS
Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1
ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V
Transmission rate [bit/s] 1.25 Gbit/s
Target transmission distance [km] 0.5 km(OM1)
Transmitter Optical Characteristics
Center wavelength [nm] 850 nm
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 81
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
Item Value
Tx operating wavelength range [nm] 770 nm - 860 nm
Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) 0 dBm
[dBm]
Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]
Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) -9.5 dBm
[dBm]
Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]
Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 9 dB
Receiver Optical Characteristics
Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 760 nm - 860 nm
Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -17 dBm
Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -
Overload power (AVG) [dBm] 0 dBm
Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -
3.2.7.3 1.25Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1310nm-10km-industry
Table 3-50 1.25Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1310nm-10km-industry specifications
Item Value
Basic Information
Module name 1.25Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1310nm-10km-
industry
Part Number 34060290
Model eSFP(S)-1310nm-1000Base-Lx
Form factor eSFP
Application standard IEEE 802.3, 1000BASE-LX10
Connector type LC
Optical fiber type SMF
Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12
Working case temperature [°C(°F)] -40°C to 85°C(-40°F to 185°F)
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 82
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
Item Value
DDM options SFF-8472
Environment standard RoHS
Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1
ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V
Transmission rate [bit/s] 1.25 Gbit/s
Target transmission distance [km] 10 km
Transmitter Optical Characteristics
Center wavelength [nm] 1310 nm
Tx operating wavelength range [nm] 1260 nm - 1360 nm
Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) -3 dBm
[dBm]
Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]
Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) -9 dBm
[dBm]
Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]
Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 9.5 dB
Receiver Optical Characteristics
Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1260 nm - 1360 nm
Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -19 dBm
Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -
Overload power (AVG) [dBm] -3 dBm
Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -
3.2.7.4 1.25Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1310nm-10km-commercial(34060473)
Table 3-51 1.25Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1310nm-10km-commercial(34060473)
specifications
Item Value
Basic Information
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 83
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
Item Value
Module name 1.25Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1310nm-10km-
commercial(34060473)
Part Number S4016067
Model OSG010N05
Form factor eSFP
Application standard IEEE 802.3, 1000BASE-LX10
Connector type LC
Optical fiber type SMF
Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12
Working case temperature [°C(°F)] 0°C to 70°C(32°F to 158°F)
DDM options SFF-8472
Environment standard RoHS
Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1
ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V
Transmission rate [bit/s] 1.25 Gbit/s
Target transmission distance [km] 10 km
Transmitter Optical Characteristics
Center wavelength [nm] 1310 nm
Tx operating wavelength range [nm] 1270 nm - 1355 nm
Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) -3 dBm
[dBm]
Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]
Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) -9 dBm
[dBm]
Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]
Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 9.5 dB
Receiver Optical Characteristics
Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1270 nm - 1355 nm
Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -20 dBm
Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 84
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
Item Value
Overload power (AVG) [dBm] -3 dBm
Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -3 dBm
3.2.7.5 1.25Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1310nm-40km-commercial
Table 3-52 1.25Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1310nm-40km-commercial specifications
Item Value
Basic Information
Module name 1.25Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1310nm-40km-
commercial
Part Number S4016954
Model OSG040002
Form factor eSFP
Application standard IEEE 802.3, 1000BASE-EX
Connector type LC
Optical fiber type SMF
Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12
Working case temperature [°C(°F)] 0°C to 70°C(32°F to 158°F)
DDM options SFF-8472
Environment standard RoHS
Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1
ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V
Transmission rate [bit/s] 1.25 Gbit/s
Target transmission distance [km] 40 km
Transmitter Optical Characteristics
Center wavelength [nm] 1310 nm
Tx operating wavelength range [nm] 1275 nm - 1350 nm
Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) 0 dBm
[dBm]
Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 85
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
Item Value
Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) -5 dBm
[dBm]
Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]
Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 9.5 dB
Receiver Optical Characteristics
Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1260 nm - 1580 nm
Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -23 dBm
Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -
Overload power (AVG) [dBm] -3 dBm
Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -3 dBm
3.2.7.6 1.25Gbps-eSFP-MMF-850nm-500m-extended (S4017307)
Table 3-53 1.25Gbps-eSFP-MMF-850nm-500m-extended specifications
Item Value
Basic Information
Module name 1.25Gbps-eSFP-MMF-850nm-500m-
extended
Part Number S4017307
Model OMGD50N02
Form factor eSFP
Application standard IEEE 802.3, 1000BASE-SX
Connector type LC
Optical fiber type MMF
Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12
Working case temperature [°C(°F)] -20°C to 85°C(-4°F to 185°F)
DDM options SFF-8472
Environment standard RoHS
Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1
ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 86
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
Item Value
Transmission rate [bit/s] 1.25 Gbit/s
Target transmission distance [km] 0.5 km(OM1)
Transmitter Optical Characteristics
Center wavelength [nm] 850 nm
Tx operating wavelength range [nm] 770 nm - 860 nm
Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) 0 dBm
[dBm]
Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]
Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) -9.5 dBm
[dBm]
Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]
Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 9 dB
Receiver Optical Characteristics
Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 760 nm - 860 nm
Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -17 dBm
Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -
Overload power (AVG) [dBm] 0 dBm
Overload power (OMA) [dBm] 0 dBm
3.2.7.7 1.25Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1310nm-40km-commercial (S4017309)
Table 3-54 1.25Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1310nm-40km-commercial specifications
Item Value
Basic Information
Module name 1.25Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1310nm-40km-
commercial
Part Number S4017309
Model OSG040N02
Form factor eSFP
Application standard IEEE 802.3, 1000BASE-EX
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 87
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
Item Value
Connector type LC
Optical fiber type SMF
Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12
Working case temperature [°C(°F)] 0°C to 70°C(32°F to 158°F)
DDM options SFF-8472
Environment standard RoHS
Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1
ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V
Transmission rate [bit/s] 1.25 Gbit/s
Target transmission distance [km] 40 km
Transmitter Optical Characteristics
Center wavelength [nm] 1310 nm
Tx operating wavelength range [nm] 1275 nm - 1350 nm
Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) 0 dBm
[dBm]
Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]
Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) -5 dBm
[dBm]
Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]
Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 9.5 dB
Receiver Optical Characteristics
Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1260 nm - 1580 nm
Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -23 dBm
Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -
Overload power (AVG) [dBm] -3 dBm
Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -3 dBm
3.2.8 1.25Gbps SFP BIDI Optical Module
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 88
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
3.2.8.1 1.25Gbps-SFP-SMF-1310nm(Tx)/1490nm(Rx)-10km-industry
Table 3-55 1.25Gbps-SFP-SMF-1310nm(Tx)/1490nm(Rx)-10km-industry
specifications
Item Value
Basic Information
Module name 1.25Gbps-SFP-SMF-1310nm(Tx)/
1490nm(Rx)-10km-industry
Part Number 34060644
Model OGEBIDI10
Form factor SFP
Application standard IEEE 802.3ah, 1000Base-BX10-U
Connector type LC
Optical fiber type SMF
Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12
Working case temperature [°C(°F)] -40°C to 85°C(-40°F to 185°F)
DDM options SFF-8472
Environment standard RoHS
Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1
ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V
Transmission rate [bit/s] 1.25 Gbit/s
Target transmission distance [km] 10 km
Transmitter Optical Characteristics
Center wavelength [nm] 1310 nm
Tx operating wavelength range [nm] 1260 nm - 1360 nm
Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) -3 dBm
[dBm]
Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]
Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) -9 dBm
[dBm]
Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]
Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 9 dB
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 89
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
Item Value
Receiver Optical Characteristics
Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1480 nm - 1500 nm
Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -19.5 dBm
Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -
Overload power (AVG) [dBm] -3 dBm
Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -
3.2.8.2 1.25Gbps-SFP-SMF-1490nm(Tx)/1310nm(Rx)-10km-industry
Table 3-56 1.25Gbps-SFP-SMF-1490nm(Tx)/1310nm(Rx)-10km-industry
specifications
Item Value
Basic Information
Module name 1.25Gbps-SFP-SMF-1490nm(Tx)/
1310nm(Rx)-10km-industry
Part Number 34060676
Model OGEBIDI11
Form factor SFP
Application standard IEEE 802.3ah, 1000Base-BX10-D
Connector type LC
Optical fiber type SMF
Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12
Working case temperature [°C(°F)] -40°C to 85°C(-40°F to 185°F)
DDM options SFF-8472
Environment standard RoHS
Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1
ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V
Transmission rate [bit/s] 1.25 Gbit/s
Target transmission distance [km] 10 km
Transmitter Optical Characteristics
Center wavelength [nm] 1490 nm
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 90
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
Item Value
Tx operating wavelength range [nm] 1480 nm - 1500 nm
Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) -3 dBm
[dBm]
Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]
Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) -9 dBm
[dBm]
Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]
Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 9 dB
Receiver Optical Characteristics
Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1260 nm - 1360 nm
Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -19.5 dBm
Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -
Overload power (AVG) [dBm] -3 dBm
Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -
3.2.9 1.25Gbps eSFP BIDI Optical Module
3.2.9.1 1.25Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1310nm(Tx)/1490nm(Rx)-10km-
commercial(34060470)
Table 3-57 1.25Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1310nm(Tx)/1490nm(Rx)-10km-
commercial(34060470) specifications
Item Value
Basic Information
Module name 1.25Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1310nm(Tx)/
1490nm(Rx)-10km-
commercial(34060470)
Part Number 34060470
Model SFP-GE-LX-SM1310-BIDI
Form factor eSFP
Application standard IEEE 802.3ah, 1000Base-BX10-U
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 91
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
Item Value
Connector type LC
Optical fiber type SMF
Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12
Working case temperature [°C(°F)] 0°C to 70°C(32°F to 158°F)
DDM options SFF-8472
Environment standard RoHS
Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1
ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V
Transmission rate [bit/s] 1.25 Gbit/s
Target transmission distance [km] 10 km
Transmitter Optical Characteristics
Center wavelength [nm] 1310 nm
Tx operating wavelength range [nm] 1260 nm - 1360 nm
Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) -3 dBm
[dBm]
Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]
Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) -9 dBm
[dBm]
Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]
Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 6 dB
Receiver Optical Characteristics
Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1480 nm - 1500 nm
Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -19.5 dBm
Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -
Overload power (AVG) [dBm] -3 dBm
Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -
NOTE
Used in pair with 34060475.
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 92
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
3.2.9.2 1.25Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1490nm(Tx)/1310nm(Rx)-10km-commercial
Table 3-58 1.25Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1490nm(Tx)/1310nm(Rx)-10km-commercial
specifications
Item Value
Basic Information
Module name 1.25Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1490nm(Tx)/
1310nm(Rx)-10km-commercial
Part Number 34060475
Model SFP-GE-LX-SM1490-BIDI
Form factor eSFP
Application standard IEEE 802.3ah, 1000Base-BX10-D
Connector type LC
Optical fiber type SMF
Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12
Working case temperature [°C(°F)] 0°C to 70°C(32°F to 158°F)
DDM options SFF-8472
Environment standard RoHS
Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1
ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V
Transmission rate [bit/s] 1.25 Gbit/s
Target transmission distance [km] 10 km
Transmitter Optical Characteristics
Center wavelength [nm] 1490 nm
Tx operating wavelength range [nm] 1480 nm - 1500 nm
Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) -3 dBm
[dBm]
Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]
Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) -9 dBm
[dBm]
Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]
Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 6 dB
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 93
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
Item Value
Receiver Optical Characteristics
Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1260 nm - 1360 nm
Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -19.5 dBm
Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -
Overload power (AVG) [dBm] -3 dBm
Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -
NOTE
Used in pair with 34060470.
3.2.9.3 1.25Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1310nm(Tx)/1490nm(Rx)-40km-commercial
Table 3-59 1.25Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1310nm(Tx)/1490nm(Rx)-40km-commercial
specifications
Item Value
Basic Information
Module name 1.25Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1310nm(Tx)/
1490nm(Rx)-40km-commercial
Part Number 34060539
Model OGEBIDI41
Form factor eSFP
Application standard IEEE 802.3ah, 1000Base-BX40-U
Connector type LC
Optical fiber type SMF
Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12
Working case temperature [°C(°F)] 0°C to 70°C(32°F to 158°F)
DDM options SFF-8472
Environment standard RoHS
Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1
ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V
Transmission rate [bit/s] 1.25 Gbit/s
Target transmission distance [km] 40 km
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 94
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
Item Value
Transmitter Optical Characteristics
Center wavelength [nm] 1310 nm
Tx operating wavelength range [nm] 1260 nm - 1360 nm
Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) 3 dBm
[dBm]
Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]
Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) -2 dBm
[dBm]
Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]
Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 9 dB
Receiver Optical Characteristics
Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1480 nm - 1500 nm
Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -
Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -23 dBm
Overload power (AVG) [dBm] -3 dBm
Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -
NOTE
Used in pair with 34060540.
3.2.9.4 1.25Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1490nm(Tx)/1310nm(Rx)-40km-commercial
Table 3-60 1.25Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1490nm(Tx)/1310nm(Rx)-40km-commercial
specifications
Item Value
Basic Information
Module name 1.25Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1490nm(Tx)/
1310nm(Rx)-40km-commercial
Part Number 34060540
Model OGEBIDI40
Form factor eSFP
Application standard IEEE 802.3ah, 1000Base-BX40-D
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 95
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
Item Value
Connector type LC
Optical fiber type SMF
Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12
Working case temperature [°C(°F)] 0°C to 70°C(32°F to 158°F)
DDM options SFF-8472
Environment standard RoHS
Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1
ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V
Transmission rate [bit/s] 1.25 Gbit/s
Target transmission distance [km] 40 km
Transmitter Optical Characteristics
Center wavelength [nm] 1490 nm
Tx operating wavelength range [nm] 1480 nm - 1500 nm
Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) 3 dBm
[dBm]
Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]
Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) -2 dBm
[dBm]
Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]
Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 9 dB
Receiver Optical Characteristics
Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1260 nm - 1360 nm
Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -
Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -23 dBm
Overload power (AVG) [dBm] -3 dBm
Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -
NOTE
Used in pair with 34060539.
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 96
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
3.2.9.5 1.25Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1570nm(Tx)/1490nm(Rx)-80km-commercial
Table 3-61 1.25Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1570nm(Tx)/1490nm(Rx)-80km-commercial
specifications
Item Value
Basic Information
Module name 1.25Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1570nm(Tx)/
1490nm(Rx)-80km-commercial
Part Number 34060595
Model OGEBIDI80
Form factor eSFP
Application standard IEEE 802.3ah, 1000Base-BX80-D
Connector type LC
Optical fiber type SMF
Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12
Working case temperature [°C(°F)] 0°C to 70°C(32°F to 158°F)
DDM options SFF-8472
Environment standard RoHS
Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1
ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V
Transmission rate [bit/s] 1.25 Gbit/s
Target transmission distance [km] 80 km
Transmitter Optical Characteristics
Center wavelength [nm] 1570 nm
Tx operating wavelength range [nm] 1560 nm - 1580 nm
Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) 4 dBm
[dBm]
Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]
Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) -2 dBm
[dBm]
Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]
Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 9 dB
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 97
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
Item Value
Receiver Optical Characteristics
Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1480 nm - 1500 nm
Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -26 dBm
Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -
Overload power (AVG) [dBm] -3 dBm
Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -
NOTE
Used in pair with 34060596.
3.2.9.6 1.25Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1490nm(Tx)/1570nm(Rx)-80km-commercial
Table 3-62 1.25Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1490nm(Tx)/1570nm(Rx)-80km-commercial
specifications
Item Value
Basic Information
Module name 1.25Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1490nm(Tx)/
1570nm(Rx)-80km-commercial
Part Number 34060596
Model OGEBIDI81
Form factor eSFP
Application standard IEEE 802.3ah, 1000Base-BX80-U
Connector type LC
Optical fiber type SMF
Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12
Working case temperature [°C(°F)] 0°C to 70°C(32°F to 158°F)
DDM options SFF-8472
Environment standard RoHS
Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1
ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V
Transmission rate [bit/s] 1.25 Gbit/s
Target transmission distance [km] 80 km
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 98
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
Item Value
Transmitter Optical Characteristics
Center wavelength [nm] 1490 nm
Tx operating wavelength range [nm] 1480 nm - 1500 nm
Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) 4 dBm
[dBm]
Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]
Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) -2 dBm
[dBm]
Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]
Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 9 dB
Receiver Optical Characteristics
Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1560 nm - 1580 nm
Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -26 dBm
Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -
Overload power (AVG) [dBm] -3 dBm
Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -
NOTE
Used in pair with 34060595.
3.2.9.7 0.1~1.25Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1310nm(Tx)/1550nm(Rx)-40km-commercial
Table 3-63 0.1~1.25Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1310nm(Tx)/1550nm(Rx)-40km-commercial
specifications
Item Value
Basic Information
Module name 0.1~1.25Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1310nm(Tx)/
1550nm(Rx)-40km-commercial
Part Number 34060638
Model eSFP-1310/1550-L1.1-BIDI
Form factor eSFP
Application standard IEEE 802.3ah, 1000Base-BX40-U
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 99
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
Item Value
Connector type LC
Optical fiber type SMF
Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12
Working case temperature [°C(°F)] -5°C to 70°C(23°F to 158°F)
DDM options SFF-8472
Environment standard RoHS
Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1
ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V
Transmission rate [bit/s] 0.1~1.25 Gbit/s
Target transmission distance [km] 40 km
Transmitter Optical Characteristics
Center wavelength [nm] 1310 nm
Tx operating wavelength range [nm] 1260 nm - 1360 nm
Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) 2 dBm
[dBm]
Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]
Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) -3 dBm
[dBm]
Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]
Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 9 dB
Receiver Optical Characteristics
Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1480 nm - 1580 nm
Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -25 dBm
Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -
Overload power (AVG) [dBm] -3 dBm
Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -
NOTE
When an optical module is used on the OptiX PTN equipment, the rate of the optical
module cannot exceed 155 Mbit/s.
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 100
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
3.2.9.8 0.1~1.25Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1550nm(Tx)/1310nm(Rx)-40km-commercial
Table 3-64 0.1~1.25Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1550nm(Tx)/1310nm(Rx)-40km-commercial
specifications
Item Value
Basic Information
Module name 0.1~1.25Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1550nm(Tx)/
1310nm(Rx)-40km-commercial
Part Number 34060639
Model eSFP-1550/1310-L1.1-BIDI
Form factor eSFP
Application standard IEEE 802.3ah, 1000Base-BX40-D
Connector type LC
Optical fiber type SMF
Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12
Working case temperature [°C(°F)] -5°C to 70°C(23°F to 158°F)
DDM options SFF-8472
Environment standard RoHS
Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1
ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V
Transmission rate [bit/s] 0.1~1.25 Gbit/s
Target transmission distance [km] 40 km
Transmitter Optical Characteristics
Center wavelength [nm] 1550 nm
Tx operating wavelength range [nm] 1530 nm - 1580 nm
Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) 2 dBm
[dBm]
Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]
Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) -3 dBm
[dBm]
Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]
Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 9 dB
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 101
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
Item Value
Receiver Optical Characteristics
Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1260 nm - 1360 nm
Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -25 dBm
Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -
Overload power (AVG) [dBm] -3 dBm
Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -
NOTE
When an optical module is used on the OptiX PTN equipment, the rate of the optical
module cannot exceed 155 Mbit/s.
3.2.10 1.25Gbps eSFP CWDM Optical Module
3.2.10.1 1.25Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1571nm-80km-commercial
Table 3-65 1.25Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1571nm-80km-commercial specifications
Item Value
Basic Information
Module name 1.25Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1571nm-80km-
commercial
Part Number 34060476
Model eSFP-LH80-SM1571
Form factor eSFP
Application standard ITU-T G.957, STM-16
Connector type LC
Optical fiber type SMF
Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12
Working case temperature [°C(°F)] 0°C to 70°C(32°F to 158°F)
DDM options SFF-8472
Environment standard RoHS
Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1
ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 102
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
Item Value
Transmission rate [bit/s] 1.25 Gbit/s
Target transmission distance [km] 80 km
Transmitter Optical Characteristics
Center wavelength [nm] 1571 nm
Tx operating wavelength range [nm] 1564.5 nm - 1577.5 nm
Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) 5 dBm
[dBm]
Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]
Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) 0 dBm
[dBm]
Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]
Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 8.5 dB
Receiver Optical Characteristics
Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1260 nm - 1620 nm
Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -28 dBm
Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -
Overload power (AVG) [dBm] -9 dBm
Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -
3.2.10.2 1.25Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1591nm-80km-commercial
Table 3-66 1.25Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1591nm-80km-commercial specifications
Item Value
Basic Information
Module name 1.25Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1591nm-80km-
commercial
Part Number 34060477
Model eSFP-LH80-SM1591
Form factor eSFP
Application standard ITU-T G.957, STM-16
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 103
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
Item Value
Connector type LC
Optical fiber type SMF
Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12
Working case temperature [°C(°F)] 0°C to 70°C(32°F to 158°F)
DDM options SFF-8472
Environment standard RoHS
Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1
ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V
Transmission rate [bit/s] 1.25 Gbit/s
Target transmission distance [km] 80 km
Transmitter Optical Characteristics
Center wavelength [nm] 1591 nm
Tx operating wavelength range [nm] 1584.5 nm - 1597.5 nm
Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) 5 dBm
[dBm]
Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]
Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) 0 dBm
[dBm]
Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]
Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 8.5 dB
Receiver Optical Characteristics
Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1260 nm - 1620 nm
Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -28 dBm
Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -
Overload power (AVG) [dBm] -9 dBm
Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 104
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
3.2.10.3 1.25Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1551nm-80km-commercial
Table 3-67 1.25Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1551nm-80km-commercial specifications
Item Value
Basic Information
Module name 1.25Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1551nm-80km-
commercial
Part Number 34060478
Model eSFP-LH80-SM1551
Form factor eSFP
Application standard ITU-T G.957, STM-16
Connector type LC
Optical fiber type SMF
Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12
Working case temperature [°C(°F)] 0°C to 70°C(32°F to 158°F)
DDM options SFF-8472
Environment standard RoHS
Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1
ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V
Transmission rate [bit/s] 1.25 Gbit/s
Target transmission distance [km] 80 km
Transmitter Optical Characteristics
Center wavelength [nm] 1551 nm
Tx operating wavelength range [nm] 1544.5 nm - 1557.5 nm
Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) 5 dBm
[dBm]
Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]
Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) 0 dBm
[dBm]
Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]
Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 8.5 dB
Receiver Optical Characteristics
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 105
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
Item Value
Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1260 nm - 1620 nm
Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -28 dBm
Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -
Overload power (AVG) [dBm] -9 dBm
Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -
3.2.10.4 1.25Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1511nm-80km-commercial
Table 3-68 1.25Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1511nm-80km-commercial specifications
Item Value
Basic Information
Module name 1.25Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1511nm-80km-
commercial
Part Number 34060479
Model eSFP-LH80-SM1511
Form factor eSFP
Application standard ITU-T G.957, STM-16
Connector type LC
Optical fiber type SMF
Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12
Working case temperature [°C(°F)] 0°C to 70°C(32°F to 158°F)
DDM options SFF-8472
Environment standard RoHS
Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1
ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V
Transmission rate [bit/s] 1.25 Gbit/s
Target transmission distance [km] 80 km
Transmitter Optical Characteristics
Center wavelength [nm] 1511 nm
Tx operating wavelength range [nm] 1504.5 nm - 1517.5 nm
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 106
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
Item Value
Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) 5 dBm
[dBm]
Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]
Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) 0 dBm
[dBm]
Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]
Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 8.5 dB
Receiver Optical Characteristics
Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1260 nm - 1620 nm
Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -28 dBm
Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -
Overload power (AVG) [dBm] -9 dBm
Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -
3.2.10.5 1.25Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1611nm-80km-commercial
Table 3-69 1.25Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1611nm-80km-commercial specifications
Item Value
Basic Information
Module name 1.25Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1611nm-80km-
commercial
Part Number 34060480
Model eSFP-LH80-SM1611
Form factor eSFP
Application standard ITU-T G.957, STM-16
Connector type LC
Optical fiber type SMF
Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12
Working case temperature [°C(°F)] 0°C to 70°C(32°F to 158°F)
DDM options SFF-8472
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 107
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
Item Value
Environment standard RoHS
Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1
ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V
Transmission rate [bit/s] 1.25 Gbit/s
Target transmission distance [km] 80 km
Transmitter Optical Characteristics
Center wavelength [nm] 1611 nm
Tx operating wavelength range [nm] 1604.5 nm - 1617.5 nm
Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) 5 dBm
[dBm]
Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]
Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) 0 dBm
[dBm]
Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]
Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 8.5 dB
Receiver Optical Characteristics
Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1260 nm - 1620 nm
Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -28 dBm
Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -
Overload power (AVG) [dBm] -9 dBm
Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -
3.2.10.6 1.25Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1491nm-80km-commercial
Table 3-70 1.25Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1491nm-80km-commercial specifications
Item Value
Basic Information
Module name 1.25Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1491nm-80km-
commercial
Part Number 34060481
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 108
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
Item Value
Model eSFP-LH80-SM1491
Form factor eSFP
Application standard ITU-T G.957, STM-16
Connector type LC
Optical fiber type SMF
Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12
Working case temperature [°C(°F)] 0°C to 70°C(32°F to 158°F)
DDM options SFF-8472
Environment standard RoHS
Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1
ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V
Transmission rate [bit/s] 1.25 Gbit/s
Target transmission distance [km] 80 km
Transmitter Optical Characteristics
Center wavelength [nm] 1491 nm
Tx operating wavelength range [nm] 1484.5 nm - 1497.5 nm
Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) 5 dBm
[dBm]
Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]
Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) 0 dBm
[dBm]
Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]
Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 8.5 dB
Receiver Optical Characteristics
Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1260 nm - 1620 nm
Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -28 dBm
Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -
Overload power (AVG) [dBm] -9 dBm
Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 109
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
3.2.10.7 1.25Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1531nm-80km-commercial
Table 3-71 1.25Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1531nm-80km-commercial specifications
Item Value
Basic Information
Module name 1.25Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1531nm-80km-
commercial
Part Number 34060482
Model eSFP-LH80-SM1531
Form factor eSFP
Application standard ITU-T G.957, STM-16
Connector type LC
Optical fiber type SMF
Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12
Working case temperature [°C(°F)] 0°C to 70°C(32°F to 158°F)
DDM options SFF-8472
Environment standard RoHS
Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1
ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V
Transmission rate [bit/s] 1.25 Gbit/s
Target transmission distance [km] 80 km
Transmitter Optical Characteristics
Center wavelength [nm] 1531 nm
Tx operating wavelength range [nm] 1524.5 nm - 1537.5 nm
Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) 5 dBm
[dBm]
Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]
Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) 0 dBm
[dBm]
Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]
Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 8.5 dB
Receiver Optical Characteristics
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 110
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
Item Value
Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1260 nm - 1620 nm
Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -28 dBm
Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -
Overload power (AVG) [dBm] -9 dBm
Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -
3.2.10.8 1.25Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1471nm-80km-commercial
Table 3-72 1.25Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1471nm-80km-commercial specifications
Item Value
Basic Information
Module name 1.25Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1471nm-80km-
commercial
Part Number 34060483
Model eSFP-LH80-SM1471
Form factor eSFP
Application standard ITU-T G.957, STM-16
Connector type LC
Optical fiber type SMF
Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12
Working case temperature [°C(°F)] 0°C to 70°C(32°F to 158°F)
DDM options SFF-8472
Environment standard RoHS
Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1
ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V
Transmission rate [bit/s] 1.25 Gbit/s
Target transmission distance [km] 80 km
Transmitter Optical Characteristics
Center wavelength [nm] 1471 nm
Tx operating wavelength range [nm] 1464.5 nm - 1477.5 nm
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 111
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
Item Value
Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) 5 dBm
[dBm]
Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]
Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) 0 dBm
[dBm]
Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]
Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 8.5 dB
Receiver Optical Characteristics
Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1260 nm - 1620 nm
Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -28 dBm
Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -
Overload power (AVG) [dBm] -9 dBm
Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -
3.2.11 125M~2.67Gbps eSFP DWDM Optical Module
3.2.11.1 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1560.61nm-120km-commercial
Table 3-73 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1560.61nm-120km-commercial
specifications
Item Value
Basic Information
Module name 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-
SMF-1560.61nm-120km-commercial
Part Number 34060366
Model eSFP-LH120-SM192.10
Form factor eSFP
Application standard SONET OC-48 LR-2, Gigabit Ethernet
Connector type LC
Optical fiber type SMF
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 112
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
Item Value
Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12
Working case temperature [°C(°F)] 0°C to 70°C(32°F to 158°F)
DDM options SFF-8472
Environment standard RoHS
Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1
ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V
Transmission rate [bit/s] 155 Mbit/s ~ 2.67 Gbit/s
Target transmission distance [km] 120 km
Transmitter Optical Characteristics
Center wavelength [nm] 1560.61 nm
Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) 4 dBm
[dBm]
Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]
Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) 0 dBm
[dBm]
Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]
Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 8.2 dB
Receiver Optical Characteristics
Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1520 nm - 1570 nm
Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -28 dBm
Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -
Overload power (AVG) [dBm] -8 dBm
Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -
3.2.11.2 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1559.79nm-120km-commercial
Table 3-74 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1559.79nm-120km-commercial
specifications
Item Value
Basic Information
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 113
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
Item Value
Module name 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-
SMF-1559.79nm-120km-commercial
Part Number 34060372
Model eSFP-LH120-SM192.20
Form factor eSFP
Application standard SONET OC-48 LR-2, Gigabit Ethernet
Connector type LC
Optical fiber type SMF
Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12
Working case temperature [°C(°F)] 0°C to 70°C(32°F to 158°F)
DDM options SFF-8472
Environment standard RoHS
Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1
ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V
Transmission rate [bit/s] 155 Mbit/s ~ 2.67 Gbit/s
Target transmission distance [km] 120 km
Transmitter Optical Characteristics
Center wavelength [nm] 1559.79 nm
Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) 4 dBm
[dBm]
Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]
Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) 0 dBm
[dBm]
Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]
Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 8.2 dB
Receiver Optical Characteristics
Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1520 nm - 1570 nm
Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -28 dBm
Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -
Overload power (AVG) [dBm] -8 dBm
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 114
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
Item Value
Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -
3.2.11.3 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1558.98nm-120km-commercial
Table 3-75 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1558.98nm-120km-commercial
specifications
Item Value
Basic Information
Module name 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-
SMF-1558.98nm-120km-commercial
Part Number 34060373
Model eSFP-LH120-SM192.30
Form factor eSFP
Application standard SONET OC-48 LR-2, Gigabit Ethernet
Connector type LC
Optical fiber type SMF
Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12
Working case temperature [°C(°F)] 0°C to 70°C(32°F to 158°F)
DDM options SFF-8472
Environment standard RoHS
Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1
ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V
Transmission rate [bit/s] 155 Mbit/s ~ 2.67 Gbit/s
Target transmission distance [km] 120 km
Transmitter Optical Characteristics
Center wavelength [nm] 1558.98 nm
Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) 4 dBm
[dBm]
Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]
Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) 0 dBm
[dBm]
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 115
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
Item Value
Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]
Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 8.2 dB
Receiver Optical Characteristics
Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1520 nm - 1570 nm
Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -28 dBm
Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -
Overload power (AVG) [dBm] -8 dBm
Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -
3.2.11.4 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1558.17nm-120km-commercial
Table 3-76 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1558.17nm-120km-commercial
specifications
Item Value
Basic Information
Module name 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-
SMF-1558.17nm-120km-commercial
Part Number 34060374
Model eSFP-LH120-SM192.40
Form factor eSFP
Application standard SONET OC-48 LR-2, Gigabit Ethernet
Connector type LC
Optical fiber type SMF
Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12
Working case temperature [°C(°F)] 0°C to 70°C(32°F to 158°F)
DDM options SFF-8472
Environment standard RoHS
Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1
ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V
Transmission rate [bit/s] 155 Mbit/s ~ 2.67 Gbit/s
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 116
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
Item Value
Target transmission distance [km] 120 km
Transmitter Optical Characteristics
Center wavelength [nm] 1558.17 nm
Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) 4 dBm
[dBm]
Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]
Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) 0 dBm
[dBm]
Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]
Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 8.2 dB
Receiver Optical Characteristics
Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1520 nm - 1570 nm
Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -28 dBm
Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -
Overload power (AVG) [dBm] -8 dBm
Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -
3.2.11.5 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1557.36nm-120km-commercial
Table 3-77 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1557.36nm-120km-commercial
specifications
Item Value
Basic Information
Module name 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-
SMF-1557.36nm-120km-commercial
Part Number 34060375
Model eSFP-LH120-SM192.50
Form factor eSFP
Application standard SONET OC-48 LR-2, Gigabit Ethernet
Connector type LC
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 117
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
Item Value
Optical fiber type SMF
Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12
Working case temperature [°C(°F)] 0°C to 70°C(32°F to 158°F)
DDM options SFF-8472
Environment standard RoHS
Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1
ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V
Transmission rate [bit/s] 155 Mbit/s ~ 2.67 Gbit/s
Target transmission distance [km] 120 km
Transmitter Optical Characteristics
Center wavelength [nm] 1557.36 nm
Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) 4 dBm
[dBm]
Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]
Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) 0 dBm
[dBm]
Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]
Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 8.2 dB
Receiver Optical Characteristics
Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1520 nm - 1570 nm
Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -28 dBm
Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -
Overload power (AVG) [dBm] -8 dBm
Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 118
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
3.2.11.6 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1556.55nm-120km-commercial
Table 3-78 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1556.55nm-120km-commercial
specifications
Item Value
Basic Information
Module name 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-
SMF-1556.55nm-120km-commercial
Part Number 34060376
Model eSFP-LH120-SM192.60
Form factor eSFP
Application standard SONET OC-48 LR-2, Gigabit Ethernet
Connector type LC
Optical fiber type SMF
Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12
Working case temperature [°C(°F)] 0°C to 70°C(32°F to 158°F)
DDM options SFF-8472
Environment standard RoHS
Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1
ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V
Transmission rate [bit/s] 155 Mbit/s ~ 2.67 Gbit/s
Target transmission distance [km] 120 km
Transmitter Optical Characteristics
Center wavelength [nm] 1556.55 nm
Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) 4 dBm
[dBm]
Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]
Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) 0 dBm
[dBm]
Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]
Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 8.2 dB
Receiver Optical Characteristics
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 119
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
Item Value
Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1520 nm - 1570 nm
Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -28 dBm
Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -
Overload power (AVG) [dBm] -8 dBm
Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -
3.2.11.7 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1555.75nm-120km-commercial
Table 3-79 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1555.75nm-120km-commercial
specifications
Item Value
Basic Information
Module name 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-
SMF-1555.75nm-120km-commercial
Part Number 34060377
Model eSFP-LH120-SM192.70
Form factor eSFP
Application standard SONET OC-48 LR-2, Gigabit Ethernet
Connector type LC
Optical fiber type SMF
Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12
Working case temperature [°C(°F)] 0°C to 70°C(32°F to 158°F)
DDM options SFF-8472
Environment standard RoHS
Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1
ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V
Transmission rate [bit/s] 155 Mbit/s ~ 2.67 Gbit/s
Target transmission distance [km] 120 km
Transmitter Optical Characteristics
Center wavelength [nm] 1555.75 nm
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 120
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
Item Value
Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) 4 dBm
[dBm]
Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]
Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) 0 dBm
[dBm]
Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]
Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 8.2 dB
Receiver Optical Characteristics
Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1520 nm - 1570 nm
Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -28 dBm
Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -
Overload power (AVG) [dBm] -8 dBm
Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -
3.2.11.8 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1554.94nm-120km-commercial
Table 3-80 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1554.94nm-120km-commercial
specifications
Item Value
Basic Information
Module name 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-
SMF-1554.94nm-120km-commercial
Part Number 34060378
Model eSFP-LH120-SM192.80
Form factor eSFP
Application standard SONET OC-48 LR-2, Gigabit Ethernet
Connector type LC
Optical fiber type SMF
Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12
Working case temperature [°C(°F)] 0°C to 70°C(32°F to 158°F)
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 121
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
Item Value
DDM options SFF-8472
Environment standard RoHS
Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1
ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V
Transmission rate [bit/s] 155 Mbit/s ~ 2.67 Gbit/s
Target transmission distance [km] 120 km
Transmitter Optical Characteristics
Center wavelength [nm] 1554.94 nm
Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) 4 dBm
[dBm]
Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]
Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) 0 dBm
[dBm]
Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]
Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 8.2 dB
Receiver Optical Characteristics
Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1520 nm - 1570 nm
Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -28 dBm
Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -
Overload power (AVG) [dBm] -8 dBm
Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -
3.2.11.9 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1554.13nm-120km-commercial
Table 3-81 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1554.13nm-120km-commercial
specifications
Item Value
Basic Information
Module name 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-
SMF-1554.13nm-120km-commercial
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 122
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
Item Value
Part Number 34060379
Model eSFP-LH120-SM192.90
Form factor eSFP
Application standard SONET OC-48 LR-2, Gigabit Ethernet
Connector type LC
Optical fiber type SMF
Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12
Working case temperature [°C(°F)] 0°C to 70°C(32°F to 158°F)
DDM options SFF-8472
Environment standard RoHS
Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1
ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V
Transmission rate [bit/s] 155 Mbit/s ~ 2.67 Gbit/s
Target transmission distance [km] 120 km
Transmitter Optical Characteristics
Center wavelength [nm] 1554.13 nm
Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) 4 dBm
[dBm]
Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]
Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) 0 dBm
[dBm]
Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]
Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 8.2 dB
Receiver Optical Characteristics
Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1520 nm - 1570 nm
Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -28 dBm
Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -
Overload power (AVG) [dBm] -8 dBm
Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 123
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
3.2.11.10 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1553.33nm-120km-commercial
Table 3-82 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1553.33nm-120km-commercial
specifications
Item Value
Basic Information
Module name 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-
SMF-1553.33nm-120km-commercial
Part Number 34060380
Model eSFP-LH120-SM193.00
Form factor eSFP
Application standard SONET OC-48 LR-2, Gigabit Ethernet
Connector type LC
Optical fiber type SMF
Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12
Working case temperature [°C(°F)] 0°C to 70°C(32°F to 158°F)
DDM options SFF-8472
Environment standard RoHS
Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1
ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V
Transmission rate [bit/s] 155 Mbit/s ~ 2.67 Gbit/s
Target transmission distance [km] 120 km
Transmitter Optical Characteristics
Center wavelength [nm] 1553.33 nm
Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) 4 dBm
[dBm]
Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]
Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) 0 dBm
[dBm]
Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]
Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 8.2 dB
Receiver Optical Characteristics
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 124
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
Item Value
Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1520 nm - 1570 nm
Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -28 dBm
Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -
Overload power (AVG) [dBm] -8 dBm
Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -
3.2.11.11 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1552.52nm-120km-commercial
Table 3-83 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1552.52nm-120km-commercial
specifications
Item Value
Basic Information
Module name 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-
SMF-1552.52nm-120km-commercial
Part Number 34060381
Model eSFP-LH120-SM193.10
Form factor eSFP
Application standard SONET OC-48 LR-2, Gigabit Ethernet
Connector type LC
Optical fiber type SMF
Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12
Working case temperature [°C(°F)] 0°C to 70°C(32°F to 158°F)
DDM options SFF-8472
Environment standard RoHS
Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1
ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V
Transmission rate [bit/s] 155 Mbit/s ~ 2.67 Gbit/s
Target transmission distance [km] 120 km
Transmitter Optical Characteristics
Center wavelength [nm] 1552.52 nm
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 125
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
Item Value
Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) 4 dBm
[dBm]
Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]
Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) 0 dBm
[dBm]
Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]
Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 8.2 dB
Receiver Optical Characteristics
Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1520 nm - 1570 nm
Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -28 dBm
Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -
Overload power (AVG) [dBm] -8 dBm
Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -
3.2.11.12 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1551.72nm-120km-commercial
Table 3-84 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1551.72nm-120km-commercial
specifications
Item Value
Basic Information
Module name 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-
SMF-1551.72nm-120km-commercial
Part Number 34060382
Model eSFP-LH120-SM193.20
Form factor eSFP
Application standard SONET OC-48 LR-2, Gigabit Ethernet
Connector type LC
Optical fiber type SMF
Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12
Working case temperature [°C(°F)] 0°C to 70°C(32°F to 158°F)
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 126
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
Item Value
DDM options SFF-8472
Environment standard RoHS
Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1
ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V
Transmission rate [bit/s] 155 Mbit/s ~ 2.67 Gbit/s
Target transmission distance [km] 120 km
Transmitter Optical Characteristics
Center wavelength [nm] 1551.72 nm
Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) 4 dBm
[dBm]
Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]
Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) 0 dBm
[dBm]
Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]
Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 8.2 dB
Receiver Optical Characteristics
Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1520 nm - 1570 nm
Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -28 dBm
Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -
Overload power (AVG) [dBm] -8 dBm
Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -
3.2.11.13 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1550.92nm-120km-commercial
Table 3-85 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1550.92nm-120km-commercial
specifications
Item Value
Basic Information
Module name 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-
SMF-1550.92nm-120km-commercial
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 127
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
Item Value
Part Number 34060383
Model eSFP-LH120-SM193.30
Form factor eSFP
Application standard SONET OC-48 LR-2, Gigabit Ethernet
Connector type LC
Optical fiber type SMF
Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12
Working case temperature [°C(°F)] 0°C to 70°C(32°F to 158°F)
DDM options SFF-8472
Environment standard RoHS
Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1
ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V
Transmission rate [bit/s] 155 Mbit/s ~ 2.67 Gbit/s
Target transmission distance [km] 120 km
Transmitter Optical Characteristics
Center wavelength [nm] 1550.92 nm
Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) 4 dBm
[dBm]
Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]
Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) 0 dBm
[dBm]
Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]
Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 8.2 dB
Receiver Optical Characteristics
Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1520 nm - 1570 nm
Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -28 dBm
Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -
Overload power (AVG) [dBm] -8 dBm
Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 128
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
3.2.11.14 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1550.12nm-120km-commercial
Table 3-86 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1550.12nm-120km-commercial
specifications
Item Value
Basic Information
Module name 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-
SMF-1550.12nm-120km-commercial
Part Number 34060384
Model eSFP-LH120-SM193.40
Form factor eSFP
Application standard SONET OC-48 LR-2, Gigabit Ethernet
Connector type LC
Optical fiber type SMF
Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12
Working case temperature [°C(°F)] 0°C to 70°C(32°F to 158°F)
DDM options SFF-8472
Environment standard RoHS
Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1
ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V
Transmission rate [bit/s] 155 Mbit/s ~ 2.67 Gbit/s
Target transmission distance [km] 120 km
Transmitter Optical Characteristics
Center wavelength [nm] 1550.12 nm
Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) 4 dBm
[dBm]
Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]
Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) 0 dBm
[dBm]
Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]
Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 8.2 dB
Receiver Optical Characteristics
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 129
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
Item Value
Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1520 nm - 1570 nm
Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -28 dBm
Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -
Overload power (AVG) [dBm] -8 dBm
Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -
3.2.11.15 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1549.32nm-120km-commercial
Table 3-87 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1549.32nm-120km-commercial
specifications
Item Value
Basic Information
Module name 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-
SMF-1549.32nm-120km-commercial
Part Number 34060385
Model eSFP-LH120-SM193.50
Form factor eSFP
Application standard SONET OC-48 LR-2, Gigabit Ethernet
Connector type LC
Optical fiber type SMF
Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12
Working case temperature [°C(°F)] 0°C to 70°C(32°F to 158°F)
DDM options SFF-8472
Environment standard RoHS
Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1
ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V
Transmission rate [bit/s] 155 Mbit/s ~ 2.67 Gbit/s
Target transmission distance [km] 120 km
Transmitter Optical Characteristics
Center wavelength [nm] 1549.32 nm
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 130
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
Item Value
Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) 4 dBm
[dBm]
Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]
Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) 0 dBm
[dBm]
Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]
Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 8.2 dB
Receiver Optical Characteristics
Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1520 nm - 1570 nm
Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -28 dBm
Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -
Overload power (AVG) [dBm] -8 dBm
Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -
3.2.11.16 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1548.51nm-120km-commercial
Table 3-88 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1548.51nm-120km-commercial
specifications
Item Value
Basic Information
Module name 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-
SMF-1548.51nm-120km-commercial
Part Number 34060386
Model eSFP-LH120-SM193.60
Form factor eSFP
Application standard SONET OC-48 LR-2, Gigabit Ethernet
Connector type LC
Optical fiber type SMF
Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12
Working case temperature [°C(°F)] 0°C to 70°C(32°F to 158°F)
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 131
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
Item Value
DDM options SFF-8472
Environment standard RoHS
Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1
ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V
Transmission rate [bit/s] 155 Mbit/s ~ 2.67 Gbit/s
Target transmission distance [km] 120 km
Transmitter Optical Characteristics
Center wavelength [nm] 1548.51 nm
Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) 4 dBm
[dBm]
Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]
Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) 0 dBm
[dBm]
Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]
Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 8.2 dB
Receiver Optical Characteristics
Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1520 nm - 1570 nm
Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -28 dBm
Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -
Overload power (AVG) [dBm] -8 dBm
Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -
3.2.11.17 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1547.72nm-120km-commercial
Table 3-89 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1547.72nm-120km-commercial
specifications
Item Value
Basic Information
Module name 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-
SMF-1547.72nm-120km-commercial
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 132
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
Item Value
Part Number 34060387
Model eSFP-LH120-SM193.70
Form factor eSFP
Application standard SONET OC-48 LR-2, Gigabit Ethernet
Connector type LC
Optical fiber type SMF
Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12
Working case temperature [°C(°F)] 0°C to 70°C(32°F to 158°F)
DDM options SFF-8472
Environment standard RoHS
Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1
ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V
Transmission rate [bit/s] 155 Mbit/s ~ 2.67 Gbit/s
Target transmission distance [km] 120 km
Transmitter Optical Characteristics
Center wavelength [nm] 1547.72 nm
Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) 4 dBm
[dBm]
Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]
Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) 0 dBm
[dBm]
Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]
Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 8.2 dB
Receiver Optical Characteristics
Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1520 nm - 1570 nm
Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -28 dBm
Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -
Overload power (AVG) [dBm] -8 dBm
Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 133
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
3.2.11.18 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1546.92nm-120km-commercial
Table 3-90 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1546.92nm-120km-commercial
specifications
Item Value
Basic Information
Module name 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-
SMF-1546.92nm-120km-commercial
Part Number 34060388
Model eSFP-LH120-SM193.80
Form factor eSFP
Application standard SONET OC-48 LR-2, Gigabit Ethernet
Connector type LC
Optical fiber type SMF
Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12
Working case temperature [°C(°F)] 0°C to 70°C(32°F to 158°F)
DDM options SFF-8472
Environment standard RoHS
Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1
ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V
Transmission rate [bit/s] 155 Mbit/s ~ 2.67 Gbit/s
Target transmission distance [km] 120 km
Transmitter Optical Characteristics
Center wavelength [nm] 1546.92 nm
Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) 4 dBm
[dBm]
Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]
Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) 0 dBm
[dBm]
Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]
Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 8.2 dB
Receiver Optical Characteristics
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 134
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
Item Value
Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1520 nm - 1570 nm
Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -28 dBm
Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -
Overload power (AVG) [dBm] -8 dBm
Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -
3.2.11.19 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1546.12nm-120km-commercial
Table 3-91 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1546.12nm-120km-commercial
specifications
Item Value
Basic Information
Module name 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-
SMF-1546.12nm-120km-commercial
Part Number 34060389
Model eSFP-LH120-SM193.90
Form factor eSFP
Application standard SONET OC-48 LR-2, Gigabit Ethernet
Connector type LC
Optical fiber type SMF
Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12
Working case temperature [°C(°F)] 0°C to 70°C(32°F to 158°F)
DDM options SFF-8472
Environment standard RoHS
Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1
ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V
Transmission rate [bit/s] 155 Mbit/s ~ 2.67 Gbit/s
Target transmission distance [km] 120 km
Transmitter Optical Characteristics
Center wavelength [nm] 1546.12 nm
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 135
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
Item Value
Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) 4 dBm
[dBm]
Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]
Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) 0 dBm
[dBm]
Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]
Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 8.2 dB
Receiver Optical Characteristics
Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1520 nm - 1570 nm
Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -28 dBm
Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -
Overload power (AVG) [dBm] -8 dBm
Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -
3.2.11.20 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1545.32nm-120km-commercial
Table 3-92 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1545.32nm-120km-commercial
specifications
Item Value
Basic Information
Module name 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-
SMF-1545.32nm-120km-commercial
Part Number 34060390
Model eSFP-LH120-SM194.00
Form factor eSFP
Application standard SONET OC-48 LR-2, Gigabit Ethernet
Connector type LC
Optical fiber type SMF
Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12
Working case temperature [°C(°F)] 0°C to 70°C(32°F to 158°F)
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 136
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
Item Value
DDM options SFF-8472
Environment standard RoHS
Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1
ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V
Transmission rate [bit/s] 155 Mbit/s ~ 2.67 Gbit/s
Target transmission distance [km] 120 km
Transmitter Optical Characteristics
Center wavelength [nm] 1545.32 nm
Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) 4 dBm
[dBm]
Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]
Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) 0 dBm
[dBm]
Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]
Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 8.2 dB
Receiver Optical Characteristics
Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1520 nm - 1570 nm
Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -28 dBm
Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -
Overload power (AVG) [dBm] -8 dBm
Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -
3.2.11.21 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1544.53nm-120km-commercial
Table 3-93 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1544.53nm-120km-commercial
specifications
Item Value
Basic Information
Module name 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-
SMF-1544.53nm-120km-commercial
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 137
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
Item Value
Part Number 34060391
Model eSFP-LH120-SM194.10
Form factor eSFP
Application standard SONET OC-48 LR-2, Gigabit Ethernet
Connector type LC
Optical fiber type SMF
Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12
Working case temperature [°C(°F)] 0°C to 70°C(32°F to 158°F)
DDM options SFF-8472
Environment standard RoHS
Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1
ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V
Transmission rate [bit/s] 155 Mbit/s ~ 2.67 Gbit/s
Target transmission distance [km] 120 km
Transmitter Optical Characteristics
Center wavelength [nm] 1544.53 nm
Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) 4 dBm
[dBm]
Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]
Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) 0 dBm
[dBm]
Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]
Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 8.2 dB
Receiver Optical Characteristics
Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1520 nm - 1570 nm
Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -28 dBm
Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -
Overload power (AVG) [dBm] -8 dBm
Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 138
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
3.2.11.22 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1543.73nm-120km-commercial
Table 3-94 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1543.73nm-120km-commercial
specifications
Item Value
Basic Information
Module name 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-
SMF-1543.73nm-120km-commercial
Part Number 34060392
Model eSFP-LH120-SM194.20
Form factor eSFP
Application standard SONET OC-48 LR-2, Gigabit Ethernet
Connector type LC
Optical fiber type SMF
Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12
Working case temperature [°C(°F)] 0°C to 70°C(32°F to 158°F)
DDM options SFF-8472
Environment standard RoHS
Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1
ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V
Transmission rate [bit/s] 155 Mbit/s ~ 2.67 Gbit/s
Target transmission distance [km] 120 km
Transmitter Optical Characteristics
Center wavelength [nm] 1543.73 nm
Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) 4 dBm
[dBm]
Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]
Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) 0 dBm
[dBm]
Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]
Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 8.2 dB
Receiver Optical Characteristics
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 139
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
Item Value
Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1520 nm - 1570 nm
Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -28 dBm
Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -
Overload power (AVG) [dBm] -8 dBm
Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -
3.2.11.23 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1542.94nm-120km-commercial
Table 3-95 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1542.94nm-120km-commercial
specifications
Item Value
Basic Information
Module name 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-
SMF-1542.94nm-120km-commercial
Part Number 34060393
Model eSFP-LH120-SM194.30
Form factor eSFP
Application standard SONET OC-48 LR-2, Gigabit Ethernet
Connector type LC
Optical fiber type SMF
Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12
Working case temperature [°C(°F)] 0°C to 70°C(32°F to 158°F)
DDM options SFF-8472
Environment standard RoHS
Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1
ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V
Transmission rate [bit/s] 155 Mbit/s ~ 2.67 Gbit/s
Target transmission distance [km] 120 km
Transmitter Optical Characteristics
Center wavelength [nm] 1542.94 nm
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 140
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
Item Value
Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) 4 dBm
[dBm]
Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]
Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) 0 dBm
[dBm]
Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]
Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 8.2 dB
Receiver Optical Characteristics
Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1520 nm - 1570 nm
Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -28 dBm
Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -
Overload power (AVG) [dBm] -8 dBm
Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -
3.2.11.24 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1542.14nm-120km-commercial
Table 3-96 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1542.14nm-120km-commercial
specifications
Item Value
Basic Information
Module name 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-
SMF-1542.14nm-120km-commercial
Part Number 34060394
Model eSFP-LH120-SM194.40
Form factor eSFP
Application standard SONET OC-48 LR-2, Gigabit Ethernet
Connector type LC
Optical fiber type SMF
Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12
Working case temperature [°C(°F)] 0°C to 70°C(32°F to 158°F)
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 141
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
Item Value
DDM options SFF-8472
Environment standard RoHS
Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1
ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V
Transmission rate [bit/s] 155 Mbit/s ~ 2.67 Gbit/s
Target transmission distance [km] 120 km
Transmitter Optical Characteristics
Center wavelength [nm] 1542.14 nm
Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) 4 dBm
[dBm]
Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]
Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) 0 dBm
[dBm]
Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]
Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 8.2 dB
Receiver Optical Characteristics
Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1520 nm - 1570 nm
Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -28 dBm
Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -
Overload power (AVG) [dBm] -8 dBm
Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -
3.2.11.25 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1541.35nm-120km-commercial
Table 3-97 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1541.35nm-120km-commercial
specifications
Item Value
Basic Information
Module name 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-
SMF-1541.35nm-120km-commercial
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 142
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
Item Value
Part Number 34060395
Model eSFP-LH120-SM194.50
Form factor eSFP
Application standard SONET OC-48 LR-2, Gigabit Ethernet
Connector type LC
Optical fiber type SMF
Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12
Working case temperature [°C(°F)] 0°C to 70°C(32°F to 158°F)
DDM options SFF-8472
Environment standard RoHS
Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1
ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V
Transmission rate [bit/s] 155 Mbit/s ~ 2.67 Gbit/s
Target transmission distance [km] 120 km
Transmitter Optical Characteristics
Center wavelength [nm] 1541.35 nm
Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) 4 dBm
[dBm]
Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]
Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) 0 dBm
[dBm]
Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]
Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 8.2 dB
Receiver Optical Characteristics
Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1520 nm - 1570 nm
Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -28 dBm
Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -
Overload power (AVG) [dBm] -8 dBm
Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 143
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
3.2.11.26 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1540.56nm-120km-commercial
Table 3-98 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1540.56nm-120km-commercial
specifications
Item Value
Basic Information
Module name 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-
SMF-1540.56nm-120km-commercial
Part Number 34060396
Model eSFP-LH120-SM194.60
Form factor eSFP
Application standard SONET OC-48 LR-2, Gigabit Ethernet
Connector type LC
Optical fiber type SMF
Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12
Working case temperature [°C(°F)] 0°C to 70°C(32°F to 158°F)
DDM options SFF-8472
Environment standard RoHS
Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1
ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V
Transmission rate [bit/s] 155 Mbit/s ~ 2.67 Gbit/s
Target transmission distance [km] 120 km
Transmitter Optical Characteristics
Center wavelength [nm] 1540.56 nm
Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) 4 dBm
[dBm]
Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]
Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) 0 dBm
[dBm]
Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]
Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 8.2 dB
Receiver Optical Characteristics
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 144
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
Item Value
Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1520 nm - 1570 nm
Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -28 dBm
Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -
Overload power (AVG) [dBm] -8 dBm
Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -
3.2.11.27 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1539.77nm-120km-commercial
Table 3-99 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1539.77nm-120km-commercial
specifications
Item Value
Basic Information
Module name 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-
SMF-1539.77nm-120km-commercial
Part Number 34060397
Model eSFP-LH120-SM194.70
Form factor eSFP
Application standard SONET OC-48 LR-2, Gigabit Ethernet
Connector type LC
Optical fiber type SMF
Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12
Working case temperature [°C(°F)] 0°C to 70°C(32°F to 158°F)
DDM options SFF-8472
Environment standard RoHS
Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1
ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V
Transmission rate [bit/s] 155 Mbit/s ~ 2.67 Gbit/s
Target transmission distance [km] 120 km
Transmitter Optical Characteristics
Center wavelength [nm] 1539.77 nm
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 145
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
Item Value
Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) 4 dBm
[dBm]
Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]
Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) 0 dBm
[dBm]
Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]
Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 8.2 dB
Receiver Optical Characteristics
Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1520 nm - 1570 nm
Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -28 dBm
Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -
Overload power (AVG) [dBm] -8 dBm
Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -
3.2.11.28 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1538.98nm-120km-commercial
Table 3-100 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1538.98nm-120km-commercial
specifications
Item Value
Basic Information
Module name 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-
SMF-1538.98nm-120km-commercial
Part Number 34060398
Model eSFP-LH120-SM194.80
Form factor eSFP
Application standard SONET OC-48 LR-2, Gigabit Ethernet
Connector type LC
Optical fiber type SMF
Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12
Working case temperature [°C(°F)] 0°C to 70°C(32°F to 158°F)
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 146
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
Item Value
DDM options SFF-8472
Environment standard RoHS
Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1
ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V
Transmission rate [bit/s] 155 Mbit/s ~ 2.67 Gbit/s
Target transmission distance [km] 120 km
Transmitter Optical Characteristics
Center wavelength [nm] 1538.98 nm
Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) 4 dBm
[dBm]
Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]
Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) 0 dBm
[dBm]
Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]
Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 8.2 dB
Receiver Optical Characteristics
Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1520 nm - 1570 nm
Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -28 dBm
Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -
Overload power (AVG) [dBm] -8 dBm
Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -
3.2.11.29 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1538.19nm-120km-commercial
Table 3-101 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1538.19nm-120km-commercial
specifications
Item Value
Basic Information
Module name 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-
SMF-1538.19nm-120km-commercial
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 147
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
Item Value
Part Number 34060399
Model eSFP-LH120-SM194.90
Form factor eSFP
Application standard SONET OC-48 LR-2, Gigabit Ethernet
Connector type LC
Optical fiber type SMF
Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12
Working case temperature [°C(°F)] 0°C to 70°C(32°F to 158°F)
DDM options SFF-8472
Environment standard RoHS
Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1
ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V
Transmission rate [bit/s] 155 Mbit/s ~ 2.67 Gbit/s
Target transmission distance [km] 120 km
Transmitter Optical Characteristics
Center wavelength [nm] 1538.19 nm
Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) 4 dBm
[dBm]
Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]
Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) 0 dBm
[dBm]
Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]
Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 8.2 dB
Receiver Optical Characteristics
Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1520 nm - 1570 nm
Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -28 dBm
Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -
Overload power (AVG) [dBm] -8 dBm
Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 148
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
3.2.11.30 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1537.40nm-120km-commercial
Table 3-102 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1537.40nm-120km-commercial
specifications
Item Value
Basic Information
Module name 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-
SMF-1537.40nm-120km-commercial
Part Number 34060400
Model eSFP-LH120-SM195.00
Form factor eSFP
Application standard SONET OC-48 LR-2, Gigabit Ethernet
Connector type LC
Optical fiber type SMF
Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12
Working case temperature [°C(°F)] 0°C to 70°C(32°F to 158°F)
DDM options SFF-8472
Environment standard RoHS
Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1
ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V
Transmission rate [bit/s] 155 Mbit/s ~ 2.67 Gbit/s
Target transmission distance [km] 120 km
Transmitter Optical Characteristics
Center wavelength [nm] 1537.4 nm
Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) 4 dBm
[dBm]
Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]
Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) 0 dBm
[dBm]
Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]
Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 8.2 dB
Receiver Optical Characteristics
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 149
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
Item Value
Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1520 nm - 1570 nm
Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -28 dBm
Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -
Overload power (AVG) [dBm] -8 dBm
Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -
3.2.11.31 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1536.61nm-120km-commercial
Table 3-103 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1536.61nm-120km-commercial
specifications
Item Value
Basic Information
Module name 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-
SMF-1536.61nm-120km-commercial
Part Number 34060401
Model eSFP-LH120-SM195.10
Form factor eSFP
Application standard SONET OC-48 LR-2, Gigabit Ethernet
Connector type LC
Optical fiber type SMF
Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12
Working case temperature [°C(°F)] 0°C to 70°C(32°F to 158°F)
DDM options SFF-8472
Environment standard RoHS
Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1
ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V
Transmission rate [bit/s] 155 Mbit/s ~ 2.67 Gbit/s
Target transmission distance [km] 120 km
Transmitter Optical Characteristics
Center wavelength [nm] 1536.61 nm
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 150
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
Item Value
Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) 4 dBm
[dBm]
Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]
Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) 0 dBm
[dBm]
Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]
Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 8.2 dB
Receiver Optical Characteristics
Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1520 nm - 1570 nm
Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -28 dBm
Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -
Overload power (AVG) [dBm] -8 dBm
Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -
3.2.11.32 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1535.82nm-120km-commercial
Table 3-104 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1535.82nm-120km-commercial
specifications
Item Value
Basic Information
Module name 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-
SMF-1535.82nm-120km-commercial
Part Number 34060402
Model eSFP-LH120-SM195.20
Form factor eSFP
Application standard SONET OC-48 LR-2, Gigabit Ethernet
Connector type LC
Optical fiber type SMF
Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12
Working case temperature [°C(°F)] 0°C to 70°C(32°F to 158°F)
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 151
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
Item Value
DDM options SFF-8472
Environment standard RoHS
Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1
ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V
Transmission rate [bit/s] 155 Mbit/s ~ 2.67 Gbit/s
Target transmission distance [km] 120 km
Transmitter Optical Characteristics
Center wavelength [nm] 1535.82 nm
Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) 4 dBm
[dBm]
Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]
Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) 0 dBm
[dBm]
Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]
Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 8.2 dB
Receiver Optical Characteristics
Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1520 nm - 1570 nm
Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -28 dBm
Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -
Overload power (AVG) [dBm] -8 dBm
Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -
3.2.11.33 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1535.04nm-120km-commercial
Table 3-105 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1535.04nm-120km-commercial
specifications
Item Value
Basic Information
Module name 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-
SMF-1535.04nm-120km-commercial
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 152
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
Item Value
Part Number 34060403
Model eSFP-LH120-SM195.30
Form factor eSFP
Application standard SONET OC-48 LR-2, Gigabit Ethernet
Connector type LC
Optical fiber type SMF
Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12
Working case temperature [°C(°F)] 0°C to 70°C(32°F to 158°F)
DDM options SFF-8472
Environment standard RoHS
Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1
ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V
Transmission rate [bit/s] 155 Mbit/s ~ 2.67 Gbit/s
Target transmission distance [km] 120 km
Transmitter Optical Characteristics
Center wavelength [nm] 1535.04 nm
Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) 4 dBm
[dBm]
Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]
Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) 0 dBm
[dBm]
Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]
Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 8.2 dB
Receiver Optical Characteristics
Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1520 nm - 1570 nm
Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -28 dBm
Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -
Overload power (AVG) [dBm] -8 dBm
Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 153
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
3.2.11.34 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1534.25nm-120km-commercial
Table 3-106 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1534.25nm-120km-commercial
specifications
Item Value
Basic Information
Module name 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-
SMF-1534.25nm-120km-commercial
Part Number 34060404
Model eSFP-LH120-SM195.40
Form factor eSFP
Application standard SONET OC-48 LR-2, Gigabit Ethernet
Connector type LC
Optical fiber type SMF
Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12
Working case temperature [°C(°F)] 0°C to 70°C(32°F to 158°F)
DDM options SFF-8472
Environment standard RoHS
Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1
ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V
Transmission rate [bit/s] 155 Mbit/s ~ 2.67 Gbit/s
Target transmission distance [km] 120 km
Transmitter Optical Characteristics
Center wavelength [nm] 1534.25 nm
Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) 4 dBm
[dBm]
Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]
Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) 0 dBm
[dBm]
Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]
Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 8.2 dB
Receiver Optical Characteristics
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 154
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
Item Value
Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1520 nm - 1570 nm
Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -28 dBm
Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -
Overload power (AVG) [dBm] -8 dBm
Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -
3.2.11.35 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1533.47nm-120km-commercial
Table 3-107 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1533.47nm-120km-commercial
specifications
Item Value
Basic Information
Module name 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-
SMF-1533.47nm-120km-commercial
Part Number 34060405
Model eSFP-LH120-SM195.50
Form factor eSFP
Application standard SONET OC-48 LR-2, Gigabit Ethernet
Connector type LC
Optical fiber type SMF
Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12
Working case temperature [°C(°F)] 0°C to 70°C(32°F to 158°F)
DDM options SFF-8472
Environment standard RoHS
Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1
ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V
Transmission rate [bit/s] 155 Mbit/s ~ 2.67 Gbit/s
Target transmission distance [km] 120 km
Transmitter Optical Characteristics
Center wavelength [nm] 1533.47 nm
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 155
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
Item Value
Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) 4 dBm
[dBm]
Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]
Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) 0 dBm
[dBm]
Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]
Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 8.2 dB
Receiver Optical Characteristics
Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1520 nm - 1570 nm
Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -28 dBm
Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -
Overload power (AVG) [dBm] -8 dBm
Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -
3.2.11.36 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1532.68nm-120km-commercial
Table 3-108 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1532.68nm-120km-commercial
specifications
Item Value
Basic Information
Module name 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-
SMF-1532.68nm-120km-commercial
Part Number 34060406
Model eSFP-LH120-SM195.60
Form factor eSFP
Application standard SONET OC-48 LR-2, Gigabit Ethernet
Connector type LC
Optical fiber type SMF
Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12
Working case temperature [°C(°F)] 0°C to 70°C(32°F to 158°F)
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 156
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
Item Value
DDM options SFF-8472
Environment standard RoHS
Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1
ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V
Transmission rate [bit/s] 155 Mbit/s ~ 2.67 Gbit/s
Target transmission distance [km] 120 km
Transmitter Optical Characteristics
Center wavelength [nm] 1532.68 nm
Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) 4 dBm
[dBm]
Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]
Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) 0 dBm
[dBm]
Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]
Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 8.2 dB
Receiver Optical Characteristics
Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1520 nm - 1570 nm
Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -28 dBm
Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -
Overload power (AVG) [dBm] -8 dBm
Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -
3.2.11.37 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1531.90nm-120km-commercial
Table 3-109 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1531.90nm-120km-commercial
specifications
Item Value
Basic Information
Module name 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-
SMF-1531.90nm-120km-commercial
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 157
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
Item Value
Part Number 34060407
Model eSFP-LH120-SM195.70
Form factor eSFP
Application standard SONET OC-48 LR-2, Gigabit Ethernet
Connector type LC
Optical fiber type SMF
Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12
Working case temperature [°C(°F)] 0°C to 70°C(32°F to 158°F)
DDM options SFF-8472
Environment standard RoHS
Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1
ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V
Transmission rate [bit/s] 155 Mbit/s ~ 2.67 Gbit/s
Target transmission distance [km] 120 km
Transmitter Optical Characteristics
Center wavelength [nm] 1531.9 nm
Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) 4 dBm
[dBm]
Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]
Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) 0 dBm
[dBm]
Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]
Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 8.2 dB
Receiver Optical Characteristics
Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1520 nm - 1570 nm
Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -28 dBm
Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -
Overload power (AVG) [dBm] -8 dBm
Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 158
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
3.2.11.38 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1531.12nm-120km-commercial
Table 3-110 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1531.12nm-120km-commercial
specifications
Item Value
Basic Information
Module name 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-
SMF-1531.12nm-120km-commercial
Part Number 34060408
Model eSFP-LH120-SM195.80
Form factor eSFP
Application standard SONET OC-48 LR-2, Gigabit Ethernet
Connector type LC
Optical fiber type SMF
Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12
Working case temperature [°C(°F)] 0°C to 70°C(32°F to 158°F)
DDM options SFF-8472
Environment standard RoHS
Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1
ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V
Transmission rate [bit/s] 155 Mbit/s ~ 2.67 Gbit/s
Target transmission distance [km] 120 km
Transmitter Optical Characteristics
Center wavelength [nm] 1531.12 nm
Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) 4 dBm
[dBm]
Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]
Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) 0 dBm
[dBm]
Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]
Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 8.2 dB
Receiver Optical Characteristics
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 159
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
Item Value
Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1520 nm - 1570 nm
Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -28 dBm
Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -
Overload power (AVG) [dBm] -8 dBm
Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -
3.2.11.39 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1530.33nm-120km-commercial
Table 3-111 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1530.33nm-120km-commercial
specifications
Item Value
Basic Information
Module name 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-
SMF-1530.33nm-120km-commercial
Part Number 34060409
Model eSFP-LH120-SM195.90
Form factor eSFP
Application standard SONET OC-48 LR-2, Gigabit Ethernet
Connector type LC
Optical fiber type SMF
Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12
Working case temperature [°C(°F)] 0°C to 70°C(32°F to 158°F)
DDM options SFF-8472
Environment standard RoHS
Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1
ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V
Transmission rate [bit/s] 155 Mbit/s ~ 2.67 Gbit/s
Target transmission distance [km] 120 km
Transmitter Optical Characteristics
Center wavelength [nm] 1530.33 nm
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 160
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
Item Value
Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) 4 dBm
[dBm]
Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]
Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) 0 dBm
[dBm]
Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]
Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 8.2 dB
Receiver Optical Characteristics
Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1520 nm - 1570 nm
Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -28 dBm
Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -
Overload power (AVG) [dBm] -8 dBm
Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -
3.2.11.40 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1529.55nm-120km-commercial
Table 3-112 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1529.55nm-120km-commercial
specifications
Item Value
Basic Information
Module name 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-
SMF-1529.55nm-120km-commercial
Part Number 34060410
Model eSFP-LH120-SM196.00
Form factor eSFP
Application standard SONET OC-48 LR-2, Gigabit Ethernet
Connector type LC
Optical fiber type SMF
Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12
Working case temperature [°C(°F)] 0°C to 70°C(32°F to 158°F)
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 161
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
Item Value
DDM options SFF-8472
Environment standard RoHS
Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1
ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V
Transmission rate [bit/s] 155 Mbit/s ~ 2.67 Gbit/s
Target transmission distance [km] 120 km
Transmitter Optical Characteristics
Center wavelength [nm] 1529.55 nm
Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) 4 dBm
[dBm]
Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]
Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) 0 dBm
[dBm]
Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]
Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 8.2 dB
Receiver Optical Characteristics
Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1520 nm - 1570 nm
Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -28 dBm
Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -
Overload power (AVG) [dBm] -8 dBm
Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -
3.2.12 10Gbps SFP+ Optical Module
3.2.12.1 10Gbps-SFP+-SMF-1550nm-80km-commercial
Table 3-113 10Gbps-SFP+-SMF-1550nm-80km-commercial specifications
Item Value
Basic Information
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 162
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
Item Value
Module name 10Gbps-SFP+-SMF-1550nm-80km-
commercial
Part Number 02310PVU
Model OSX080N04
Form factor SFP+
Application standard IEEE 802.3ae, 10GBASE-ZR/ZW
Connector type LC
Optical fiber type SMF
Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12
Working case temperature [°C(°F)] 0°C to 70°C(32°F to 158°F)
DDM options SFF-8472
Environment standard RoHS
Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1
ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V
Transmission rate [bit/s] 9.953 Gbit/s
10.3125 Gbit/s
Target transmission distance [km] 80 km
Transmitter Optical Characteristics
Center wavelength [nm] 1550 nm
Tx operating wavelength range [nm] 1530 nm - 1565 nm
Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) 4 dBm
[dBm]
Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]
Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) 0 dBm
[dBm]
Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]
Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 9 dB
Receiver Optical Characteristics
Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1260 nm - 1565 nm
Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -24 dBm
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 163
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
Item Value
Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -
Overload power (AVG) [dBm] -7 dBm
Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -
NOTE
The interface standard is Huawei-specific. Self-loop is not supported. An optical attenuator
must be added if self-loop is required.
3.2.12.2 10Gbps-SFP+-SMF-1310nm-40km-commercial (02311YEB)
Table 3-114 10Gbps-SFP+-SMF-1310nm-40km-commercial specifications
Item Value
Basic Information
Module name 10Gbps-SFP+-SMF-1310nm-40km-
commercial
Part Number 02311YEB
Model OSX040N14
Form factor SFP+
Application standard IEEE 802.3ae, 10GBASE-ER/EW
Connector type LC
Optical fiber type SMF
Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12
Working case temperature [°C(°F)] 0°C to 70°C(32°F to 158°F)
DDM options SFF-8472
Environment standard RoHS
Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1
ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V
Transmission rate [bit/s] 9.953 bit/s ~ 10.3125 Gbit/s
Target transmission distance [km] 40 km
Transmitter Optical Characteristics
Center wavelength [nm] 1310 nm
Tx operating wavelength range [nm] 1260 nm - 1355 nm
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 164
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
Item Value
Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) 4 dBm
[dBm]
Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]
Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) -2 dBm
[dBm]
Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]
Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 3.5 dB
Receiver Optical Characteristics
Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1260 nm - 1600 nm
Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -20 dBm
Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -20 dBm
Overload power (AVG) [dBm] -7 dBm
Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -7 dBm
NOTE
1310nm and 1550nm can not be connected,Self-loop is not supported. An optical
attenuator must be added if self-loop is required.
3.2.12.3 10Gbps-SFP+-SMF-1310nm-10km-industry
Table 3-115 10Gbps-SFP+-SMF-1310nm-10km-industry specifications
Item Value
Basic Information
Module name 10Gbps-SFP+-SMF-1310nm-10km-
industry
Part Number 34060599
Model OSX010N05
Form factor SFP+
Application standard IEEE 802.3ae, 10GBASE-LR/LW
Connector type LC
Optical fiber type SMF
Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 165
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
Item Value
Working case temperature [°C(°F)] -40°C to 85°C(-40°F to 185°F)
DDM options SFF-8472
Environment standard RoHS
Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1
ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V
Transmission rate [bit/s] 9.953 Gbit/s
10.3125 Gbit/s
Target transmission distance [km] 10 km
Transmitter Optical Characteristics
Center wavelength [nm] 1310 nm
Tx operating wavelength range [nm] 1260 nm - 1355 nm
Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) 0.5 dBm
[dBm]
Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -5.2 dBm
[dBm]
Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) -8.2 dBm
[dBm]
Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]
Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 3.5 dB
Receiver Optical Characteristics
Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1260 nm - 1355 nm
Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -14.4 dBm
Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -12.6 dBm
Overload power (AVG) [dBm] 0.5 dBm
Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -
3.2.12.4 10Gbps-SFP+-MMF-850nm-0.1km-industry
Table 3-116 10Gbps-SFP+-MMF-850nm-0.1km-industry specifications
Item Value
Basic Information
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 166
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
Item Value
Module name 10Gbps-SFP+-MMF-850nm-0.1km-
industry
Part Number 34060618
Model OMXD10N01
Form factor SFP+
Application standard IEEE 802.3ae, 10GBASE-SR/SW
Connector type LC
Optical fiber type MMF
Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12
Working case temperature [°C(°F)] -40°C to 85°C(-40°F to 185°F)
DDM options SFF-8472
Environment standard RoHS
Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1
ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V
Transmission rate [bit/s] 9.953 Gbit/s
10.3125 Gbit/s
Target transmission distance [km] 0.3 km(OM3)
0.082 km(OM2)
Transmitter Optical Characteristics
Center wavelength [nm] 850 nm
Tx operating wavelength range [nm] 840 nm - 860 nm
Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) -1 dBm
[dBm]
Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -7.3 dBm
[dBm]
Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) -5 dBm
[dBm]
Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]
Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 3 dB
Receiver Optical Characteristics
Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 840 nm - 860 nm
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 167
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
Item Value
Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -9.9 dBm
Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -11.1 dBm
Overload power (AVG) [dBm] -1 dBm
Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -
3.2.12.5 10Gbps-SFP+-SMF-1550nm-40km-industry
Table 3-117 10Gbps-SFP+-SMF-1550nm-40km-industry specifications
Item Value
Basic Information
Module name 10Gbps-SFP+-SMF-1550nm-40km-
industry
Part Number 34060684
Model OSX040N05
Form factor SFP+
Application standard IEEE 802.3ae, 10GBASE-ER/EW
Connector type LC
Optical fiber type SMF
Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12
Working case temperature [°C(°F)] -40°C to 85°C(-40°F to 185°F)
DDM options SFF-8472
Environment standard RoHS
Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1
ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V
Transmission rate [bit/s] 9.953 Gbit/s
10.3125 Gbit/s
Target transmission distance [km] 40 km
Transmitter Optical Characteristics
Center wavelength [nm] 1550 nm
Tx operating wavelength range [nm] 1530 nm - 1565 nm
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 168
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
Item Value
Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) 4 dBm
[dBm]
Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -1.7 dBm
[dBm]
Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) -4.7 dBm
[dBm]
Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]
Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 3 dB
Receiver Optical Characteristics
Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1530 nm - 1565 nm
Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -15.8 dBm
Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -14.1 dBm
Overload power (AVG) [dBm] -1 dBm
Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -
NOTE
Self-loop is not supported. An optical attenuator must be added if self-loop is required.
3.2.12.6 10Gbps-SFP+-SMF-1310nm-40km-commercial (34061409)
Table 3-118 10Gbps-SFP+-SMF-1310nm-40km-commercial specifications
Item Value
Basic Information
Module name 10Gbps-SFP+-SMF-1310nm-40km-
commercial
Part Number 34061409
Model Default
Form factor SFP+
Application standard IEEE 802.3ae, 10GBASE-ER/EW
Connector type LC
Optical fiber type SMF
Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12
Working case temperature [°C(°F)] 0°C to 70°C(32°F to 158°F)
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 169
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
Item Value
DDM options SFF-8472
Environment standard RoHS
Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1
ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V
Transmission rate [bit/s] 10.3125 Gbit/s
Target transmission distance [km] 40 km
Transmitter Optical Characteristics
Center wavelength [nm] 1310 nm
Tx operating wavelength range [nm] 1260 nm- 1355nm
Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) 4 dBm
[dBm]
Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]
Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) -2 dBm
[dBm]
Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]
Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 9 dB
Receiver Optical Characteristics
Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1260 nm-1600nm
Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -20 dBm
Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -
Overload power (AVG) [dBm] -7 dBm
Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -
NOTE
The interface standard is Huawei-specific. Self-loop is not supported. An optical attenuator
must be added if self-loop is required.
3.2.12.7 10Gbps-SFP+-MMF-850nm-0.3km-commercial
Table 3-119 10Gbps-SFP+-MMF-850nm-0.3km-commercial specifications
Item Value
Basic Information
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 170
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
Item Value
Module name 10Gbps-SFP+-MMF-850nm-0.3km-
commercial
Part Number S4017482
Model OSX040N03
Form factor SFP+
Application standard IEEE 802.3ae, 10GBASE-SR/SW
Connector type LC
Optical fiber type MMF
Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12
Working case temperature [°C(°F)] 0°C to 70°C(32°F to 158°F)
DDM options SFF-8472
Environment standard RoHS
Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1
ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V
Transmission rate [bit/s] 9.953 Gbit/s
10.3125 Gbit/s
Target transmission distance [km] 0.3 km(OM3)
Transmitter Optical Characteristics
Center wavelength [nm] 850 nm
Tx operating wavelength range [nm] 840 nm - 860 nm
Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) -1 dBm
[dBm]
Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]
Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) -7.3 dBm
[dBm]
Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]
Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 3 dB
Receiver Optical Characteristics
Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 840 nm - 860 nm
Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -9.9 dBm
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 171
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
Item Value
Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -11.1 dBm
Overload power (AVG) [dBm] -1 dBm
Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -1 dBm
3.2.12.8 10Gbps-SFP+-SMF-1310nm-10km-commercial
Table 3-120 10Gbps-SFP+-SMF-1310nm-10km-commercial specifications
Item Value
Basic Information
Module name 10Gbps-SFP+-SMF-1310nm-10km-
commercial
Part Number S4017483
Model OSX001002
Form factor SFP+
Application standard IEEE 802.3ae, 10GBASE-LR/LW
Connector type LC
Optical fiber type SMF
Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12
Working case temperature [°C(°F)] 0°C to 70°C(32°F to 158°F)
DDM options SFF-8472
Environment standard RoHS
Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1
ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V
Transmission rate [bit/s] 9.953 Gbit/s
10.3125 Gbit/s
Target transmission distance [km] 10 km
Transmitter Optical Characteristics
Center wavelength [nm] 1310 nm
Tx operating wavelength range [nm] 1260 nm - 1355 nm
Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) 0.5 dBm
[dBm]
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 172
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
Item Value
Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]
Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) -8.2 dBm
[dBm]
Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]
Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 3.5 dB
Receiver Optical Characteristics
Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1260 nm - 1355 nm
Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -14.4 dBm
Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -12.6 dBm
Overload power (AVG) [dBm] 0.5 dBm
Overload power (OMA) [dBm] 0.5 dBm
3.2.12.9 10Gbps-SFP+-SMF-1550nm-40km-commercial
Table 3-121 10Gbps-SFP+-SMF-1550nm-40km-commercial specifications
Item Value
Basic Information
Module name 10Gbps-SFP+-SMF-1550nm-40km-
commercial
Part Number S4017484
Model OMXD30002
Form factor SFP+
Application standard IEEE 802.3ae, 10GBASE-ER/EW
Connector type LC
Optical fiber type SMF
Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12
Working case temperature [°C(°F)] 0°C to 70°C(32°F to 158°F)
DDM options SFF-8472
Environment standard RoHS
Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 173
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
Item Value
ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V
Transmission rate [bit/s] 9.953 Gbit/s
10.3125 Gbit/s
Target transmission distance [km] 40 km
Transmitter Optical Characteristics
Center wavelength [nm] 1550 nm
Tx operating wavelength range [nm] 1530 nm - 1565 nm
Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) 4 dBm
[dBm]
Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]
Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) -4.7 dBm
[dBm]
Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]
Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 3 dB
Receiver Optical Characteristics
Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1530 nm - 1565 nm
Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -15.8 dBm
Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -14.1 dBm
Overload power (AVG) [dBm] -1 dBm
Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -1 dBm
NOTE
Self-loop is not supported. An optical attenuator must be added if self-loop is required.
3.2.13 1.25/9.953/10.3125Gbps SFP+ Optical Module
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 174
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
3.2.13.1 1.25/9.953/10.3125Gbps-SFP+-MMF-850nm-0.3km-commercial
Table 3-122 1.25/9.953/10.3125Gbps-SFP+-MMF-850nm-0.3km-commercial
specifications
Item Value
Basic Information
Module name 1.25/9.953/10.3125Gbps-SFP+-
MMF-850nm-0.3km-commercial
Part Number 34061041
Model OSXD50N00
Form factor SFP+
Application standard IEEE 802.3ae, 10GBASE-SR/SW,
1000BASE-SX
Connector type LC
Optical fiber type MMF
Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12
Working case temperature [°C(°F)] 0°C to 70°C(32°F to 158°F)
DDM options SFF-8472
Environment standard RoHS
Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1
ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V
Transmission rate [bit/s] 1.25 Gbit/s
9.953 Gbit/s
10.3125 Gbit/s
Target transmission distance [km] 0.55 km(OM3/GE)
0.3 km(OM3/10GE)
Transmitter Optical Characteristics
Center wavelength [nm] 850 nm
Tx operating wavelength range [nm] 840 nm - 860 nm
Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) GE: 0 dBm
[dBm] 10GE: -1 dBm
Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 175
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
Item Value
Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) GE: -9.5 dBm
[dBm] 10GE: -7.3 dBm
Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]
Minimum extinction ratio [dB] GE: 9 dB
10G: 3 dB
Receiver Optical Characteristics
Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 840 nm - 860 nm
Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] GE: -17 dBm
10GE: -9.9 dBm
Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -
Overload power (AVG) [dBm] -1 dBm
Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -1 dBm
3.2.13.2 1.25/9.953/10.3125Gbps-SFP+-SMF-1310nm-10km-commercial
Table 3-123 1.25/9.953/10.3125Gbps-SFP+-SMF-1310nm-10km-commercial
specifications
Item Value
Basic Information
Module name 1.25/9.953/10.3125Gbps-SFP+-
SMF-1310nm-10km-commercial
Part Number 34061042
Model OSX010N13
Form factor SFP+
Application standard IEEE 802.3ae, 10GBASE-LR/LW,
1000BASE-LX
Connector type LC
Optical fiber type SMF
Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12
Working case temperature [°C(°F)] 0°C to 70°C(32°F to 158°F)
DDM options SFF-8472
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 176
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
Item Value
Environment standard RoHS
Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1
ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V
Transmission rate [bit/s] 1.25 Gbit/s
9.953 Gbit/s
10.3125 Gbit/s
Target transmission distance [km] GE: 10 km
10GE: 10 km
Transmitter Optical Characteristics
Center wavelength [nm] 1310 nm
Tx operating wavelength range [nm] 1260 nm - 1360 nm
Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) GE: 0.5 dBm
[dBm] 10GE: 0.5 dBm
Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]
Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) GE: -8.2 dBm
[dBm] 10GE: -8.2 dBm
Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]
Minimum extinction ratio [dB] GE: 9 dB
10GE: 3.5 dB
Receiver Optical Characteristics
Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1260 nm - 1360 nm
Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] GE: -19 dBm
10GE: -14.4 dBm
Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -
Overload power (AVG) [dBm] 0.5 dBm
Overload power (OMA) [dBm] 0.5 dBm
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 177
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
3.2.13.3 1.25/9.953/10.3125Gbps-SFP+-SMF-1550nm-40km-commercial
Table 3-124 1.25/9.953/10.3125Gbps-SFP+-SMF-1550nm-40km-commercial
specifications
Item Value
Basic Information
Module name 1.25/9.953/10.3125Gbps-SFP+-
SMF-1550nm-40km-commercial
Part Number 34061043
Model OSX040N12
Form factor SFP+
Application standard IEEE 802.3ae, 10GBASE-ER/EW,
1000BASE-LX
Connector type LC
Optical fiber type SMF
Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12
Working case temperature [°C(°F)] 0°C to 70°C(32°F to 158°F)
DDM options SFF-8472
Environment standard RoHS
Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1
ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V
Transmission rate [bit/s] 1.25 Gbit/s
9.953 Gbit/s
10.3125 Gbit/s
Target transmission distance [km] GE: 40 km
10GE: 40 km
Transmitter Optical Characteristics
Center wavelength [nm] 1550 nm
Tx operating wavelength range [nm] 1530 nm - 1565 nm
Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) GE: 4 dBm
[dBm] 10GE: 4 dBm
Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 178
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
Item Value
Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) GE: -4.7 dBm
[dBm] 10GE: -4.7 dBm
Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]
Minimum extinction ratio [dB] GE: 9 dB
10GE: 3.0 dB
Receiver Optical Characteristics
Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1530 nm - 1565 nm
Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] GE: -15.8 dBm
10GE: -15.8 dBm
Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -
Overload power (AVG) [dBm] -1 dBm
Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -1 dBm
3.2.14 10Gbps SFP+ CWDM Optical Module
3.2.14.1 10Gbps-SFP+-SMF-1511nm-70km-commercial
Table 3-125 10Gbps-SFP+-SMF-1511nm-70km-commercial specifications
Item Value
Basic Information
Module name 10Gbps-SFP+-SMF-1511nm-70km-
commercial
Part Number 34060686
Model OSX070001
Form factor SFP+
Application standard IEEE 802.3ae, 10GBASE-X
Connector type LC
Optical fiber type SMF
Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12
Working case temperature [°C(°F)] 0°C to 70°C(32°F to 158°F)
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 179
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
Item Value
DDM options SFF-8472
Environment standard RoHS
Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1
ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V
Transmission rate [bit/s] 9.953 Gbit/s
10.3125 Gbit/s
Target transmission distance [km] 70 km
Transmitter Optical Characteristics
Center wavelength [nm] 1511 nm
Tx operating wavelength range [nm] 1504.5 nm - 1517.5 nm
Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) 4 dBm
[dBm]
Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]
Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) 0 dBm
[dBm]
Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]
Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 8.2 dB
Receiver Optical Characteristics
Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1460 nm - 1620 nm
Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -23 dBm
Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -
Overload power (AVG) [dBm] -7 dBm
Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -
3.2.14.2 10Gbps-SFP+-SMF-1471nm-70km-commercial
Table 3-126 10Gbps-SFP+-SMF-1471nm-70km-commercial specifications
Item Value
Basic Information
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 180
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
Item Value
Module name 10Gbps-SFP+-SMF-1471nm-70km-
commercial
Part Number 34060687
Model OSX070002
Form factor SFP+
Application standard IEEE 802.3ae, 10GBASE-X
Connector type LC
Optical fiber type SMF
Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12
Working case temperature [°C(°F)] 0°C to 70°C(32°F to 158°F)
DDM options SFF-8472
Environment standard RoHS
Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1
ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V
Transmission rate [bit/s] 9.953 Gbit/s
10.3125 Gbit/s
Target transmission distance [km] 70 km
Transmitter Optical Characteristics
Center wavelength [nm] 1471 nm
Tx operating wavelength range [nm] 1464.5 nm - 1477.5 nm
Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) 4 dBm
[dBm]
Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]
Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) 0 dBm
[dBm]
Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]
Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 8.2 dB
Receiver Optical Characteristics
Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1460 nm - 1620 nm
Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -23 dBm
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 181
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
Item Value
Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -
Overload power (AVG) [dBm] -7 dBm
Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -
3.2.14.3 10Gbps-SFP+-SMF-1491nm-70km-commercial
Table 3-127 10Gbps-SFP+-SMF-1491nm-70km-commercial specifications
Item Value
Basic Information
Module name 10Gbps-SFP+-SMF-1491nm-70km-
commercial
Part Number 34060688
Model OSX070003
Form factor SFP+
Application standard IEEE 802.3ae, 10GBASE-X
Connector type LC
Optical fiber type SMF
Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12
Working case temperature [°C(°F)] 0°C to 70°C(32°F to 158°F)
DDM options SFF-8472
Environment standard RoHS
Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1
ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V
Transmission rate [bit/s] 9.953 Gbit/s
10.3125 Gbit/s
Target transmission distance [km] 70 km
Transmitter Optical Characteristics
Center wavelength [nm] 1491 nm
Tx operating wavelength range [nm] 1484.5 nm - 1497.5 nm
Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) 4 dBm
[dBm]
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 182
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
Item Value
Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]
Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) 0 dBm
[dBm]
Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]
Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 8.2 dB
Receiver Optical Characteristics
Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1460 nm - 1620 nm
Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -23 dBm
Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -
Overload power (AVG) [dBm] -7 dBm
Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -
3.2.14.4 10Gbps-SFP+-SMF-1531nm-70km-commercial
Table 3-128 10Gbps-SFP+-SMF-1531nm-70km-commercial specifications
Item Value
Basic Information
Module name 10Gbps-SFP+-SMF-1531nm-70km-
commercial
Part Number 34060689
Model OSX070004
Form factor SFP+
Application standard IEEE 802.3ae, 10GBASE-X
Connector type LC
Optical fiber type SMF
Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12
Working case temperature [°C(°F)] 0°C to 70°C(32°F to 158°F)
DDM options SFF-8472
Environment standard RoHS
Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 183
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
Item Value
ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V
Transmission rate [bit/s] 9.953 Gbit/s
10.3125 Gbit/s
Target transmission distance [km] 70 km
Transmitter Optical Characteristics
Center wavelength [nm] 1531 nm
Tx operating wavelength range [nm] 1524.5 nm - 1537.5 nm
Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) 4 dBm
[dBm]
Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]
Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) 0 dBm
[dBm]
Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]
Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 8.2 dB
Receiver Optical Characteristics
Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1460 nm - 1620 nm
Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -23 dBm
Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -
Overload power (AVG) [dBm] -7 dBm
Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -
3.2.14.5 10Gbps-SFP+-SMF-1551nm-70km-commercial
Table 3-129 10Gbps-SFP+-SMF-1551nm-70km-commercial specifications
Item Value
Basic Information
Module name 10Gbps-SFP+-SMF-1551nm-70km-
commercial
Part Number 34060690
Model OSX070005
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 184
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
Item Value
Form factor SFP+
Application standard IEEE 802.3ae, 10GBASE-X
Connector type LC
Optical fiber type SMF
Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12
Working case temperature [°C(°F)] 0°C to 70°C(32°F to 158°F)
DDM options SFF-8472
Environment standard RoHS
Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1
ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V
Transmission rate [bit/s] 9.953 Gbit/s
10.3125 Gbit/s
Target transmission distance [km] 70 km
Transmitter Optical Characteristics
Center wavelength [nm] 1551 nm
Tx operating wavelength range [nm] 1544.5 nm - 1557.5 nm
Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) 4 dBm
[dBm]
Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]
Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) 0 dBm
[dBm]
Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]
Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 8.2 dB
Receiver Optical Characteristics
Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1460 nm - 1620 nm
Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -23 dBm
Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -
Overload power (AVG) [dBm] -7 dBm
Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 185
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
3.2.14.6 10Gbps-SFP+-SMF-1571nm-70km-commercial
Table 3-130 10Gbps-SFP+-SMF-1571nm-70km-commercial specifications
Item Value
Basic Information
Module name 10Gbps-SFP+-SMF-1571nm-70km-
commercial
Part Number 34060691
Model OSX070006
Form factor SFP+
Application standard IEEE 802.3ae, 10GBASE-X
Connector type LC
Optical fiber type SMF
Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12
Working case temperature [°C(°F)] 0°C to 70°C(32°F to 158°F)
DDM options SFF-8472
Environment standard RoHS
Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1
ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V
Transmission rate [bit/s] 9.953 Gbit/s
10.3125 Gbit/s
Target transmission distance [km] 70 km
Transmitter Optical Characteristics
Center wavelength [nm] 1571 nm
Tx operating wavelength range [nm] 1564.5 nm - 1577.5 nm
Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) 4 dBm
[dBm]
Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]
Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) 0 dBm
[dBm]
Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]
Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 8.2 dB
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 186
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
Item Value
Receiver Optical Characteristics
Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1460 nm - 1620 nm
Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -23 dBm
Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -
Overload power (AVG) [dBm] -7 dBm
Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -
3.2.14.7 10Gbps-SFP+-SMF-1591nm-70km-commercial
Table 3-131 10Gbps-SFP+-SMF-1591nm-70km-commercial specifications
Item Value
Basic Information
Module name 10Gbps-SFP+-SMF-1591nm-70km-
commercial
Part Number 34060692
Model OSX070007
Form factor SFP+
Application standard IEEE 802.3ae, 10GBASE-X
Connector type LC
Optical fiber type SMF
Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12
Working case temperature [°C(°F)] 0°C to 70°C(32°F to 158°F)
DDM options SFF-8472
Environment standard RoHS
Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1
ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V
Transmission rate [bit/s] 9.953 Gbit/s
10.3125 Gbit/s
Target transmission distance [km] 70 km
Transmitter Optical Characteristics
Center wavelength [nm] 1591 nm
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 187
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
Item Value
Tx operating wavelength range [nm] 1584.5 nm - 1597.5 nm
Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) 4 dBm
[dBm]
Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]
Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) 0 dBm
[dBm]
Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]
Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 8.2 dB
Receiver Optical Characteristics
Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1460 nm - 1620 nm
Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -21 dBm
Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -
Overload power (AVG) [dBm] -7 dBm
Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -
3.2.14.8 10Gbps-SFP+-SMF-1611nm-70km-commercial
Table 3-132 10Gbps-SFP+-SMF-1611nm-70km-commercial specifications
Item Value
Basic Information
Module name 10Gbps-SFP+-SMF-1611nm-70km-
commercial
Part Number 34060693
Model OSX070008
Form factor SFP+
Application standard IEEE 802.3ae, 10GBASE-X
Connector type LC
Optical fiber type SMF
Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12
Working case temperature [°C(°F)] 0°C to 70°C(32°F to 158°F)
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 188
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
Item Value
DDM options SFF-8472
Environment standard RoHS
Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1
ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V
Transmission rate [bit/s] 9.953 Gbit/s
10.3125 Gbit/s
Target transmission distance [km] 70 km
Transmitter Optical Characteristics
Center wavelength [nm] 1611 nm
Tx operating wavelength range [nm] 1604.5 nm - 1617.4 nm
Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) 4 dBm
[dBm]
Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]
Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) 0 dBm
[dBm]
Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]
Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 8.2 dB
Receiver Optical Characteristics
Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1460 nm - 1620 nm
Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -21 dBm
Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -
Overload power (AVG) [dBm] -7 dBm
Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -
3.2.15 10Gbps SFP+ BIDI Optical Module
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 189
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
3.2.15.1 10Gbps-SFP+-SMF-1270nm(Tx)/1330nm(Rx)-40km-commercial
(02311JNF)
Table 3-133 10Gbps-SFP+-SMF-1270nm(Tx)/1330nm(Rx)-40km-commercial
specifications
Item Value
Basic Information
Module name 10Gbps-SFP+-SMF-1270nm(Tx)/
1330nm(Rx)-40km-commercial
Part Number 02311JNF
Model OSX040B10
Form factor SFP+
Application standard IEEE 802.3ae, 10GBASE-BX-U
Connector type LC
Optical fiber type SMF
Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12
Working case temperature [°C(°F)] 0°C to 70°C(32°F to 158°F)
DDM options SFF-8472
Environment standard RoHS
Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1
ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V
Transmission rate [bit/s] 9.953 Gbit/s
10.3125 Gbit/s
Target transmission distance [km] 40 km
Transmitter Optical Characteristics
Center wavelength [nm] 1270 nm
Tx operating wavelength range [nm] 1260 nm - 1280 nm
Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) 5 dBm
[dBm]
Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]
Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) 0 dBm
[dBm]
Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 190
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
Item Value
Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 3.5 dB
Receiver Optical Characteristics
Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1320 nm - 1340 nm
Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -18 dBm
Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -
Overload power (AVG) [dBm] -9 dBm
Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -
3.2.15.2 10Gbps-SFP+-SMF-1330nm(Tx)/1270nm(Rx)-40km-commercial
(02311JNQ)
Table 3-134 10Gbps-SFP+-SMF-1330nm(Tx)/1270nm(Rx)-40km-commercial
specifications
Item Value
Basic Information
Module name 10Gbps-SFP+-SMF-1330nm(Tx)/
1270nm(Rx)-40km-commercial
Part Number 02311JNQ
Model OSX040B11
Form factor SFP+
Application standard IEEE 802.3ae, 10GBASE-BX40-D
Connector type LC
Optical fiber type SMF
Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12
Working case temperature [°C(°F)] 0°C to 70°C(32°F to 158°F)
DDM options SFF-8472
Environment standard RoHS
Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1
ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V
Transmission rate [bit/s] 9.953 Gbit/s
10.3125 Gbit/s
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 191
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
Item Value
Target transmission distance [km] 40 km
Transmitter Optical Characteristics
Center wavelength [nm] 1330 nm
Tx operating wavelength range [nm] 1320 nm - 1340 nm
Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) 5 dBm
[dBm]
Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]
Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) 0 dBm
[dBm]
Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]
Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 3.5 dB
Receiver Optical Characteristics
Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1260 nm - 1280 nm
Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -18 dBm
Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -
Overload power (AVG) [dBm] -9 dBm
Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -
3.2.15.3 10Gbps-SFP+-SMF-1270nm(Tx)/1330nm(Rx)-10km-industry
Table 3-135 10Gbps-SFP+-SMF-1270nm(Tx)/1330nm(Rx)-10km-industry
specifications
Item Value
Basic Information
Module name 10Gbps-SFP+-SMF-1270nm(Tx)/
1330nm(Rx)-10km-industry
Part Number 34060544-001
Model SFP-GE-LX-SM1270-BIDI
Form factor SFP+
Application standard IEEE 802.3ae, 10GBASE-BX10-U
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 192
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
Item Value
Connector type LC
Optical fiber type SMF
Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12
Working case temperature [°C(°F)] -40°C to 85°C(-40°F to 185°F)
DDM options SFF-8472
Environment standard RoHS
Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1
ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V
Transmission rate [bit/s] 9.953 Gbit/s
10.3125 Gbit/s
Target transmission distance [km] 10 km
Transmitter Optical Characteristics
Center wavelength [nm] 1270 nm
Tx operating wavelength range [nm] 1260 nm - 1280 nm
Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) 0.5 dBm
[dBm]
Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]
Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) -8.2 dBm
[dBm]
Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -5.2 dBm
[dBm]
Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 3.5 dB
Receiver Optical Characteristics
Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1320 nm - 1340 nm
Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -14.4 dBm
Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -10.3 dBm
Overload power (AVG) [dBm] 0.5 dBm
Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 193
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
3.2.15.4 10Gbps-SFP+-SMF-1330nm(Tx)/1270nm(Rx)-10km-industry
Table 3-136 10Gbps-SFP+-SMF-1330nm(Tx)/1270nm(Rx)-10km-industry
specifications
Item Value
Basic Information
Module name 10Gbps-SFP+-SMF-1330nm(Tx)/
1270nm(Rx)-10km-industry
Part Number 34060546-001
Model SFP-GE-LX-SM1330-BIDI
Form factor SFP+
Application standard IEEE 802.3ae, 10GBASE-BX10-D
Connector type LC
Optical fiber type SMF
Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12
Working case temperature [°C(°F)] -40°C to 85°C(-40°F to 185°F)
DDM options SFF-8472
Environment standard RoHS
Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1
ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V
Transmission rate [bit/s] 9.953 Gbit/s
10.3125 Gbit/s
Target transmission distance [km] 10 km
Transmitter Optical Characteristics
Center wavelength [nm] 1330 nm
Tx operating wavelength range [nm] 1320 nm - 1340 nm
Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) 0.5 dBm
[dBm]
Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]
Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) -8.2 dBm
[dBm]
Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -5.2 dBm
[dBm]
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 194
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
Item Value
Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 3.5 dB
Receiver Optical Characteristics
Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1260 nm - 1280 nm
Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -14.4 dBm
Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -12.6 dBm
Overload power (AVG) [dBm] 0.5 dBm
Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -
3.2.16 10Gbps SFP+ OTN Optical Module
3.2.16.1 10Gbps-SFP+-SMF-1528nm~1568nm-80km-commercial
Table 3-137 10Gbps-SFP+-SMF-1528nm~1568nm-80km-commercial specifications
Item Value
Basic Information
Module name 10Gbps-SFP+-
SMF-1528nm~1568nm-80km-
commercial
Part Number 34060852
Model ODX0880T1
Form factor SFP+
Application standard IEEE 802.3ae, 10GBASE-ZR/ZW, ITUT
G.709
Connector type LC
Optical fiber type SMF
Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12(10GE)
<1x10E-4(OTU2, OTU2e)
Working case temperature [°C(°F)] 0°C to 70°C(32°F to 158°F)
DDM options SFF-8472
Environment standard RoHS
Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 195
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
Item Value
ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V
Transmission rate [bit/s] 9.953 Gbit/s
10.3125 Gbit/s
11.1 Gbit/s
Target transmission distance [km] 80 km
Transmitter Optical Characteristics
Center wavelength [nm] -
Tx operating wavelength range [nm] 1529.163 nm - 1560.606 nm
Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) 3 dBm
[dBm]
Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]
Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) -1 dBm
[dBm]
Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]
Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 9 dB
Receiver Optical Characteristics
Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1260 nm - 1600 nm
Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -24 dBm(10GE 1e-12)
-26 dBm(OTU2,OTU2e,1e-4)
Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -
Overload power (AVG) [dBm] -7 dBm
Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -
NOTE
The interface standard is Huawei-specific.
3.2.17 10Gbps SFP+ DWDM Optical Module
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 196
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
3.2.17.1 10Gbps-SFP+-SMF-1528nm~1568nm-40km-commercial
Table 3-138 10Gbps-SFP+-SMF-1528nm~1568nm-40km-commercial specifications
Item Value
Basic Information
Module name 10Gbps-SFP+-
SMF-1528nm~1568nm-40km-
commercial
Part Number 02314MED
Model OSX040C01
Form factor SFP+
Application standard IEEE 802.3ae, 10GBASE-ER/EW, ITUT G.
709
Connector type LC
Optical fiber type SMF
Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12(10GE)
<1x10E-4(OTU2, OTU2e)
Working case temperature [°C(°F)] 0°C to 70°C(32°F to 158°F)
DDM options SFF-INF-8077i
Environment standard RoHS
Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1
ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V
Transmission rate [bit/s] 9.953 Gbit/s
10.3125 Gbit/s
11.1 Gbit/s
Target transmission distance [km] 40 km
Transmitter Optical Characteristics
Center wavelength [nm] -
Tx operating wavelength range [nm] 1529.163 nm - 1567.133 nm
Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) 3 dBm
[dBm]
Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]
Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) -1 dBm
[dBm]
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 197
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
Item Value
Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]
Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 8.2 dB
Receiver Optical Characteristics
Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1525 nm - 1575 nm
Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -16 dBm(EOL)(@ BER 1E-12,
9.95Gbps~10.7Gbps)
-19 dBm(EOL)(@ BER 2E-03, 11.3Gbps,
dispersion 800ps/nm, at room
temperature and OSNR > 31dB)
Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -
Overload power (AVG) [dBm] -1 dBm
Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -
3.2.17.2 10Gbps-SFP+-SMF-1528nm~1568nm-80km-commercial
Table 3-139 10Gbps-SFP+-SMF-1528nm~1568nm-80km-commercial specifications
Item Value
Basic Information
Module name 10Gbps-SFP+-
SMF-1528nm~1568nm-80km-
commercial
Part Number 34060852
Model ODX0880T1
Form factor SFP+
Application standard IEEE 802.3ae, 10GBASE-ZR/ZW, ITUT
G.709
Connector type LC
Optical fiber type SMF
Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12(10GE)
<1x10E-4(OTU2, OTU2e)
Working case temperature [°C(°F)] 0°C to 70°C(32°F to 158°F)
DDM options SFF-8472
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 198
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
Item Value
Environment standard RoHS
Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1
ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V
Transmission rate [bit/s] 9.953 Gbit/s
10.3125 Gbit/s
11.1 Gbit/s
Target transmission distance [km] 80 km
Transmitter Optical Characteristics
Center wavelength [nm] -
Tx operating wavelength range [nm] 1529.163 nm - 1560.606 nm
Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) 3 dBm
[dBm]
Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]
Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) -1 dBm
[dBm]
Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]
Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 9 dB
Receiver Optical Characteristics
Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1260 nm - 1600 nm
Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -24 dBm(10GE 1e-12)
-26 dBm(OTU2,OTU2e,1e-4)
Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -
Overload power (AVG) [dBm] -7 dBm
Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -
NOTE
The interface standard is Huawei-specific.
3.3 Cables
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 199
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
3.3.1 AC Power Cable
This section describes the structure and technical specifications of the AC-input
power cable.
NO TICE
If no special requirements are imposed on power cables, power cables are
delivered according to default configurations. Otherwise, power cables need to be
purchased locally.
Overview
An AC power cable is used to connect to the AC power module of a device to
supply power to the device.
NO TE
Cables must be in compliance with standards of the destination country or region. The
actual cable type depends on the requirements of the target country or customer.
Appearance
Figure 3-19 Connector C13 (PDU)
Figure 3-20 Connector C13 (wall-mounted)
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 200
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
Figure 3-21 Heat shrink tubing
Technical Specifications
Table 3-140 Technical specifications of AC power cables in different countries or
regions (PDU)
Par Mod Description Connec Con Len Num Fire
t el tor X1 nect gth ber Rati
Nu or of ng
mb X2 Core
er s
040 - Power Cords Cable,China C14SM C13S 1.5 3 -
501 AC Power 250V10A, F m cores
88 1.5m,C14SM,
227IEC53(RVV)1.0mm2(3C
),C13SF,PDU Cable
040 - Power Cords Cable,Europe C14SM C13S 1.8 3 -
5G0 AC 250V10A, F m cores
19 1.8m,C14SM,H05VV-F-
3*1.00mm2,C13SF,PDU
Cable
040 - Power cord,Europe AC C14SM C13S 3 m 3 -
5G0 250V10A, F cores
19- 3.0m,C14SM,H05VV-F-
002 3*1.00^2,C13SF,250V,
10A,PDU Cable
040 - Power Cords Cable,North C14SM C13S 1.8 3 -
5G0 America AC Power F m cores
29 250V10A,1.8m,C14SM,SJT
18AWG(3C),C13SF,PDU
Cable
040 - Power Cords Cable,Japan C14SM C13S 1.8 3 -
5G0 AC Power 250V12A, F m cores
2D 1.8m,C14SM,HVCTF
1.25mm2(3C),C13SF,PDU
Cable
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 201
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
Par Mod Description Connec Con Len Num Fire
t el tor X1 nect gth ber Rati
Nu or of ng
mb X2 Core
er s
040 - Power Cords C14SM C13S 1.8 3 -
5G0 Cable,Australia AC Power F m cores
2F 250V10A,
1.8m,C14SM,H05VV-
F-1.0mm2(3C),C13SF,PDU
Cable
040 - Power Cords Cable,Korea C14SM C13S 1.8 3 -
5G0 AC Power 250V10A, F m cores
2H 1.8m,C14SM,H05VV-
F-1.0mm2(3C),C13SF,PDU
Cable
Table 3-141 Technical specifications of AC power cables in different countries or
regions (wall-mounted)
Par Mod Description Connec Con Len Num Fire
t el tor X1 nect gth ber Rati
Nu or of ng
mb X2 Core
er s
040 - Power Cords Cable,China PISM C13S 3m 3 -
411 AC Power 250V10A, F cores
04 3.0m,PISM,
227IEC53-1.0mm2(3C),C13
SF,Black
040 - Power Cable,America AC PBSM C13S 3m 3 -
207 Power Cable,125V10A, F cores
28 3.0m,PBSM,
18SJT(3C),C13SF,Black
040 - Power cord,Europe AC PFSM C13S 3m 3 -
410 Power Cable,250V10A, F cores
56 3.0m,PFSM,(H05VVF
1.0mm2(3C)),C13SF,250V,
10A,BLack
040 - Power Cable,Britain AC PGAM C13S 3m 3 -
408 Power Cable 250V10A, F cores
90 3.0m,PGAM ,H05VV-
F-1.0mm2(3C),C13SF,Black
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 202
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
Par Mod Description Connec Con Len Num Fire
t el tor X1 nect gth ber Rati
Nu or of ng
mb X2 Core
er s
040 - Power Cable,Japan AC PBSM C13S 3m 3 -
408 Power Cable 125V12A, F cores
87 3.0m,PBSM,HVCTF-1.25m
m2(3C),C13SF,Black
040 - Power cord,BS546 PM- C13S 3m 3 -
408 250V10A,3.0m,PM- IAM F cores
89 IAM,H05VV-
F-1.5mm2(3C),C13SF,250V,
10A,Black
040 - Power Cords PISM C13S 3m 3 -
408 Cable,Australia AC Power F cores
88 Cable,250V 10A,
3.0m,PISM,H05VV-
F-1.0mm2(3C),C13SF,Black
040 - Power Cable,Switzerland PJSM C13S 3m 3 -
411 AC Power Cable 250V10A, F cores
19 3.0m,PJSM ,H05VV-
F-1.0mm2(3C),C13SF,Black
040 - Power Cable,Italy AC PLSM C13S 3m 3 -
411 Power Cable 250V10A, F cores
20 3.0m,PLSM,H05VV-
F-1.0mm2(3C),C13SF,Black
040 - Power Cords PISM C13S 3m 3 -
477 Cable,Argentina AC Power F cores
85 250V10A,
3.0m,PISM,H05VV-
F-1.0mm2(3C),C13SF,Black
041 - Power Cable,Brazil AC PNSM C13S 3m 3 -
502 Power Cable 250V10A, F cores
58 3.0m,PNSM ,H05VV-
F-1.0mm2(3C),C13SF,Black
040 - Power Cords Cable,Korea PFSM C13S 3m 3 -
5G0 AC Power 250V10A, F cores
28 3m,PFSM,H05VV-F
3*1.0mm2(3C),C13SF,Black
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 203
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
Par Mod Description Connec Con Len Num Fire
t el tor X1 nect gth ber Rati
Nu or of ng
mb X2 Core
er s
040 - Power Cords PKSM C13S 3m 3 -
5G0 Cable,Denmark AC Power F cores
2K 250V10A,
3m,PKSM,H05VV-
F-3*1.0mm2(3C),C13SF,Bla
ck
040 - Power Cords Cable,India PM- C13S 3m 3 -
510 AC Power 250V10A, IIAM F cores
35 3.0m,PM-IIAM,IS
694-1.0mm2(3C), C13 SF,
250V,10A,Black
040 - Power cord,South Africa PMAM C13S 3m 3 -
510 AC Power 250V10A, F cores
80 3m,PMAM,H05VV-
F-1.0mm2(3C),C13SF,250V,
10A,Black
040 - Power cord,Taiwan AC PBSM C13S 3m 3 -
521 125V11A, F cores
37 3.0m,PBSM,HVCTF
3*1.25mm2,C13SF,125V,
11A,Black,BSMI
3.3.2 Fiber Jumper
Overview
A fiber jumper consists of one or more optical fibers of a certain length and the
optical connectors at both ends. A fiber jumper connects an optical module to a
fiber terminal box.
Comply with the following rules when selecting fiber jumpers:
1. Determine the length of fiber jumpers based on the onsite cabling distance.
2. Determine the fiber type based on the optical module type.
– Use a multimode fiber jumper for a multimode optical module.
– Use a single-mode fiber jumper for a single-mode optical module.
3. Determine the optical connector type based on the port type.
Ensure that the optical connector at each end of a fiber jumper is the same
type as the port to which it will be connected.
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 204
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
NO TICE
The optical transmission module of the multi-transverse mode needs to be
connected to the multi-mode fiber. The optical transmitting module in single-
longitudinal or multi-longitudinal mode needs to be connected to the single-
mode fiber.
Optical Fiber
Optical fibers are classified into single-mode fibers and multimode fibers.
● Single-mode fibers have a diameter of 5 μm to 10 μm and transmit laser in
one mode under a specified wavelength. These fibers support a wide
frequency band and a large transmission capacity, so they are used for long-
distance transmission. Most single-mode fibers are yellow, as shown in Figure
3-23.
● Multimode fibers have a diameter of 50 μm or 62.5 μm and transmit laser in
multiple modes with a specified wavelength. These fibers have a lower
transmission capacity than single-mode fibers and are used for short-distance
transmission. Model dispersion occurs during transmission over multimode
fibers.
In the latest cabling infrastructure of ISO/IEC 11801, multimode fibers are
classified into four categories: OM1, OM2, OM3, and OM4.
– OM1: traditional 62.5 μm/125 μm multimode fibers. OM1 fibers have a
large core diameter and numerical aperture, and provide high light
gathering ability and bending resistance.
– OM2: traditional 50 μm/125 μm multimode fibers. OM2 fibers have a
small core diameter and numerical aperture. Compared with OM1 fibers,
OM2 fibers provide higher bandwidth because they significantly reduce
the modal dispersion. When transmitting data at 1 Gbit/s with 850 nm
wavelength, OM1 and OM2 fibers support maximum link lengths of 220
m and 550 m, respectively. OM1 and OM2 fibers can provide sufficient
bandwidth within a distance of 300 m. Generally, OM1 and OM2 fibers
are orange, as shown in Figure 3-24.
– OM3: new-generation multimode fibers, with longer transmission
distances than OM1 and OM2 fibers.
– OM4: laser optimized multimode fibers with 50 μm core diameter. OM4
is an improvement to OM3 and only increases the modal bandwidth.
OM4 fibers provide 4700 MHz*km of modal bandwidth, whereas OM3
fibers provide only 2000 MHz*km of modal bandwidth. Generally, OM3
and OM4 fibers are light green. You can identify OM3 and OM4 fibers by
their labels or printed marks.
Figure 3-22 shows an LC/PC optical connector.
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 205
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
Figure 3-22 LC/PC optical connector
NO TICE
When connecting or removing an LC/PC optical connector, align the connector
with the optical port and do not rotate the fiber. Pay attention to the following
points:
● To connect a fiber, align the optical connector with the optical port and gently
insert the optical fiber into the port.
● To remove a fiber, press the clip on the connector, push the connector inward
slightly, and pull the fiber out.
Appearance
Figure 3-23 shows the appearance of an LC single-mode fiber.
Figure 3-23 Appearance of an LC single-mode fiber
Figure 3-24 shows the appearance of an LC multimode fiber.
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 206
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
Figure 3-24 Appearance of an LC multimode fiber
3.3.3 Ethernet Cable
Overview
Ethernet cables are also referred to as network cables and can be classified into
straight-through cables and crossover cables according to the connection sequence
of the copper cores in the cables.
The Ethernet service interfaces on the equipment support Auto MDI-X to the
straight-through cables and crossover cables. Hence, you can connect either type
of the network cables to the Ethernet service interfaces as required.
NO TE
Ethernet cables need to be made on site.
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 207
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
Appearance
Figure 3-25 Appearance of the network cable
Cable Pinouts
Table 3-142 Pin assignment of the straight-through cable connector
Connector X1 Pin Connector X2 Pin Color Relation
X1.1 X2.1 White-orange Twisted pair
X1.2 X2.2 Orange
X1.3 X2.3 White-green Twisted pair
X1.6 X2.6 Green
X1.4 X2.4 Blue Twisted pair
X1.5 X2.5 White-blue
X1.7 X2.7 White-brown Twisted pair
X1.8 X2.8 Brown
Table 3-143 Pin assignment of the crossover cable connector
Connector X1 Pin Connector X2 Pin Color Relation
X1.1 X2.3 White-orange Twisted pair
X1.2 X2.6 Orange
X1.3 X2.1 White-green Twisted pair
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 208
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
Connector X1 Pin Connector X2 Pin Color Relation
X1.6 X2.2 Green
X1.4 X2.4 Blue Twisted pair
X1.5 X2.5 White-blue
X1.7 X2.7 White-brown Twisted pair
X1.8 X2.8 Brown
Technical Specifications
Table 3-144 Technical specifications of the straight-through cable
Descr Twisted-Pair Cable, 100ohm, Category 5e, STP, 0.52mm, 24AWG, 8Cores,
iptio 4Pairs, PANTONE 430U
n
Conn Network Interface Connector, 8-Bit 8PIN, Shielded, Crystal Model
ector Connector, 24-26AWG, Leads Single Solide Cable
X1
Conn Network Interface Connector, 8-Bit 8PIN, Shielded, Crystal Model
ector Connector, 24-26AWG, Leads Single Solide Cable
X2
Leng 1m,3m,5m,10m,20m,30m
th
Inner 0.52mm
Diam
eter
Num 8 Cores
ber
of
Cores
Table 3-145 Technical specifications of the crossover cable
Descr Twisted-Pair Cable, 100ohm, Category 5e, STP, 0.52mm, 24AWG, 8Cores,
iptio 4Pairs, PANTONE 430U
n
Conn Network Interface Connector, 8-Bit 8PIN, Shielded, Crystal Model
ector Connector, 24-26AWG, Leads Single Solide Cable
X1
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 209
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
Conn Network Interface Connector, 8-Bit 8PIN, Shielded, Crystal Model
ector Connector, 24-26AWG, Leads Single Solide Cable
X2
Leng 2m,3m,5m,10m,20m,30m
th
Inner 0.52mm
Diam
eter
Num 8 Cores
ber
of
Cores
3.3.4 Chassis Ground Cable
Overview
One end of a chassis ground cable is connected to the ground screw on the right-
side cabinet column, and the other end is connected to the ground screw on the
chassis.
Appearance
Figure1 shows the appearance of chassis ground cable.
Figure 3-26 Appearance of chassis ground cable.
1. OT one-hole naked crimping connector
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 210
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
Technical Specifications
Table 3-146 Technical specifications of chassis ground cable
Part Mo Description Con Connec Le Nu Fire
Nu del nec tor X2 ngt mbe Rating
mb tor h r of
er X1 Cor
es
250 CPG Electronic|Electric Cable, 141 141700 10 - IEC
306 N01 450V/750V,H07Z-K 700 56: m 60332-
98 001 UL3386,10mm2,Yellow/ 16: Naked 1
Green,80A,LSZH Nak Crimpin &VW-1
Cable,VDE,UL ed g
Cri Termina
mpi l,OT,
ng 10mm2,
Ter M8,Tin
min Plating,
al,O Naked
T, Ring
10 Termina
mm l
2,M
6,Ti
n
Plati
ng,
Nak
ed
Rin
g
Ter
min
al
3.3.5 Management Cable
A device uses Ethernet interfaces to input or output network management signals.
Both the management network interface MGMT-ETH and management serial
interface Console use RJ-45 connectors. Table 3-147 and Table 3-148 describe the
pins of the MGMT-ETH and Console interfaces, respectively.
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 211
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
Table 3-147 MGMT-ETH interface
Connector Pin Description
1 Transmit positive of the MGMT-ETH
interface
2 Transmit negative of the MGMT-ETH
interface
3 Receive positive of the MGMT-ETH
interface
6 Receive negative of the MGMT-ETH
interface
4 Not defined
5 Not defined
7 Not defined
8 Not defined
Table 3-148 CONSOLE interface
Connector Pin Description
1 Not defined
2 Not defined
3 Transmit end of the Console interface
4 Not defined
5 Ground end of the Console interface
6 Receive end of the Console interface
7 Not defined
8 Not defined
Management Network Interface Cable
When the MGMT-ETH interface functions as a management network interface, an
Ethernet cable is used as the management cable to implement communication
between the device and network management computer.
The MGMT-ETH interface supports auto-sensing of the straight-through cable
mode and crossover cable mode. For details about Ethernet cables, see Hardware
Description > Cables > Ethernet Cable.
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 212
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
Console Interface Cable
The panel of the device has an independent Console interface. The console
interface uses a serial cable as the management cable to implement
communication between the device and the network management computer.
Figure 3-27 shows the serial cable.
Figure 3-27 Standard serial cable (04040838 - Single Cable,Serial Port Cable,
3m,D9F,CC2P0.32PWG1U,MP8-VI,S3026V)
Table 3-149 describes the pin assignment of a serial cable.
Table 3-149 Pin assignment of a serial cable
Connector X1 Connector X2 Pin Color Description
Pin
X1.4 X2.5 White and green Ground end of
the Console
interface
X1.5 X2.6 Green Receive end of
the Console
interface
X1.8 X2.3 White and blue Transmit end of
the Console
interface
NO TICE
To use a USB-to-Ethernet serial cable, you need to download the driver from the
website http://www.wch-ic.com/products/CH340.html and configure the driver
as required.
3.3.6 USB-to-Ethernet Cable
This section describes the structure and technical specifications of the USB-to-
Ethernet cable.
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 213
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
Overview
One end of a USB-to-Ethernet cable is a USB port used to connect to a client, and
the other end is split into two RJ45 connectors used to connect to routers. The two
RJ45 connectors include one standard console port and one non-standard console
port. Pin assignment for the two ports is different. For details, see Table 1.
Appearance
Figure 3-28 Structure of the USB-to-Ethernet cable
Pin Assignment
Table 3-150 Pin assignment of the USB-to-Ethernet cable
Wire Rela Colo Desc Start Conv End Desc Colo Rela Wire
tion r ripti Pin erter Pin ripti r tion
on on
W3- Pair Whit +5V X1.1 USB X2.6 RS23 Blue Pair W1-
Main e DC to 2_RX Labe
Labe RS23 l 1
l Blue Data X1.2 2 X2.3 RS23 Whit (RS2
- conv 2_TX e 32)
Pair Oran Data X1.3 ersio X2.5 GND Oran -
ge + n ge
Whit GND X1.4 X3.5 RS23 Blue Pair W2-
e 2_RX Labe
l 2
- - - - - X3.8 RS23 Whit (Spe
2_TX e cial
- - - - - X3.4 GND Oran - RS23
ge 2)
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 214
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
Technical Specifications
Table 3-151 Technical specifications of the USB-to-Ethernet cable
Part Mod Description Conn Conn Leng Nu Fire
Num el ector ector th mbe Ratin
ber X1 X2 r of g
Core
s
0407 - Signal Cable,USB-to- USB- MP8- 1.5 m - -
1851 Ethernet cable, A(Ma II
1.5m,USB- le)
A(Male),CC2P0.48B(S),
2*MP8-II
NO TICE
To use the USB-to-Ethernet serial cable, download the driver from the website and
configure the driver as required. Download the driver from http://www.wch-
ic.com/search?q=CH340&t=downloads.
3.4 Power Distribution
3.4.1 PDC120S12-CN (DC-DC Module,120W,-40degC,
65degC,-72V,28.8V,11.4V-12.6V,12V/10A,0,2000uF)
Overview
Table 3-152 Basic information about the PDC120S12-CN
Item Details
Description DC-DC Module,120W,-40degC,
65degC,-72V,28.8V,11.4V-12.6V,12V/
10A,0,2000uF
Part Number 02270211
Model PDC120S12-CN
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 215
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
Appearance
Figure 3-29 Appearance of the PDC120S12-CN (PDC120S12-CN)
Version Mapping
Table 3-153 Mappings between PDC120S12-CN and product
Product First Supported Unsupported Limitations
Version Model
NetEngine A821 E V800R022C00SPC - -
600
NetEngine A822 E V800R022C00SPC - -
600
NetEngine A813 E V800R022C00SPC - -
600
Functions and Features
Table 3-154 Functions and features of the PDC120S12-CN
Functions and Features Description
Input overvoltage protection In this protection state, the power
module stops supplying power to a
device and can automatically recover.
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 216
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
Functions and Features Description
Input undervoltage protection In this protection state, the power
module stops supplying power to a
device and can automatically recover.
Output overcurrent protection When overcurrent occurs, the output
enters the hiccup mode. When
overcurrent is cleared, the output
automatically recovers.
Output overvoltage protection When output overvoltage occurs, the
output enters the hiccup protection
mode. After the fault is rectified, the
output automatically recovers.
Technical Specifications
Table 3-155 Technical specifications of the PDC120S12-CN
Item Specification
Dimensions without packaging (H x W 40 mm x 50 mm × 165 mm (1.57 in. x
x D) [mm(in.)] 1.97 in. x 6.50 in.)
Weight without packaging [kg(lb)] 0.5 kg (1.10 lb)
Installation type Installing to the CPE power adapter
bracket
Rated input voltage [V] 1. –48 V/–60 V
2. +24 V
3. +48 V
NOTE
Do not connect the positive and negative
power systems at the same time.
Input voltage range [V] 1. –72 V to –38.4 V
2. +19 V to +30 V
3. +38.4 V to +72 V
Rated output voltage [V] 12 V
Output voltage range [V] 11.64 V DC to 12.36 V DC
Maximum input current [A] 4 A
Maximum output current [A] 1. –72 V to –38.4 V: 10 A
2. +19 V to +30 V: 5 A
3. +38.4 V to +72 V: 10 A
Number of inputs 2
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 217
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
Item Specification
Number of outputs 1
Front-end circuit breaker/fuse [A] 6 A
Input terminal 4-pin phoenix terminal
Output terminal 3-pin common connector
Long-term operating temperature -40°C to 65°C(-40°F to 149°F)
[°C(°F)]
Storage temperature [°C(°F)] –40°C to +70°C (–40°F to +158°F)
Long-term operating relative humidity 5% to 95% (non-condensing)
[RH]
Storage relative humidity [RH] 5% to 95% (non-condensing)
Long-term operating altitude [m(ft.)] -60 m to 5000 m (When the altitude
ranges from 1800 m to 5000 m, the
operating temperature decreases by
1°C for each additional 200 m.)
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 218
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement
4 Hardware Installation and Parts
Replacement
4.1 Hardware installation and maintenance
4.1 Hardware installation and maintenance
4.1.1 Installation Guide
4.1.1.1 Equipment Installation Process
This section describes the general equipment installation process. Before installing
equipment, you need to determine the installation mode according to installation
environment. After unpacking and inspecting the equipment, you need to install
the chassis, fibers, and cables in sequence, and then check the installation result.
After determining that the installation is correct, you can power on the equipment
and then check fiber connections.
Table 4-1 lists the general installation process.
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 219
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement
Table 4-1 Equipment installation process
Installation Process Description
Before installation, plan installation
space, build telecommunications
rooms, and determine the installation
mode according to requirements of the
equipment for running environment.
This ensures that the equipment can
Installation preparation
be properly installed and
commissioned, and then can run
stably. For details on the requirements
of the equipment for running
environment, see 4.1.1.2 Installation
Preparation.
When a project starts, the project
supervisor needs to work with the
Unpacking and inspecting equipment customer to unpack and inspect the
delivered equipment. For details, see
4.1.1.3.1 Unpacking Inspection.
The installation modes for chassis vary
with installation environment. For
Installing chassis
details, see 4.1.1.3.2 Installing
chassis.
The installation modes for fibers and
Installing fibers and cables cables in chassis vary with installation
environment.
After hardware installation is
complete, check the installation to
Checking installation
ensure that the equipment can run
stably.
Before powering on the equipment,
check the external power supply to
ensure proper voltage and fuse
Powering on the equipment capacity. After powering on the
equipment, observe the indicators to
determine whether the equipment
runs properly.
During installation of fiber jumpers,
the fiber jumpers may be incorrectly
connected or attenuate much optical
power. To avoid impacts on services,
check fiber jumper connections after
Checking fiber connections
the fiber jumpers are routed from
optical interfaces to the optical
distribution frame (ODF). For details,
see 4.1.1.3.4 Checking Tail Fiber
Connection.
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 220
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement
4.1.1.2 Installation Preparation
Before installation, plan installation space, build telecommunications rooms, and
determine the installation mode according to requirements of the equipment for
running environment. This ensures that the equipment can be properly installed
and commissioned, and then can run stably. The equipment can run in various
environment, and the running environment can be classified into three types, that
is, running environment A, B, and C. This section describes the three types of
environment.
For the requirements for running environment, see Product Description Technical
Specifications and Environmental Requirements.
In environment A, B, and C, installation modes are different. For details on how to
choose equipment installation modes and references, see Table 4-2.
Table 4-2 Running environment and installation modes
Running Installation
Description Example Reference
Environment Mode
For details on
the
The
Indoor Standard installation
equipment is
environment central mode, see
installed in a
Running where telecommunic 4.1.1.2.1
19-inch
environment temperature ations room Requirement
cabinet, an
A and humidity or s for Running
N63E cabinet,
are under communicatio Environment
or a T63
control n shelter A and
cabinet.
Installation
Planning.
Indoor Wall in the
environment corridor
For details on
where
the
temperature
installation
and humidity
mode, see
are partially The
4.1.1.2.2
under control equipment
Room where Requirement
Running or without can be
temperature s for Running
environment control, or installed in a
is not under Environment
B common standard
control such B and
outdoor network
as an attic in Installation
environment cabinet.
a residential Planning for
with a simple
building details on the
shelter such
installation
as an awning,
mode.
where
humidity
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 221
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement
Running Installation
Description Example Reference
Environment Mode
Simple
telecommunic
ations room,
telecommunic
ations room
reconstructed
from a
cottage, or
telecommunic
ations room
reconstructed
from a
common
residential
building
reaches 100% (In such a
occasionally telecommunic
ations room,
air
conditioners
and mains are
available, but
sealing
conditions are
poor.)
Public area
inside a
residential
building such
as a stairwell
or cleaning
tool room
● Outdoor
area close
to a For details on
pollution the
source The installation
equipment mode, see
Outdoor or
Running ● Environme can be 4.1.1.2.3
an attic in a
environment nt close to installed in a Requirement
residential
C a pollution standard s for Running
building
source outdoor Environment
with only cabinet C and
simple Installation
shields Planning.
such as
awnings
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 222
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement
Running Installation
Description Example Reference
Environment Mode
● Place on
the sea
NOTE
An area close
to a pollution
source refers
to an area
where saline
water such as
the sea or a
salina is
within 3.7 km
away from it,
where a heavy
pollution
source such as
For details on
a Area The
metallurgical the
complying equipment
plant, coal installation
with can be
mine, or mode, see
thermal environment installed in an
4.1.1.2.3
power plant is B but close to outdoor
Requirement
within 3 km the sea or a cabinet with
s for Running
away from it, pollution an air
where a Environment
source conditioner or
medium C and
heat
pollution Underground Installation
source such as garage exchanger
a chemical Planning.
plant, a
rubber plant,
or an
electroplating
factory is
within 2 km
away from it,
or where a
light pollution
source such as
a food factory,
leather
factory, or
heating boiler
is within 1 km
away from it.
4.1.1.2.1 Requirements for Running Environment A and Installation Planning
This section describes the requirements for running environment A (environment
under full control) and requirements for installation planning.
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 223
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement
Equipment Room Environment Requirements
The equipment room where the router equipment is installed must be able to
provide an equipment operating environment that meets the ETSI EN 300 019-1-3
class3.2 standard at least.
A good operation environment is the key to guarantee safe operation of the OptiX
transmission equipment. Therefore, the equipment room should not be located in
any area with high temperature, heavy dust, poisonous gas, dangerous explosives,
low pressure, serious vibration or loud noises. Moreover, it should be built away
from the general step-down electrical substations and traction substations. When
designing the project, you need to consider the hydrographic, geological, seismic
and traffic factors according to the communication network planning and
communication technology, so as to choose the place that meets the environment
design requirement.
The engineering design in terms of construction, structure, heating, ventilation,
power supply, lighting and fire fighting should comply with the environment
requirements for optical synchronous transmission equipment. It should also
comply with the international standards and specifications related to industrial
enterprise, environment protection, fire fighting, and human protection, as well as
the regulations and requirements for constructing and designing buildings.
Site requirements are as follows:
● The altitude should be within the range of -60 m to 4000 m.
● The site should be kept away from pollution sources. For sources of heavy
pollution such as the smeltery and coal mine, keep a distance of 5 km. For
sources of medium pollution such as the chemical, rubber and galvanization
industries, keep a distance of 3.7 km. For sources of light pollution such as
food and tanner industries, keep a distance of 2 km. If these sources of
pollution cannot be avoided, the equipment room must be in the perennial
upwind direction of the pollution sources. In addition, quality equipment room
or protection product must be adopted.
● The ventilation port for air exchange of the equipment room must be kept
away from the exhaust of city waste pipes, big cesspools and sewage
treatment tanks. The equipment room should be kept in the positive pressure
state lest the corrosive gases enter the equipment room and erode
components and circuit boards.
● The equipment room should be kept away from the industrial and heating
boilers.
● The equipment room is located on the second floor or the higher floor. If this
requirement cannot be satisfied, the ground for equipment installation in the
equipment room shall be at least 600 mm above the maximum flood level in
the local record.
● The equipment room should be kept away from livestock farms. If this
requirement cannot be satisfied, it should be located in the perennial upwind
direction of the livestock farms.
● The equipment room should be kept 3.7 km away from the seaside or salt
lake. If this requirement cannot be satisfied, the equipment room should be
airtight with cooling facilities. In addition, the alkalized soil cannot be used as
the construction material. Otherwise, the equipment applicable in atrocious
environment must be adopted.
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 224
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement
● The historical livestock room or the chemical fertilizer warehouse cannot be
used as the equipment room.
● The equipment room should be solid enough to withstand wind and
downpour.
● The equipment room should be kept away from the road or sand field with
dusts flying around. If this requirement cannot be satisfied, the windows and
doors of the equipment room should be kept away from the sources of
pollution.
● The equipment room should not be placed near any water source. If this
cannot be avoided, the equipment room must be closed, with an air
conditioning system installed.
● Mechanical stress requirements
Item Subitem Range
Random vibration Acceleration 0.02 m2/s3
Frequency ● 5 Hz to 10 Hz
● 10 Hz to 50 Hz
● 50 Hz to 100 Hz
dB/oct -12 to +12
Layout of Equipment Room
This section describes the principles of the overall layout of the equipment room.
The communication equipment room houses a complete set of communication
transmission equipment, for example, SPC switching equipment, power supply,
and so on. They should be arranged compactly for ease of maintenance and
management. Figure 4-1 shows a typical layout of the equipment room.
Figure 4-1 Layout of the equipment room
The principles for layout of the equipment room are as follows:
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 225
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement
● Meet the requirements for wiring and maintaining the communication cable
and power cable.
● Avoid line roundabout for convenient maintenance, thus lowering the cable
cost, reducing communication failures and improving the work efficiency.
● Install the transmission equipment in a separate room close to the MDF room,
or near the switch.
Construction of the Equipment Room
This topic describes the requirements for the construction of the equipment room.
The construction of the equipment room shall meet the requirements listed in
Table 4-3.
Table 4-3 Construction requirements for the equipment room
Item Requirements
Area The equipment room should be able to house all the devices
of the terminal office at least.
Net height Minimum indoor height refers to the net height under the roof
beam or under the ventilation pipe. Normally it is no less than
3 m.
Indoor floor The floor of the equipment room should be semi-conductive
and not dust-arousing. Generally, ESD raised floor is required.
The floor boards should be laid tightly and firmly. For each
square meter of floor space, the horizontal tolerance should
not be greater than 2 mm. If no raised floor is available,
electrostatic conductive floor material with a volume resistivity
ranging 1.0x107 ohms·cm - 1.0x1010 ohms·cm should be laid.
The electrostatic conductive floor material or the ESD raised
floor should be grounded well. It can be connected to the
grounding device through a current limiting resistor and a
connection wire. Resistance of the current limiting resistor
should be 1 megaohm.
NOTICE
If thermal insulation cotton is required under the support for the floor,
or an ESD raised floor is required, do not use the thermal insulation
cotton and the ESD raised floor containing sulfur to prevent devices
from being corroded.
Load-bearing >450 kg/m2
capacity of
floor
Doors and Doors are single-leaf, 2 m high and 1 m wide. All doors and
windows windows should be sealed with dust-proof rubber strips.
Double-layer glass is recommended for windows.
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 226
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement
Item Requirements
Wall The wall can be covered with wallpaper or lusterless paint, but
not the paint that is apt to get pulverized or peeled.
NOTICE
If organic materials such as soundproof cotton are required, use
materials that do not contain sulfur.
Indoor ducts Indoor ducts are used for cabling. The inside of the ducts
should be smooth and clean. The reserved length and width
(margins) as well as the number, position and size of the holes
should comply with the relevant requirements for placing the
optical synchronous transmission equipment.
Water supply The service pipes, drain pipes and rain pipes should not pass
and drainage through the equipment room. Fire hydrants should not be
placed in the equipment room, but in corridors or the place
near the staircase where they can be easily seen and accessed
to.
Waterproof The equipment should be kept away from indoor places with
requirement water sources, such as the air conditioner external units, water
pipes, and ducts.
Internal The place where the equipment is installed is separated from
partition wall the equipment room door. The partition wall can hold back
some dusts, as be shown in Figure 4-2.
Installation The air conditioner should be installed in the place where the
position of the discharged air from the air conditioner shall not be directed to
air conditioner the equipment. The air conditioner must be away from a
window to prevent the air conditioner blowing moisture on the
window to devices in the equipment room when the window is
not securely closed.
Other In addition to the rodent-proof measures (for example,
requirements measures against mice), measures against proliferation of
fungi and mildew should be taken in the equipment room.
When there is high humidity such as on rainy days, do not
open the door of the equipment room to prevent moisture
increase that may be condensed into water on cold surfaces of
the devices in the equipment room.
Storage batteries must be placed separately from devices in
the equipment room.
In the equipment room, do not use organic materials such as
thermal insulation cotton that contains sulfur or chlorine and
rubber gaskets. PEF thermal insulation cotton can be used as a
thermal insulation material.
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 227
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement
Figure 4-2 Internal partition wall of the equipment room
Cleanliness of the Equipment Room
This section describes the requirements for the cleanness of the equipment room.
Dust on the equipment may lead to electrostatic adherence, and consequently
result in poor connection between metal connectors or connecting points. This will
reduce the service life of the equipment, and even makes it faulty.
To ensure long-term and reliable equipment operating, reduce dust particles in the
equipment room.
Table 4-4 shows the specifications for the density and diameter of dust particles
in the equipment room.
Table 4-4 Mechanical active substance
Mechanical Active Substance Content
Suspended dust ≤ 0.4 mg/m3
Deposited dust ≤ 15 mg/(m2·h)
Gravel ≤ 300 mg/m3
The equipment room shall be guarded against dust and corrosion by harmful
gases such as SO2, H2S, NH3, NO2, and CL2. Corrosive Gas Control Requirements
shows the limits for them.
To meet the above requirements, take the following measures:
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 228
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement
● Keep the equipment room far away from pollution sources and do not smoke
in the equipment room.
● Seal the doors and windows.
● Use dustproof materials for the floor, walls, and roof.
● Install screen doors and screen windows. Ensure that the outer windows are
dustproof.
● Always wear clean lab coat and protective footwear before getting into the
equipment room.
● Cover the ceiling and walls of the equipment room with wallpapers or
lusterless paint (pulverized paint prohibited) to prevent dust flake-off.
Air cleanness requirements
● The air is free from explosive, electric-conductive, magnetic-conductive, or
corrosive dust.
● The concentrations of mechanically active substances meet the requirements
defined in the following table.
Mechanically Concentration
Active
Substance
Suspended dust ≤ 5.00 mg/m3
Deposited dust ≤ 20.0 mg/(m2·h)
Gravel ≤ 300 mg/m3
● The concentrations of chemically active substances meet the requirements
defined in the following table.
Chemically Monthly Average Concentration
Active
Substance
3
SO2 ≤ 0.30 mg/m
3
H2S ≤ 0.10 mg/m
3
NO2 ≤ 0.50 mg/m
HF ≤ 0.01 mg/m3
3
NH3 ≤ 1.00 mg/m
3
Cl2 ≤ 0.10 mg/m
HCl ≤ 0.10 mg/m3
3
O3 ≤ 0.05 mg/m
Biological environment requirements
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 229
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement
– Ensure that the location where the equipment is stored is free from
microbial infestation.
– There are no rodents, such as mice.
Temperature and Humidity
This section describes the requirements for the relative humidity and ambient
temperature in the equipment room.
Item Description
Temperature -40ºC to +70ºC (-40ºF to +158ºF)
Relative humidity 5% to 100%
Temperature ≤ 1ºC/min
change rate
Atmospheric 70 kPa to 106 kPa
pressure
Solar radiation ≤ 1120 W/m2
Heat radiation ≤ 600 W/m2
NO TICE
It is recommended that the storage environment humidity be less than 60%.
● If the humidity of the storage environment is greater than 90%, it is
recommended that the storage duration be less than one month and the
installation be completed within one month after the device arrives.
● If the humidity of the storage environment is greater than 70%, it is
recommended that the storage period be less than or equal to two months and
the installation be completed within two months after the device is delivered.
Proper temperature and humidity should be maintained inside the equipment
room for the transmission equipment to work well constantly, as shown in
Hardware Description Technical Specifications .
Corrosive Gas Control Requirements
This topic describes the requirements for the corrosive gases in the equipment
room.
Besides dust-proof efforts, measures should be taken to prevent the equipment
room from being corroded by harmful gases, for example, SO2, H2S, NH3 and so
on. Table 4-5 shows the content limit on corrosive gases.
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 230
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement
Table 4-5 Corrosive gas content specification
Item Unit Monthly Average
Content
3
SO2 mg/m ≤ 0.30
3
H2S mg/m ≤ 0.10
3
NH3 mg/m ≤ 1.0
3
Cl2 mg/m ≤ 0.10
3
N02 mg/m ≤ 0.50
HF mg/m3 ≤ 0.01
3
O3 mg/m ≤ 0.05
To fulfill the above requirements, take the following measures for the equipment
room:
● Build the equipment room away from places with high-density corrosive gases
such as mines, metallurgical plants, tire plants, rubber plants, and chemical
plants.
● Keep the equipment room far away from sewers, effluent pipes, shafts,
dumps, and septic tanks. The air intake of the equipment room should be at
the opposite side to the pollution source.
● Do not use sulfur-containing organic materials to decorate the equipment
room. These materials include ESD pads, thermal insulation cotton, and
soundproof cotton that are made up from sulfur-containing rubber.
● Do not store diesels or gasoline engines in the equipment room where devices
are placed. When an oil-fired engine is outside the equipment room, ensure
that the exhaust of the engine is in the downstream direction of the
equipment room and the engine is far away from the air intake vent of the air
conditioner for the equipment room.
● Place storage batteries isolated from one another. You are suggested to put
one battery in a room.
● Make an agreement with a professional monitoring company to monitor the
environment regularly.
Electromagnetic Requirements
This section describes the electromagnetic conditions and the measures for
suppressing electromagnetic interferences.
The electromagnetic requirements are showed in Table 4-6.
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 231
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement
Table 4-6 Electromagnetic specification
Item Parameter
Low frequency magnetic Frequency (Hz) 50 to 20 000
field
Ampl. A/m (rms) 10 to 0.025
Amplitude modulation Frequency (MHz) 0.009 to1000
radiated electromagnetic
fields Ampl. V/m (rms) 3
Pulse modulation Frequency (GHz) 1 to 20
radiated electromagnetic
fields Ampl. (V/m (peak)) 3
To suppress electromagnetic interferences, take the following measures:
● Build the equipment room way from electric transformers, high-voltage power
lines and other equipment or devices with high current. For example, you may
build it 20 meters or more away from the transformer, or more than 50
meters from high-voltage power lines.
● Build the room way from high-power radio transmitters. For example, build it
at a place free of high-power radio transmitters within 500 meters.
● If there is a mobile communication transmitter in the comprehensive building,
make sure its interference level complies with the corresponding standard.
Shielding and isolation measures can be taken for further protection if
necessary.
● Release and execute stipulations that forbid any personnel using wireless
handy communication devices close to equipment in the equipment room.
ESD Protection
This section describes the requirements for the ESD prevention and the preventive
measures for the equipment room.
The absolute static voltage value should be less than 2000 V.
To fulfill this requirement, take the following measures:
● Train the operators on ESD prevention.
● Control the humidity in the room to reduce the impact from static electricity.
● Lay ESD floor in the room.
● Wear ESD shoes and uniforms before entering the room.
● Use ESD tools such as ESD wrist straps, ESD tweezers and extraction tools
when dealing with the equipment.
● Ground all conducting materials in the room, including computer terminals.
● Use ESD worktables.
● Keep non-ESD materials (such as common bags, foams, and rubbers) at least
30 cm away from boards and ESD-sensitive components.
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 232
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement
Surge Protection and Grounding Requirements
This section describes the requirements for surge protection and grounding.
Table 4-7 shows the requirements for surge protection and grounding.
Table 4-7 Requirements for surge protection and grounding
Item Description
On structure of the equipment room Build the equipment room with steel
and concrete. The equipment room
should be equipped with facilities such
as surge protector to protect it against
direct lightning strokes. Make sure the
surge protection grounding of the
equipment room, or that of devices
such as the surge protector, shares the
same grounding body with the
protection grounding of the building
where the room is located in.
Use TN-S for AC power supply Equip the communication office with
special electric transformers and
metal-jacketed or insulation-jacketed
power cable. The power cable is to
pass through a steel pipe and buried in
the earth before entering the office.
Both ends of both the metal jacket
and the steel pipe should be grounded
by proximate. Make sure the buried
length is no less than 15 meters. Each
of the three live cables at the low-
voltage side of the AC transformer
should be equipped with a gapless zinc
oxide arrester respectively. The chassis,
the AC neutral cable of the low-
voltage side, and the metal jacket of
the cable connected to the chassis
should all proximately grounded.
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 233
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement
Item Description
Equip the incoming power cable with a After the AC low-voltage power cables
surge protector are led into the room, install the surge
protector for the power cables in the
AC voltage stabilizer and the AC power
distribution panel (box). Correctly
ground the surge protector nearby.
After the DC power cable is led into
the equipment room or outdoor
cabinet from outdoors or outside the
cabinet, install a power lightning
protection device for the DC power
cable. The lightning protection device
should be grounded in proximity. For
an equipment room in urban area,
install a power supply surge protector
with the nominal discharge current of
no less than 20 kA. For an equipment
room that is built in a suburb and
subject to lightning strikes, install a
power supply surge protector with the
nominal discharge current of more
than 60 kA. For an equipment room
that is built in a mountain area and
subject to frequent lightning strikes, or
in a separate high-rise building in a
city, install a power supply surge
protector with the nominal discharge
current of more than 100 kA. The
ground cable of the surge protector
should be no longer than 1 m (3.28
ft).
DC power supply grounding The working ground of the office, that
is, the anode of a -48 V DC power
supply or the cathode of a 24 V power
supply, should be led from the in-door
grounding bus line by proximate. The
ground cable should satisfy the
maximum load of the equipment. The
power supply facilities for the office
are to possess a DC working neutral
line, which is introduced from the
general grounding bus line or the
protection ground bar of the
equipment room.
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 234
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement
Item Description
Equipotent connection All communication equipment and
auxiliary equipment in the room such
as the mobile base station and the
transmitting, exchanging, power and
distribution frame should be
connected to the protection ground.
The protection grounding of all
equipment in the communication
office should share a same general
ground bar, while that of the same
equipment room all connect to the
same protection ground bar. The
working ground and protection ground
of the communication equipment in
the equipment room should adopt the
joint grounding mode, that is, they
share a same grounding network.
Protection grounding efforts should
also be done to the indoor cable tray,
equipment chassis, metal ventilation
pipe, metal door or window.
General requirements on grounding The AC neutral line cannot be
connected to the protection ground of
any communication equipment. Make
sure there is no fuse, switch or other
devices of the like on a grounding line.
All grounding lines should be as short
and straightforward as possible. Make
all efforts to avoid winding of them.
On the grounding resistor < 10 ohms. The upper end of the
grounding body should be 0.7 meters
or more underground. In cold areas,
the grounding body should be buried
in the frozen layer or lower. Make
regular monitor efforts on the
grounding resistor to make sure the
grounding is always valid.
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 235
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement
Item Description
On routing of the signal cable Signal cables should be led into the
communication office from
underground. Aerial routing of signal
cables is forbidden. The leadin or
leadout communication cable should
be metal-jacketed. Otherwise, they
should be routed in metal pipes. The
ground cable of the arrester should be
as short as possible. The empty pairs
in the cable should be connected to
the protection ground in the
equipment room.
Lightning-proof requirements of When the equipment is installed in an
outdoor cables outdoor cabinet, the cables connected
to the equipment may be exposed
outdoors. If the length of the exposed
cables exceeds 5 m, a signal lightning
protector must be installed on the
equipment.
On the grounding bus line The general grounding bus line can be
grounding loop or bar. The ground
cable should be not of aluminum
material. If interconnection occurs
between different metal connectors,
take measures to avoid by electric
chemical corrosion. Generally, the
cross-sectional area is a copper bar of
no less than 120 mm2 or zinc-plated
flat steel of the same resistance. The
grounding bus line should be kept
insulated from the construction steel.
On the grounding lead-in wire The grounding lead-in should be no
longer than 30 meter. As for the
material, it is recommended to use
zinc plated flat steel with the cross-
sectional area being 40 mm x 4 mm or
50 mm x 5 mm.
Power Supply
This section describes the DC power supply system.
The working power voltage for the equipment ranges from -38.4 V to -72 V. The
transmission equipment offers a transmission path for communication networks,
so its interruption will have a wide influence. Therefore, the DC power distribution
system should be protected against power failure and configured with storage
batteries. To deal with a long-term power outage, a diesel generator should be
equipped as the standby AC power supply for the backbone transmission
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 236
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement
equipment. The DC power supply system consists of storage battery, primary
power supply (rectifier), DC distributor and control panel.
Storage battery
Storage battery is an essential component of the DC power distribution system of
router equipment. Functionally, it serves to:
● Stabilize the voltage for the transmission equipment to work reliably.
● Store energy. In the case of outage of mains, the storage battery can feed
power for a period of time, which depends on its capacity, so that the
communication will not be interrupted immediately.
● Filter for large capacitors. The storage batteries are useful for absorbing surge
voltage from rectifiers and preventing noise and power frequency interference
from getting into the communication equipment.
● Automatically shut down. When the voltage of the storage battery drops to
below -43.2 V, the control circuit can automatically shut down the output.
The storage battery of router equipment is charged and discharges under a low,
constant voltage. Table 4-8 shows the relevant requirements:
Table 4-8 DC charge/discharge status and voltage requirements
Power Mains Battery DC Voltage Terminal The
Supply Supply Charge / Value Voltage of Number of
Categor Status Discharge Each Storage
y Storage Batteries
Battery in Each
Group
DC -48 V Normal Floating Floating charge 2.23 V 24 PCS
charged voltage reaches
by the 53.5 V.
rectifier
Outage Discharge Discharge 1.8 V
voltage reaches
43.2 V.
Resumed Under When the 2.35 V
loading charging
conditions, voltage reaches
automatic 56.4 V, it
ally automatically
charged changes to
with a constant
current 0.1 voltage mode,
to 0.15 that is changes
times of the charging
the status to
battery floating charge.
capacity.
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 237
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement
Primary power supply (rectifier)
● Primary power supplies shall be able to operate in parallel, and there should
be current equalizing device between them.
● The primary power supplies should be equipped with a current limiting device.
● The output voltage of the primary power supply should meet the requirement
for initial charging of storage batteries, that is 2.35 x 24= 56.4 V DC (when
the power supply is -48 V DC)
● A DC voltmeter and an ammeter should be installed for the primary power
supplies.
● The efficiency of the primary power supply should be more than 85% and its
power factor more than 0.8.
● Natural cooling is recommended for the primary power supply. The primary
power supply should be able to work continuously with full load within
0°C-40°C.
● The output noise voltage (measured with a psophometer, plus weighing
factors) of the primary power supply should meet the requirements shown in
Table 4-9.
● The primary power supply should be able to automatically shut down the
output at a low voltage.
Table 4-9 DC voltage specifications
Item DC Power Supply for Transmission Equipment
Nominal value (V) -48
Voltage fluctuation range -38.4 to-57.6
(V)
Noise 0 Hz-300Hz ≤ 400 mV (peak value)
voltage
300 Hz ≤ 2 mV (weighted noise of psophometer)
-3400Hz
3.4 kHz-150 Single frequency: ≤ 5mV Broadband: ≤
kHz effective value 100 mV
effective value
150 kHz-200 Single frequency: ≤ 3 mV Broadband: ≤
kHz effective value 30 mV
effective value
200 kHz-500 Single frequency: ≤ 2 mV
kHz effective value
500 kHz -30 Single frequency: ≤ 1 mV
MHz effective value
DC distributor and control panel
● The capacity of the primary power supply should be designed according to
the power consumption of the transmission equipment of the terminal office,
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 238
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement
and a certain margin should be reserved. Generally, high frequency switching
power supplies with a high switching efficiency should be adopted, which
should work in N+1 hot standby mode. There should be an output current
equalizer for each power module. The failure of a single power module will
not affect the normal operation of the whole DC power distribution system.
● Each control panel can access a minimum of two groups of storage batteries.
When one of them fails, the other can supply power instead.
● Each control panel can access a minimum of 5 primary power supplies.
● The power supply equipment should be capable of automation, so as to
satisfy the non-attendant requirement.
● When the primary power supply charges the storage batteries in floating
charge mode, the number of primary power supplies put into operation
depends on the load. When one primary power supply becomes faulty, it will
drop out automatically, while the standby primary power supply will
automatically go into operation.
● In the case of mains outage, storage batteries will discharge. When the mains
resumes, it will automatically recharge the discharged storage batteries with a
current 0.1 to 0.15 times of the battery capacity. When the charging voltage
reaches 56.4 V, it will automatically change to constant-voltage charging.
● When the storage batteries are fully charged, they will automatically change
to floating charge.
router equipment also has critical restriction on random transient noises, which
include the abnormal operation noise of the equipment caused by external
magnetic interference and the interference from the equipment itself and the
ground cables. The shorter the duration of the transient pulse, the larger values of
such transient noises can be allowed. For the allowable values, see Figure 4-3.
Figure 4-3 Transient noises
● When the power supply equipment fails or works abnormally, visual and
audible alarms should be given. Such alarm information should be sent to the
operation and maintenance center.
● In case short circuit occurs in a tributary of the power supply system, the
whole power distribution system should not be affected by the sharp voltage
reduction.
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 239
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement
Lighting in the Equipment Room
The OptiX transmission equipment room is equipped with three lighting systems.
● Active lighting system, which is powered by mains supply.
● Backup lighting system, which is powered by backup power supply (diesel
electric generator) of the office.
● Emergency lighting system, which is powered by storage batteries when the
mains supply has been interrupted but the backup power supply has not yet
started to supply power.
Protection System
This section describes the requirements for the protection system.
ESD protection
The equipment-affecting electrostatic induction comes from the external electric
field such as outdoor high voltage transmission line or lightning. It also comes
from the internal system such as indoor environment, floor materials or
equipment structure.
Static electricity may damage the metallic parts on integrated circuit boards and
cause faults in software and electronic switch. Statistics shows that 60 percent of
the damaged circuit boards are caused by static electricity. It is essential to take
effective ESD protection measures.
The following measures are recommended:
● Ground the equipment well. When laying the raised floor covered with
semiconductive materials, copper foil should be used for grounding at a
number of points on the floor (the copper foil should be placed between the
concrete floor and the semiconductive floor and should be connected to the
ground cable).
● Take dust-proof measure. Dust may do great harm to router equipment. Dusts
or other particles getting into the equipment room may cause poor
connection between connectors or metal connecting points. When the
humidity in the room is high, dust can cause electrical leakage. It is found in
maintenance that the equipment failure is often caused by accumulated
dusts. Especially, when the humidity in the room is very low, electrostatic
adherence is likely to occur.
● Keep proper temperature and humidity. Too high humidity may make the
metal components rusty, while too low humidity may induce static electricity.
● Always wear an ESD wrist strap and lab coat when touching a circuit board to
prevent electrostatic damage to the equipment.
Interference prevention
With the development of technologies and social economy, more and more
electromagnetic signals are transmitted in the air. They may affect the
communication quality by causing cross-talk and stray noise, and even result in
communication interruption. The electromagnetic interference (EMI) sources
include:
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 240
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement
● The corona discharge of the electric transmission line
● The transformer
● Switches
● Waveform distortion of the power supply network caused during the
operation of large equipment
● Radio frequency (RF) interference
● Natural interference sources such as terrestrial magnetic field and external
radiation
The interference, from either inside or outside the equipment or the application
system, affects the equipment through conductive modes such as capacitance
coupling, inductance coupling, electromagnetic wave radiation, common
impedance (including grounding system) and cable (power and signal cables). In
terms of external relationships of the equipment, interference is from the signal
cable, power cable, grounding system and spatial electromagnetic wave.
Integrated circuits (ICs) have the interference resistance capability to a degree.
However when the external noises go beyond their anti-interference tolerance,
corrupted signals and even system malfunction will be caused. It is impossible to
eliminate or shield all the interference sources, but the following measures can be
taken to suppress the interference signals:
● High frequency interference in the power supply network is generated when
the primary coil of the power supply transformer is coupled to the secondary
coil through distributed capacitors. To suppress such interference, we can use
an appropriate transformer, and install a low-pass filter at the inlet of the
power supply cable.
● The interference of the transient voltage in the power supply network can be
reduced by inputting power directly from the primary transformer with a filter
capacitor for router equipment.
● When router equipment works in the 50 Hz mains power supply network with
the above interference, the surge voltage caused by the power supply network
and the over-voltage generated by lightening will be passed to the power
supply of the optical synchronous transmission equipment, which leads to
computing errors of the processors. Therefore, before directly using the mains
supply, effective measures against interference from power supply network
should be taken.
● The key to eliminate the interference from the grounding system is to avoid
loops among various grounds, such as the signal ground (including analog
and digital grounds), BGND, PGND and shield ground, or loops formed by
large distributed capacitors. Otherwise, the common impedance interference
from the grounding system may affect the operation of the equipment. In
buildings other than high-rises, the working ground of router equipment
should be separated as far as possible from the ground for electricity
equipment and surge protection device.
● Prevent electromagnetic radiation interference from the surroundings to the
equipment. In some integrated communication buildings, if there is a high
frequency transmitter there, its influence on router equipment should meet
the relevant requirements. Independent power supplies are recommended for
them.
● EMI from the telecommunications line should be restrained. Influenced by
high frequency electromagnetic field (external interference), high longitudinal
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 241
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement
voltage will occur in the core and sheath of the communication cable.
Because of the asymmetry of cores in the cables, the longitudinal voltage will
generate a horizontal noise voltage at the ends of the cores. When both ends
of the cable sheath are grounded, the sheath will function as a shield layer,
greatly reducing the longitudinal voltage and reducing the interference
voltage. Other effective methods include: reduce the voltage or current of the
interference source; reduce the line length and the spacing of the conducting
wires to reduce the area of the affected loop; directly place the insulated
conducting wires on the grounded floor; use a special grounding feedback
cable to avoid co-impedance; or twist the signal cable and the feedback cable
together to offset partial peripheral electromagnetic interference, and so on.
Fire protection
For small equipment rooms, a certain number of portable fire extinguishers should
be equipped in each room for an initial fire control. In large equipment rooms, fire
extinguishing facilities should be equipped. An automatic fire alarm system should
also be equipped in the equipment room. All telecom buildings with fire alarm
system should have fire emergency lighting system and evacuation instruction
marks at important places, paths and gateways.
Anti-earthquake demand
The designed anti-earthquake intensity of the telecom equipment room must be
one degree (Richter scale) higher than that for the common buildings. The
equipment room building that cannot meet the requirement should be reinforced.
When installing router equipment, the following anti-earthquake measures should
be taken.
● Use steel framework for the cabinet of the equipment. There are locking
devices to fix the boards in the cabinet.
● The cabinet is reinforced with guide rail on the top and supports at the
bottom.
surge protection
Chimneys, antennas or other things that are over 15 m tall on the top of the
equipment room building should be designed according to the surge protection
requirements for civil buildings.
Measures should be taken against direct flash and intrusion of lightning current.
In the main high-rise transmission building, protective measures should be taken
to prevent side lightning strokes, especially in frequent lightning areas. Therefore
designers should take actual conditions into consideration and take appropriate
measures. For example, connect the metal external window frame to the surge
protection wire; along the height of the building, place the surge protection metal
bands at a definite spacing on the outside wall, and so on.
The main equipment-room building should be provided with the following surge
protection measures:
● The building should have surge protector nets or bands installed at the
positions susceptible to lightning strokes. Lightning prevention wires or
lightning rods should be installed on the top of chimneys and antennas that
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 242
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement
are protruding from the building. The cross-sectional area of the grounding
wire of the surge protection device should not be smaller than 120 mm2,
while the space between the wires not larger than 30 m.
● The earth resistance of the earthing/grounding system is recommended to be
less than 10 ohms, and the equipment grounding should be in accordance
with national and local electrical codes as well.
● Outdoor cables and metal pipes should be grounded before entering the
building, and the outdoor cables should be equipped with lightening
protection devices at the inlet of the building.
● It is suggested to use roof plates, beams and pillars made of reinforced
concrete and the reinforcement bar as the ground cables of lightening
arresters.
In the past surge protection grounding of the building was separate from the
grounding for telecom system and power supply system, and a large distance was
required between the grounding objects. However, the distance requirement is not
satisfied due to small space of the building. In fact, they cannot be separated in
most cases, so joint grounding system is recommended for the lightening
protection grounding of the building. The joint grounding system shall connect the
telecom BGND, PGND, surge protection grounding of the building, and grounding
of the power frequency AC power supply system. A high earth resistance of the
joint grounding system is required. The earth resistance required by
telecommunication is far lower than 10 ohms, and the grounding requirements for
different telecom devices vary, so the resistance of the joint grounding system
should be determined according to the minimum resistance required for the
grounding device.
It is recommended to use steel bars in the walls and pillars of the building as
ground cables for lightening protection. These wires should be electrically
connected so as to equalize the electric potential in the building.
Condensation Prevention
● Before installing the equipment, ensure that no condensation is on the
equipment. Otherwise, the equipment may fail to be powered on.
● If the indoor and outdoor temperature difference is 15°C or more, wait eight
hours after moving devices to the equipment and then install them.
● Generally, when the outdoor humidity is greater than 80% and the indoor and
outdoor temperature difference is greater than 5°C, condensation forms. In
highly humid weather, before installing a device or board, you are advised to
remove the package inside an equipment room and check whether
condensation forms as follows: Touch the surface of the device or board with
dry fingers or ESD gloves to check whether water marks exist. If they do,
condensation forms, and the device or board must be kept in the equipment
room for 8 hours before being powered on.
NO TE
If the temperature difference is undetermined, wait one night before installing the
equipment.If the temperature difference is undetermined, wait one night before
installing the equipment.
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 243
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement
CA UTION
In damp scenarios such as subways and tunnels, power on the equipment within
24 hours after unpacking to prevent condensation. During future maintenance,
ensure that the power-off time does not exceed 24 hours.
Transportation environment requirements
NO TE
The transportation environment must comply with ETSI EN 300 019-1-2.
● Climate requirements
Item Description
Temperature -40ºC to +70ºC (-40ºF to +158ºF)
Relative 5% to 95%
humidity
Temperature ≤ 1ºC/min
change rate
Atmospheric 70 kPa to 106 kPa
pressure
Solar radiation ≤ 1120 W/m2
Heat radiation ≤ 600 W/m2
● Waterproof requirements
– The equipment packaging is intact.
– Rainproof measures are taken for the transportation tools to prevent
water from entering the packaging.
– No water accumulates in the transportation tools.
● Biological environment requirements
– Ensure that the location where the equipment is placed is free from
microbial infestation.
– There are no rodents, such as mice.
● Air cleanness requirements
– The air is free from explosive, electric-conductive, magnetic-conductive, or
corrosive dust.
– The concentrations of mechanically active substances meet the
requirements defined in the following table.
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 244
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement
Mechanically Concentration
Active
Substance
Deposited dust ≤ 3.0 mg/(m2·h)
Gravel ≤ 100 mg/m3
– The concentrations of chemically active substances meet the
requirements defined in the following table.
Chemically Monthly Average Concentration
Active
Substance
3
SO2 ≤ 1.00 mg/m
3
H2S ≤ 0.50 mg/m
3
NO2 ≤ 1.00 mg/m
HF ≤ 0.03 mg/m3
3
NH3 ≤ 3.00 mg/m
HCl ≤ 0.50 mg/m3
3
O3 ≤ 0.10 mg/m
● Mechanical stress requirements
Item Subitem Range
Random vibration Acceleration 1 m2/s3
Frequency ● 5 Hz to 20 Hz
● 20 Hz to 200 Hz
dB/oct -3
Collision Shock response 100 m/s2, 11 ms, 100
spectrum I (sample times on each side
weight > 50 kg)
Shock response 180 m/s2, 6 ms, 100
spectrum II (sample times on each side
weight ≤ 50 kg)
NOTE
Shock response spectrum is a curve of the maximum acceleration responses generated
by the equipment under specified impact excitation.
Operating environment requirements
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 245
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement
NO TE
The operating environment must comply with ETSI EN 300 019-1-3.
● Climate requirements
Item Temperature Relative humidity
NetEngine -40ºC to +65ºC (-40ºF 5% to +95%
A821 E to +149ºF)
NetEngine -5ºC to +55ºC (-23ºF 5% to +95%
A813 E to +131ºF)
NetEngine
A822 E
NOTE
● If the equipment is installed in a cabinet, the impact of radiation can be ignored.
● The temperature and relative humidity are measured at the place 1.5 m (4.92 ft)
above the floor and 0.4 m (1.31 ft) away from the front side of a cabinet without
any front or rear protection panel.
To improve product application reliability, it is recommended that a dedicated
precision air conditioner be installed in an equipment room and the
temperature and relative humidity be controlled within the following ranges:
– Temperature range: 15ºC to 30ºC (59ºF to 86ºF)
– Relative humidity range: 40% to 75%
NO TE
Do not install the air conditioner above the equipment and ensure that the air exhaust
vent of the air conditioner does not face the equipment. Keep the air conditioner away
from a window as far as possible to ensure that no moisture from the window is
blown towards the equipment through the air conditioner.
Item Description
Altitude ≤ 4000 m (13123.2 ft)
(When the altitude is lower than 1800 m (5905.44 ft),
the equipment operates normally. When the altitude is
within the range from 1800 m to 4000 m (from 3280.8 ft
to 13123.2 ft), the actual equipment operating
temperature decreases by 1ºC (1.8ºF) for every 220 m
(721.78 ft) increase in altitude.)
Temperature ≤ 0.5ºC/min
change rate
Wind speed ≤ 5 m/s
Solar radiation ≤ 700 W/m2
Heat radiation ≤ 600 W/m2
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 246
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement
● Biological environment requirements
– Ensure that the location where the equipment is installed is free from
microbial infestation.
– There are no rodents, such as mice.
● Air cleanness requirements
– The air is free from explosive, electric-conductive, magnetic-conductive, or
corrosive dust.
– The concentrations of mechanically active substances meet the
requirements defined in the following table.
Mechanically Concentration
Active
Substance
Suspended ≤ 0.4 mg/m3
dust
Deposited dust ≤ 15 mg/(m2·h)
Gravel ≤ 300 mg/m3
– The concentrations of chemically active substances meet the
requirements defined in the following table.
Chemically Monthly Average Concentration
Active
Substance
3
SO2 ≤ 0.30 mg/m
3
H2S ≤ 0.10 mg/m
3
NO2 ≤ 0.50 mg/m
HF ≤ 0.01 mg/m3
3
NH3 ≤ 1.00 mg/m
3
Cl2 ≤ 0.10 mg/m
HCl ≤ 0.10 mg/m3
3
O3 ≤ 0.05 mg/m
● Mechanical stress requirements
Item Subitem Range
Sinusoidal vibration Velocity ≤ 5 mm/s
Acceleration ≤ 2 m/s2
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 247
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement
Item Subitem Range
Frequency ● 5 Hz to 62 Hz
● 62 Hz to 200 Hz
Collision Shock response Half-sine wave, 30
spectrum II m/s2, 11 ms, 3 times on
each side
Static payload 0 kPa
NOTE
Shock response spectrum is a curve of the maximum acceleration responses generated
by the equipment under specified impact excitation.
Static payload refers to the capability of the equipment in package to bear the
pressure from the top in normal pile-up method.
4.1.1.2.2 Requirements for Running Environment B and Installation Planning
This section describes the requirements for equipment location selection,
dustproof and waterproof, surge protection and grounding, heat dissipation,
cooperation between air ducts, power supply of equipment, cabling space,
selection of network cabinets and outdoor cabinets, and corrosion protection
when equipment is installed in running environment B.
Requirements for Selecting a Site for Equipment
To ensure that equipment operates stably over a long term, the site of equipment
in environment of class B must satisfy requirements with respect to
communication network design, communication technologies, hydrographic,
geology, and transportation.
When selecting a site for equipment, make sure that the site satisfies the
following requirements:
● Equipment is installed in a place free from electromagnetic interference
source (such as a large radar station, launching tower, and transformer
substation), harmful gas source (such as a chemical plant and salt mist area),
dust, noise, and shock.
● Equipment is kept away from intensive vibration or noise, transformer
substations, industrial boilers, and heating boilers.
● Equipment is kept away from a tree or other plants. Otherwise, insects may
be absorbed by fans, resulting in damage to fans.
● Equipment is installed at least 500m ( away from the seashore. If the network
cabinet or outdoor cabinet is configured with fans, ensure that the air intake
vents do not face the direction in which the sea wind blows.
● In an area prone to snow or rain, the vents of the network cabinet or outdoor
cabinet are at least one meter higher than the position with accumulated
water or snow.
● Equipment is installed in a position away from water drips (outdoor part of
an air conditioner and dripping eave).
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 248
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement
● The AC power system feeds power stably and no other devices with high
power consumption are operating. The rated voltage of the AC power system
is 220 V and the voltage on the power grid fluctuates within ±10%. After
equipment is installed, the voltage between L and N is 220 V, the voltage
between L and PE is lower than 220 V, and the voltage between N and PE is
lower than 5 V. Otherwise, electrical leakage may occur on the equipment
and the user may fall victim to electric shock.
● Equipment does not face directly to windows of residential buildings. A
network cabinet is at least 5 m away from windows and an outdoor cabinet is
at least 10 m away from windows.
● Equipment is not directly exposed to rainwater or near windows or doors
through which rain water may enter.
● Equipment doors do not face residents or stand parallel with residents.
● When equipment is installed on a wall, the equipment is at least one meter
above the ground. This distance keeps equipment beyond the reach of
residents.
● The air intake vents on equipment are far away from outlets of a sewer, large
digestion tank, or sewage treatment pool. Equipment is under positive
pressure, which helps block aggressive gas. Aggressive gas may erode
electronic components or PCBs.
● When installed in a basement, a network cabinet should be installed in a
place unable to be flooded. In this scenario, the municipal drainage system of
the building needs to be taken into consideration.
● If the first floor of the building is low-lying, do not install the equipment in
the weak-current well on the first floor or ground-mount the equipment in
the corridor.
● Do not lead the cables or optical cables on the top of the network cabinet
and then downwards into the network cabinet from the side or top. In
addition, take water-proof measures for all cables led into the network
cabinet so that rainwater will not enter the network cabinet along the cables.
● Cabinets have special protective equipment, such as rat guards. Ensure that
these facilities have been installed.
● Cabinets have access control and environmental monitoring equipment.
Ensure that these facilities have been installed and used.
● A filler panel is installed in each empty slot.
● Natural cooling equipment has enough space for heat dissipation.
● To prevent the air duct from being blocked, do not place any object around
the air intake or exhaust vent.
Dust Resistance and Water Resistance
The protection rating of the equipment is IP20. A network cabinet installed
outdoors or in a corridor that is exposed to rain must meet the requirements of
IP55 rating protection at least. A network cabinet installed indoors or in a corridor
that is free from rain must meet the requirements of IP31 rating protection at
least.
For equipment at a customer site, it is recommended that the equipment be
stored indoors.
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 249
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement
Ensure that no water accumulates on the floor or drops to the equipment
packaging. Keep the equipment away from places where water is apt to leak, such
as the places near automatic fire-fighting facilities and heating facilities.
If the equipment has to be stored outdoors, ensure that:
● The packaging is intact.
● Rainproof measures are taken to prevent water from entering the packaging.
● No water accumulates under the packaging.
● The packaging is not exposed to sunlight.
Dustproof and Waterproof Capability of the Device
The protection rating of the equipment is IP20. (The first number "2" indicates
that the equipment can prevent a solid foreign object with the diameter larger
than 5 mm from entering the equipment. The second number "0" indicates that
the waterproof function is not provided.)
Install the device in a place that is free from flooding and prevent foreign objects
such as screw and cable end from entering the heat-dissipation hole of the device.
Otherwise, the device may be burnt due to short circuit.
Outdoor Dustproof and Waterproof Requirement
If the network cabinet is installed outdoors or in a corridor that is exposed to rain,
the network cabinet must meet the requirements of IP55 rating protection at
least. ("IP" indicates International Protection Rating. The first number "5" refers to
the rating for preventing the solid particle from entering the network cabinet.
That is, ingress of dust is not totally prevented, but dust shall not penetrate in a
quantity to interfere with satisfactory operation of apparatus or to impair safety.
The second number "5" refers to the rating for preventing water from entering the
network cabinet. That is, water projected in jets against the enclosure from any
direction shall have no harmful effects.)
In regions with heavy dust, it is recommended that customers add air filters to
their customized network cabinets to improve the reliability of the network
cabinet.
Indoor Dustproof and Waterproof Requirement
If the network cabinet is installed indoors or in a corridor that is free from rain,
the network cabinet must meet the requirements of IP31 rating protection at
least. (The first number "3" indicates that the network cabinet can prevent a solid
object with the diameter equal to or larger than 2.5 mm from entering the
network cabinet. The second number "1" indicates that vertically falling drops
shall have no harmful effects.)
In regions with heavy dust, it is recommended that customers add air filters to
their customized network cabinets to improve the reliability of the network
cabinet.
Corrosion Protection
To ensure normal running of the equipment installed in environment B,
concentration of corrosive gas must satisfy relevant requirements.
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 250
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement
Table 4-10 lists requirements for concentration of corrosive gas in installation
environment.
Table 4-10 Requirements for concentration of corrosive gas
Chemical Active Unit Content
Substance
3
SO2 mg/m ≤ 0.30
3
H2S mg/m ≤ 0.10
3
NH3 mg/m ≤ 1.00
3
Cl2 mg/m ≤ 0.10
The equipment installation environment cannot be surrounded with pollution
sources such as drainage ditches, coal-fired power plants, smokestacks, fertilizer
plants, paper mills, or daily commodity factories.
Principle for Heat Dissipation of a Network Cabinet
The router equipment needs to be installed in a standard network cabinet that
complies with heat dissipation requirements of the router equipment.
1. When the router equipment is installed in a network cabinet, the temperature
at the air intake vent cannot exceed the maximum temperature permitted by
the equipment to run normally, and the network cabinet must be capable of
dissipating the heat generated by all the equipment installed in the network
cabinet.
2. Fans need to have the backup function. After a fan fails, the other fans can
still work normally. A failed fan needs to be replaced in time. For more
information about the air volume of fans, see the air volume of an indoor
cabinet.
3. The heat dissipation capability of a network cabinet without fans is greater
than the maximum total heat dissipation consumption of the equipment in
the network cabinet, and the internal temperature of the network cabinet is
lower than the maximum working temperature of the equipment.
Thermal Design of a Network Cabinet with Natural Heat Dissipation
When the equipment is installed in a network cabinet with natural heat
dissipation, the air duct direction of the equipment needs to be consistent with the
air duct direction of the network cabinet. The equipment can be installed
horizontally or vertically.
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 251
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement
Table 4-11 Requirements for a network cabinet with natural heat dissipation
where the router is installed horizontally
Supported installation mode Horizontal installation
Sets of equipment that can be housed
1 2
in the network cabinet
Dimensions (mm): H x W x D 200×580×500 400×580×500
Air exhaust vents are close to the top
Positions of the air vents on the of the network cabinet and air intake
network cabinet vents are close to the bottom of the
network cabinet.
Cross-sectional area of the air vents on
88 176
the network cabinet (cm2)
Requirements for The distance between each side (left
the position Requirements for or right side) of the equipment and
where the router the width the corresponding side panel of the
equipment is network cabinet is at least 40 mm.
installed in the
network cabinet ● The bottom of
the equipment
does not block
● The bottom of the air intake
the equipment vents.
does not block ● The top of the
the air intake equipment is
vents. not higher
● The top of the than the
equipment is lowest row of
not higher air exhaust
than the vents.
Requirements for lowest row of ● The distance
the height air exhaust between two
vents. sets of
● The distance equipment is
between the at least 90
top of the mm.
equipment and ● The distance
the top panel between the
of the network top of the
cabinet is at equipment and
least 135 mm. the top panel
of the network
cabinet is at
least 225 mm.
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 252
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement
Table 4-12 Requirements for a network cabinet with natural heat dissipation
where the router is installed vertically
Supported installation mode Vertical installation
Sets of equipment that can be housed
1 2
in the network cabinet
Dimensions (mm): H x W x D 580×100×500 580×200×500
Air exhaust vents are close to the top
Positions of the air vents on the of the network cabinet and air intake
network cabinet vents are close to the bottom of the
network cabinet.
Cross-sectional area of the air vents on
40 80
the network cabinet (cm2)
Requirements for ● The
the position recommended
where the router distance
equipment is between each
installed in the side (left or
network cabinet The right side) of
recommended the equipment
distance between and the
each side of the
Requirements for corresponding
equipment and
the width side panel of
the corresponding the network
side panel of the cabinet is at
network cabinet is least 9 mm.
at least 10 mm.
● The distance
between two
sets of
equipment is
at least 9 mm.
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 253
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement
Supported installation mode Vertical installation
● The distance
● The distance between the
between the bottom of the
air intake vent equipment and
at the bottom the bottom of
of the the network
equipment and cabinet is at
the bottom of least 45 mm.
the network ● The top of the
cabinet is at equipment is
least 45 mm. not higher
● The top of the than the
equipment is lowest row of
not higher air exhaust
Requirements for
than the vents.
the height
lowest row of ● The distance
air exhaust between two
vents. sets of
● The distance equipment is
between the at least 90
air exhaust mm.
vent on the top ● The distance
of the between the
equipment and top of the
the top panel equipment and
of the network the top panel
cabinet is at of the network
least 45 mm. cabinet is at
least 70 mm.
Thermal Design of a Network Cabinet with Fan Cooling
Table 4-13 lists requirements for the device.
Table 4-13 Requirements for a network cabinet with fan cooling where the router
is installed
Sets of equipment that can 1 2 3
be housed in the network
cabinet
Dimensions (mm): H x W x D 200 x 580 x 400 x 580 x 600 x 580 x
500 500 500
Air volume of the cabinet ≥ 42 ≥ 84 ≥ 126
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 254
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement
Sets of equipment that can 1 2 3
be housed in the network
cabinet
Dimensions and number of One 9 cm fan One 12 cm One 15 cm
fans or two 8 cm fan or two 9 fan or two 12
fans cm fans cm fans
connected in connected in connected in
parallel mode parallel mode parallel mode
(Air volume = (Air volume = (Air volume =
Maximum air Maximum air Maximum air
volume of a volume of a volume of a
single fan x single fan x single fan x
0.5 x Number 0.5 x Number 0.5 x Number
of fans) of fans) of fans)
Fan positions The fans need to be arranged in the diagonal
direction of the entrance on the network
cabinet.
Cross-sectional area of the air ≥ 81 ≥ 144 ≥ 225
vents on the network cabinet
(cm2)
Requirements Requirements The distance between each side (left or right
for the for the width side) of the equipment and the corresponding
position side panel of the network cabinet is at least 40
where the mm.
router If air vents are blocked, the blocked area of the
equipment is air vents does not exceed 10% of the total area
installed in of the air vents.
the network
cabinet Requirements The equipment needs to be stacked without
for the height any space.
The distance between the equipment and the
ODF or power supply on the top or in the
bottom of the network cabinet is at least 45
mm.
Table 4-14 lists requirements for the device.
Table 4-14 Requirements for a network cabinet with fan cooling where the router
is installed
Sets of equipment that can 1 2 3
be housed in the network
cabinet
Dimensions (mm): H x W x D 100×580×500 200×580×500 300×580×500
Air volume of the cabinet ≥150 ≥300 ≥450
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 255
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement
Sets of equipment that can 1 2 3
be housed in the network
cabinet
Dimensions and number of Two 9 cm fan Two12 cm fan Two 15 cm
fans or three 8 cm or three 9 cm fan or three
fans fans 12 cm fans
connected in connected in connected in
parallel mode parallel mode parallel mode
(Air volume = (Air volume = (Air volume =
Maximum air Maximum air Maximum air
volume of a volume of a volume of a
single fan x single fan x single fan x
0.5 x Number 0.5 x Number 0.5 x Number
of fans) of fans) of fans)
Fan positions The fans need to be arranged in the diagonal
direction of the entrance on the network
cabinet.
Cross-sectional area of the air ≥162 ≥288 ≥450
vents on the network cabinet
(cm2)
Requirements Requirements The distance between each side (left or right
for the for the width side) of the equipment and the corresponding
position side panel of the network cabinet is at least 60
where the mm.
router If air vents are blocked, the blocked area of the
equipment is air vents does not exceed 10% of the total area
installed in of the air vents.
the network
cabinet Requirements The equipment needs to be stacked without
for the height any space.
The distance between the equipment and the
ODF or power supply on the top or in the
bottom of the network cabinet is at least 45
mm.
Cooperation Between Air Ducts
When selecting a network cabinet, make sure that the air ducts for the network
cabinet match those for equipment.
Recommended Air Ducts for Equipment
Figure 4-4 shows the recommended air ducts for equipment installed horizontally.
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 256
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement
Figure 4-4 Recommended air ducts for equipment installed horizontally
Recommended Air Ducts for a Network Cabinet
In the case of a network cabinet with natural heat dissipation, make sure that air
intake vents are kept as far away from air exhaust vents as possible, to achieve a
better chimney effect. Air intake vents must be in the lower part of the network
cabinet and close to the bottom panel; air exhaust vents must be on the top panel
of the network cabinet.
A network cabinet with natural heat dissipation enables air to flow in three typical
modes, that is, bottom in top out, bottom in side out, and side in side out, as
shown in Figure 4-5.
Figure 4-5 Recommended air ducts for a network cabinet with natural heat
dissipation
In the case of a network cabinet with fan cooling, arrange air intake vents and
fans properly so that air flows evenly without forming an air reflow zone.
A network cabinet with fan cooling also enables air to flow in three typical modes,
that is, bottom in top out, bottom in side out, and side in side out, as shown in
Figure 4-6.
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 257
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement
Figure 4-6 Recommended air ducts for a network cabinet with fan cooling
The fan tray assembly must match the design of vents on a network cabinet and
generate sufficient air volume.
A general rule to design vents is to determine the area of vents based on the size
of the fan tray assembly. This ensures a minimum of 30% of the maximum air
volume generated by fans.
For example, a fan tray assembly with dimensions of 120 mm x 120 mm x 25 mm
generates 144 CFM air volume to the maximum. In this case, when the area of
vents is 14400 mm 2 (40 mm x 360 mm or 120 mm x 120 mm), the system can
obtain 57.6 CFM air volume at least.
Cabling Space
When installing the router equipment in environment B, you need to consider the
cabling space in front of the equipment.
● When installing the router equipment in a network cabinet, you need to
follow the standard of installing the equipment in a 19-inch cabinet. The
cabling space in front of the equipment must be no less than 75 mm.
● When installing the router equipment in an outdoor cabinet, you also need to
follow the standard of installing the equipment in a 19-inch cabinet. The
cabling space in front of the equipment must be no less than 75 mm.
● When a network cabinet is installed on a wall, sufficient space must be left
around the cabinet.
– At least 800 mm space must be left in front of the network cabinet.
– At least 200 mm space must be left at the rear of the network cabinet.
– At least 200 mm space must be left on the top of the network cabinet.
– At least 300 mm space must be left below the network cabinet.
Power Supply for Equipment
The router equipment supports DC power supply and AC power supply.
Requirements for Power Supply
For details, see Product Description Technical Specifications and Environmental
Requirements.
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 258
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement
General Requirements on surge protection and Grounding
Telecommunications devices have stricter requirements on surge protection and
grounding than other devices. Taking proper surge protection and grounding
measures is the major requirement to ensure that the device works normally.
DANGER
When routing power cables or service cables connected to equipment to the
outdoor area, do not route them overhead.
1. Ground the equipment in compliance with national regulations, industry
standards, and carrier regulations.
NO TE
● When the device is installed inside the building, and the subscriber cable and power
cable are routed in the overhead cabling mode, install an elementary surge protection
device on the input side of the AC power system and ensure that the surge protection
rating is not smaller than 5 kA (8/20 μs).
2. If the building has installation environment with a dedicated grounding
system, use the grounding system of the building directly to ground the
device. Do not use the downlead of the lightning belt or lightning rod of the
building to ground the device.
3. If the building does not have installation environment with a dedicated
grounding system, it is recommended that you use the protective earthing
(PE) of the AC power distribution system of the building to ground the device.
4. If the building does not have any dedicated installation environment for
grounding devices or the PE of the AC power distribution system, construct a
new grounding system. It is recommended that you install the network
cabinet on a lower floor of the building to reduce the grounding cost.
5. Routing the aerial open wire into the network cabinet is prohibited. Use the
cable with metallic jacket and route the cable underground into the network
cabinet.
6. After the power supply enters the network cabinet, use a surge protection bar.
7. Connect all devices and metal parts in the network cabinet to the ground bar
in the network cabinet in an equipotential manner. Connect the ground bar in
the network cabinet to the external ground device by using a ground cable.
Grounding Without Dedicated Grounding Environment
The equipment is generally installed in harsh environmental conditions. Even if in
the installation scenario without dedicated grounding environment, you also need
to ground the equipment properly if possible.
TN-C-S/TN-S AC Power System (N Wire and PE Wire Are Combined into One
Wire on the surge protection Bar or N Wire and PE Wire Are Provided
Separately)
It is recommended that you use the PE wire of the AC power cable to ground the
equipment. The prerequisite is that the PE wire of the AC power cable for the
corridor of the building is already grounded properly.
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 259
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement
DANGER
The PE wire of the AC power cable must be grounded. Otherwise, electrical
leakage may occur on the device and cause personnel injury.
Figure 4-7 shows the grounding connections of the TN-C-S AC power system.
Figure 4-7 Grounding connections of the TN-C-S AC power system
Figure 4-8 shows the grounding connections of the TN-S AC power system.
Figure 4-8 Grounding connections of the TN-S AC power system
Use a ground cable (the cross-sectional area of the ground cable must be at least
6 mm2) to connect all devices in the network cabinet to the ground bar of the
network cabinet. Connect the ground bar to the network cabinet in an
equipotential manner through a metallic structure.
Use a ground cable to connect the grounding point of the reinforcing rib of the
optical fiber to the ground bar. You can also connect this grounding point to the
network cabinet in an equipotential manner through a metallic structure.
Use a ground cable (the cross-sectional area of the ground cable must be at least
16 mm2) to connect the ground bar of the network cabinet to the PE wire of the
corridor AC power supply.
TT AC Power System (Provide Only L Line and N Line and Directly Ground
the Device)
It is recommended that an external ground device be adopted. For example, use
the dedicated ground device (such as the ground flat steel sheet, ground post, and
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 260
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement
ground bar) of the building or the base concrete bar of the reinforcement concrete
of the building, or deploy a new earth screen.
Figure 4-9 shows the grounding connections of the TT AC power system.
Figure 4-9 Grounding connections of the TT AC power system
Use a ground cable (the cross-sectional area of the ground cable must be at least
6 mm2) to connect all devices in the network cabinet to the ground bar of the
network cabinet. Connect the ground bar to the network cabinet in an
equipotential manner through a metallic structure.
Use the ground cable to connect the grounding point of the reinforcing rib of the
optical fiber to the ground bar. You can also connect this grounding point to the
network cabinet in an equipotential manner through a metallic structure.
Use a ground cable (the cross-sectional area of the ground cable must be at least
16 mm2) to connect the ground bar of the network cabinet to an external ground
device.
NO TE
● In an installation environment with dedicated ground devices, the corridor ground
device is recommended for grounding.
● In an installation environment without dedicated ground devices, it is recommended
that the base concrete bar of the reinforcement concrete of the building be used or a
new earth screen be deployed for grounding.
Selection of the Network Cabinet
When selecting a network cabinet, mainly consider the factors such as capacity,
parts performance, protection performance, engineering installation performance,
ventilation, and heat dissipation. These factors help to select a reliable network
cabinet at the initial stage of network device deployment to ensure that the device
runs reliably.
The network cabinet is generally installed in a basement or corridor. The network
cabinet needs to support the wall-installation mode and AC power distribution,
and must be capable of obtaining power from the power system inside the
building. Its EMC and noise must comply with standards. When an ONU is
running, the network cabinet must ensure that the noise is lower than 5 dB to
avoid disturbing residents.
Space of the Network Cabinet
The space of the network cabinet in different configurations must meet the
requirements of terminal block layout and the space for routing FE network
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 261
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement
cables, power cables, and optical fibers. For the requirements of the cable routing
space, see Cabling Space.
surge protection and Grounding of the Network Cabinet
● The electrical continuity between parts of the network cabinet must be
satisfactory to provide reliable grounding, safety, and protection performance.
Ensure that the resistance between any two connected points is less than 0.1
ohm. You can use a multimeter to measure the resistance.
● For the AC-powered cabinet, it is recommended that you reserve a surge
protection bar and ensure that the surge protection rating is not smaller than
5 kA (8/20 μs).
● The network cabinet must provide a ground bar for grounding all devices in
the cabinet in a unified way. The resistance of the PGND cable must be
smaller than 10 ohms.
Protection Performance of the Network Cabinet
The device is not waterproof. Therefore, when the device is installed indoors,
install it in the network cabinet that is free from splashing water.
In regions with heavy dust, it is recommended that customers add air filters to
their customized network cabinets to improve the reliability of the network
cabinet.
Ensure that all cable apertures for external cables are sealed properly.
If the network cabinet is installed indoors or in a corridor that is free from rain,
the network cabinet must meet the requirements of IP31 rating protection. (The
first number "3" indicates that the network cabinet can prevent a solid particle
with the diameter equal to or larger than 2.5 mm from entering the network
cabinet. The second number "1" indicates that vertically falling drops shall have
no harmful effects.)
Test conditions/parameters of IP X1: drippage: 1 mm/minute; duration: 10 minutes.
Eligible adjudging criterion for protection:
● No water enters the cabinet.
● The water that enters the cabinet must be within the amount that may affect
the normal operation and safety performance of the cabinet. Water must not
accumulate on the insulating parts that may cause electrical leakage within
the creepage distance. Water must not enter the electrical parts or enter the
winding (resistance) that cannot be used in the damp state. No water
accumulates around the cable head or enters the cable.
Engineering Installation of the Network Cabinet
The engineering installation performance of the network cabinet must meet the
requirements of installing the cabinet on a wall in the main indoor application
scenarios of the network cabinet, such as a basement or corridor.
● The network cabinet can be adaptively installed on different walls.
● When the wall is not flat, the network cabinet can be leveled so as to be
installed reliably (the recommended adjustable scope is 10 mm at least).
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 262
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement
The space for routing power cables, optical fibers, and subscriber cables are
planned properly in the network cabinet. Various types of cables are routed
separately and the cables do not cross over each other. The positions of the MDF
and the ODF are proper to ensure that the cable length is proper after the device
is installed.
Ventilation and Heat Dissipation Performance of the Network Cabinet
Requirements on the ventilation and heat dissipation performance of the network
cabinet: Obvious air intake vent and air exhaust vent are distributed in the air duct
of the network cabinet after the device is installed. Due to the difference between
internal and external network cabinet temperatures, the temperature of the air
intake vent must be 10 °C lower than the maximum ambient temperature of the
router device when it is operating. This ensures that each board on the router
equipment satisfies requirements for heat dissipation.
4.1.1.2.3 Requirements for Running Environment C and Installation Planning
In environment C, you need to install equipment in an outdoor cabinet with an air
conditioner or heat exchanger.
When router equipment is installed in an outdoor cabinet, do not install other
type of equipment in the cabinet. If other type of equipment and router
equipment have to be installed in the same outdoor cabinet, make sure that the
equipment satisfies requirements for heat dissipation and anti-erosion.
When installed in environment C, the equipment needs to be installed in an
outdoor cabinet with an air conditioner or heat exchanger, which keeps the
equipment fully isolated from the outside environment. Environment C involves
the following cases:
● Outdoor area close to a pollution source
● Environment with only simple shields such as awnings
● Place on the sea
NO TE
An area close to a pollution source refers to an area where saline water such as the sea or a
salina is within 3.7 km away from it, where a heavy pollution source such as a metallurgical
plant, coal mine, or thermal power plant is within 3 km away from it, where a medium pollution
source such as a chemical plant, rubber plant, or electroplating factory is within 2 km away
from it, or where a light pollution source such as a food factory, leather factory, or heating
boiler is within 1 km away from it.
Selection of the Outdoor Cabinet
When selecting an outdoor cabinet, mainly consider the factors such as capacity,
parts performance, protection performance, engineering installation performance,
ventilation, and heat dissipation. These factors help to select a reliable outdoor
cabinet at the initial stage of network device deployment to ensure that the device
runs reliably.
An outdoor cabinet is mainly installed in an outdoor area or an indoor area close
to contamination sources, such as an underground garage. Its EMC and noise must
comply with standards. When an ONU is running, the outdoor cabinet must
ensure that the noise is lower than 7 dB to avoid disturbing residents.
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 263
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement
Space of the Outdoor Cabinet
The space of the outdoor cabinet in different configurations must meet the
requirements of terminal block layout and the space for routing FE network
cables, power cables and optical fibers. For the requirements of the cable routing
space, see Cabling Space.
surge protection and Grounding of the Outdoor Cabinet
● The electrical continuity between parts of the outdoor cabinet must be
satisfactory to provide reliable grounding, safety, and protection performance.
Ensure that the resistance between any two connected points is less than 0.1
ohm. You can use a multimeter to measure the resistance.
● Surge protection devices are required to be installed near the outdoor cabinet
for AC/DC power cables directly connected to the outdoor cabinet. The surge
protection rating must not be smaller than 20 kA (8/20 μs). The signal cable
connected to the outdoor cabinet needs to be connected to the surge
protection board on an outdoor cabinet.
● The MDF must have protective units installed and the surge protection rating
must not be smaller than 1 kA (8/20 μs).
● The cabinet must provide an internal ground bar for grounding all devices in
the cabinet in a unified way. The resistance of the PGND cable must be
smaller than 10 ohms.
Protection Performance of the Outdoor Cabinet
When installed outdoors, an outdoor cabinet with rainproof heat-dissipation hole
and bottom lead-out cabling mode is recommended.
In regions with heavy dust, it is recommended that customers add air filters to
their customized outdoor cabinets to improve the reliability of the device.
Ensure that all cable apertures for external cables are sealed properly. Waterproof
plugs must be used when the device is installed in an outdoor cabinet.
If the cabinet is installed outdoors or in a corridor that is exposed to rain, the
cabinet must meet the requirements of IP55 rating protection. ("IP" indicates
International Protection Rating. The first number "5" refers to the rating for
preventing the solid particle from entering the cabinet. That is, ingress of dust is
not totally prevented, but dust shall not penetrate in a quantity to interfere with
satisfactory operation of apparatus or to impair safety. The second number "5"
refers to the rating for preventing water from entering the cabinet. That is, water
projected in jets against the enclosure from any direction shall have no harmful
effects.) For details, refer to Standards of the Outdoor Cabinet.
For example, test conditions/parameters of IP X5: flow: 12.5 L/minute±5%;
distance: 2.5 -3 m; spray duration: 1 minute/m2, at least 3 minutes.
Eligible adjudging criterion for protection:
● No water enters the cabinet.
● The water that enters the cabinet must be within the amount that may affect
the normal operation and safety performance of the cabinet. Water must not
accumulate on the insulating parts that may cause electrical leakage within
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 264
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement
the creepage distance. Water must not enter the electrical parts or enter the
winding (resistance) that cannot be used in the damp state. No water
accumulates around the cable head or enters the cable.
Engineering Installation of the Outdoor Cabinet
The engineering installation performance of the outdoor cabinet must meet the
requirements of installing the cabinet on a wall in the main outdoor application
scenarios of the outdoor cabinet, such as an elevated platform.
● The outdoor cabinet can be adaptively installed on different elevated
platforms.
● When installed on a concrete floor, the cabinet can be leveled so as to be
installed reliably (the recommended adjustable scope is 10 mm at least).
The space for routing power cables, optical fibers, and subscriber cables are
planned properly in the outdoor cabinet. Various types of cables are routed
separately and the cables do not cross over each other. The positions of the DDF
and the ODF are proper to ensure that the cable length is proper after the device
is installed.
The fiber management tray is installed in a proper position beyond the air exhaust
vent.
The top of the device is not higher than the lower edge of the air exhaust vent in
the cabinet when the device is installed in an outdoor cabinet. After installation,
the distance between the device top and the barrier of the cabinet top is at least
50 mm.
Place the battery and device in different compartments of the outdoor cabinet if
possible to protect the device against corrosion.
Ventilation and Heat Dissipation Performance of the Outdoor Cabinet
Requirements on the ventilation and heat dissipation performance of the outdoor
cabinet: Obvious air intake vent and air exhaust vent are distributed in the air duct
of the outdoor cabinet after the device is installed. The vent position and vent
dimensions are proper and meet the environment specifications of the device.
Outdoor Cabinet Monitoring
The outdoor cabinet can monitor the door status, temperature, and surge
protection.
Standards of the Outdoor Cabinet
Standard Description
ID
IEC 529 First characteristic Dust-protected: Ingress of dust is not totally
numeral: 5. prevented but dust does not enter in sufficient
quantity to interfere with satisfactory
operation of the equipment
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 265
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement
Standard Description
ID
Second Protected against water jets: Water projected
characteristic by a nozzle against the enclosure from any
numeral: 5. direction shall have no harmful effect
4.1.1.2.4 Basic Installation Specifications
A correct installation mode is the prerequisite for ensuring that the ONU works
normally.
Basic Installation Specifications
Keep off electromagnetic interference. Do not route ground cables or
subscriber cables into the room in the
overhead mode.
Connect the ground cable to the It is recommended that you use the
ground bar. metal tube that is grounded to route
cables out of the outdoor cabinet.
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 266
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement
Basic Installation Specifications
Do not use the cabinet that is not Ground subscriber cables in a unified
waterproof outdoors. The protection way.
rating of the outdoor cabinet must
reach IP55.
Use a dedicated surge protection bar. The device does not have any ground
cable.
Seal the cable apertures of the cabinet Ensure that the cabinet door is locked
properly to prevent dust or insects when the device is running.
from entering the cabinet.
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 267
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement
Basic Installation Specifications
Ensure that the ventilation openings of The ends of the optical fiber that is
the network cabinet are free of not used must be protected with
obstacle. dustproof caps.
When devices are installed into an IMB The corrugated tube does not enter
network cabinet or APM30H cabinet the network cabinet and the cut of the
without a temperature control unit corrugated tube is not smoothened.
(such as air conditioner or heat
exchanger), ensure that the IMB
network cabinet or APM30H cabinet is
not completely closed. The air intake
vent and air exhaust vent on the IMB
network cabinet or APM30H cabinet
must match air channels.
The metal wire of the optical cable Signal cables must be routed
that is not in the overhead mode must separately from power cables.
be fastened.
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 268
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement
Basic Installation Specifications
When the device is installed on a wall, Ensure that cable connectors and ports
instead of using plastic or other parts, do not face upwards.
use the mounting brackets and
expansion bolts delivered with the
device to fasten the device.
When the device is installed indoors, if When the device is installed in
the device is close to the sewer or overhead/side cabling mode network
heating line, water may easily damp or cabinet, the water may enter the
enter the device. device through cables. It is
recommended that route cables under
the aperture, keep the distance about
100mm.
Do not install devices close to the Do not install devices in resting places.
window. For example, install the IMB
network cabinet at least 5 meters
away from the window and install the
APM30H cabinet at least 10 meters
away from the window to avoid the
influence of noises while protecting
devices against wind and rain. The
following figure shows the distance
requirements for installing an IMB
network cabinet.
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 269
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement
4.1.1.3 General Installation Guidelines
This chapter describes the general installation guidelines on unpacking and
inspecting equipment, installing boards, checking optical fiber connections,
equipment grounding regulations, engineering labels, cable routing and bundling,
and making and testing cable connectors.
4.1.1.3.1 Unpacking Inspection
When a project starts, the project supervisor should work with the customer to
unpack and inspect the delivered equipment.
Unpacking the Chassis
Unpack the chassis before starting the installation.
Prerequisites
The chassis must be delivered to the site.
Tools, Instruments, and Materials
● ESD gloves
● Diagonal pliers
● Paper knife
Precautions
NO TICE
● Integrated circuits (ICs) are sensitive to electrostatic discharge from the human
body. When handling boards or metallic parts of the equipment, wear ESD
gloves and hold only the edges of the boards during operation.
● If the equipment is transported from a cold and dry place to a warm and damp
place, wait at least 30 minutes before unpacking it. Otherwise, the moisture
condenses on the board surface and damages the components.
Procedure
Step 1 Transport the packing box to the equipment room.
Step 2 Check the packing box, and stop unpacking it in any of the following cases:
● The outer package is severely damaged.
● There is water leakage on the outer package.
Find the causes and provide feedback to the local representative office of Huawei.
Step 3 Observe the labels on the carton to check the equipment configuration and take a
record.
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 270
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement
Step 4 Cut the strap with the diagonal plier and then split the adhesive tape properly
along the seam between the cover and the body of the box with the paper knife.
Do not scratch the articles inside the box.
Step 5 Open the carton and take out the chassis box from the carton.
Step 6 Open the chassis box and take out the chassis. Then, check whether the chassis is
damaged.
----End
Unpacking Boards
If the board is separately delivered, unpack the board before you install it.
Prerequisites
None
Tools, Equipment and Materials
● ESD wrist strap or ESD gloves
● Diagonal pliers
● Paper knife
Background Information
Generally, the board has been installed in the chassis properly before delivery and
is shipped together with the chassis. If a carton is used to pack boards for
shipping, unpacking and checking are necessary when the boards arrive at the
destination. (Generally, a carton is used when boards are required for capacity
expansion.) The boards are put into shielding bags for transportation. Take ESD
protection measures when you unpack the boards to prevent damage to them.
Precautions
NO TICE
Electronic circuits and components are extremely sensitive to electrostatic
discharge (ESD). When handling circuit boards, make sure that you wear a
securely grounded ESD wrist strap or ESD gloves, and only hold the edge of boards
during operation.
Procedure
Step 1 Wear a securely grounded ESD wrist strap (or ESD gloves) and make sure that it is
securely grounded. Check the packing box of the board and make sure it is intact
without any damage.
Step 2 Cut the straps with diagonal pliers and use a paper knife to split the tape along
the seam between the cover and the box body. See Figure 4-10.
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 271
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement
NO TICE
Do not cut too deep into the carton with the paper knife. Otherwise, the knife
might scratch the articles inside.
Figure 4-10 Board carton
NO TE
● Each board is packed in both a cushion foam and an shielding bag. Keep the bags
properly. They can be used later for keeping the boards or packing the damaged boards
returned for repair.
● The ambient temperature and humidity may have an impact on the boards. In each
shielding bag there is a small bag of desiccant, which shall not be thrown away.
● Wait for at least 30 minutes before unpacking if the board is just moved from a cold,
dry place to a warm, damp place. Otherwise, moisture will condense on the board
surface and damage the components.
Step 3 Open the carton and check whether the number and type of the boards are
consistent with what is marked on the carton label. Check that there is no evident
damage on the board package.
Step 4 Open the board box and take the board out of the shielding bag.
● Hold the bottom of the shielding bag with the left hand.
● Take the board out of the bag gently by its front panel with the right hand.
● Do not touch any electronic component on the board surface to avoid
damage.
● Keep the bags properly.
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 272
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement
Step 5 Check whether the board is physically damaged or is not in line with the packing
list. Table 4-15 lists the checklist. In this case of any damage to the board, contact
local representatives of Huawei.
Table 4-15 Board checklist
Item Requirement
Name and quantity The board name and quantity should
be in line with the contract or packing
list.
Outer view The board should be clean and free of
any scratch, loose component, or
damage.
Connector The connector should be properly
installed and free of tilted or deformed
pins.
Step 6 If no problem is found, put the board back into the board box and put it in the
place specified by the customer.
● If you are going to install the board right after unpacking, place the board on
an ESD surface to discharge the static electricity.
● If you are going to install the board at a later time, pack the board using the
original materials and place them at a cool dry place without direct sunshine
or strong electromagnetic radiation.
----End
Requirements of Inspection
The received goods must be inspected against the Packing List item by item.
● After the goods are inspected complete and intact, both the engineering
supervisor and the customer must sign the Packing List. After that, the
customer takes over the goods.
● During the inspection, if some equipment is stated undelivered in the Packing
List, directly report the situation to the order management engineer of the
local office of Huawei for subsequent handling. Both the engineering
supervisor and the customer shall sign the Packing List to confirm the
situation.
● If any short, wrong, extra or damaged equipment is found during the
inspection, both parties shall sign the Unpacking Memo and the Packing List.
The project supervisor shall fill in the Equipment Problem Report and send it
to the order management engineer of the local office of Huawei within three
days.
4.1.1.3.2 Installing chassis
The installation modes for chassis vary with installation environment.
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 273
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement
NO TE
For installation on a desk, on a wall, in a 19-inch open rack, in a 19-inch cabinet, or in an
A63E cabinet, see the "Quick Installation Guide for A800 (Indoor)".
4.1.1.3.3 Installing Router Tray and Power Adapter
There may be different models of power adapters. Refer to the installation
procedure in this guide to install a power adapter.
NO TE
For details, see the Support E website: https://support.huawei.com/enterprise/en/doc/
EDOC1100289139?
idPath=24030814%7C9856750%7C22715517%7C253427857%7C253450399.
If you need to install a DC power connector, refer to the following procedure:
1. Take the power connector out of the packaging bag, and strip a power cable
at a length in line with the value marked on the silkscreen attached to the
connector.
CA UTION
To avoid damage to copper wires when a length of 8 mm power cable is
stripped, do not apply too much force when peeling insulation coating off the
wires.
2. Put the cord end terminal onto the exposed conductor and ensure that the
conductor is aligned with the edge of the cord end terminal.
3. Crimp the joint parts of the cord end terminal and the cable conductor.
When installing a DC power connector on the product. Insert the NEG(-) wires
(blue) into the hole marked a negative sign ("1-" and "2-") and the RTN(+)
wires (black/brown) into the hole marked a positive sign ("1+" and "2+").
When the wires touch the end of the holes, slide the cover on the top of the
power connector to expose M4 screws and then use a torque screwdriver to
tighten the M2.5 screws, with a torque of 0.45 N
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 274
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement
DANGER
Inserting the conducting wires to wrong holes may cause damage to the
device. Verify that the positive and negative wires are inserted in the correct
holes before powering on the device.
4. Pull each wire slightly to check whether it is securely connected. If a cable
slides outward or the wires of a cable are exposed outside the hole for the
cable, remove the cable, cut the split wires, strip a power cable, and reinstall
the cable.
4.1.1.3.4 Checking Tail Fiber Connection
This section describes how to check the fiber connection by using an optical
interface board.
Prerequisites
The fiber must be installed and routed from the optical interface to the ODF.
On the power supply device side, the power switch must be turned on.
Tools, Equipment and Materials
Optical power meter
Short fiber
Precautions
DANGER
Avoid direct eye exposure to laser beams when connecting the fiber.
Connection Diagram for the Check
When using an optical interface board to test the fiber connection, connect the
fiber to the optical power meter on the ODF side and connect the fiber to the
OUT port of the optical interface board on the chassis side.
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 275
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement
Procedure
Step 1 On the chassis side, remove the fiber that connects to the OUT port of an optical
interface board.
Step 2 Connect the optical power meter to the OUT port of the optical interface through
the fiber.
Step 3 Turn on the optical power switch and set the working wavelength according to the
optical interface type. The optical power meter reads that the launched optical
power of the optical interface board is A.
Step 4 Recover the fiber connection to the OUT port.
Step 5 On the ODF side, remove the fiber that connects to the OUT port. Connect the
fiber to the optical power meter. The tested optical power is B.
Step 6 Remove the fiber from the corresponding OUT port of the optical interface board.
The optical power meter reads the LO state and receives no optical signals.
Step 7 Compare A with B.
● If the deviation between A and B is less than 1 dB, it indicates that the fiber is
correctly connected and the attenuation of the fiber is within the normal
range.
● If the deviation between A and B is more than 1 dB, make sure the fiber is
fine and correctly routed, and then check whether the fiber terminal is clean.
NO TICE
If the fiber is connected through a flange, the deviation between A and B should
be less than 2 dB. Otherwise, it indicates that the fiber is incorrectly connected
and the attenuation of the fiber is not within the normal range. Make sure that
the fiber is fine and correctly routed, and then check whether the fiber terminal is
clean.
Step 8 Check the fiber of the IN port in the same way.
Step 9 Recover the fiber connections on the chassis side and ODF side.
Step 10 Repeat Steps 1 - 9 to check fiber connections to other optical interfaces.
----End
4.1.1.3.5 Grounding Specifications
Suitable grounding helps to avoid accidental personal injury and guarantee the
safe running of the equipment, and provide EMC shielding to improve the quality
of service (QoS).
General Grounding Specifications
This section introduces the general grounding specifications.
General grounding specifications, as shown in Table 4-16.
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 276
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement
Table 4-16 General grounding specifications
No. Description
1 Working ground, protection ground (including shielding ground and
lightning ground) should be bonded to the same grounding electrode.
2 Cable racks, equipment frames and enclosures, metallic air ducts and
doors and windows in the equipment room should be grounded.
3 All the metallic equipment units that are normally neutral should be
grounded.
4 The ground cables should firmly contact with the ground bar in the
equipment.
5 Connection to the already grounded equipment for grounding purpose is
not allowed.
Grounding Specifications for the Building
This section introduces the grounding specifications for the building.
Grounding specifications for the building, as shown in Table 4-17.
Table 4-17 Grounding specifications for the building
No. Description
1 Usually, the earth resistance of the telecommunication site where the
base station equipment is located is recommended to be less than 10
ohm. It also should comply with the relative stipulation of the country.
Equipment Grounding Specifications
This section introduces the equipment grounding specifications.
Equipment grounding specifications, as shown in Table 4-18.
Table 4-18 Equipment grounding specifications
No. Description
1 All the network telecommunications equipment including mobile base
station, transmission equipment, switching equipment and office power
should be grounded. All the protection grounds (PGNDs) of such
equipment should be finally bonded to a general ground bar. The PGNDs
in an equipment room should be bonded to the general ground bar in the
same equipment room.
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 277
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement
No. Description
2 The PGND of the equipment should be connected to the nearby ground
bar (user-supplied). Copper-core conducting cable with green-yellow
plastic insulation cover should be used. The cross-sectional area of the
conductive cable is required to be 25 mm2 or wider.
3 The grounding terminals at the front door, rear door and side panels of
the cabinet should be separately connected to the grounding post of the
cabinet. The cross-sectional area of the cable is required to be 1.6 mm2.
4 The metallic units of the equipment cabinet should have good
conductance. Any nonconductive paint should be removed from the
metal-to-metal contact.
5 The cabinets contact the adjacent cabinets in a row through the fixing
bolts and washers on the cabinet top. A surface of 30 x 50 mm2 around
the bolt holes should not be covered with paint. Rust-proof and rot-proof
measures should be taken. The surface of the washer and nut should be
plated with nickel to ensure good electrical conductance.
6 When the cabinets of the same type are connected, cables not longer
than 300 mm should be used to connect the grounding busbars of
adjacent cabinets, if these busbars exist. The cross-sectional area of the
short cables is required to be 6 mm2. Two ends of the short cable should
be secured to the terminals of the ground bar.
Grounding Specifications for Office Power
This section introduces the grounding specifications for office power
Grounding specifications for office power, as shown in Table 4-19.
Table 4-19 Grounding specifications for office power
No. Description
1 TN-S AC power system should be adopted in the equipment room.
2 A C-level AC lightning protector with rated current not less than 20 KA
should be installed at the AC power cable inlet of the equipment room.
3 PGNDs of the office power and telecommunications equipment should
finally connect to the same grounding electrode. Grounds of
telecommunications equipment and office power in an equipment room
should be bonded to the ground bar in the same equipment room.
4 Lightning-proof circuit should be added to AC power interface.
5 The positive electrode of -48V/-60V DC power or the negative electrode
of 24 DC power should be grounded at the DC power outlet.
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 278
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement
No. Description
6 The working ground and PGND of DC power system and the PGND of
switching equipment should finally connect to the same grounding
electrode. Grounds of telecommunications equipment and office power in
an equipment room should be bonded to the ground bar in the same
equipment room.
7 Surge-proof circuit should be added to DC power interface.
Grounding Specifications for Signal Cables
This section introduces the grounding specifications for signal cables.
Grounding specifications for signal cables, as shown in Table 4-20.
Table 4-20 Grounding specifications for signal cables
No. Description
1 The outside cable should have metallic protection cover and two ends of
the cover should be well grounded. The end in the equipment room can
be connected to the ground bar in the equipment room. Lightning
protector should be installed in the interface connecting the coming
cable. The ground cable of the lightning protector should be as short as
possible.
2 Both the outer conductor of coaxial cable and the metal shield of
shielded cable should firmly contact with the metal surface of the target
equipment.
3 Idle wire pair in the signal cable should be grounded in the equipment
room.
4 The TDA tone cable should pass through the main distribution frame
(MDF) that has a security unit before it goes out the office. Metal shield
of the cable should connect to the PGND of the MDF. The MDF and the
cabinet should share the same grounding electrode.
5 Overhead signal cables in the telecommunications office or mobile base
station area is not allowed.
Specifications for Managing Ground Cables
This section introduces the Specifications for managing ground cables.
Specifications for managing ground cables, as shown in Table 4-21.
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 279
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement
Table 4-21 Specifications for managing ground cables
No. Description
1 Ground cables should be routed separately with signal cables.
2 Ground cables should not be routed into the equipment room through
overhead cable trays. They should be routed under ground or inside the
room.
3 The PGNG cable must be a jointless copper-core cable. Installing
connectors, splices or breakers to ground cables is not allowed.
4 The PGND cable should use copper-core conducting cable with green-
yellow plastic insulation cover.
5 The neutral wire of the AC power cable should not connect to the PGNDs
of the telecommunications equipment in the equipment room.
6 The PGND cable should be as short as possible (no more than 30 m).
Otherwise, the user should adjust the position of ground bar.
4.1.1.3.6 Engineering Labels
Engineering labels are attached to both ends of various cables to identify the
physical positions of cables on different devices. There are two types of
engineering labels, specialized for the power cables and signal cables respectively.
The power cables include - 48 V / - 60 V power cables, power ground cables
(BGND) and protection ground cables (PGND). The signal cables include external
alarm cables, network cables, clock cables, optical fibers and so on.
Engineering labels for cables ensure the orderly and correct installation of cables
of equipment and facilitate the easy subsequent equipment maintenance and
inspection.
NO TE
In case there is special requirement from the user of the equipment on the description
method of the labels, the labels should be printed accordingly. However, this must be stated
in the self-check report.
Introduction to Labels
Introduces the labels used in the equipment.
?.1. Material
This section describes the requirements for the thickness, color, materials, ambient
temperature, and fill-in method of the labels.
The label's characteristic are as follows:
● Thickness: 0.09 mm
● Color: chalk white
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 280
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement
● Material: Polyester (PET), with UL and CSA certifications
● Ambient temperature: - 29 to 149 degrees Celsius
● Laser printing or handwriting with oiliness markers
?.2. Type and Shape
There are two types of engineering labels for power cables and signal cables
respectively.
Label for Signal Cables
The label for signal cables is L-shaped with fixed dimensions, as shown in Figure
4-11.
Figure 4-11 Label for signal cables
1.Dividing line 2.Cut dotted line
The dividing lines on the label help to specify more clearly the position of a cable.
For example, there is one between the cabinet number and the frame number and
another one between the frame number and the slot number. The dividing line is
1.5 mm x 0.6 mm in size with the color of PONTONE 656c (light blue).
The cut dotted line helps to fold the label when attaching it to the cable, and its
size is 1.0 mm x 2.0 mm.
There is a mark "TO:" (upside down in the figure) at the lower right corner of the
label. The mark is used to identify the opposite end of the cable on which the
label is attached.
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 281
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement
Label for Power Cables
The label for power cables should be attached to the identification plate on the
cable ties that are bundled to the cable. The identification plate has an
embossment of 0.2 mm x 0.6 mm around (symmetric on both sides), and the area
in the middle is for attaching the label, as shown in Figure 4-12.
Figure 4-12 Label for power cables
1.Cable tie 2.Label 3.Dividing line on the label
Information Carried on Labels
This section gives the information carried on labels for signal cable and power
cable.
?.1. For Power Cables
Labels for power cables are only attached on one side of the identification plates.
On the labels, there is information (the part after the mark "TO:") about the
location of the device on the other end of the cable, like the location of control
cabinet, distribution box or power socket.
?.2. For Signal Cables
The two sides of the label attached on the signal cable carry information about
the location of the ports connected to both ends of the cable.
The information is given like this:
● Area 1 contains the location information of local end of the cable.
● Area 2 (with the mark "TO:") contains the location information of the
opposite end of the cable.
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 282
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement
● Area 3 has been folded up inside the label.
Printed parts on the label for signal cables, as shown in Figure 4-13.
Figure 4-13 Label for signal cables
Seen from the cabling end of the equipment, the text part of the label is on the
right side of the cable. The side with "TO:" that is facing outside carries the
location information of the opposite end, and the other side carries the location
information of the local end. Therefore, the information in Area 1 at one end is
the same as the information in Area 2 at the other end of the cable, and vice
versa. In other words, the local information at one end is called the opposite
information at the other end.
?.3. Remarks
To use labels, focus on the following points.
● When printing/writing and attaching labels, pay attention to keep the labels
clean.
● Since the label paper is made of moistureproof and waterproof material, ink-
jet printers and ink pens are forbidden for printing and writing labels.
● Labels should be attached with good order in alignment.
● Cable ties should be bundled in the same position of power cables, with
identification plates on the same side.
● The positions of "up", "down", "right" or "left" are all based on the viewpoint
of the engineering person who is working on the label.
Filling Information on Labels
This section describes how to fill information on labels. The contents can be
printed or written on the labels. Printing is recommended for the sake of high
efficiency and eye-pleasant layout.
?.1. Printing Labels
Use a laser printer to print the label according to the template.
Template for the Printing
Template is available to print out the label. You can obtain the template by:
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 283
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement
● Downloading the template from http://support.huawei.com. The directory of
the template is Documentation > Engineering Service > Engineering Quality >
Quality Standard and Template.
● Asking for the template from Huawei local office.
Figure 4-14 shows the template style.
Figure 4-14 Template of label
1.Cell 2.Cell
Cells Merging on the Template
When using the template, you can directly modify the contents on the template,
and the following should be observed:
● The settings of centered characters, direction, and fonts should not be
changed.
● When there are too many characters to be filled in, zoom out the characters,
but make sure the printouts are clear and legible.
To merge the cells, you should first recover the table structure (if gridlines are
displayed, you can start from Step 3 directly).
1. Select the menu item Edit >Select All.
2. Select the menu item Format > Borders and Shading >Borders. Select Box and
click OK.
3. Drag the mouse to select the cells to be merged and select the menu item
Table > Merge Cells.
4. Change the content based on the original thing.
If two merged cells are still not enough to accommodate the characters, use
multiple lines.
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 284
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement
Requirements on the Printer
To print the labels, laser jet printer must be used, although there is no restriction
on the model of the printer. Before printing the label, set up the page and try the
printing on ordinary blank paper (both sides are blank):
1. Cover the blank paper onto the whole page of label paper, and check whether
the page setup conforms to the requirement.
2. Make sure the printer properties, such as "paper size" and "direction", have
been set correctly.
3. If the warning prompt as shown in Figure 4-15 appears before printing, click
Ignore to continue the printing.
Figure 4-15 Warning prompt before printing
If the printout conforms to the requirement, print it to label paper. If the printout
does not conform, adjust the page setup and try the printing again, until the
correct printout is produced. The method of adjusting the page setup is as follows:
1. Select the menu item File > Page Setup.
2. Select the Margins tab page.
3. Select Left for Gutter Position.
4. Set Header and Footer to 0, and adjust the values of Top, Bottom, Left, and
Right.
After the page setup has been made correct, save it for future use. This page setup
is only necessary the first time you use the template to print the labels.
Requirements on the Printed Label
After you print the labels, check whether they comply with the template
specifications:
● All the printouts must be on the label, and nothing should be printed on the
bottom page of the label.
● Contents in the cells should be aligned in the center. In a single-line printout,
the dividing lines and the mark "TO:" should not be covered by the printed
characters.
● When the cells are merged and the printouts are made in multiple lines, avoid
covering the mark "TO:" when printing the texts by using the space bar to
move the printing contents to the next line.
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 285
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement
NO TICE
Different from the ordinary paper, the label paper is composed of two pages. No
matter what model of printer you are using, feed in the labels one after another
by hand. Never use the auto-feed mode in order to avoid jamming the labels.
Different models of printers may have different feeding modes, make sure to feed
in the labels correctly.
?.2. Writing Labels
Use the black oiliness markers delivered together with the equipment to write the
labels. For easy recognition and good-looking, the font in handwriting should be
close to the standard typeface as much as possible.
Writing pen
Use the black oiliness markers delivered together with the device to write the
labels.
In special cases, black ball-pens are allowed, although not recommended. When
writing with the ball-pen, take care not to leave the oil on the label, which may
contaminate the label and blur the words.
NO TE
The delivered marker has two nibs. Make sure to use the smaller nib to write the labels.
Handwriting
For the sake of easy recognition and good looking, the font in handwriting should
be close to the standard typeface as much as possible.Table 4-22 shows the
standard typeface.
Table 4-22 Standard typeface for handwriting
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
9 A B C D E F G H
I J K L M N O P Q
R S T U V W X Y Z
The font size depends on the number of figures and letters. The words must be
medium-sized, legible, tidy and good-looking.
Writing direction
Write the characters in proper size, and the direction is shown in Figure 4-16.
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 286
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement
Figure 4-16 Writing direction of the label
attaching Labels
After printing or writing the label, remove the label from the bottom page and
attach it to the signal cable, or the identification plate of the power cable.
?.1. Attaching the Label to the Signal Cable
This section describes the positions where the labels should be attached on the
signal cables and the means by which the labels are folded.
Paste the label at the proper position
It is recommended to paste a label at a point 2 cm from the connector.
NO TE
In special cases, for example, to avoid cable bent or affecting other cables, other positions
are allowed to attach the labels.
The steps to attach the label to the cable are shown in Figure 4-17 The finished
labels should be on the right or top of the cables, according to different cabling
methods. The left part of the figures shows the method to attach the label when
the cable is laid vertically, while the right part of the figures shows the method to
attach the label when the cable is laid horizontally.
● Stick the label to the proper position on the cable, fold the narrow part of the
label according to the directions shown in Figure 4-17.
Figure 4-17 Sticking the label onto proper position of the signal cable
1. Cable 2. Label
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 287
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement
Fold the part
Fold the printed part along the dotted line according to the directions shown in
(2) of Figure 4-17.
The length of the narrow part is based on an external cable diameter of 2.6 mm,
after this part has been stuck to the back of the label, it may not overlap the
entire printed part.
After the printed part of the label has been folded, the narrow part of the label
should be covered completely, as shown in Figure 4-17.
Fold the Label
Fold the label upwards along the dashed line, and attach it. After being attached,
the label is shaped as (3) of Figure 4-17.
?.2. attaching the Label to the Power Cable
This section describes the positions where the labels should be attached on the
power cables and the means by which the cable ties are bound to the power
cables.
Remove the label from the bottom page, then attach it to the identification plate
on the cable tie. The label should be stuck to the rectangular flute, and should be
stuck to only one side of the identification plate. Make sure to attach the labels on
the same side of the identification plates. The cable ties are bundled 2 cm from
the connectors, and other positions are allowed in special circumstances.
Cable ties should be bundled on both ends of a cable. After the bundling, the
finished identification plate should be on top of the cable in horizontal cabling, or
on the right side of the cable in vertical cabling. Make sure the label is facing out,
as shown in Figure 4-18.
Figure 4-18 Appearance of attached labels on power cables
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 288
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement
Frequently Used Engineering Labels
This section describes the frequently used engineering labels. The other labels are
omitted here. You can perform the operation as required on site.
?.1. Engineering Labels for Power Cables
The labels are attached to the DC cables that provide power for the cabinets, and
the protection ground cables, including the -48 V, PGND, and BGND cables. The
labels for DC power cables are attached to one side of the identification plates on
cable ties.
Table 4-23 shows the information carried on the labels for the DC power cables.
Table 4-23 Information on labels attached to the DC power cables
Content Meaning
MN(BC) - -1 MN (BC): BC is written right under
MN. On the loaded cabinet side, MN
MN(BC) - -2 identifies the row and column number
MN(BC) - BGND of the power distribution equipment
like the control cabinet and
MN(BC) - PGND distribution box, BC identifies the row
and column number of the -48 V
connector (if there is no row number
or column number, or the connector
can be identified without them, BC can
be omitted). BGND and PGND have no
row and column number for
identification. On the power cabinet
side, only MN is used to identify the
cabinet.
The label only carries location information about the opposite equipment, the
control cabinet or the distribution box, while information of the local end is not
necessary. Table 4-23 lists the information of two -48 V power supplies on the
label. The information for other DC voltages (such as 24 V, 60 V) should be given
in similar methods. Make sure that labels are attached in correct direction. That is,
after the cable ties are bundled onto the cable, the identification plates with the
labels should face up, and the text on the labels in the same cabinet should be in
the same direction, as shown in Figure 4-19.
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 289
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement
Figure 4-19 Example of the labels on the DC power cable
On the loaded cabinet side, the label marked with "A01/B08- -2" on the cable
indicates that the cable is -2 DC supply, which is from the eighth connector on the
second row of -48V bus bar in the cabinet on Row A, and Column 1 in the
equipment room.
On the distribution unit side, the label marked with "B03- -2" indicates that the
cable is -2 DC supply, which is from the loaded cabinet on Row B, Column 03 in
the equipment room.
NO TE
● In the power distribution unit (or the first power cabinet of a row in the transmission
equipment room), every terminal block on the - connector bar has a numeric
identification. For example, in the above label of "A01/B08--48V2", "08" (or sometimes
"8") is the numeric identification of the terminal block.
● PGND and BGND are two copper bars, on which the terminal blocks are connected,
therefore which terminal is connected makes no difference. It is only necessary to give
the row and column of the power distribution unit, instead of giving the specific serial
number of the terminal block on the copper bar. For example, if the label on the loaded
cabinet side is "A01-BGND", it means that the power cable is a BGND that connects
BGND copper bar in the power distribution unit on Row A, Column 01 in the equipment
room. Information on the labels for PGND cables should be given in the similar way.
?.2. Engineering Labels for External Cables of Alarm Box
The external cables of alarm box are connected to the first subscriber cabinet of
each row (used for power distribution). Labels posted on the first cabinet of each
row should indicate which equipment is using the access terminal.
Labels are not needed on the equipment side unless there is special requirement.
In this case, only Area 2 of the label should be filled in.
Table 4-24 shows the information on the labels of alarm box external cables.
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 290
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement
Table 4-24 Information on labels attached to the external cables of alarm box
Content Meaning Example
MN MN: serial M: The cabinets going from front to back (in a
number of the row) in the equipment room are numbered from
cabinet in the A to Z.
equipment N: The cabinets going from left to right (in a
room column) are numbered from 01 to 99.
For example, A01 is the cabinet in Row A and
Column 01.
The label on the alarm cable carries simple information, and only part of the text
area needs to be filled in. It is recommended to keep the whole length of the label
instead of cutting out the blank area.
Figure 4-20 shows a label on the alarm cable, on which "A01" indicates that the
alarm cable connects the first cabinet and the cabinet on Row A, Column 01 in the
equipment room.
Figure 4-20 Example of the label on the alarm cable
?.3. Engineering Labels for Ethernet Cables
Engineering labels of Ethernet cables are used to identify network port cables of
boards. The label content includes the cabinet number, position number, subrack
serial number, position number of the physical board, and serial number of the
network port.
Meaning of the Label
Table 4-25 shows the information on both sides of the labels attached to the
Ethernet cables that connect the boards in the frames.
Table 4-25 Information on labels attached to the Ethernet cables
Content Meaning Example
MN-B-C-D MN: cabinet For example, A01
number
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 291
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement
Content Meaning Example
B: frame Numbered in top-down order with two digits,
number for example, 01
C: physical Numbered in top-down and left-right order
slot number with two digits, for example, 01
D: Ethernet Numbered in top-down and left-right order
port number with two digits, for example, 01
MN-Z MN: cabinet For example, B02
number
Z: location Valid location number of the terminal device
number onsite. If the cable is connected to a router in a
cabinet, the serial numbers of the cabinet, the
frame and the Ethernet interface of the router
should be specified, for example, B02-03-12. If
the cable is connected to the network
management station (NMS), specific location
of the NMS should be given.
Example of the Label
Figure 4-21 shows the label on the Ethernet cable:
Figure 4-21 Example of the label on the Ethernet cable
"A01-03-10-05" indicates that on the local end of the Ethernet cable is connected
to Ethernet Port 05, Slot 10, Frame 03 of the cabinet on Row A, Column 01 in the
equipment room.
"B02-03-12" indicates that the opposite end of the Ethernet cable is connected to
Ethernet Port 12, Frame 03 of the cabinet on Row B, Column 02 in the equipment
room.
?.4. Engineering Labels of the Fibers Between Two Devices
These labels are attached to the fibers that connect the optical interfaces on the
boards in a frame, or on the device boxes. There are two types of labels for fibers:
one is for the fiber that connects the optical interfaces on two devices, the other is
for the fiber that connects the device and the optical distribution frame (ODF).
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 292
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement
Meaning of the Label
Table 4-26 shows the information on both sides of the labels attached to the fiber
that connects two devices.
Table 4-26 Information on labels attached to the fiber between two devices
Content Meaning Example
MN-B-C-D-R/T MN: cabinet number For example, A01
B: frame number Numbered in top-down order with
two digits, for example, 01
C: physical slot number Numbered in top-down and left-
right order with two digits, for
example, 01
D: optical interface Numbered in top-down and left-
number right order with two digits, for
example, 05
R: optical receiving -
interface
T: optical transmitting
interface
MN-B-C-D-R/T MN: cabinet number The meanings are the same as
above. When the local device and
B: frame number the opposite end device are not in
C: physical slot number the same equipment room, MN
can be the name of the
D: optical interface equipment room.
number
R: optical receiving -
interface
T: optical transmitting
interface
Example of the Label
Figure 4-22 shows the label on the fiber jumper between two devices:
Figure 4-22 Example of the label on the fiber between two devices
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 293
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement
"A01-01-05-05-R" indicates that the local end of the fiber jumper is connected to
Optical Receiving Interface 05 on Slot 5, Frame 01 in the cabinet on Row A,
Column 01 in the equipment room.
"G01-01-01-01-T" indicates that the opposite end of the fiber jumper is connected
to optical transmitting interface 01 on Slot 01, Frame 01 in the cabinet on Row G,
Column 01 in the equipment room.
?.5. Labels for the Fiber that Connects the Device and the ODF
The label stuck on the fiber from the equipment to the ODF contains all necessary
information on the cabinet and the ODF.
Meaning of the Label
Table 4-27 shows the information on both sides of the labels attached to the fiber
that connects the device and the ODF.
Table 4-27 Information on labels attached to the fiber between the device and
the ODF
Content Meaning Example
MN-B-C-D-R/T MN: cabinet number For example, A01
B: frame number Numbered in bottom-up
order with two digits, for
example, 01
C: physical slot number Numbered in top-down
and left-right order with
two digits, for example,
01
D: optical interface number Numbered in top-down
and left-right order with
two digits, for example,
05
MN-B-C-D-R/T R: optical receiving interface -
T: optical transmitting
interface
ODF-MN-B-C-R/T MN: row number and column M indicates a row that is
number of ODF numbered A to Z from
front to back in order.
N indicates a column
that is numbered 01 to
99 from left to right in
order, for example, G01
is the ODF of Row G and
Column 01.
B: row number of the Range from 01 to 99, for
terminal device example, 01-01
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 294
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement
Content Meaning Example
C: column number of the
terminal device
R: optical receiving interface -
T: optical transmitting
interface
Example of the Label
Figure 4-23 shows the label on the fiber jumper between the device and the ODF.
Figure 4-23 Example of the label on the fiber between the device and the ODF
"ODF-G01-01-01-R" indicates that the local end of the fiber jumper is connected
to the optical receiving terminal on Row 01, Column 01 of the ODF in Row G
Column 01 in the equipment room.
"A01-01-05-05-R" indicates that the opposite end of the fiber jumper is connected
to Optical Receiving Interface 5 on Slot 05, frame 01 in the cabinet on Row A,
Column 01 in the equipment room.
4.1.1.3.7 The Requirements of Cabling and Bundling
Introduces the requirements of cabling and bundling the cables.
The Requirements of Cabling
Describes the method and requirements of cable routing.
● For equipment room installed with supports and ESD protection floor, cables
can be arranged in downward mode. That is, all cables can be routed through
the interlayer of the floor or the cable trough. If the overhead cabling mode is
adopted, cable tray is required above the cabinet for holding cables.
● The specifications and cross-sectional area of the cable, and the route and
position for cabling should be designed beforehand.
● All cables should be arranged neatly, with their sheaths remaining intact.
● Communication cables, such as alarm cables, network cables and clock cables,
should be arranged separately with the power cable and optical fibers.
● Turnings of the cable should be smooth, with the bend radius reaching 60mm
or above.
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 295
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement
● Any damage to the insulation layer of the conducting line is not allowed.
● The cable arrangement should take the future maintenance and capacity
expansion into consideration.
The Requirements of Bundling
Describes the method and requirements of cable binding.
● Bundling of the cable should be tidy, clear and elegant. As a general rule,
cables are grouped by types, or grouped as needed when they are in a large
number. Bind them with cable ties and route them in either upward or
underfloor cabling mode in the cabling area at the two sides of the cabinet.
● Cables must be bundled when arranged in ducts. Bind the cables closely with
appropriate tightness. The space between the cable ties should be even and
the overall appearance of the cabling nice.
● You may not bind the cables when arranged in cable troughs. But they should
be placed tidy and straight in the trough with no crossover. Moreover, the
cables can not overflow the trough. At two ends and turnings of the trough,
use a plastic clip for the cables.
● Cables both inside and outside the cabinet must be bundled. Keep the cables
bundled closely and neatly.
● Use cable ties of different specifications for cables according to actual
circumstances.
● Do not connect two cable ties in bundling. Otherwise, the binding strength
will be weakened.
● After the bundling, cut the remaining part of the cable tie smoothly, removing
all burrs.
● The space between the cable ties is even and is three or four times the size of
the bundle diameter.
● When making turning for the bundled cable, keep the bend radius as big as
possible to avoid breaking the cable cores at the turning.
Figure 4-24 shows the specific operation of bundling.
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 296
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement
Figure 4-24 Cable bundling
1. No cable tie at 2. Cable tie 3. Burr 4. Cut smoothly
turning
4.1.1.3.8 Binding Strap
This chapter introduces the architecture and usage of the binding strap, as well as
precautions for bundling the optical fibers.
NO TICE
To avoid any human-caused accidents, read this chapter carefully before bundling
the fiber jumpers.
Introduction to Binding Straps
The section describes the architecture and cutting of the binding strap.
?.1. Architecture
The binding strap fulfills its locking function by cooperation of these two sides.
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 297
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement
The binding strap for optical fiber is 12.7 mm wide, with one hook side
(transparent polypropylene material) and one mat side (black nylon material).
The architecture of the binding strap ,as shown in Figure 4-25.
Figure 4-25 Binding strap
1. Hook side 2. Mat side
?.2. Cutting
This procedure cutting the binding strap after installing the fiber jumpers.
Prerequisites
None
Tools, Equipment and Materials
● Cutterbar
● Binding strap
Precautions
NO TE
You can use a pair of scissors if there is no cutterbar on site.
Procedure
Step 1 Install the binding strap on the plastic axis of the cutterbar, as shown in Figure
4-26.
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 298
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement
Figure 4-26 Install binding strap on cutterbar
1. Binding strap 2. Plastic axis 3. Cutterbar
Step 2 Roll the binding strap and allow it to pass through the guiding trough of the
cutterbar.
Step 3 Cut the binding strap into appropriate length by slantly hauling the binding strap
towards the cutter tooth of the cutterbar, as shown in Figure 4-27.
Figure 4-27 Cut the binding strap
1. Binding strap 2. Guiding trough 3. Cutter tooth
----End
Bundling the Binding Strap
This section describes how to bund the binding strap.
?.1. Procedures for Bundling the Binding Strap
This procedure describes how to bind bundling of the binding strap
Prerequisites
None
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 299
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement
Tools, Equipment and Materials
● Optical fiber
● Binding strap
Precautions
NO TE
When you use a binding strap, keep the mat side inside and the hook side outside.
Procedure
Step 1 Arrange the optical fibers into a bundle.
Step 2 Cut off a piece of binding strap of appropriate length according to the size of the
bundle.
Step 3 Hold the fiber bundle with one hand and press one end of the binding strap on
the bundle with the thumb.
Step 4 Strain the binding strap by the other end with the other hand, as shown in Figure
4-28.
Figure 4-28 Step 2 of bundling optical fiber
Step 5 Turn the binding strap around the fiber bundle with appropriate strain till the mat
side adhibits the hook side snugly, as shown in Figure 4-29.
Figure 4-29 Step 3 of bundling optical fiber
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 300
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement
----End
?.2. Expected Result
The section describes the expected result of the binding strap.
Figure 4-30 shows the bundling result.
Figure 4-30 Bundling result of optical fiber
?.3. Precautions
Bundle the fibers as the follow items.
● It is only the mat side of the binding strap that contacts the optical fiber.
● Arrange the optical fibers tidily into a bundle before bundling.
● Bundle the optical fibers with appropriate tightness. Never bind them too
tight.
● The space between two binding straps should not exceed 40 cm.
4.1.1.3.9 Assembling and Testing the Cable Connector
This section describes how to assemble the cable connector and how to test the
connectivity of the cable.
Assembling the RJ45 connector with the Ethernet Cable and Testing the
Connectivity
This section describes how to assemble the RJ45 connector with the shielded
Ethernet cable or non-shielded Ethernet cable, and how to test the cable
connectivity and network cable connection.
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 301
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement
?.1. Connection Relations of Network Cables
The commonly used network cables are classified into straight through network
cables and crossover network cables based on the different pin assignments.
Figure 4-31 shows the pin assignment of the straight through network cables.
Figure 4-31 Pin assignment of the straight through network cables
Table 4-28 lists the pin assignment of the straight through network cables.
Table 4-28 Pin assignment of the straight through network cables
Connector Connector X2 Color Relation
X1
X1.1 X2.1 White or orange Twisted pair
X1.2 X2.2 Orange
X1.3 X2.3 White or green Twisted pair
X1.6 X2.6 Green
X1.4 X2.4 Blue Twisted pair
X1.5 X2.5 White or blue
X1.7 X2.7 White or brown Twisted pair
X1.8 X2.8 Brown
Figure 4-32 shows the pin assignment of the crossover network cables.
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 302
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement
Figure 4-32 Pin assignment of the crossover network cables
Table 4-29 lists the pin assignment of the crossover network cables.
Table 4-29 Pin assignment of the crossover network cables
Connector Connector X2 Color Relation
X1
X1.6 X2.2 Orange Twisted pair
X1.3 X2.1 White or orange
X1.1 X2.3 White or green Twisted pair
X1.2 X2.6 Green
X1.4 X2.4 Blue Twisted pair
X1.5 X2.5 White or blue
X1.7 X2.7 White or brown Twisted pair
X1.8 X2.8 Brown
Figure 4-33 shows the pin assignment of the RJ45 connector.
Figure 4-33 Pin assignment of the RJ45 connector
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 303
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement
?.2. Assembling the RJ45 connector with the Shielded Ethernet Cable
This section describes the materials of the RJ45 connector for the shielded
Ethernet cable and the procedures of assembling the RJ45 connector with the
shielded Ethernet cable.
Prerequisites
None
Tools, Equipment and Materials
Wire stripper, cable cutter and crimper
Shielded Ethernet cable, whose components are shown in Figure 4-34.
Shielded Ethernet connector, whose components are shown in Figure 4-34.
Figure 4-34 Components of the shielded RJ45 connector
A Connector B Connector C Connector D Connector
external metal cable tray plug
sleeve sleeve
E Network F Network G Twisted - -
cable cable pair cable
sleeve shield layer
Procedure
Step 1 Lead the network cable through the connector external sleeve A, as shown in
Figure 4-35.
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 304
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement
Figure 4-35 Leading the network cable through the connector external sleeve
Step 2 Strip a 300 mm length of the external sleeve E and cut the nylon rip cord inside
the external sleeve. Make a 5 mm cut on the cable external sleeve, as shown in
Figure 4-36.
Figure 4-36 Stripping the external sleeve of the twisted pair cable
NO TICE
● When stripping the sleeve of the twisted pair cable, do not scratch the shield
layer.
● When stripping the shield layer, do not scratch the insulation layer covering the
twisted cores.
Step 3 Lead the connector metal sleeve B through the twisted pair cable. The sleeve
should envelop the shield layer F, as shown in Figure 4-37.
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 305
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement
Figure 4-37 Leading the connector metal sleeve
Step 4 Lead the connector metal sleeve to the root of the twisted pair cable sleeve. Cut
the shield layer and aluminum foil straight along the edge of the metal sleeve
without leaving any aluminum wires. Expose the twisted pair G, which is about 20
mm long, as shown in Figure 4-38.
Figure 4-38 Stripping the shield layer of the twisted pair cable
Step 5 Lead the four pairs of twisted cables, which are marked in different colors,
through the connector cable tray C respectively according to the colors. See Figure
4-39 and Figure 4-40.
Figure 4-39 Leading twisted pair cables through connector cable tray
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 306
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement
Figure 4-40 Colors of cores in the cable tray
Step 6 Align the four pairs of twisted cables G on the connector cable tray C according to
the illustrated colors. See Figure 4-41 and Figure 4-42.
Figure 4-41 Aligning the four pairs of twisted cables on the connector cable tray
Figure 4-42 Alignment of cores in different colors on the cable tray
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 307
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement
Step 7 Cut the cables straight along the edge of the connector cable tray C, as shown in
Figure 4-43.
Figure 4-43 Cutting the cables
Step 8 Lead the connector cable tray through the connector body D, and rotate the metal
shield shell 90 degree to push the cable tray inward, as shown in Figure 4-44.
Figure 4-44 Inserting the cable tray through the connector body
CA UTION
Make sure the connector cable tray is inserted to the bottom of the connector
body.
Step 9 Move the connector metal shell B toward the connector body to envelop the
connector body and connector cable tray. Then, use the crimper to crimp the
connector, as shown in Figure 4-45.
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 308
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement
Figure 4-45 Crimping the connector
Step 10 Move the connector external sleeve A toward the connector body until the
external sleeve A hitches the connector metal shell. Then, the cable components
at one end are made. See Figure 4-46.
Figure 4-46 Hitching the connector external sleeve
Step 11 A network cable may be either a crossover cable or a straight-through cable.
Which operations should be performed at the other end depends on the network
cable type.
● To assemble a straight-through cable, repeat Steps 1-10 to make the cable
components at the other end.
● To assemble a crossover cable, perform the following operations.
a. Repeat Steps 1-4.
b. Repeat Steps 5-6. In Steps 5-6, for the wire sequence, refer to the
mapping relation of the crossover cables in Table 4-29.
c. Repeat Steps 7-10 to make the cable components at the other end.
----End
?.3. Assembling the RJ45 connector with the Non-Shielded Ethernet Cable
This section describes the materials of the RJ45 connector for the non-shielded
Ethernet cable and procedures of assembling the RJ45 connector with the non-
shielded Ethernet cable.
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 309
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement
Prerequisites
None
Tools, Equipment and Materials
Wire stripper, cable cutter and crimper
Non-shielded Ethernet cable, whose components are shown in Figure 4-47.
Non-shielded Ethernet connector, whose components are shown in Figure 4-47.
Figure 4-47 Material components
A Connector plug B Sleeve C Twisted pair
cable
Procedure
Step 1 Strip the twisted pair cable according to the illustrated size and cut a 16 mm
length off the sleeve, as shown in Figure 4-48.
Figure 4-48 Stripping the twisted pair cable
Step 2 Align the twisted pairs in sequence and match the colors according to Figure
4-49. Cut the ends of the twisted pairs straight.
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 310
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement
Figure 4-49 Aligning the stripped twisted pair cable
NO TICE
● When stripping the sleeve of the twisted pair cable, do not scratch the shield
layer.
● When stripping the shield layer, do not scratch the insulation layer covering the
twisted cores.
Step 3 Insert the cable B with the aligned twisted pairs into the connector plug A and
crimp the connector with a crimper, as shown in Figure 4-50.
Figure 4-50 Crimping the connector
Step 4 A network cable may be either a crossover cable or a straight-through cable.
Which operations should be performed at the other end depends on the network
cable type.
● To assemble a straight-through cable, repeat Steps 1-3 to make the cable
components at the other end.
● To assemble a crossover cable, perform the following operations.
a. Repeat Step 1.
b. Repeat Step 2. In Step 2, for the wire sequence, refer to the mapping
relation of the crossover cables in Table 4-29.
c. Repeat Step 3 to make the cable components at the other end.
----End
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 311
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement
?.4. Checking the Assembled Cable Connector
This section describes how to check the assembled cable connector.
Prerequisites
None
Tools, Equipment and Materials
None
Checking the Physical View of the Metal Contact Slices
The checking standards are listed as follows:
● The metal contact slices should be of the same height and are of the required
sizes. The crimp part should properly contact the core conductor.
● The metal contact slices should be basically parallel with a deviation of not
more than five degrees. The top edges should be basically parallel with the
axes of the RJ45 connector with a deviation of not more than 10 degrees. This
ensures reliable contact.
● No perceptible object, dirt or rust should be present on the surface of the
metal contact slice. Otherwise, the conductivity is affected.
● The metal contact slices should reliably contact the RJ45 connector socket.
The plastic spacers should remain the same before and after the crimping,
and should have the same spacing between each other. Each of them should
be straight and intact.
● The crimping blade of the metal contact slice should exceed the core end. The
core end should tightly contact the trunking side of the RJ45 connector. The
contact spacing should not exceed 0.5 mm.
Procedure
Step 1 Hold the crimped RJ45 connector and observe the side from the front. Check the
height of each metal contact slice. The standard height is 6.02 mm ± 0.13 mm. If
no special test instrument is available on site, compare the RJ45 connector with
another well crimped RJ45 connector. Figure 4-51 and Figure 4-52 show an
unqualified RJ45 connector and a qualified RJ45 connector respectively.
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 312
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement
Figure 4-51 Metal contact slices of inconsistent height
Figure 4-52 Metal contact slices of consistent height
NO TE
If the RJ45 connector does not meet the requirement, crimp the RJ45 connector again and
make sure the RJ45 connector meets the requirement.
Step 2 Hold the RJ45 connector and slant it to a 45-degree angle. Side-glance the top
edge of each metal contact slice. Figure 4-53 an unqualified RJ45 connector.
Figure 4-53 Metal contact slices of inconsistent parallelism and height
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 313
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement
Step 3 Hold the RJ45 connector. Observe the side and front of the metal contact slice,
and check for any perceptible object, dirt or rust. Remove the perceptible object,
dirt or rust, if there is any. If the removal fails, replace RJ45 connector and
assemble the connector again. Otherwise, the connector is unqualified. See Figure
4-54.
Figure 4-54 Metal contact slices with perceptible object, dirt or rust on the surface
Step 4 Hold the RJ45 connector. Observe the side and front of the metal contact slices,
and observe the plastic spacers. Make sure they are intact and do not tilt. If they
tilt or are not intact, rectify the RJ45 connector. If the rectification fails, replace the
RJ45 connector and assemble the connector again. Otherwise, the connector is
unqualified. See Figure 4-55.
Figure 4-55 RJ45 connector with tilted plastic spacers
Step 5 Hold the RJ45 connector and observe the side to check whether you can see the
core section. Make sure that the end of the cable core is close to the face of the
cable trough of the connector. The metal contact should be higher than the end of
the cable core, and be properly crimped to the cable core. If the RJ45 connector
does not meet this requirement, replace the RJ45 connector and assemble the
connector again. Otherwise, the RJ45 connector is intact. See Figure 4-56.
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 314
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement
Figure 4-56 Cable core not pushed to the proper position
----End
?.5. Testing Cable Connectivity
This section describes how to test the connectivity of the Ethernet cable by using
the network cable tester.
Prerequisites
During the process of routing or bundling cables, and assembling the connectors,
the circuit on the cable may become open or broken. Hence, after the preceding
procedures are completed, test the connectivity of the cable.
Tools, Equipment and Materials
Network cable tester
Assembled network cable
Background Information
You can also use a multimeter to test the connectivity of the network cable
according to the core connections.
Procedure
Step 1 Insert the RJ45 connectors at the two ends of the assembled network cable into
the RJ-45 female ports of the network cable tester in sequence.
Step 2 Make sure the RJ45 connectors are inserted properly. Turn on the network cable
tester and start the test. In the case of the crossover cable and straight through
network cable, the test procedures are the same but the indicators at the two
ends turn on in different sequences. Test the crossover cable according to the core
connections.
● In the case of the straight through network cable, the indicators at points 1, 8
and G turn on in sequence. This indicates that the connectivity is fine and core
connections are correct.
● In the case of the crossover cable, the indicators at points 1, 8 and G of the
main end turn on in sequence, and the indicators at points 3, 6, 1, 4, ,5 2, 7, 8
and G of the subsidiary end turns on in sequence. This indicates that the
connectivity of the crossover cable is proper.
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 315
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement
NO TE
Turn the switch to position S to extend the interval for indicators to turn on. In this way, you can
observe the change more accurately. See Figure 4-57.
Figure 4-57 Testing the connectivity
Step 3 Slightly shake the RJ45 connector of the assembled network interface and repeat
Step 2. Make sure that each metal contact slice of the RJ45 connector reliably
contacts the core and contacts the contact point of the female network port of the
network cable tester.
----End
Assembling Power Cables
This section describes how to assemble the OT terminals and cord end terminals
of power cables.
?.1. Assembling OT Terminals and Power Cables
This section briefs the components of ring terminals and power cables, and
describes the procedure for assembling them.
Prerequisites
none.
Tools, Equipment and Materials
Wire stripper
Heat gun
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 316
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement
The components of ring terminals and power cables are shown inFigure 4-58.
Figure 4-58 Components of a ring terminal and a power cable
A Heat shrink tube B Ring terminal C Insulation layer of D Conductor of power
power cable cable
Procedure
Step 1 Peel a part of the insulation layer C of a power cable according to the cross-
section of the cable conductor. The conductor D with length L1 appears, as shown
in Figure 4-59. The recommended values of L1 are shown in Table 4-30.
Figure 4-59 Peeling a power cable
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 317
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement
NO TICE
● When peeling the insulation layer of a power cable, do not hurt the metal
conductor of the cable.
● If the bare press-fitting terminal is not provided by Huawei, adapt the value of
L1 according to the actual value L of the terminal. L1 = L + (1-2) mm.
Table 4-30 Cross-sectional area of the conductor and value of L1
Cross-Sectional Area of Value of L1(mm)
Conductor(mm2)
1, 1.5, 2.5 7
4 8
6 9
10 11
16 13
Step 2 Put the power cable into heat shrink tubing A, as shown in Figure 4-60.
Step 3 Put the cable conductor into a ring terminal. And keep the ring terminal close to
the insulation layer C of the power cable, as shown in Figure 4-60.
Figure 4-60 Inserting the cable conductor into the ring terminal
NO TICE
After the conductor is put into the ring terminal, the L2 part will extrude. The
value of L2 should be less than or equal to 2 mm.
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 318
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement
Step 4 As shown in Figure 4-61, press-fit the joint parts of the bare press-fitting terminal
and the conductor by a press-fitting tool.
Figure 4-61 Press-Fitting joint parts of a bare press-fitting terminal and a
conductor
NO TE
The shapes of press-fit parts may vary with the types of the press-fitting dies.
Step 5 Push the heat shrink tubing A towards the connector till the tube covers the press-
fit part. Heat the heat shrink tubing using a heat gun, as shown in Figure 4-62.
Figure 4-62 1-5 Heating a heat shrink tubing
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 319
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement
NO TICE
Do not heat the heat shrink tubing for too long time. Otherwise, the insulation
layer may be damaged.
----End
?.2. Assembling Cord End Terminals and Power Cables
This section briefs the components of cord end terminals and power cables, and
describes the procedure for assembling them.
Prerequisites
none.
Tools, Equipment and Materials
Wire stripper
Cord end terminal crimper are shown in Figure 4-63.
The components of cord end terminals and power cables are shown in Figure
4-64.
Figure 4-63 Cord end terminal crimper
Figure 4-64 Components of a cord end terminal and a power cable
A Cold soldering terminal B Insulation layer of power C Conductor of power cable
cable
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 320
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement
Procedure
Step 1 Peel a part of the insulation layer B of a power cable according to the cross-
sectional area of the cable conductor. The conductor C with length L1 appears, as
shown in Figure 4-65. The recommended values of L1 are shown in Table 4-31.
Figure 4-65 Peeling a power cable
NO TICE
When peeling the insulation layer of a power cable, do not hurt the metal
conductor of the cable.
Table 4-31 Cross-sectional area of the conductor and value of L1
Cross-sectional Area of Conductor Value of L1(mm)
(mm2)
1, 1.5, 2.5 7
4 8
6 9
10 11
16 13
Step 2 Put the cable conductor into the cord end terminal A. Align the conductor with the
edge of the cord end terminal, as shown in Figure 4-66.
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 321
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement
Figure 4-66 Putting a cable into a cord end terminal
NO TICE
After the cord end terminal is assembled, the exposed part of the conductor
should not be more than 1 mm.
Step 3 Press-fit the joint parts of the cord end terminal and the conductor using soldering
tool, as shown in Figure 4-67.
Figure 4-67 Press-Fitting a cord end terminal and a power cable
Step 4 After press-fitting the terminal, check the maximum width of the press-fit part.
The width of the tubular terminal after press-fit should be less than the maximum
width described in Table 4-32
Table 4-32 Maximum width of tubular terminal after press-fit
Cross-Sectional Area of Tubular Maximum Width of Terminal after
Terminal(mm2) Press-Fit(mm)
0.25 1
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 322
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement
Cross-Sectional Area of Tubular Maximum Width of Terminal after
Terminal(mm2) Press-Fit(mm)
0.5 1
1.0 1.5
1.5 1.5
2.5 2.4
4 3.1
6 4
10 5.3
16 6
----End
4.1.1.3.10 Inspecting and Cleaning Optical Fiber Connectors and Adapters
This topic describes how to inspect and clean optical fiber connectors and
adapters. Cleaning optical components is to remove dust or other dirt to avoid
performance degradation of optical transmission systems.
Overview
This topic introduces the purpose and procedure of cleaning optical fiber
connectors, as well as polluters to optical fiber connectors.
Cleaning fiber connectors is to remove dust or other dirt to avoid performance
degradation of optical transmission systems.
Figure 4-68 shows an optical fiber connector.
Figure 4-68 Optical fiber connector
Optical fiber connectors should be free of:
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 323
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement
● Dust
● Grease (usually brought by hands)
● Condensate residue
● Powder (evaporated residue of water or solvent)
Dust is the most common dirt in optical fiber connectors. The dust particles that
can be seen only by a microscope can affect the quality of optical signals,
deteriorate the system performance, and cause instability in network operation.
A 1-micrometer dust particle on the single-mode fiber connector can block 1%
light and cause 0.05 dB attenuation. A 9-micrometer dust particle that cannot be
seen by human eyes can block an entire fiber core. Therefore, small dirt even that
cannot be seen by human eyes should be removed.
Procedure
Table 4-33 describes the procedure of inspecting and cleaning the optical fiber
connectors and adapters.
Table 4-33 Table 1 Procedure of inspecting and cleaning the optical fiber
connectors and adapters
Step Details
Clean optical fiber connectors using See " Cleaning Optical Fiber Connectors
the cassette cleaner Using the Cassette Cleaner".
Clean optical fiber connectors using See " Cleaning Optical Fiber Connectors
lens tissue Using Lens Tissue".
Clean optical fiber adapters using See " Cleaning Optical Fiber Adapters
dustfree absorbent swabs Using Dustfree Absorbent Swabs".
Protection of Optical Fiber Connectors
This topic describes requirements for fiber connector protection.
The requirements are as follows:
● All boards with optical ports must be packed properly, to avoid mechanical
and electrostatic damages and to reduce vibrations.
● The protective caps must be put in an ESD bag.
● Protective caps must be installed on all optical fiber connectors when not in
use. The optical fiber connectors must be stored in proper packages to keep
them clean.
● Figure 4-69 shows the recommended protective caps, whereas Figure 4-70
shows the protective caps not recommended.
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 324
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement
Figure 4-69 Protective caps recommended
Figure 4-70 Protective caps not recommended
NO TE
The protective caps not recommended are made of soft rubber, which are apt to absorb
dust and sundries, and difficult to clean.
Tools, Equipment, and Materials
Optical connectors should be cleaned using recommended tools, equipment and
materials.
The following provides the recommended tools, equipment and materials:
● Optical power meter
● 400X fiber microscope (A video fiber microscope is recommended.)
● CLETOP cassette cleaner shown in Figure 4-71
● Cleaning solvent (Isoamylol is preferred, propyl alcohol is the next, and
alcohol or formalin is forbidden.)
● Non-woven lens tissue, fiber cleaning tissue, and dustfree cloth (Non-woven
lens tissue is recommended.)
● Special compressed air
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 325
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement
● Special cleaning roll
● Dustfree absorbent swab (made of medical cotton or long fiber cotton)
shown in Figure 4-72 and Figure 4-73
Figure 4-71 CLETOP cassette cleaner
Figure 4-72 Dustfree absorbent swabs for cleaning the SC and FC connectors
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 326
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement
Figure 4-73 Dustfree absorbent swabs for cleaning the LC connectors
Inspecting Optical Fiber Connectors
This topic describes how to inspect the end face of optical fibers using a fiber
microscope.
Tools, Equipment, and Materials
The following provides the required tools, equipment and materials for inspecting
optical fiber connectors:
● Optical power meter
● 400X fiber microscope (A video fiber microscope is recommended.)
Precautions
CA UTION
Laser energy is invisible and may cause eye injuries. Never look directly into fiber
connectors or ports.
Use a fiber microscope equipped with a safety device or a desktop video fiber
microscope when inspecting the optical fiber connectors.
NO TICE
Electrostatic discharge is hazardous to the electronic equipment. Wear an ESD
wrist strap and ensure that the strap is grounded properly before touching the
equipment and boards, to protect the static-sensitive components against
electrostatic discharge of the human body. Otherwise, the equipment may be
damaged or the service may be interrupted.
Procedure
1. Shut down the laser and disconnect the fiber end before inspecting the fiber
connector.
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 327
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement
2. Test the optical power using a power meter to ensure that the laser is shut
down.
3. Use a fiber microscope to check whether the fiber connector is contaminated
or damaged. See the examples below.
– Clean fiber and face
Figure 4-74 shows an image of a clean fiber end face under the fiber
microscope.
Figure 4-74 Clean fiber and face
– Damaged fiber end face
Figure 4-75 shows images of the damaged fiber end face. The image on
the left shows a severely damaged fiber. Severely damaged fibers can
cause damage to the equipment and should not be used. The image on
the right shows a defective fiber. If the output power is within a certain
range, the defective fiber might not cause any damage to the equipment.
If the output power is unstable or out of the range, however, the
defective fiber can cause damage to the equipment.
Figure 4-75 Damaged or defective fiber end face
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 328
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement
NO TE
Figure 4-75 shows only the 800-micrometer fiber cores.
For details on acceptable and unacceptable fibers, see Figure 4-76, Figure
4-77 and Figure 4-78.
Figure 4-76 Clean fiber end face
Figure 4-77 Acceptable fibers with imperfections
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 329
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement
Figure 4-78 Unacceptable fibers with imperfections
4. If any dirt is detected, clean the optical fiber connector. For details, see "
Cleaning Optical Fiber Connectors Using the Cassette Cleaner" and "
Cleaning Optical Fiber Connectors Using Lens Tissue".
5. If any damage is detected, replace the fiber.
Inspecting the Optical Fiber Link
This section describes the insertion loss and reflection requirements of optical links
and the method of checking the quality of optical links for the application of 50G
optical modules with the PAM4 coding technology.
Tools, Equipment, and Materials
Tools and instruments for checking optical fiber links are as follows:
● OTDR meter
● Fiber microscope
Precautions
CA UTION
Because the transmit optical power of the OTDR meter is much higher than the
damaged optical power threshold at the receive end, the optical fiber must be
removed from the optical module when the OTDR meter is used to test the optical
path quality.
Currently, the Ethernet port rate is increasing. Since the 50G optical module link
uses the PAM4 encoding technology, there are higher requirements on the optical
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 330
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement
fiber and cable quality and the link is more sensitive to multipath reflection
interference of signals. If the fiber link connector, fiber section, or fiber splicing
surface is dirty, optical signals are reflected back and forth on the fiber link,
causing interference due to co-channel noise on the receive side. As a result, the
optical link is unstable or intermittently disconnected.
According to the national standard (GBT50312-2016), the loss of the optical fiber
link connector must meet the requirements described in Table 4-34.
Table 4-34 Maximum attenuation of the optical fiber connector
Type Maximum attenuation of an optical fiber
connector (dB)
Fiber splicing connector 0.3
Optical mechanical connector 0.3
Optical connector 0.75
NO TE
Fiber cores are connected through connectors, such as the ODF, optical attenuator, and
flange, in splicing and mechanical modes.
Table 4-35 describes requirements for the reflection of the optical fiber connector
when Ethernet ports (such as 200G and 50G) use PAM4 encoding to double the
rate. More connectors bring lower requirements for the reflection.
Table 4-35 Maximum reflection of connectors
Number of Maximum Reflection of Each Connector (dB)
Optical Fiber
Connectors 50GBASE-FR 50GBASE-LR 50GBASE-ER
1 -25 -22 -19
2 -31 -29 -27
4 -35 -33 -32
6 -38 -35 -35
8 -40 -37 -37
10 -41 -39 -39
Procedure
1. After the optical fiber at the peer end is disconnected, use the OTDR meter to
test the local end. Check whether the loss and reflection of each link and
node are normal. (The loss of a fiber splicing connector should be less than
0.3 dB, the loss of a connector should be less than 0.75 dB, and the reflection
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 331
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement
of a connector should be less than -30 dB.) If the test result is not within the
required range, process the abnormal port.
2. Locate the equipment room where the port resides based on the distance
between abnormal points in the OTDR test result. Preliminarily determine the
port location, disconnect the port, and perform an OTDR test on the port that
reports alarms. Check whether the distance is consistent with that in the
previous test. If not, continue to test other ports.
3. After the abnormal port is found, test the port using a fiber microscope. If the
port is dirty, clean it. For details, see "Inspecting and Cleaning Optical Fiber
Connectors and Adapters".
4. After the port is cleaned, restore the port, and ensure that the connector is
tightened. Perform an OTDR test on the port to check whether loss and
reflection of each link and node are normal.
5. If the fault persists, replace the flange and perform an OTDR test on the port
that reports alarms to check whether loss and reflection of each link and
node are normal.
6. If the fault persists, replace the optical fiber and perform an OTDR test on the
port that reports alarms to check whether loss and reflection of each link and
node are normal.
7. If multiple abnormal points exist on the link, repeat steps 2 to 6.
Cleaning Optical Fiber Connectors Using the Cassette Cleaner
This topic describes how to clean the fiber connectors using a CLETOP cassette
cleaner.
Prerequisites
Before cleaning, inspect the fiber end face with a fiber microscope or a magnifier
to confirm the degree of fiber contamination. Clean the fiber only when it is
severely contaminated. This is because the cleaning operation itself may introduce
dust, dirt, or cause damage to the fiber.
The following procedure provides the steps to clean the fiber connectors using
cartridge type cleaners. There are several types of cartridge cleaners. The following
describes a type of CLETOP cassette cleaner.
Tools, Equipment, and Materials
The following lists the required tools, equipment and materials for cleaning optical
fiber connectors:
● CLETOP cassette cleaner
● Optical power meter
● 400X fiber microscope (A video fiber microscope is recommended.)
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 332
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement
Precautions
CA UTION
Laser energy is invisible and may cause eye injuries. Never look directly into fiber
connectors or ports.
NO TICE
Electrostatic discharge is hazardous to the electronic equipment. Wear an ESD
wrist strap and ensure that the strap is grounded properly before touching the
equipment and boards, to protect the static-sensitive components against
electrostatic discharge of the human body. Otherwise, the equipment may be
damaged or the service may be interrupted.
Procedure
1. Shut down the laser and disconnect the fiber end before inspecting the fiber
connector.
2. Test the optical power using a power meter to ensure that the laser is shut
down.
3. Press down and hold the lever of the cassette cleaner. The shutter slides back
and exposes a new cleaning area. See Figure 4-79.
Figure 4-79 Using the CLETOP cassette cleaner
4. Place the fiber end face gently against the cleaning area.
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 333
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement
Drag the fiber end face gently on one cleaning area in the arrow direction
each time. See Figure 4-80. Do it again on the other cleaning area in the
same direction as the first time once. See Figure 4-81.
NO TICE
Do not drag the fiber end face on the same cleaning area more than once.
Otherwise, the connector can be contaminated or damaged.
Figure 4-80 Dragging the fiber end face gently on one cleaning area
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 334
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement
Figure 4-81 Dragging the fiber end face gently on the other cleaning area
5. Release the lever of the cassette cleaner to close the cleaning area.
6. Use a fiber microscope to inspect the fiber to check whether there is any dirt.
For details see the examples shown in Inspecting Optical Fiber Connectors.
If the fiber end face is still dirty, repeat 1 to 6.
7. Connect the fiber to the optical port immediately. If it is not used for the time
being, put a protective cap on it.
8. Turn on the laser after connecting the fiber to the board.
Cleaning Optical Fiber Connectors Using Lens Tissue
This topic describes how to clean the fiber connectors using lens tissue.
Prerequisites
Before cleaning, inspect the fiber end face with a fiber microscope or a magnifier
to confirm the degree of fiber contamination. Clean the fiber only when it is
severely contaminated. This is because the cleaning operation itself may introduce
dust, dirt, or cause damage to the fiber.
Tools, Equipment, and Materials
The following provides the required tools, equipment and materials:
● Optical power meter
● 400X fiber microscope (A video fiber microscope is recommended.)
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 335
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement
● Cleaning solvent (Isoamylol is preferred, propyl alcohol is the next, and
alcohol or formalin is forbidden.)
● Non-woven lens tissue, fiber cleaning tissue, and dustfree cloth (Non-woven
lens tissue is recommended.)
● Special compressed air or cleaning roll
Precautions
CA UTION
Laser energy is invisible and may cause eye injuries. Never look directly into fiber
connectors or ports.
NO TICE
Electrostatic discharge is hazardous to the electronic equipment. Wear an ESD
wrist strap and ensure that the strap is grounded properly before touching the
equipment and boards, to protect the static-sensitive components against
electrostatic discharge of the human body. Otherwise, the equipment may be
damaged or the service may be interrupted.
Procedure
1. Shut down the laser and disconnect the fiber end before inspecting the fiber
connector.
2. Test the optical power using a power meter to ensure that the laser is shut
down.
3. Put a little cleaning solvent on the lens tissue.
4. Clean the fiber end face on the lens tissue. See Figure 4-82 and Figure 4-83.
NO TICE
Drag the fiber end face on the same area in the lens tissue only once.
Otherwise, the connector can be contaminated or damaged.
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 336
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement
Figure 4-82 Cleaning the fiber end face using the lens tissue on the desk
Figure 4-83 Cleaning the fiber end face using the lens tissue on the hand
5. Repeat 4 several times on the areas of the lens tissue that have not been
used.
6. Use the compressed air to blow off dust on the fiber end face.
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 337
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement
NO TE
● When using the compressed air, keep the nozzle as close as possible to the fiber
end face without touching it.
● Before using the compressed air, first spray it into the air to expel deposits in the
compressed air.
● If the compressed air is not available, use a cleaning roll instead.
7. Use a fiber microscope to inspect the fiber to check whether there is any dirt.
For details, see the examples shown in Inspecting Optical Fiber Connectors.
If the fiber end face is still dirty, repeat 1 to 6.
8. Do not touch the fiber connector after cleaning it. Connect it to the optical
port immediately. If it is not used for the time being, put a protective cap on
it.
9. Turn on the laser after connecting the fiber to the board.
Cleaning Optical Fiber Adapters Using Dustfree Absorbent Swabs
This topic describes how to clean fiber adapters using dustfree absorbent swabs.
Prerequisites
There are several types of dustfree absorbent swabs available. Select appropriate
dustfree absorbent swabs based on site conditions. You can obtain the following
tools and materials from a fiber cable and connector manufacturer.
Tools, Equipment, and Materials
The following lists the required tools, equipment and materials:
● Optical power meter
● 400X fiber microscope (A video fiber microscope is recommended.)
● Cleaning solvent (Isoamylol is preferred, propyl alcohol is the next, and
alcohol or formalin is forbidden.)
● Special compressed air
● Dustfree absorbent swab (made of medical cotton or long fiber cotton)
Precautions
CA UTION
Laser energy is invisible and may cause eye injuries. Never look directly into fiber
connectors or ports.
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 338
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement
NO TICE
Electrostatic discharge is hazardous to the electronic equipment. Wear an ESD
wrist strap and ensure that the strap is grounded properly before touching the
equipment and boards, to protect the static-sensitive components against
electrostatic discharge of the human body. Otherwise, the equipment may be
damaged or the service may be interrupted.
Procedure
1. Shut down the laser and disconnect the fiber end before inspecting the fiber
connector.
2. Test the optical power using a power meter to ensure that the laser is shut
down.
3. Select the dustfree absorbent swab with a proper diameter based on the type
of an adapter.
NO TE
For SC and FC fiber adapters, use the dustfree absorbent swab with a diameter of 2.5
mm (0.1 in.); for the LC fiber adapter, use the dustfree absorbent swab with a
diameter of 1.25 mm (0.05 in.). See Figure 4-84 and Figure 4-85.
Figure 4-84 Dustfree absorbent swabs for cleaning the SC and FC connectors
Figure 4-85 Dustfree absorbent swabs for cleaning the LC connectors
4. Put a little cleaning solvent on the dustfree absorbent swab.
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 339
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement
5. Place the dustfree absorbent swab gently on the adapter so that the cleaning
solvent is against the fiber end face. Draw out the dustfree absorbent swab
from the fiber adapter and then rotate the dustfree absorbent swab clockwise
once. Ensure that the tip of the dustfree absorbent swab directly contacts the
fiber end face.
6. Use the compressed air to blow off dust on the fiber end face.
NO TE
● When using the compressed air, keep the nozzle as close as possible to the fiber
end face without touching it.
● Before using the compressed air, first spray it into the air to expel deposits in the
compressed air.
7. Step 7 Use a fiber microscope to inspect the fiber to check whether there is
any dirt. For details, see Inspecting Optical Fiber Connectors. If the fiber end
face is still dirty, repeat 1 to 6.
8. Connect the fiber to the optical port immediately. If it is not used for the time
being, put a protective cap on it.
9. Turn on the laser after connecting the fiber to the board.
4.1.2 Parts Replacement
4.1.2.1 Component Information
Whether Parts Can Be Replaced
Part Chassis Control PIC PIU FAN Optical
board board board board module
A821 E/ Yes No No No No Yes
A822 E/
A813 E
4.1.2.2 Basic Operation Process and Precautions
To ensure that the device provides uninterrupted communication services for users,
device parts are replaced when the power is on in most cases. Therefore, to ensure
safe operation of a device and minimize the impact of part replacement on
services, maintenance personnel must follow the basic operation process described
in this section.
NO TICE
Huawei engineers need to obtain the telephone number of the GTAC to contact
Huawei headquarters as soon as possible when an exception or a problem that
Huawei engineers cannot locate or solve temporarily occurs.
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 340
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement
1. Assess the feasibility of the operation.
During the process of troubleshooting or repairing a device, maintenance
personnel must assess whether the operation is feasible before replacing a
part.
– Whether the needed spare parts are available in the depot.
– Whether the maintenance personnel is qualified for carrying out the
operation.
NO TE
Parts replacement can be carried out only by maintenance personnel who are
professionally trained. Specifically, maintenance personnel must familiarize
themselves with the functions of each part, the basic operation process of part
replacement, and the basic skills of part replacement.
– Whether the risks of the operation can be controlled. Part replacement is
risky.
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 341
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement
NO TICE
Improper operation may cause abnormal running of the device, service
interruption, or injuries to the personnel. Therefore, before replacing
parts, maintenance personnel must comprehensively evaluate the risks of
the operation and determine whether the risks can be controlled through
certain measures when the power is on. Maintenance personnel can
replace the parts only when the risks can be controlled. Otherwise,
contact Huawei technical support personnel.
2. Prepare tools and spare parts.
After determining that the operation is feasible, maintenance personnel need
to prepare tools and spare parts.
– Prepare spare parts.
NO TICE
Before replacing the chassis or control board, contact Huawei engineers
to see if a license is required. You can apply for a license or use Stick
License to activate some license control items.
– The common tools include the multimeter, cable tester, ESD wrist strap,
Phillips screwdriver, flat-head screwdriver, needle-nose pliers, cutter, and
pliers.
3. Take protective measures.
Although part replacement is risky, in most cases, however, maintenance
personnel can avoid the risks by taking protective measures.
For example, before replacing a master control board, maintenance personnel
can switch services from the master control board to the slave control board.
After the slave control board runs properly, maintenance personnel can
replace the master control board. In this manner, interruption of services is
prevented.
Therefore, to ensure safe operation of a device and minimize the impact of
part replacement on services, maintenance personnel must take related
protective measures.
4. Replace parts.
When the protective measures are available, maintenance personnel can carry
out part replacement according to the procedures in this section.
DANGER
Wear an ESD wrist strap or ESD gloves before replacing parts when the power
is on.
Avoid direct eye exposure to the laser beam launched from the optical
interface board or fiber.
5. Verify the functions of the new parts.
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 342
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement
After completing part replacement, maintenance personnel must verify the
functions of the new parts through the testing methods described in this
section.
NO TE
The operation is considered successful only when the new parts are proved to be
running normally. Otherwise, contact Huawei technical support personnel.
6. Return and repair the faulty parts.
If a part that is replaced is faulty, maintenance personnel should fill in the
Offsite Repair Card for Faulty Materials, and send the card and the faulty part
to Huawei for timely maintenance.
NO TICE
Carefully maintain the damaged CF card and local disk that store data to
prevent information leak.
Before you replace the master control board or its CF card, delete data from
the CF card to prevent data embezzlement.
Use either of the following methods to delete data from the CF card on an
master control board:
● Connect a CF card reader to a PC and then delete data from the CF card
on the PC.
● Physically destroy the CF card.
4.1.2.3 Replacing the Chassis
Context
The chassis is damaged due to external forces or a hardware fault.
Impact on the System
Services will be interrupted for about 30 minutes because the device needs to be
powered off to replace the chassis.
Precautions
DANGER
Avoid direct eye exposure to the laser beam launched from the optical interface
board or fiber.
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 343
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement
NO TICE
● Before replacing the chassis, contact Huawei engineers to see if a license is
required. You can apply for a license or use Stick License to activate some
license control items.
● When replacing a part, make sure that the interface is not connected to any
optical fibers or cables.
● Optical interfaces and optical fiber connectors must be clean. Optical fiber
connectors must be properly capped to keep dusts away.
Tool
● ESD wrist strap or ESD gloves
● Phillips screwdriver
● ESD bag
Procedure
Step 1 Wear the ESD wrist strap, and insert the grounding end into the ESD jack on the
device, or wear ESD gloves.
Step 2 Make sure that the spare part is the same as the one to be replaced in terms of
name, model, and parameters. If they do not meet the requirements, contact
Huawei GTAC.
Step 3 Record the slot of each board and mapping between each fiber or cable and
interface on the device. When the part replacement is complete, restore the fiber
or cable connections.
NO TE
Two methods are available for backing up a device's configuration data:
● Using an NMS: Use an NE software management module to back up a device's
configuration data as a configuration file to an NMS server or client.
● Using a command: Run the save command to save a device's configuration data to
the device's storage unit as a configuration file and copy the configuration file to the
maintenance terminal for backup.
Step 4 Power off the device.
CA UTION
Make sure that indicators on all the boards are off which indicates that the device
is powered off.
Step 5 Remove the power connectors and all fibers and cables connected to the chassis.
For devices on which cards are pluggable, remove all boards.
Step 6 Remove the mounting ears on the chassis and then take down the chassis. (Skip
this step if the chassis is installed on a desk.)
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 344
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement
CA UTION
Hold the bottom of the chassis when you remove the mounting ears to prevent
injuries to human bodies or damage to other devices.
Step 7 Remove the mounting ears, and install them onto the spare chassis. Install the
spare chassis to the previous position. Then, restore all boards and fiber or cable
connections.
Step 8 Power on the device and observe indicators.
NO TE
Step 9 Log in to the device and run the display device command to query the running
status of the device. If the Status column displays only Normal, the device is
running properly.
----End
Follow-up Procedure
After replacing a part, collect the tools. If the part is faulty, maintenance personnel
should fill in the Offsite Repair Card for Faulty Materials, and send the card and
the faulty part to Huawei for timely maintenance.
4.1.2.4 Replacing the Optical Module
Impact on the System
If optical modules are not in service protection, replacement of an optical module
will cause service interruption.
Precautions
DANGER
Avoid direct eye exposure to the laser beam launched from the optical interface
board or fiber.
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 345
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement
NO TICE
● An optical module is an electrostatic sensitive device. Therefore, take ESD
measures during the whole process of replacing an optical module to prevent
the optical module from being damaged.
● Only an external optical module can be replaced. An external optical module is
pluggable.
● When replacing a part, make sure that the interface is not connected to any
optical fibers or cables.
● Be careful when you remove or insert an optical cable in case the connector of
an optical cable is damaged.
● Optical interfaces and optical fiber connectors must be clean. Optical fiber
connectors must be properly capped to keep dusts away.
Tool
● ESD wrist strap or ESD gloves
● ESD bag
Procedure
Step 1 Wear the ESD wrist strap, and insert the grounding end into the ESD jack on the
device, or wear ESD gloves.
Step 2 Record the slot and interface of the optical module.
Step 3 Remove fibers.
NO TE
You can remove fibers by hands. If dense fibers are installed, you can use a fiber extractor
to remove fibers. The following figure shows the appearance of a fiber extractor.
1. Clamp the top and bottom sides of an LC/PC connector using hands or a fiber
extractor and press the spring.
2. Remove the fiber connector.
3. Cover the fiber connector with a dust cap.
Step 4 Pull out the optical module to be replaced.
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 346
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement
1. Remove the optical cables from the connector and cover the optical cable
connector with a dust cap.
NO TE
If optical interfaces are concave in the board panel and difficult to remove by hands,
use a fiber extractor to unfold the handle of the optical module and pull it out.
2. Turn the pulled handle of the optical module downward, as shown in the
figure.
3. Hold the handle to pull out the optical module carefully from the optical
interface, as shown in the figure.
4. Place the removed optical module in the ESD bag.
Step 5 Insert the new optical module into the optical interface.
NO TICE
An optical module must not be inserted inversely. If you cannot completely insert
an optical module into the interface, do not push it. Instead, you should reverse it
and insert it into the interface again.
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 347
HUAWEI NetEngine A800
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement
1. Take out the new optical module from the ESD bag and check whether there
is any damage or component missing. Check whether the new optical module
is of the same type as the optical module to be replaced.
2. Insert the new optical module into the optical interface, as shown in the
figure. When the click of the reed in the optical module is heard, the optical
module is correctly inserted.
3. Remove the dust cap from the connector and insert the optical cables in the
original sequence.
NO TE
Check whether the LINK indicator on the optical interface works normally. If the
indicator is green, the links connected to the interface are Up.
----End
Follow-up Procedure
After replacing a part, collect the tools. If the part is faulty, maintenance personnel
should fill in the Offsite Repair Card for Faulty Materials, and send the card and
the faulty part to Huawei for timely maintenance.
Issue 05 (2023-03-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 348
Note: The preview effect may be slightly different from the source document. You can download the document and view it on your PC.